World of OS/2/W_OS_2.BIN/PRCP06.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1994-01-28 | 479KB | 16,064 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. 8250 IBM MULTIPROTOCOL INTELLIGENT HUB ETHERNET BRIDGE MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ethernet bridge module is a 2-slot module that integrates a
high-performance 2-port bridge, and implements the "port switching" feature.
The bridge module can be switched between any two of the three Ethernet
segments, or between any Ethernet segment and an external Ethernet network (via
an AUI port) without having to swap cables.

It offers protocol-type filtering and supports the Spanning Tree Algorithm and
Protocol (IEEE 802.1) for bridge redundancy and loop detection; a back-up
bridge with automatic takeover can be installed for added protection against
failures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. 8250 IBM MULTIPROTOCOL INTELLIGENT HUB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 8250 is a family of intelligent hub products with modular hardware
composed of a rack-mountable chassis plus a set of feature modules that provide
primarily the functions of:

    o   LAN concentration (Ethernet, Token-Ring, and fiber distributed
        data interface (FDDI))
    o   LAN and media management
    o   Hub management
    o   Bridging interconnection

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   The 8250 provides wiring concentration for multiple Local Area
        Network (LAN) types and reduces the cost of ownership by providing
        tools for easy changes and quick fault isolation.
    o   The 8250 protects investment in existing LANs through its standard
        LAN interfaces and the support of multiple cables and connector
        types.
    o   The 8250 provides a comprehensive set of management functions for
        managing the hub as well as the attached LANs.
    o   Expansion of LANs can be achieved through gradual insertion of
        concentration modules or segmentation of the LAN.
    o   The 8250 increases user productivity by reducing down time and the
        time needed to reconfigure a user workstation on the network.
    o   The 8250 contains an SNMP agent which allows it to be managed using
        the fault, performance and configuration tools of AIX* NetView*/
        6000's NetView Hub Management/6000 Product.
    o   The 8250 "Automatic Update Service" subscription is a simple and
        cost-effective way to ensure that the feature modules are up-to-
        date with the latest versions of code. Subscriptions on module
        and site basis are available to accommodate the size of the
        network, and simplify network administration.

The 8250 is a multiprotocol intelligent hub with modular hardware composed of a
rack-mountable chassis plus a set of feature modules that provide primarily the
functions of:

LAN concentration   The 8250 supports concentration for Ethernet, Token-Ring,
and FDDI   networks, with multiple cable types (shielded twisted pair (STP),
unshielded twisted pair (UTP), fiber, coaxial) and multiple choices of   cable
connectors. Multiple LAN types as well as multiple segments for a   single type
can coexist in the same chassis.

Hub management   Extensive hub management functions are provided either from a
terminal   connected to an RS-232 port or from an SNMP management station such
as   AIX NetView/6000.

LAN and media management   The 8250 provides functions for managing the media
of LAN segments   (Ethernet, Token-Ring, FDDI), by collecting management
information   (performance, statistics, configuration, problems) and reporting
it to a   network management station via SNMP or TELNET protocols.

Interconnect   The 8250 offers integrated bridging functions for Ethernet
segments and   network.

SNMP management   The 8250 contains an SNMP agent which includes enterprise
specific   extensions designed to take advantage of the advanced features of
the   8250.

With front-loading slots, the 8250 Model 017 and Model 6HC accommodate the same
set of feature modules and accessories. The Model 017 presents 17 slots, and is
well suited for locations with a high density of users.  The Model 006 is a
down-sized version with six slots, provides the same advanced functions as the
larger model, and is ideal for the workgroup and small department connectivity.

The backplane architecture of the 8250 allows the "hot-pluggability" of any
8250 module, which means a module can be installed or removed without powering
down the concentrator or taking the network out of service. Moreover, the
special architecture of the backplane makes any module "full-floating," which
means that no fixed position in the chassis is required according to the type
of the module.

This 8250 backplane is also used as the bussing system for connecting the
various modules. It supports any combinations of Ethernet, Token-Ring, and FDDI
segments, with up to three Ethernet segments, up to seven Token-Ring segments,
and up to four FDDI rings.  Modules for a given LAN type can be assigned
without restriction to any of the corresponding segments, with no fixed
positions of blades for given LAN segments.  Modules with a "port switching"
feature offer additional flexibility with the ability to assign individual
ports on a module to the various segments of same LAN type, hence the
terminology of "port switching" and "module switching" features.

Fault tolerance is offered as an option, and can be achieved through redundancy
of critical components, such as the Power Supply and the Hub Controller Module,
which monitors the concentrator conditions, including temperature and power
supply status.  Redundant links with automatic switchover at the backbone and,
for the Ethernet case, at the lobe level, ensure fault tolerance to the end
station.

The 8250 Model 6PS is a new 8250 chassis model with 6 front-loading slots and
an Integrated Server that has 5 front-loading slots for Type-3 server adapters.
Model 6PS supports multi-protocol media concentration and management (Token
Ring, Ethernet and FDDI), and features the same set of modules and
characteristics as other 8250 models.  The Integrated Server is a hot-pluggable
drawer based on an IBM PS/2.

The Integrated Server is a hot-pluggable drawer based on an IBM PS/2, with the
following characteristics:

    o   Micro Channel system bus, for 8/16-bit operations
    o   A 50/25 Mhz IBM 486SLC2 microprocessor
    o   An internal memory cache controller with 16KB memory cache
    o   It has 8MB of Random Access Memory (RAM) as a base, and can be expanded
        up to 16MB.
    o   Integrated system board diskette controller
    o   XGA-2 graphics chip set (high resolution 1024x768) (Supports interlaced
        and Non-Interlaced IBM displays)
    o   Enhanced security
    o   TOD clock
    o   Standard Device External Ports/Connectors:
        -   Enhanced Graphics Array (XGA-2) (Supports Interlaced and
            Non-Interlaced IBM displays)
        -   Keyboard
        -   Two 9 pin Serial/asynchronous port (FIFO and DMA serial support)
        -   Parallel port (DMA parallel port)
        -   Mouse connector
    o   8MBytes of 70ns memory, expandable to 16Mbytes
    o   One 2.88MB 3.5" diskette drive with media sense
    o   One 212MB hard disk drive (can be replaced by a 400MB disk)
    o   5-slots for MicroChannel adapters with Type-3 form factor and 8/16-bit
        data transfer.

The Integrated Server DRAM can be upgraded up to 16MB with the:

    o   IBM PS/2 2MB Memory Module kit-70ns
    o   IBM PS/2 4MB Memory Module kit-70ns
    o   IBM PS/2 8MB Memory Module kit-70ns

The Integrated Server drawer has a 'Reset' pushbutton, when depressed it resets
the server, starts execution of diagnostics and enters the IML phase for the
server. It has no impact on the media concentration portion of the hub.

Model 6PS has a controller board that is hidden in the backplane.  All 8250
feature modules can used on this model: like 6-slot models, modules are
inserted horizontally.

Model 6PS makes use of a 325W power supply (same one as of as Model 017). A
back up power supply can be installed for added redundancy.

Management modules (xMM) play an important role in the 8250, in terms of media
and hub management.  There are three types:

    1.  Ethernet management modules (basic and advanced)
    2.  Token-Ring management module (basic)
    3.  FDDI management module

Each xMM has a double role:

    o   It controls the various 8250 modules in terms of configuration,
        operations, and fault.  This function is independent from the LAN
        type of the module (for example, an Ethernet management module can
        be used to control a Token-Ring media module). It also supports the
        SNMP agent for hub management.
        When multiple xMMs are present on the same hub, only one is
        selected as master, with the responsibility of communication with
        the SNMP monitor.  If the master fails, automatically another xMM
        takes over as the new master.
    o   The second role is LAN dependent, and aims at collecting LAN
        statistics, errors, and configuration changes.  For instance, if
        Token-Ring management is needed, a Token-Ring management module
        should be installed.  If the multiple segments need to be monitored
        simultaneously, multiple xMMs are required; however, every xMM can
        be re-assigned to another segment via software commands.

The Token-Ring and FDDI management modules implement the TCP/IP TELNET
protocol, allowing access from a remote TCP/IP station to the functions of the
xMM.  All xMMs are accessible from an ASCII terminal directly connected to the
RS-232 port that is present on each xMM.  This port also accepts a modem
connection for remote dial-in management of the concentrator.  An xMM requires
an initial set-up of base parameters such as IP address and SNMP parameters;
this is done from an ASCII terminal connected to the RS-232 port.

Each xMM incorporates electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM). EEPROM allows the saving, on operator request, of the concentrator
configuration, and hence provides protection against power failures.  Also,
program updates can be done via file transfer throughout the network (excepting
the basic version of the Ethernet management module), or downloaded from a
personal computer via the RS-232 port.

Multiple options are possible for operating and managing the 8250:

    o   Management from a network management station that supports SNMP
        protocols and the 8250 SNMP-compliant MIB extensions. This is
        suited to medium and large installations with remote permanent
        monitoring.  When the management station is based on AIX NetView/
        6000, the IBM AIX NetView Hub Management Program/6000 can be added
        for enhanced user interface and increased functions.
    o   From an ASCII terminal that is directly connected to the RS-232
        port on an xMM, with a character-based, command-line interface.
        This is an inexpensive solution well suited for a workgroup
        installation.
    o   Remote login via TELNET session from a TCP/IP station in the case
        of a Token-Ring or a FDDI management module.  Management traffic
        flows via the network. This is ideal for small and medium installations with remote
        occasional monitoring.

When no xMM is installed, the 8250 can run as an "unmanaged" concentrator;
configurations such as segment assignment are done through dual in-line package
(DIP) switches present on each module.

The IBM 8250 is a multi-LAN technology concentrator. This allows a customer to
wire his or her building or floor without dedicating the cables, the
connectors, or the concentration equipment to a single LAN technology.  As a
consequence, the LAN can be adapted to meet the business requirements for LAN
applications on heterogeneous LANs.

Because of its redundant capabilities, the 8250 can be used to build LAN
networks with applications that require maximum uptime.

Once a LAN is installed, a continued cost is associated with its maintenance
and operation. The business requirement is to reduce cost of ownership by
requiring fewer skills and personnel to perform the daily operations. The 8250
addresses this requirements.

With its support of the three major LAN types (Ethernet, Token-Ring, FDDI), the
8250 can be installed today without requiring a change to LAN adapters or
applications, and can be used to extend existing LANs.

The support of multiple cable and connector types ensures protection of the
customer's investment in already installed cable.

The 8250 is fully compatible with major LAN standards (802.x, SNMP) and request
for change.  This ensures compatibility with existing equipment from other
vendors.

System management is a key feature of the 8250.  A comprehensive set of
management functions is proposed for managing the hub, as well as the attached
LANs.

The 8250 is a very flexible product. Beside the default settings, the network
operator can always reconfigure the components according to network changes;
also, the operational status of components is permanently available to the
operator.

As for media management, the network operator can collect LAN configuration
data, to understand who is connecting to the network, or can collect LAN
statistics to monitor the load or throughput efficiency of the network.

A hub management program is made available on AIX NetView/6000, the IBM
management platform for SNMP LAN equipment, to enable the network operator to
manage both router and LAN networks from a single management station.

The strength of star-wired LAN topology can be used to simplify the management
of distributed LAN systems.  In this structure, multiple hubs can be tied back
to a central hub, which works in conjunction with a multiport bridge/router to
provide inter-LAN connectivity. The IBM 8250 working with the IBM 6611 can form
the basis for such a configuration, and from an NetView/6000 management
station, can simplify a customers system management task.

The 8250 is a very modular product. When the network is small, only a small
number of concentration modules is needed; as the network grows, more
concentration modules can be added to extend the network, without disruption of
the already installed modules.

Also, if a user starts with a 6-slot model, and because of growth reaches the
chassis limit, he or she can use the larger model (17-slot) and reuse the same
modules.

Moreover, if the LAN size becomes important, and the down time becomes
critical, redundant features can be added to increase network reliability.

Two dimensions to network growth are the number of LAN users and the network
traffic.  At one breakpoint, the solution for the network owner is to segment
the LAN into multiple LAN segments.  With the 8250, no new concentrator is
required, because multiple segment support is built in.

The 8250 can also be used to move from a lower-speed LAN to a higher-speed LAN
of same technology (for example, 4 to 16Mbit Token-Ring), or to move from
lower-bandwidth (Token-Ring, Ethernet) to higher-bandwidth (FDDI) LANs, to
satisfy the needs of new applications.

End user productivity is directly tied to the time during which the LAN is
running. The 8250, being an essential piece in the LAN with redundant
capabilities and modular architecture without a single point of failure,
reduces down time significantly.

End user productivity is also impacted by the network response time. Therefore,
good monitoring of network behavior and load can predict future bottlenecks,
and appropriate actions can be taken ahead to maintain the right level of
response time.

Productivity is also measured by the time required to reassign a workstation to
a network, or to reconfigure an entire network.  With remote configurations,
less trips to the wiring cabinet are needed, and most of the error-prone manual
interventions are avoided.

MODELS

    Model 6HC: 6-Slot Hub Chassis with hidden controller.
    Model 06S: 6-Slot Hub Chassis, single power supply.
    Model O17: 17-Slot Hub Chassis

The 8250 Intelligent Hub and all the related feature modules are Customer
Set-up (CSU).

The IBM 8250 is a family of intelligent hub products with modular hardware
composed of rack-mountable chassis plus a set of feature modules which provide
primarily the functions of:

    o   Lan concentration (Ethernet, Token-Ring, FDDI)
    o   LAN and media management
    o   Hub management
    o   Bridging interconnection

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    17-Slot Hub Chassis
      Width:  444mm   (17.5 inches)
      Depth:  465mm   (18.3 inches)
      Height: 222mm   (8.75 inches)
      Weight: 17.3 kg (38 pounds)
    6-Slot Hub Chassis
      Width:  424mm   (16.7 inches)
      Depth:  360mm   (14.2 inches)
      Height: 175mm   (6.88 inches)
      Weight: 5.5 kg  (12 pounds)
    6-Slot Hub Chassis with integrated PS/2 server
      Width:  444mm (17.5 inches)
      Depth:  500mm (19.68 inches)
      Height:  222mm (8.75 inches)
      Weight 25 kg (55 pound)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    6-Slot Hub Chassis
      Temperature:   10  to  40.0C (50 to 104F)
      Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
      Wet Bulb: Calorific value: 1000 Btu/Hour
      Electrical power:     0,2 kVA
      Capacity of Exhaust:  2. Cubic meter/min.
      Noise Level:          66 dB
      Leakage and Starting Current: 30 A (110 V) and 15 A (220 V)
    17-Slot Hub Chassis
      Temperature:   10  to  40.0C (50 to 104F)
      Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
      Wet Bulb:  Calorific value: 1700 Btu/Hour
      Electrical power:     0,3 kVA
      Capacity of Exhaust:  1.9 Cubic meter/min.
      Noise Level:          66 dB
      Leakage and Starting Current: 40 A (110V) and 20 A (220 V)
    6-Slot Hub Chassis with integrated PS/2 server
      Temperature:  0 to 40.0C
      Relative Humidity: 8 to 85 percent (non-condensing)
      Calorific Value:  1700 BTU/Hour
      Electrical power:  0.3 kVA
      Capacity of Exhaust:  1.9 cubic meter/min.
      Noise Level:  6.6 dB
      Leakage & Starting Current:  30 A (110 V) and 15 A (220 V)

The Fault Tolerant Module is mandatory for every machine, and it takes one slot
in the chassis. When a hub model is ordered (parts 43G3890, 43G3892, 43G3893 or
43G3895), the fault tolerant controller module is included in the shipping
group.

All modules of the 8250 are 1-slot wide, except the following modules which are
2-slot wide:

    o   T/R Twisted Pair media module (Feature 3821)
    o   Ethernet Bridge module (Feature 3828)
    o   FDDI modules (Feature 3825, 3826, 3827)

The minimum system consists of an IBM 8250 Model 006 or Model 017 and the
modules required to implement the customer LAN configuration.

No mandatory software is required to operate the 8250.  However, the following
licensed program running on top of an AIX NetView/6000 (5767-077) licensed
program product will be available to help network operators managing the 8250
Hub and the attached network:

    o   IBM AIX NetView Hub Management Program/6000
        This AIX NetView/6000 application will have to be separately ordered and
        will provide:
        -   Enhanced User Interface with graphical display of the hub and
            color-coded status of the components
        -   Box management functions (configuration, status, operations) through
            pull-down menus and clicking on selected functions or components
        -   LAN management functions (statistics on ports and networks,
            configurations, errors)
        -   Remote program update of the 8250 management modules
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. ** Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. 8250 ETHERNET MODULES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

10BaseT modules The 10BaseT modules offer a highly reliable and cost-effective
approach for Ethernet concentration.  The 12-port modules with the 50-pin
TELCO-type connector are a high-density means to link without "tangles" to 12
10BaseT-compliant ports. Both "module switching" and "port switching" versions
are proposed. The 8-port 10BaseT module provides eight connections through the
face plate of the module; it supports also both unshielded and shielded twisted
pair cabling. 10BaseT transceivers are proposed as accessories. The
Fault-Tolerant 10BaseT transceiver offer dual connections for added protection
from cable or network failures. 24-port 10BaseT module

The 24-port 10BaseT module (#3829) is a 1-slot feature module that can connect
up to 24 10BaseT compliant ports, using unshielded twisted pair cabling. It is
equipped with Two Telco-type connectors to avoid cable intermingling.

The 24-port module helps in creating a high density Ethernet network in a
minimum amount of space.  Up to 360 and 120 users can be connected on model 017
and models 6HC/06S respectively, with full management (384 and 144 users
without management for model 017 and models 6HC/06S respectively), providing
higher port density at a lower cost per port. The 24-port module implements
bank switching technology, so each Telco connector, supporting 12 ports, is
assignable to one of the three Ethernet segments on the 8250 backplane; this
can be done with software local or remote commands.

The 24-port module complies with the IEEE 802.3 10BaseT standard for superior
cable distances on unshielded twisted pair. The module is full-floating and hot
pluggable likewise other 8250 modules.

10BaseFB and Fiber modules The Ethernet 10BaseFB and Fiber modules are a
cost-effective alternative for businesses planning to move to fiber-based and
higher-speed networks (for example, FDDI), but needing backbone redundancy now.
The 10BaseFB and Fiber modules have dual link capabilities, with automatic
switchover. This allows the construction of Ethernet backbones with dual links,
and therefore provides protection against cable of another hub failure. "Dual
homing" for Ethernet stations can be achieved with the aid of the
fault-tolerant 10BaseF and Fiber transceivers; this is well suited for
connecting either bridge/routers or servers running critical applications.

Both "port switching" and "module switching" models are proposed, as well as
multiple choices of fiber connectors. The 10BaseFB modules implement the
current IEEE/ANSI 10Base-FB standard for running fiber backbones, and supersede
the fiber modules that implement a draft version of the 10BaseFB standard.
This "repeaterless" technology provides the ultimate in configuration
flexibility since it is not constrained by the 4-repeater rule.

FOIRL modules The FOIRL modules offer an FOIRL-based fiber Ethernet connection.
Like fiber modules, the FOIRL modules incorporate hardware base switchover
logic between any two ports on the module, allowing the building of an Ethernet
backbone with dual links and automatic switchover. Repeater and transceiver
modules

The repeater and transceiver modules provide attachment unit interface (AUI)
connections to the 8250:

    -   The 2-port repeater module connects the 8250 via an external
        transceiver to an Ethernet segment such as thick coaxial cable
        of up to 500 meters.
    -   The 3-port transceiver module attaches the 8250 to bridges,
        routers, repeaters, and stations, providing a simple connection
        to other Ethernet equipment on your network.

Both modules implement the "port switching" capability. They can even be
isolated from the three Ethernet segments from a remote console, for example
during troubleshooting.

BNC module The BNC module provides six connections to thin-wire Ethernet
segments.

It is fully compliant with the IEEE's 10Base2 standard.  All segments can be
terminated either internally or externally.  The BNC module partitions a bad
segment automatically, and then reconnects it when the problem is solved.

The BNC module can also be isolated from the main network, for example for
testing purposes, from a remote console. Terminal server module The terminal
server module is a single slot multi-protocol terminal server module that
connects serial devices to Ethernet-based LANs.  It provides 16 asynchronous
ports for connecting a variety of devices, such as terminals, modems, printers,
PCs running terminal emulation, and hosts without a direct LAN connection to
the Ethernet network.

The terminal server module implements the full suite of TCP/IP protocols:
TELNET, reverse TELNET, SLIP, TFTP, RLOGIN, and BOOTP.  It also supports the
Digital Equipment Corporation's Local Area Transport (LAT) protocol, and
provides a user interface that is compatible with the DECserver. In addition,
it implements network protocol translation between the LAT and TCP/IP
protocols, allowing TCP/IP users to access resources transparently on LAT
hosts, and vice versa.

The terminal server module implements the "module switching" feature which
means each module can be assigned individually to any of the three Ethernet
segments. Moreover, each port supports up to 10 sessions mixing LAT and TCP/IP
protocols, allowing a user to communicate simultaneously with LAT and TCP/IP
hosts.  Any of the 16 ports can be used for a remote user connection via a
dial-in/dial-out modem, with transfer rates up to 38.4 kilobits per second
(Kbps).

Multiple ways of booting the terminal server program are offered:  self loading
from the module's PROM, from a network server with BOOTP or TFTP protocols, or
from another terminal server module. Given the wide variety of wirings, patch
cables are offered as accessories for major wiring types.

Ethernet Bridge Module The Ethernet bridge module is a 2-slot module that
integrates a high-performance 2-port bridge, and implements the "port
switching" feature.  The bridge module can be switched between any two of the
three Ethernet segments, or between any Ethernet segment and an external
Ethernet network (via an AUI port) without having to swap cables. It offers
protocol-type filtering and supports the Spanning Tree Algorithm and Protocol
(IEEE 802.1) for bridge redundancy and loop detection; a back-up bridge with
automatic takeover can be installed for added protection against failures.

Ethernet management modules (EMMs) The Ethernet basic and advanced management
modules implement all the common features described earlier for xMMs, except
remote program update for the basic version. Each EMM can continuously monitor
and report such key statistics as network load or collisions, allowing the
network administrator to maintain a running log by time of day. In addition,
statistics such as counts of errors and packets received are collected down to
the port level.  It also monitors the Last Source Address for network mapping,
and Last Error Address for error tracking.

The advanced version offers, in addition, a host of advanced features. The
"cross-module" and "cross-media" redundancy features allow the assignment of a
port on a given module as the backup to a port located on another module, not
necessarily of same media type. This allows the building of cost-effective
backup links and extends fault-tolerance capabilities.  The advanced EMM also
offers built-in network security; individual ports can be set up, whenever the
network address changes, to either report an alarm or isolate the port. 6-Port
Switch Module (#6714, P/N 58G6714)

The 6-port Switch module occupies two slots in the 8250 hub, and has five ports
on the front panel (three 10BaseT and two AUI; one 10BaseT port is dedicated to
front panel access, the remaining four ports may be switchable between a subset
of 8250 backplane segments and two front panel AUI and two 10BaseT).  The sixth
port is switchable between any of the three Ethernet segments on the backplane.

It offers a low-cost, media-speed switching function between six Ethernet
networks.  It increases network performance by eliminating congestion problems,
and increases the performance of critical stations such as servers, dedicating
the full 10 megabit per second (10Mbps) bandwidth of a port.  This is an ideal
solution for small LANs, where there is a need to improve overall network
performance.

6-Port Bridge module (#7384, P/N 58G7384) The 6-port Bridge module occupies two
slots in the 8250 hub, and has five ports on the front panel (three 10BaseT and
two AUI; one 10BaseT port is dedicated to front panel access, the remaining
four ports may be switchable between a subset of 8250 backplane segments and
two front panel AUI and two 10BaseT).  The sixth port is switchable between any
of the three Ethernet segments on the backplane. The 6-port Bridge module
supports standard bridging features such as Spanning Tree Protocol 802.1d, and
filtering on Destination and Source Address for enhanced performance and
network security.  The Spanning Tree Protocol allows the design of LANs that
are free of loops.  The standard-based interconnection solution allows
interconnection with multivendor bridges.

AUS Ethernet 6-port Bridge (Single) (#7347, P/N 58G7347) The Automatic Update
Service (AUS) subscription for the 6-port Bridge module is a simple and
cost-effective way to ensure that the Switch module is up to date with the
latest versions of code, through automatic distribution during 3-year of all
newly announced code extensions and enhancements.

AUS Ethernet 6-port Switch (Single) (#7349, P/N 58G7349) The Automatic Update
Service (AUS) subscription for the 6-port Switch modules is a simple and
cost-effective way to ensure that the Switch module is up to date with the
latest versions of code, through automatic distribution during 3-year of all
newly announced code extensions and enhancements. * Signifies a trademark or
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. **
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. 8250 TOKEN-RING MODULES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Token-Ring media module This is a 2-slot-wide module providing 20 RJ-45 ports
to support Token-Ring stations.  It's a fully managed module, with the "module
switching" feature, that accepts both unshielded and shielded twisted pair
connections, for 4 and 16Mbit rings.  When unshielded copper is in use for
Token-Ring, workstation media filters (offered as accessories) should be
installed to match the Token-Ring adapter card DB9 connector to an RJ-45
connector and to match the impedance of the adapter to that of the cable. The
media filter also meets FCC requirements for regulated radio frequency
emissions (Class A regulations).

The media module incorporates a repeater that re-times the signal, providing
excellent transmission quality on both UTP and STP media.  Up to seven media
modules can be installed in one 8250 Model 017, for a total of 140 ports. For
models 06S and 6HC, three media modules can be installed for a total of 64
ports.  Media modules can be configured to form a single or separate LAN
segments.

The Token-Ring media module supports automatic wrap capability at the port
level to protect the network from faulty stations or cable failure. It also
detects automatically the failure of another Token-Ring media module and
bypasses the failing module. The media module can be isolated from the main
network while maintaining communications between lobe ports, for
troubleshooting and diagnostic purposes.

Token-Ring fiber repeater module The Token-Ring fiber repeater module extends
Token-Ring segments up to 2 km between concentrators with fiber optic cabling
(ST-type connectors) and an integrated repeater. It supports the "module
switching" feature and offers primary and backup ring paths with automatic
fail-over for complete fault tolerance on the repeated ring paths.

For greater flexibility, two copper RJ-45 ports are provided for connecting
external bridges, routers, or LAN stations.  Also, two non-repeated STP RI/RO
connections (RJ-45) are provided for connection with external Token-Ring
concentrators.

Token-Ring management module (basic) The Token-Ring management module delivers
cost-effective, full-featured network management of the 8250 Token-Ring
networks.

Copper RI/RO ports are provided for uplink connections to other Token-Ring
concentrators, such as IBM 8228 and IBM 8230 concentrators. When a ring is
formed in combination with an 8230's concentrators, the 8230 and the 8250
management module cooperate upon an uplink failure by wrapping to the backup
ring, maintaining total connectivity to the network.

The Token-Ring management module implements all the common features described
earlier for xMMs.  It can serve as an independent real-time monitoring and
control center for one Token-Ring network, by collecting and reporting key
statistics (isolating errors, nonisolating errors, inbound and outbound
counters) as well as neighbor information for building the network map.  It
protects networks from unauthorized users through its address to port feature.

Customers with Basic TRMM's, can upgrade their modules, with the 'TRMM Upgrade'
feature, to take benefit of the added functions of the Advanced model.  The
upgrade consists of a daughter board to be fixed on the Basic TRMM by the user,
and a new code to be loaded on the module.

Token-Ring management module (Advanced) The Advanced Token-Ring Management
Module, provides all the features of Basic TRMM, while offering important
additional functions.

The main features of Advanced TRMM are:

    -   Real-time performance monitoring
        Each Advanced TRMM can serve as an independent real-time
        monitoring and control center for one Token-Ring network, without
        the need for a specialized workstation. The Advanced TRMM can
        continuously monitor and report such key statistics as network
        performance of the Token-Ring LAN and each station's ring usage.
        The ring performance is tracked through the collection of token
        rotation time statistics and the ring usage; station usage
        information is collected either in bytes or frames, giving the
        network administrator an accurate picture of network trends.
    -   Advanced TRMM allows also the setting of thresholds at which a
        network alarm is generated, to inform the network administrator
        from excessive network loads.
    -   Advanced security features
        In addition to port access security provided on the Basic TRMM,
        Advanced TRMM provides an added level of protection: group-port
        security. Group-port security allows the administrator to enable
        or disable an entire group of ports at one time, or at pre-
        defined times; this feature can be used to prevent access to the
        network for pre-defined periods and a given group of users.

Multistation access unit (MAU) module The MAU module is a single-slot, 8-port,
and RI/RO unmanaged MAU that creates a self-contained Token-Ring network.  It
is ideal for networks with numerous small segments: each MAU can operate as an
independent segment, or can be combined to another MAU via the RI/RO
connections to form a single segment.  Patch cables are provided as accessories
for that purpose.

It provides automatic ring-wrap capability, preventing ring failure. Also, in
case of power failure, the RI/RO main and backup paths continue to operate.

Token-Ring bridge modules The Token-Ring bridge modules are 2-port, 1-slot
Token-Ring to Token-Ring bridges.  One port is assigned to the front panel, on
either STP cabling with DB9 connector, or UTP cabling with RJ-45 connector. The
other port is selectable among any of the internal Token-Ring segments on the
backplane (up to 7). Either port may operate at 4 or 16 Mbits.

The SR bridge module implements Source Routing protocol and is fully compatible
with IBM Token-Ring bridges (6611, PS/2 bridge program, 8209).

The SR/SRT bridge module implements both the SR protocol and the SRT (Source
Routing/Transparent) protocol, an 802.1 standard for Source Routing operation
that also allows interoperation with Transparent bridges. The module can run in
either modes, as a user selectable option. The module uses dedicated hardware
to implement address filtering, insuring that heavy traffic does not degrade
performance.

Both modules includes an SNMP agent, and may be managed from an SNMP manager.
In addition, they offer an RS-232 port for management via a local terminal or
via a modem. Also they may be managed via LAN Network Manager.

The modules use Flash PROMs to save configuration and program update can be
done through code download from the RS-232 port.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. 8250 FDDI MODULES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Fiber and STP media modules The FDDI media module (fiber or STP) is an 8-port,
2-slot medium access control (MAC)-less concentrator designed to connect single
attachment stations to an FDDI network.  This is a cost-effective modular
solution for either concentrating a workgroup of FDDI users or building a tree
of single access concentrators.

Up to four media modules can be installed in the 8250 Model 017 (two in models
6HC and 06S), with a maximum of 32 (16 for the Models 6HC and 06S) stations.
It implements the "module switching" feature, allowing the assignment of each
module to any of the four independent FDDI rings. With a redundant S-type
(slave) port, the media module allows for cascading concentrators in a dual
ring tree configuration, while offering a unique fault-tolerant link
capability.

Two fiber modules are available, one with ST-type connector, the other with the
standard approved MIC connector.  They simplify migration from existing
non-FDDI networks with 50- or 62.5-micron fiber optic cables. The STP module is
fully compatible with IBM FDDI copper adapters for the Personal System*
(PS/2*).

The FDDI media modules do not incorporate DIP switches.  A management module is
required to assign a module on a backplane segment.

FDDI management module The FDDI management module is a 2-slot module with an
FDDI MAC; it provides A/B ports for uplink connections to another 8250 or an
IBM 8240 FDDI concentrator; hence an FDDI network with dual rings and automatic
ring wrap can be formed.  A connection to an optical bypass is also provided.

The FDDI management module implements all the common features described earlier
for xMMs.  It supports FDDI system management team (SMT) management; SMT access
from remote SMT stations can be configured to allow read-write or read-only.

In addition, it can serve as an independent real-time monitoring and control
center for one FDDI ring, by collecting and reporting key statistics (MAC
counters), network events, and neighbor information.  The latter is used for
building the network map.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. WORKSTATION NETWORKING MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  73G6030

Feature Code 3174

The Workstation Networking Module is an optional module for the IBM 8250
Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub that provides key 3174 Establishment Controller
token-ring LAN based and synchronous communication link functions, such as APPN
and TCP/IP, as well as traditional 3270 terminal attachment.  It allows
customers to consolidate their LAN network infrastructure while preserving
investments in 3270 terminal hardware, wiring and related applications.

The Workstation Networking Module is an integral member of the 3174 product
family and is a derivative of the existing 3174-23R.  It is a 3270 solution for
the IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub that uses 3174 Configuration
Support-C Licensed Internal Code (LIC) to support many key functions provided
by the IBM 3174 Establishment Controller.

Supported functions include:

    -   3270 Terminal Attachment for up to thirty-two 3270 Category A
        devices
    -   SDLC and X.25 host protocols
    -   Token-Ring DSPU
    -   Token-Ring Gateway
    -   Peer Communications (LAN Over Coax)
    -   APPN
    -   TCP/IP
    -   Central Site Change Management
    -   Central Site Control Facility
    -   3174 RAS functions (e.g., 'slash' tests)
    -   3174 End User Interface

The Workstation Networking Module supports up to thirty-two 3270 Category A
devices.  It provides function similar to a thirty-two port 3174-23R. Terminal
attachment is accomplished by use of the existing IBM 3299 Terminal Multiplexer
family.  Supported 3270 terminal types are the same as those supported by the
IBM 3174 Establishment Controller.  The Workstation Networking Module may be
installed in any model of the 8250 family.

The Workstation Networking Module is a two-slot 8250 module.  The maximum
number of Workstation Networking Modules that can be installed in an 8250 is
dependent on the number of available 8250 slots (example: the 8250 Model 6HC
has six slots, and can therefore support up to three Workstation Networking
Modules, if no other 8250 feature modules are installed).

The Workstation Networking Module includes a processor, 6 MB control storage, a
3 1/2" 2.88 MB diskette drive (formatted capacity), non-volatile storage, an
operator panel and a Type 1 communications port (EIA232/V.24/V.28 or V.35).  It
has four Dual Purpose Connectors (DPC) and supports attachment of up to
thirty-two 3270 Category A devices through the use of IBM 3299 Terminal
Multiplexers (3299-001, 002, 003, 032 or 32T).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. V.35 COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR FEATURE #3174 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  25F8490

Marketing Part Number  39F7963

Feature Code 9000

This code applies only at initial order of the Workstation Networking Module
(feature #3174).  If specified, it causes a 6 m (20 ft) CCITT V.35
communications cable to be shipped with the Workstation Networking Module. Any
communication cable required for the Workstation Networking Module after its
initial order must be ordered as an 8250 accessory.

NOTE: No external communications cable is shipped with the Workstation
Networking Module unless #9000 or #9002 is specified at its initial order. An
external communications cable is not required for token-ring attachment of the
Workstation Networking Module as a token-ring network control unit (e.g., DSPU
- 3174-23R).  Only one communications cable may be specified at initial
Workstation Networking Module order (#9000 or #9002).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. EIA232/V.24/V.28 COMMUNICATION CABLE FOR FEATURE #3174 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  53F4779

Marketing Part Number  53F4780

Feature Code 9002

This code applies only at initial order of the Workstation Networking Module
(feature #3174).  If specified, it causes a 6 m (20 ft) EIA232/V.24/V.28
communications cable to be shipped with the Workstation Networking Module. Any
communication cable required for the Workstation Networking Module after its
initial order must be ordered as an 8250 accessory.

NOTE:  No external communications cable is shipped with the Workstation
Networking Module unless #9000 or #9002 is specified at its initial order. An
external communications cable is not required for token-ring attachment of the
Workstation Networking Module as a token-ring network control unit (e.g., DSPU
- 3174-23R).  Only one communications cable may be specified at initial
Workstation Networking Module order (#9000 or #9002).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. FAULT TOLERANT CONTROLLER MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  43G3791

Feature Code 3791

Bus Master  No

Fault tolerant controller module for 8250


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. 17-SLOT CHASSIS POWER SUPPLY (US) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  43G3925

Feature Code 3925

Bus Master  No

17-SLOT CHASSIS POWER SUPPLY (US)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. 6-SLOT CHASSIS POWER SUPPLY (US) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  43G3923

Feature Code 3923

Bus Master  No

6-SLOT CHASSIS POWER SUPPLY (US)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. OPTICAL FIBER CONVERTER MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  53F5503

Service Part Number   96X5810

Feature Code 5503

Bus Master  No

Provides attachment for the base unit onto a optical fiber ring path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. IBM 8222 6-PORT 10BASE-T WORKGROUP HUB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  60G0625

Feature Code 8222-001

Now you can attach up to seven IBM Personal System/2(R) (PS/2(R)), IBM
PS/ValuePoint(TM), or non-IBM computers in a 10Base-T Ethernet network or
attach up to six computers to an existing 10Base-T Ethernet network.  The IBM
8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub has six 10Base-T ports for workstation
connections using unshielded twisted-pair (category 3, 4, or 5) wiring.  In
addition, an Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) port is included in the 8222 which
allows connection of another workstation, connection of the 8222 to a base
Ethernet network, or connection of other 8222s to the Ethernet network through
cascading.  Cascading can also be accomplished through any of the 10Base-T
ports.

The 8222 allows for automatic disablement (partitioning) of any of its ports
connected to a device that generates repeated collisions, re-enabling that port
when the condition clears.  The 8222 also automatically detects and corrects
for polarity reversals on cables connected to its 10Base-T ports (repeater
receive pair).

The 8222 contains status LEDs for power (of the 8222), collision and activity
(on the Ethernet network).  Link OK and Disabled (partitioned) status LEDs are
provided for every 10Base-T port, and a Disabled (partitioned) status LED is
provided for the AUI port.

The 8222 can be placed on a flat surface, such as a table top or a desk top, or
it can be mounted on a wall or another object.  Screws and mounting brackets
are provided with the 8222 to facilitate mounting. (TM) Trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. (R) Registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Provides attachment for up to seven stations in an Ethernet
       10Base-T network or up to six stations to an existing Ethernet
       network.
    o  Grows with the customer's network through cascading.  More 8222s
       can be added to the network as the number of network users grows.
    o  Provides connection to 10Base2, 10Base5, and FOIRL (fiber) IEEE
       802.3 Ethernet networks through the AUI port.
    o  Allows automatic partitioning of any of its ports connected to a
       device that generates repeated collisions, re-enabling that port
       when the condition clears.
    o  Automatically detects polarity reversals on cables connected to
       its 10Base-T ports.
    o  Provides status LEDs for power (of the 8222), collision and
       activity (on the Ethernet network).  Link OK and Disabled
       (partitioned) status LEDs are provided for every 10Base-T port
       and a Disabled (partitioned) status LED is provided for the AUI
       port.
    o  Conveniently sits on a shelf or a tabletop, or can be mounted on
       a wall or similar surface.
    o  Includes a one-year warranty.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub allows connection of up to seven
stations in a new IEEE 802.3 Ethernet network and up to six stations to an
existing IEEE 802.3 Ethernet network.  In addition, the 8222 facilitates growth
of the network through its cascading ability.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub, when connected to IBM PS/ValuePoint
or IBM Personal System/2 machines with IBM Ethernet adapters, provides
customers with an ideal IBM Ethernet networking solution for the small LAN. The
8222 can attach up to seven stations in a 10Base-T Ethernet network, or it can
attach up to six 10Base-T stations to an existing 10Base2, 10Base5, or FOIRL
Ethernet network using the AUI port.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub, when connected to the IBM 8250
Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub or the IBM 6611 Router, provides connection of
workgroups or departments to the corporate enterprise network.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub is compatible with all IBM and
non-IBM machines, whether the machines contain IBM or non-IBM Ethernet
adapters, as long as the machines and adapters conform to the specifications
listed in the IEEE 802.3 standard.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub allows growth of the customer's
business.  As the number of workstations on the network increases, more 8222s
can be added to the network to meet the demand.  The 8222s can be cascaded in
two ways:

    1. Using the AUI port and a customer-supplied AUI attachment cable
       and transceiver to connect to a 10Base2, 10Base5, or fiber
       backbone, adding up to six new stations to the network for every
       8222, or
    2. Using a crossover cable to connect an RJ-45 port on one 8222 with
       an RJ-45 port on another 8222 to add up to four new stations to
       the network for every 8222.  A crossover cable makes the receive
       pair of wires on one end of the cable the transmit pair of wires
       at the other end of the cable and vice versa.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub can be placed on a table top or
mounted to a wall, providing installation flexibility.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub provides limited network management
and troubleshooting capability.

The 8222 provides for automatic disablement (partitioning) of any of its ports
connected to a device that generates repeated collisions, re-enabling that port
when the condition clears.  The 8222 also automatically detects and corrects
for polarity reversals on cables connected to its 10Base-T ports (repeater
receive pair).

The 8222 contains status LEDs for power (of the 8222), collision and activity
(on the Ethernet network).  Link OK and Disabled (partitioned) status LEDs are
also provided for every 10Base-T port.

Troubleshooting tips are provided in the IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub
Installation Instructions and Planning Guide, shipped with every 8222.

The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub conforms to the repeater
specifications of the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Width:  263mm (10.40 inches)
    Depth:  141mm (5.50 inches)
    Height:  54mm (2.10 inches)
    Weight: 975g (2.15 lbs)
Note: Values do not include the power cord.

Operating Environment:  The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub will meet or
exceed the following EMI requirements:

    o  FCC Class A (US)
    o  VCCI Class 1 (Japan)
    o  CISPR-22 Class A (Australia, New Zealand, etc.)
    o  EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (CE Mark)

Product Power On

    o  Temperature: 10.0 to 40.0 degrees C (50 to 104 degrees F)
    o  Relative Humidity: 8% to 80%
    o  Wet Bulb: 27.0 degrees C (80 degrees F)

Product Power Off

    o  Temperature: 10.0 to 52.0 degrees C (50 to 125 degrees F)
    o  Relative Humidity: 8% to 80%
    o  Wet Bulb: 27.0 degrees C (80 degrees F)

Compatibility:  The IBM 8222 6-Port 10Base-T Workgroup Hub will connect IBM or
non-IBM workstations with IBM or non-IBM Ethernet adapters to an Ethernet
network.  The 8222 is compatible with all current IBM Ethernet products,
including:

    o  IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet (PN 48G7169, FC 7169)
    o  IBM LAN Adapter for Ethernet TP (PN 60G0605, FC 0605)
    o  IBM LAN Adapter/A for Ethernet (PN 48G7171, FC 7171)
    o  IBM EtherStreamer MC 32 Adapter (PN 59G9066, FC 9066)
    o  IBM 8250 MultiProtocol Intelligent Hub
    o  IBM 6611 Router
    o  IBM 3172 Interconnect Controller
    o  IBM 8209 LAN Bridge
    o  IBM 3174 Communications Controller

User management is responsible for evaluation, selection and implementation of
security features, administrative procedures and appropriate controls in
application systems and communications facilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. AUTOMATIC UPDATE SERVICE FEATURES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  58G7330

The "Automatic Update Service" (AUS) is a simple cost-effective way of ensuring
that hardware modules are up-to-date with the latest code functions and
improvements.

Available on a 3-year subscription basis, the AUS covers all feature modules
with independently upgrade-able code components. With AUS, the subscriber
receives automatically the newest version of code when it is released.

Two types of subscriptions are available:

    o   "Single", a subscription for a single feature module.
    o   "Site", a subscription for as many modules (of same type) as
        needed, in a single building or campus with a single mailing
        address where the 8250 intelligent hubs are installed.  This
        subscription covers already installed modules as well as those
        ordered during the subscription period.

AUS is available for all 8250 feature modules which contain update-able code
functions; this includes management, bridges and terminal server modules. Two
easy and flexible ways to down load the new version of code are available:

    o   Out-of-band through the local console port, with an easy to use
        menu driven down load program, from a workstation running DOS or
        DOS emulation.
    o   In-band, from a TCP/IP workstation through standard TCP/IP file
        transfer protocol.  When using IHMP/6000 or IHMP/6000 Entry,
        code updates and control of versions are made easier through
        menus for hub configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. 6611 IBM NETWORK PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 6611 Network Processors Models 120, 140, and 170 are IBM's first
multiprotocol, multiport, router and bridge products.  The hardware platform
for IBM 6611 Network Processors is based on IBM's proven RISC technology.
Software support of all IBM 6611 Network Processors is provided by the IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program (5648-016) and is available preloaded into the
IBM Network Processors at the time of manufacture.

Customers are building wide area networks (WANs) that interconnect local area
network (LAN) technologies and protocols from multiple vendors.  The IBM 6611
Network Processors, by enabling the consolidation of multiple protocols on a
physical link, can reduce a customer's networking expenses.  The basic
functions of the IBM 6611 Network Processors include the ability to route a
wide variety of LAN protocols as well the ability to transport Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) and Network Basic Input/Output System (NetBIOS) traffic in a
bridged or routed environment.  The IBM 6611 Network Processor can also act as
a gateway for remote SDLC devices such as the IBM 3174 Establishment
Controller.  The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) network management
agent is included in the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program.  It can be managed
by an existing SNMP manager and by the AIX* NetView/6000 program (5765-077).

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Systems Management
        The IBM 6611 Network Processors can reduce systems management
        expenses for networking facilities by enabling the consolidation
        of multiple networking protocols on a physical link.
    o   End-User Productivity
        The IBM 6611 Network Processors address customer requirements
        for a cost-effective means of implementing new end-user
        applications that improve end-user productivity through LAN
        technologies and protocols and distributed computing models such
        as client-server computing.
    o   Investment Protection
        The IBM 6611 Network Processors, with their ability to handle a
        wide variety of LAN-based protocols as well as SNA, enable
        customers to protect the significant investment that they have
        made in application development, personnel training, and
        computing and networking hardware.
    o   Growth Enablement
        Application growth is no longer constrained by the expense of
        implementing and maintaining multiple physical networks to
        support the wide variety of LAN protocols underlying the rich
        array of LAN-based personal computer and workstation applications.
    o   Business Solutions
        The IBM 6611 Network Processors, with their ability to handle a
        wide variety of LAN protocols, enable business solutions to be
        developed to meet unique end-user requirements with minimal
        consideration of, and constraint imposed by, the underlying
        networking protocols.

The 6611 Network Processor Model 120 is a table-top unit.  It may be installed
in a horizontal position on a table, or may be placed in a horizontal position
on a shelf of a 19-inch rack.

The Model 120 is available in eight fixed configurations:

    o   One Token-Ring port and two V.35/V.36 compatible serial ports
    o   One Ethernet** port and two V.35/V.36 compatible serial ports
    o   One Token-Ring port and two EIA 422/449 serial ports
    o   One Ethernet port and two EIA 422/449 serial ports
    o   One Token-Ring port and one X.25 port
    o   One Ethernet port and one X.25 port
    o   One Token-Ring port and four SDLC ports
    o   One Ethernet port and four SDLC ports

The Token-Ring port provides a single attachment to either a 16 Mbps or a 4
Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network.  IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control (MAC) is
provided.  Configuration parameters permit the selection of either the 16 or 4
Mbps rate.  Early Token Release can be enabled or disabled when the 16 Mbps
rate is selected.  The transmission media (cabling) supported by the Token-Ring
port at 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps is consistent with the transmission media supported
by other IBM Token-Ring Network adapters.  A Token-Ring Network Adapter Cable
is available as feature #2665.  It provides a connection between the Token-Ring
port and the receptacle.  That cable is comprised of 150-ohm shielded
twisted-pair wiring and an IBM Cabling System connector.

The Ethernet port provides a single attachment to an a 10Mbps Ethernet link.
The port supports Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple
Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) local area network specifications.  IEEE
802.3 Media Access Control (MAC) is provided.  A customer-supplied Attachment
Unit Interface (AUI) 10Base5 (thick) cable and a customer-supplied Ethernet
transceiver are required to connect the Ethernet port to the Ethernet network.
Customer selection of an Ethernet transceiver with the cable-matching function
can provide connectivity to other Ethernet backbone wiring options including
10Base2 (thin) and 10Base-T twisted pair.

Two serial communications interfaces are provided.  The supported electrical
interface standard is EIA 422/449.  Each interface operates in full duplex mode
at speeds ranging from 19.2 Kbps up to 1.536 Mbps full duplex.  A
customer-supplied data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) device is required
to connect the IBM 6611 to the serial link.  The DCE can be either a data
service unit/channel service unit (DSU/CSU), or a modem.  Three key items that
must be provided by the DCE are (1) conformance to EIA 422/449 standards, (2) a
continuous clock, and (3) the ability to accept DTE-provided clock which is
generated from the receive clock.  If the DCE is a DSU/CSU connected to a T1
link, the DSU/CSU must provide the framing bits that bring the total speed of
the connection up to the 1.544 Mbps level.  An EIA 422/449 Serial Adapter Cable
is available as feature #2645.  These serial ports do not provide fractional T1
capability.

The two serial ports each provide a CCITT V.35 compatible electrical interface.
Each interface operates in full duplex mode at speeds from 19.2 Kbps to 1.536
Mbps.  Customer-supplied data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) is required
to connect the 6611 to the serial link.  The DCE must conform to the CCITT V.35
Recommendation and provide the framing bits that bring the total data rate of
the connection to 1.544 Mbps.  A V.35 Compatible Serial Adapter Cable to
connect each port to the DCE is available as feature #2655.  These serial ports
do not provide fractional T1 capabilities.

A single attachment that enables the IBM 6611 Model 120 to be a DTE device on
an X.25 network via a customer-supplied modem (DCE) that provides either an EIA
232 or a 1984 CCITT V.35 interface is provided.  The X.25 port supports data
rates of up to 19.2 Kbps for EIA 232 and up to 56 Kbps for V.35.  Only the IP
protocol is supported on the X.25 interface.  An X.25 cable is required to
connect the X.25 port to the X.25 DCE (#2977 or #2978 for EIA-232, #2987 or
#2988 for V.35).

The X.25 port will also support one 1984 CCITT X.21 interface at a data rate up
to 64 Kbps.  Two X.25 Adapter CCITT X.21 cables are available (#2975 and
#2976).

Four SDLC ports are provided which support four EIA 232 electrical interfaces
or two 1984 CCITT V.35 electrical interfaces in any combination up to the
maximum of four per Model 120.  The SDLC ports supports data rates up to 19.2
Kbps for the EIA 232 interface and up to 64 Kbps for the V.35 interface.  The
two CCITT V.35 interfaces are only supported on ports 0 and 1.  The SDLC ports
are provided to support attachment of SNA/SDLC Physical Unit 2.0 devices such
as the IBM 3174 Establishment Controller.  Multiple cables are required to
connect each SDLC port to the appropriate communications link. The SDLC Adapter
Interface Cable (Feature #2723) provides a single connection between the four
SDLC ports on the Model 120 and the individual interface cables, either the
SDLC Adapter EIA 232/CCITT V.24 Cable (Feature #2725) or the SDLC Adapter CCITT
V.35 Cable (Feature #2727).  These cables, in turn, provide the connection to
the customer-supplied DCE.

Alternatively, one 1984 CCITT X.21 electrical interface at a data rate up to 64
Kbps is supported, on Port 0 only.  The SDLC Adapter CCITT X.21 Cable (feature
#2729) provides connection between the SDLC Adapter Interface Cable and the
X.21 interface of the customer supplied data circuit-terminating equipment
(DCE).

MODEL 120 Standard features of the 6611 Model 120 include:

    o   One 3.5-inch 1.44 MB diskette drive
    o   16 MB memory

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Horizontal -

    o   Width:  406mm (16.0 inches)
    o   Depth:  419mm (16.5 inches)
    o   Height: 84mm  (3.3 inches)
    o   Weight: 9 - 11.5kg (20-25 lbs)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Operating:

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent (noncondensing)
    o   Wet Bulb:  27C (80.6F)

Non-operating:

    o   Temperature:  10 to 43C (50 to 110F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent (noncondensing)
    o   Wet Bulb:  27C (80.6F)

MODEL 120 Fixed configuration options, no adapter features supported

The minimum system configuration consists of an IBM 6611 Network Processor
Model 120, 140, or 170 and the adapters, cables and power cord necessary to
implement the customer's configuration.

IBM will provide an optional remote service capability for IBM 6611 Network
Processor customers.  Customers desiring to establish this service must provide
a modem such as the IBM 5853, or equivalent, and a communications line.  IBM
believes that this capability will provide an enhanced service level and
increased system availability.

To operate, the IBM 6611 Network Processor requires the IBM Multiprotocol
Network Program (5648-016).  The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program must be
specified for preloading into the IBM 6611 Network Processor at the time of
manufacture.

Initial configuration of the IBM 6611 Network Processors and post-installation
configuration changes will require the use of the IBM Multiprotocol Network
Program Configuration Program that is shipped with the IBM Multiprotocol
Networking Program.  The configuration program will operate in either of the
following customer-supplied hardware and software operating environments: An
IBM PS/2 or compatible as follows:

    o   Intel 80386 or higher central processing unit
    o   IBM DOS 3.3 or MS-DOS 3.3  or later versions
    o   MS Windows 3.0 or later versions
    o   8MB of memory
    o   3.5-inch floppy disk
    o   10MB of free hard file disk space
    o   VGA display
    o   Mouse

A RISC System/6000* POWERstation* or POWERserver* as follows:

    o   AIX Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000 (AIX/6000 3.1.5) or higher
    o   AIXWindows Environment/6000
    o   16MB of memory
    o   3.5-inch floppy disk
    o   10MB of free hard file disk space
    o   Graphics display
    o   Mouse

If the customer elects to install a communication link between the IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program Configuration Program on a RISC System/6000 and
the IBM 6611 Network Processor, the TCP/IP function in AIX/6000 3.1.5 or higher
must be implemented.

If the customer elects to install network management, the SNMP agent function
must be configured in the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program.  In addition, the
customer must install an SNMP manager program such as the new IBM AIX
NetView/6000 (5765-077).  IBM AIX NetView/6000 can be connected to NetView, and
the implementation requirements are in the AIX NetView/6000 announcement.
Implementation of that connection requires that NetView be at the Version 2
Release 2 level.

If the customer elects to install source route bridging, that function must be
configured in the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program.  Remote source route
bridging can be implemented by using an IBM 6611 Network Processor for each
bridge half, or by using the IBM 6611 Network Processor for one bridge half and
an IBM Personal System/2 for the other bridge half.  If the latter option is
selected, the Personal System/2 must have the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program Version 2.2 (53F7-724) installed.  If the customer elects to implement
network management of the IBM Token-Ring Network, the IBM LAN Network Manager
Version 1.0 (74F5537) must be installed.  To support the IBM Multiprotocol
Network Program, a no-charge update must be installed on the IBM Token-Ring
Network Bridge Program Version 2.2 and on the IBM LAN Network Manager Version
1.0.

Model 120:  Yes.  Setup by IBM service personnel is also available for an
additional charge. * Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation. ** Ethernet is a trademark of
Xerox Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. 6611 IBM NETWORK PROCESSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

IBM expands its networking systems offerings by introducing the IBM 6611
Network Processor 140 and the IBM 6611 Network Processor 170.  They are IBM's
first multiprotocol, multiport, router and bridge products.  The hardware
platform for the IBM 6611 Network Processors 140 and 170 is based on IBM's
proven RISC technology.  The IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 is a four-slot
product, and the IBM 6611 Network Processor 170 is a seven-slot product.
Software support of the IBM 6611 Network Processors will be provided by the IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program (5648-016) and available preloaded into the IBM
Network Processors 140 and 170 at the time of manufacture.

Customers are building wide area networks (WANs) that interconnect local area
network (LAN) technologies and protocols from multiple vendors.  The IBM 6611
Network Processors, by enabling the consolidation of multiple protocols on a
physical link, can reduce a customer's networking expenses.  The basic
functions of the IBM 6611 Network Processors include the ability to route a
wide variety of LAN protocols as well the ability to transport Systems Network
Architecture (SNA) and Network Basic Input/Output System (NETBIOS) traffic in a
bridged or routed environment.  The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
network management agent is included in the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program.
It can be managed by an existing SNMP manager and by the AIX* NetView/6000
program (5765-077).

The traditional SNA computing and networking model defined a hierarchical
network that linked terminals to host-based transaction processing applications
that utilized the Customer Information Control System (CICS) and the
Information Management System (IMS).  During the past several years,
implementation of a flat computing and networking model has proceeded rapidly
as applications have been distributed to LAN-connected personal computers and
workstations from a wide variety of manufacturers with a diverse set of
underlying communications protocols.

In addition, implementation of the flat computing model may have resulted in
the implementation of multiple networks as each department in an enterprise
implemented business solutions tailored to the specialized tasks performed by
that department.

The continually increasing cost of supporting multiple networks across similar
geographic areas has resulted in a critical customer requirement for a means to
achieve cost savings in equipment and tariff costs for the physical network and
personnel costs related to the installation, operation, and management of
multiple networks.  The IBM 6611 Network Processors are announced in response
to this key customer requirement.  It provides a means to economically
interconnect local area networks (LANs), connect LANs to wide area networks
(WANs), and connect LANs to LANs via WANs.

The IBM 6611 Network Processors, by enabling the consolidation of multiple
protocols on a link, can reduce a customer's networking expenses.  In addition,
the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program includes an SNMP agent.  That enables the
IBM 6611 Network Processors to be managed on a distributed basis by an SNMP
manager such as the newly announced AIX NetView/6000 program.  At the
customer's option, the AIX NetView/6000 program can be linked to NetView to
provide centralized network management from a System/370* or System/390*
processor.  Thus, additional personnel cost savings may be attainable depending
upon one's present and future network management structure.

End-user productivity is being enhanced by the migration of applications from a
computing model based on fixed-function video display terminals to multiple
computing models such as distributed, cooperative, and client-server computing.
Those new computing models are dependent on the networking of personal
computers, workstations, mid-range processors, and central-site mainframe
processors.  The new computing models are generally LAN-based, and the
applications are typically developed to meet unique end-user requirements
without regard for any potential networking impact.  The IBM 6611 Network
Processors can accommodate the proliferation of disparate end-user business
solutions by providing a means to economically consolidate the transmission of
many LAN-based protocols as well as SNA.

Both end-user departments and corporate information systems organizations have
made major investments in a wide variety of business solutions. Customers have
made a major investment in processors, from personal computers and workstations
to mid-range machines and hosts, and in LAN equipment and software from a wide
variety of vendors.  In addition, there are thousands of installed SNA networks
that also represent a significant hardware and software investment over along
period of time.  Customers have made a large investment in application
development across the enterprise as well as an investment in training for end
users, programmers, and systems operators and managers.  The IBM 6611 Network
Processors, by providing adapters for the attachment of devices located on
Ethernet and token ring LANs as well as attachment of SNA/Synchronous Data Link
Control (SDLC) Physical Unit 2.0 devices (such as the IBM 3174), and by
supporting many of the available LAN protocols, enables customers to protect
the major computing and networking investments that have been previously made.

Application growth today is being driven by the need to provide end users with
access to any required information regardless of the technology and protocols
used to implement the application and regardless of geographic and
organizational boundaries.  The IBM 6611 Network Processors, by supporting the
consolidation of multiple LAN-based protocols as well as SNA on a physical
link, enables customers to focus on application development to achieve end-user
productivity and corporate growth without concern regarding the availability of
the appropriate networking protocols required to support the application.

In the past, corporate information systems organizations implemented host-based
applications and networks to serve end users.  Today, those end users are
installing LAN-based business solutions from a wide variety of hardware and
software vendors to achieve the function and productivity associated with
personal computers and workstations.  Thus, end-user departments are working
with telecommunications managers and management information systems (MIS)
managers in regard to networking issues and often significantly influencing the
corporate networking direction.  The IBM 66111 Network Processors provide a
major response to end-user requirements by enabling the implementation of a
common corporate data utility that can accommodate the protocols associated
with a wide variety of business solutions based on a rich spectrum of available
LAN technologies as well as SNA.

IBM is announcing a comprehensive set of products to address customer
requirements for routing, bridging, and systems management in a multiprotocol
environment.  The IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and IBM 6611 Network Processor
170 provide the base hardware platforms for the execution of routing and
bridging functions implemented in the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program
(5648-016).  The latter includes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
agent, which can be managed by an SNMP manager such as the AIX NetView/6000
program (5765-077).

The IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 has four adapter slots, and the IBM 6611
Network Processor 170 has seven adapter slots.  Both IBM 6611 Network
Processors are floor-standing units.  The IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 can
also be placed in a vertical position on the bottom shelf of a 19-inch rack,
assuming there is sufficient vertical clearance between shelves.  Optionally,
the IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 can be installed in a horizontal orientation
on a table.  That option is not available for for the IBM 6611 Network
Processor 170.

The basic functions of the Multiprotocol Network Program include the ability to
route a wide variety of LAN protocols (TCP/IP, XNS, IPX, DECnet Phase IV, and
Apple Talk Phase 2) as well as the ability to transport SNA and NETBIOS traffic
in a bridged or routed environment on the same physical link as the LAN
protocols.

An SNMP agent is also included in the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program.  It
provides a distributed network management solution for multi-vendor
environments using the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
and SNMP.  If centralized network management through System/370, System/390
NetView is also desired, the AIX NetView Service Point program (5621-107)
provides an interface between AIX NetView/6000 and NetView.

When connected to a frame relay network, the IBM 6611 Network Processors 140
and 170 perform the functions of a data terminal equipment (DTE) device.  The
frame relay function will support Permanent Virtual Circuits and provide
wide-area transport of IP, XNS, IPX, DECnet (Phase IV), AppleTalk, SNA, NETBIOS
and token ring source route bridging.  The Local Management Interface (LMI)
options include support for ANSI T1.617 Annex D.

The IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and IBM 6611 Network Processor 170 Frame
Relay encapsulation protocol will provide interoperability with other equipment
supporting this proposed industry standard.  The IBM 6611 Network Processors
140 and 170  will attach to frame relay networks that adhere to ANSI T1.617/8
(CCITT Q.922/3).  A list of supported network providers will be available at
general availability of the IBM 6611 Network Processors 140 and 170.

The second option for multi-vendor interoperability for the wide area network
is the use of the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).  This encapsulation protocol
is based on Request for Comment (RFC) 1171.  It uses the frame structure of
HDLC (ISO 3309).  This PPP specification defines both control of the data-link
connection and support for each of the protocol families.  The IBM 6611 Network
Processors support the current Network Control Protocol RFC for IP (RFC 1172)
and for source route bridging.  In addition, IBM has included Network Control
Protocol support for IPX, XNS, DECnet Phase IV, and AppleTalk.  SNA and NETBIOS
Data Link Switching use IP as a transport in the WAN environment, and are thus
supported with PPP.  Networking vendors supporting the noted specifications are
expected to interoperate with the IBM 6611 Network Processors in a multi-vendor
environment.  Additional details in regard to PPP interoperability will be
available at general availability.

The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program (5648-016) provides the ability to route
a wide variety of LAN protocols and transport SNA and NETBIOS in a bridged or
routed environment.  With those capabilities, customers can use the IBM 6611
Network Processors and the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program to interconnect
LANs, connect LANs to WANs, and connect LANs to LANs via WANs. In addition, the
IBM Multiprotocol Network Program provides the SNMP agent function.  The IBM
Multiprotocol Network Program is preloaded into the IBM 6611 Network Processors
140 and 170 when they are built.

Above the physical layer, the following protocols are supported to provide
routing services, network services, and network applications for the first five
protocol suites listed at the beginning of this section.

    o   TCP/IP
        -   ARP -- Address Resolution Protocol
        -   IP  -- Internet Protocol
        -   TCP -- Transmission Control Protocol
        -   UDP -- User Datagram Protocol
        -   ICMP -- Internet Control Message Protocol
        -   RIP -- Routing Information Protocol
        -   OSPF -- Open Shortest Path First
        -   HELLO
        -   EGP -- Exterior Gateway Protocol
        -   BGP -- Border Gateway Protocol
        -   SNMP -- Simple Network Management Protocol
        -   FTP -- File Transfer Protocol
        -   TELNET
    o   XNS *
        -   Error
        -   Echo
        -   IDP -- Internetwork Datagram Protocol
        -   RIP -- Routing Information Protocol
        -   Sequenced Packet Protocol **
        -   Packet Exchange Protocol **
    o   IPX
        -   IPX -- Internet Packet Exchange Protocol
        -   SPX -- Sequenced Packet Exchange **
        -   SAP -- Service Advertising Protocol
        -   RIP -- Routing Information Protocol
    o   AppleTalk (Phase 2)
        -   AARP -- AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol
        -   NBP -- Name Binding Protocol
        -   AEP -- AppleTalk Echo Protocol
        -   DDP -- Datagram Delivery Protocol
        -   RTMP -- Routing Table Maintenance Protocol
        -   ZIP -- Zone Information Protocol
    o   DECnet (Phase IV)
        -   DECnet Routing
        -   Level 1 (Routing IV for Intradomain Communications)
        -   Level 2 (Area Routing for Interdomain Communications)

Notes: o  *The XNS protocol suite is defined per the Xerox standard XNSS 028112
and   published in the "Xerox System Integration Standard:  Internet Transport
Protocols" (the Xerox 'gray book').  Protocols."  Variations of the XNS
protocol suite such as Banyan VINES and Ungerman-Bass Net One are not
supported. o  **The Sequenced Packet Protocol and Packet Exchange Protocol in
the XNS   protocol suite and the SPX protocol in the IPX protocol suite are
transported by the IBM Multiprotocol Network Program, but are not   implemented
in that program.

Interoperability between routers at the transport layer and application layers
depends upon a common implementation of open, standards-based or architected
router-to-router protocols.  That statement is of particular importance for
those customers with routers from multiple vendors, but is equally applicable
to customers with routers from a single vendor.

For example, in the TCP/IP protocol suite, OSPF and RIP are the open,
standards-based router-to-router protocols.  OSPF is based on Request For
Comment (RFC) 1247.  Networking vendors supporting that specification are
expected to interoperate with the IBM 6611 Network Processors 140 and 170.
Additional details concerning the interoperability of those products with other
routers that have implemented OSPF will be provided at general availability of
the IBM 6611 Network Processors.

The OSPF protocol provides an open standard that is available to any router
manufacturer, and it provides a number of major enhancements compared to RIP.
However, RIP has been widely implemented and in many networks provides a
satisfactory router-to-router protocol.  RIP is based on RFC 1058. Networking
vendors supporting that specification are expected to interoperate with the IBM
6611 Network Processors 140 and 170.  Additional details concerning the
interoperability of those products with other routers that have implemented RIP
will be provided at general availability of the IBM 6611 Network Processors.

Router-to-router protocols such as OSPF and RIP are transported over serial and
LAN connections.  The 6611 2-Port Serial Adapter can support, at the data link
level, the interoperability of routers from the same or multiple vendors
assuming a common implementation of the open, standards-based specifications
for Frame Relay and/or the Point-to-Point Protocol.  Those two specifications
are discussed in the paragraphs that follow the description of the 6611 2-Port
Serial Adapter.

A key element in the reduction of a customer's networking expenses is the
consolidation of the above protocols with SNA and NETBIOS traffic across a
link.  Data link switching (DLS) is the name of the methodology developed by
IBM to transport the SNA and NETBIOS protocols with IBM 6611 Network
Processors.  The physical devices supported by SNA DLS are token ring attached
devices and Physical Unit Type 2.0 devices attached to the 4-Port SDLC Adapter.
NETBIOS DLS supports end stations located on both token ring and Ethernet
networks.

Key customer benefits provided by DLS are in the areas of availability and
efficient WAN utilization.  Availability is improved because DLS enables the
IBM 6611 Network Processors to internally terminate the 802.2 Layer and locally
acknowledge frames, while encapsulating the data in TCP/IP.  Local
acknowledgement minimizes time outs and the resulting session loss.
Availability improvements are achieved through the automatic route switching
provided by IP which reroutes traffic around failed nodes and through the
reliable WAN transport provided by TCP.  Data link controls are provided by
TCP, and it can retransmit data and keep sessions "alive" when alternate paths
are available.

Efficient WAN utilization is achieved because DLS permits all supported
protocols (including SNA) to be consolidated on a link.  In addition, the IBM
6611 Network Processors with DLS will handle the link layer flow control for
SNA end stations.  Therefore, WAN and LAN traffic overhead is minimized because
the IBM 6611 Network Processors can handle the polling for SDLC and the "keep
alive" messages for the 802.2 logical link control.

NETBIOS data link switching (DLS) is a set of additions to SNA DLS which will
allow the pass-thru of NETBIOS broadcast frames and the addition of
station/name/router information to the DLS tables.

The IBM 6611 Network Processors are bridge and router products.  In addition to
the previously described routing capabilities, the IBM 6611 Network Processors
provide two source route bridging (SRB) functions, called basic and multiport.
The basic SRB function provides a means to connect two local or remote IBM
Token-Ring Networks into one logical ring.  The connected rings can be any
combination of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Networks.  Two configurations
of the basic SRB function are available:

1.  Local Bridge Connectivity.  A single IBM 6611 Network Processor may be
used to physically connect two IBM Token-Ring Networks that converge at   one
location, such as a wiring closet.  Each of the two interconnected   rings
requires a 6611 Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter in the IBM 6611   Network
Processor.

2.  Remote Bridge Connectivity.  The remote SRB function supports bridging
across the 6611 2-Port Serial Adapter in either of two configurations:
Compatibility Mode:  This configuration is based on a point-to-point
telecommunication link with a data rate up to 1.344 Mbps.  In this mode   of
operation, each 6611 2-Port Serial Adapter can support connection to   two IBM
PS/2s running the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version   2.2
(53F7-724).  The IBM 6611 Network Processors will operate in   compatibility
mode with the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program.  In   this configuration,
the IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 or 170 must have   at least one 6611
Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter installed and   operational.   Native Mode:
This configuration is based on a serial link with a data   rate up to 1.544
Mbps.  In this mode of operation, each port of the 6611   2-Port Serial Adapter
in a local IBM 6611 Network Processor can support a   bridged connection to a
port on the 2-Port Serial Adapter in a remote IBM   6611 Network Processor.
In native mode, the telecommunications facility between two or more IBM   6611
Network Processors can be provided by a point-to-point serial link   or by a
frame relay network.

The multiport source route bridging function also provides both local and
remote bridge connectivity.  The IBM 6611 Network Processor multiport SRB
function provides a means to connect more than two local or remote IBM
Token-Ring Networks into one logical ring.  Multiport local SRB will support as
many 6611 Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapters as can be configured by the IBM 6611
Network Processors.  Multiport remote SRB will similarly support as many 6611
Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapters and 6611 2-Port Serial Adapters as can be
configured by the IBM 6611 Network Processors.  Multiport remote SRB supports
the same configurations as single-port remote SRB:  compatibility mode and
native mode with a native mode telecommunications facility that can be either a
point-to-point serial link or a frame relay network.

Both basic and multiport SRB in the IBM 6611 Network Processors can provide a
significant benefit to customers who have implemented the remote bridge
capability of the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program.  With the introduction
of the IBM 6611 Network Processor SRB function and Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program compatibility, an IBM 6611 Network Processor can be used for one bridge
half and a Personal System/2 can be used for the other bridge half.  Thus, a
single IBM 6611 Network Processor can replace multiple IBM Personal System/2*s
required today to support multiple, remote IBM PS/2*s running the IBM
Token-Ring Network Bridge Program.

The functional capabilities of the IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.0,
announced in September, 1990, include the management of bridged PS/2s that use
the IBM Token Ring Network Bridge Program Version 2.2 announced in June, 1990.

Both the IBM LAN Network Manager Version 1.0 and the IBM Token-Ring Network
Bridge Program Version 2.2 will support token ring SRB function in the IBM 6611
Network Processors for basic and multiport bridging with local and remote
connectivity.  A range of management capabilities will be supported. The level
of management support is dependent upon:

    o   The presence or absence of the IBM LAN Network Manager
        Version 1.0.
    o   The presence or absence of the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
        Program Version 2.2.
    o   Whether the bridge connection is local or remote.
    o   The overall network topology and placement of the IBM LAN Network
        Manager and the IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program within that
        topology.

The Multiprotocol Network Program Configuration Program is initially used to
create the configuration diskette required for the initial program load (IPL)
when the IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 or IBM 6611 Network Processor 170 is
first installed.  Once an IBM 6611 Network Processor is operational on a TCP/IP
network, configuration changes can be exchanged on-line between a RISC
System/6000 POWERstation or POWERserver and an IBM 6611 Network Processor on
the same network.  That on-line configuration exchange capability is not
available for configuration changes created on a Personal System/2 or
compatible system.  However, the Multiprotocol Network Program can apply
software configuration changes to the IBM 6611 Network Processor while it
remains operational, regardless of whether those changes were created on a
Personal System/2 or on a RISC System/6000.  Hardware configuration changes
must be installed by an IBM customer engineer.  The Multiprotocol Network
Program Configuration Program can send requests to the IBM 6611 Network
Processors to retrieve information such as the current configuration and
currently installed hardware.

The Multiprotocol Network Program Configuration Program has been designed with
a focus on usability.  It provides a graphical user interface that enables
users to manipulate hardware objects and configure individual ports. Protocols
can be easily defined through the use of windows, pop-ups, and templates.
Whenever possible, default values and ranges are shown to simplify the
configuration of protocols.  Contextual help is available to the user at each
step of the configuration task.

Network management for the IBM 6611 Network Processors has four major elements:

    o   The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) - an open, standards-
        based (RFC 1157) protocol that is used for the exchange of
        variables between SNMP agents and one or more SNMP managers in a
        TCP/IP network.
    o   SNMP agents - the Multiprotocol Network Program provides the SNMP
        agent for each IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and 170.
    o   SNMP manager(s) - the IBM AIX NetView/6000 program or the
        customer's currently installed SNMP management program.
    o   The Management Information Base (MIB) - an open, standards-based
        set of definitions for variables (or data objects) that are shared
        or exchanged between the SNMP agents and the SNMP manager(s).

MIB variables include data elements such as network statistics and operational
status information.  The Multiprotocol Network Program supports multiple open,
standards-based MIBs including MIB I and MIB II, and provides an additional
IBM, enterprise-specific MIB.

The Multiprotocol Network Program logs all errors in the error log that is
maintained by each IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 and 170.  Critical errors,
such as those related to network availability, are forwarded as traps (or
problem alerts) to the SNMP manager.  To assist problem determination and
diagnosis, traps generated by the Multiprotocol Network Program will include
probable cause information and recommended actions.

The Multiprotocol Network Program includes the TCP/IP TELNET and File Transfer
Program (FTP) applications.  TELNET provides a remote access to the systems
management interface of the IBM 6611 Network Processors 140 and 170 to perform
functions such as viewing the error log, running diagnostics and requesting
dumps and traces.  FTP enables the transfer of information such as error logs,
dumps and traces from the IBM 6611 Network Processors 140 and 170 to the
workstation in which the SNMP manager is operating.

The Multiprotocol Network Program Configuration Program can be installed in the
same RISC System/6000 as AIX NetView/6000.  The AIX NetView/6000 Announcement
Letter provides additional information on establishing communication between
AIX NetView/6000 and the host-based NetView product.

The IBM 6611 Network Processor 140 is a table-top or floor-standing unit.  It
has four customer-configurable adapter card slots and two, 160MB fixed disk
drives.  The IBM 6611 Network Processor 170 is a floor-standing unit.  It has
seven customer-configurable adapter card slots and a 355MB fixed disk drive
with an associated SCSI adapter that occupies an eighth slot.  Both IBM 6611
Network Processors have 16MB of memory.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    IBM 6611 Network Processor 140
    Horizontal -
      o   Width:  460 mm (18 inches)
      o   Depth:  525 mm (20.75 inches)
      o   Height: 165 mm (6.5 inches) (with pedestal)
      o   Weight: 15.5 kg (34 pounds) (maximum)
    Vertical -
      o   Width:  280 mm (11.25 inches) (at the pedestal)
      o   Depth:  525 mm (20.75 inches)
      o   Height: 470 mm (18.5 inches) (with pedestal)
      o   Weight: 15.5 kg (34 pounds) (maximum)

IBM 6611 Network Processor 170

      o   Width:  360 mm (14.2 inches)
      o   Depth:  675 mm (26.6 inches)
      o   Height: 610 mm (24.0 inches)
      o   Weight: 53.1 kg (117 pounds) (maximum)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Operating:

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent (noncondensing)
    o   Wet Bulb:  27C (80.6F)

Non-operating:

    o   Temperature:  10 to 52C (50 to 125.6F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent (noncondensing)
    o   Wet Bulb:  27C (80.6F)

To operate, the IBM 6611 Network Processor requires the IBM Multiprotocol
Network Program (5648-016).  The IBM Multiprotocol Network Program must be
specified for preloading into the IBM 6611 Network Processor at the time of
manufacture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. 6611 2-PORT SERIAL ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 6611 2-Port Serial Adapter feature provides a means to connect the 6611 to
a wide area network (WAN).  The WAN can support only IBM 6611 Network
Processors or IBM 6611 Network Processors and routers from multiple vendors.
Multi-vendor connectivity can be achieved through the implementation of a
standards-based Frame Relay WAN or implementation of the serial link
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).  Interoperability is discussed in the following
paragraphs and in the Interoperability section of this document. This adapter
provides two serial communications interfaces per adapter.  The supported
electrical interface standard is EIA 422.  Each adapter interface operates in
full duplex mode at speeds ranging from 19.2 Kbps up to 1.536 Mbps full duplex.
A customer-supplied data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) device is required
to connect the IBM 6611 to the serial link.  The DCE can be either a data
service unit/channel service unit (DSU/CSU), or a modem. Two key items that
must be provided by the DCE are conformance to the EIA 449 and 422 standards
and a continuous clock.  If the DCE is a DSU/CSU connected to a T1 link, the
DSU/CSU must provide the framing bits that bring the total speed of the
connection up to the 1.544 Mbps level.  A Serial Adapter Cable to connect the
2-Port Serial Adapter to the DCE is available from IBM as feature #2645.
Maximum:  Up to the maximum number of available adapter slots.  Prerequisite:
None.  Customer Set-up:  No.  Field Installable:  Yes. Cable Order:  (#2645)
Serial Adapter Cable.  Maximum:  Two cables per adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. 6611 2-PORT V.35/V.36 COMPATIBLE SERIAL ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 6611 2-Port Serial Adapter feature provides a means to connect the 6611 to
a wide area network (WAN).  The WAN can support only IBM 6611 Network
Processors or IBM 6611 Network Processors and routers from multiple vendors.
Multi-vendor connectivity can be achieved through the implementation of a
standards-based Frame Relay WAN or implementation of the serial link
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).  Interoperability is discussed in the following
paragraphs and in the Interoperability section of this document.

The 6611 2-Port V.35/V.36 Compatible Serial Adapter provides two serial
communications interfaces per adapter. The supported electrical interface is
CCITT V.35. Each adapter interface operates in full duplex mode at speeds from
19.2 Kbps to 1.536 Mbps.  Customer-supplied data circuit-terminating equipment
(DCE) is required to connect the 6611 to the serial link.  The DCE must conform
to the CCITT V.35 Recommendation and provide the framing bits that bring the
total data rate of the connection to 1.544 Mbps.  A 2-Port V.35/V.36 Compatible
Serial adapter cable to connect the adapter to the DCE is available from IBM as
feature #2655.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. 6611 TOKEN-RING NETWORK 16/4 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This adapter provides a single attachment to either a 16 Mbps or a 4 Mbps IBM
Token-Ring Network.  The adapter provides IEEE 802.5 Media Access Control
(MAC).  Configuration parameters permit the selection of either the 16 or 4
Mbps rate.  Early Token Release can be enabled or disabled when the 16 Mbps
rate is selected.  The transmission media (cabling) supported by the 6611
Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter at 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps is consistent with the
transmission media supported by other IBM Token-Ring Network adapters.  A
Token-Ring Network Adapter cable is available from IBM as feature #2665.  It
provides a connection between the adapter and the receptacle.  That cable is
comprised of 150-ohm shielded twisted-pair wiring and an IBM Cabling System
connector.  Maximum:  Up to the maximum number of available adapter slots.
Prerequisite:  None.  Customer Set-up:  No.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable
Order:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. 6611 ETHERNET ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This adapter provides a single attachment to an a 10Mbps Ethernet link.  The
adapter supports Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple
Access/Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) local area network specifications.  The
adapter provides 802.3 Media Access Control (MAC).  A customer-supplied
Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) 10Base5 (thick) cable and a customer supplied
Ethernet transceiver are required to connect the Ethernet Adapter to the
Ethernet network.  Customer selection of an Ethernet transceiver with the
cable-matching function can provide connectivity to other Ethernet backbone
wiring options including 10Base2 (thin) and 10Base-T twisted pair.  Maximum: Up
to the maximum number of available adapter slots.  Prerequisite:  None.
Customer Set-up:  No.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. 6611 4-PORT SDLC ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This adapter provides up to 4 SDLC interfaces.  Support is provided for a
maximum of four EIA 232 electrical interfaces or two 1984 CCITT V.35 electrical
interfaces in any combination up to the maximum number (4) of ports on the
adapter.  The SDLC adapter supports data rates up to 19.2 Kbps for the EIA 232
interface and up to 64 Kbps for the V.35 interface.  The two CCITT V.35
interfaces are only supported on ports 0 and 1.  This adapter is provided to
support attachment of SNA/SDLC Physical Unit 2.0 devices such as the IBM 3174
Establishment Controller.  Multiple cables are required to connect the SDLC
Adapter to the appropriate link.  A Multiport Interface Cable (Feature #2723)
is available from IBM.  It provides a single connection between the 4-Port SDLC
Adapter and the electrical interfaces supported by this adapter.  IBM also
provides a Multiport EIA 232 Cable (Feature #2725) and a Multiport V.35 Cable
(Feature #2727).  They provide a connection between the Multiport Interface
Cable and the EIA 232 or V.35 interface of the customer-supplied DCE.  Maximum:
3 on the Network Processor 140; 6 on the Network Processor 170 Prerequisite:
None.  Customer Set-up:  No.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  (#2723)
6611 SDLC Adapter Interface Cable Maximum:  One cable per adapter.  Cable
Order:  (#2725)  6611 SDLC Adapter EIA 232/CCITT V.24 Cable Maximum:  Four
cables per (#2723) 6611 SDLC Adapter Interface Cable Cable Order:  (#2727)
6611 SDLC Adapter CCITT V.35 Cable Maximum:  Two cables per (#2723) 6611 SDLC
Adapter Interface Cable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. 6611 X.25 ADAPTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This feature provides a single attachment that enables the IBM 6611 Network
Processors to be a DTE device on an X.25 network via a customer-supplied modem
(DCE) that provides either an EIA 232 or a 1984 CCITT V.35 interface. The X.25
Adapter supports data rates of up to 19.2 Kbps for EIA 232 and up to 56 Kbps
for V.35.  The 6611 will only support the IP protocol on the X.25 interface.
An X.25 adapter cable is required to connect the X.25 Adapter to the X.25 DCE.
Two cables are available from IBM, and they support the two electrical
interfaces provided by the 6611 X.25 Adapter.  Maximum: 3 on the Network
Processor 140; 4 on the Network Processor 170 Prerequisite:  None. Customer
Set-up:  No.  Field Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  (#2977) EIA 232/CCITT
V.24 Cable - 3 Meter; Or (#2978) EIA 232/CCITT V.24 Cable - 6 Meter; Or (#2987)
CCITT V.35 Cable - 3 Meter; Or (#2988) CCITT V.35 Cable - 6 Meter.  Maximum:
One cable per adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. IBM 8240 FDDI CONCENTRATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM 8240 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Concentrator and two device
attachment modules attach up to 24 devices to a 100 megabits per second (Mbps)
network.  These devices may be on either the IBM Cabling System's shielded
twisted pair (STP) or on multimode optical fiber.  It is modular in design and
provides an orderly way to install, grow, and maintain an FDDI network while
providing greater bandwidth than is offered by existing local area networks
(LANs) such as Token-Ring and Ethernet.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   "Plug and Play" for easy installation and maintenance
    o   Supports the PS/2* FDDI adapters on both fiber and shielded twisted-pair
        cables.  The 8240 also supports the RISC/6000 fiber adapter announced
        January 21, 1992.
    o   "Hot pluggability", which allows for device expansion and improved
        network availability.  In addition, you can mix and match the Optical
        Fiber Device Attachment Modules and the Copper Device Attachment Modules.
    o   Standards-based SMT 6.2, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
        X3T9.5 and International Standards Organization (ISO) 9314, for
        interoperability within a multi-vendor network.
    o   Includes a Maintenance Facility that provides device customization,
        Remote Program Update, and LAN segment topology via a user-friendly
        graphical interface.  Also included is an FDDI SNMP Proxy Agent Program
        which is supported by the AIX Netview/6000 network management system.

The 8240 is a "Plug and Play" concentrator that allows customers to be
productive quickly and easily on a high-performance 100Mbps FDDI network.
Further customization is achieved by a user-friendly Maintenance Facility which
also provides a graphical user interface to display all of the devices attached
to the 8240 and to the FDDI segment.

Customers can now achieve increased bandwidth along with higher network
availability than existing LANs such as Token-Ring and Ethernet.  Customers can
also easily migrate servers and requestors individually to a 100Mbps networking
environment.

The technology within the 8240 provides improvement of network availability as
a result of automatic reconfiguration of the network.  When a network link
failure occurs, the problem can automatically be isolated, bypassed, and
reported, and quickly repaired, resulting in less network downtime.

The 8240 is both versatile and robust.  As a stand-alone device, it can be used
to create a small, dedicated, high-performance LAN for specialized communities
of users or for a network test bed.  As the number of users grows, integration
into the FDDI network is achieved via easy-to-install device attachment
modules.

As a backbone unit within an FDDI establishment network, the 8240 can be used
to attach high-performance workstations and other devices such as FDDI to
Token-Ring and FDDI to Ethernet bridges.  The FDDI network thus provides a
migration for additional growth and capacity for new users and applications
along with greater drive distance for LAN extension.  Here, too,
easy-to-install attachment modules allow the customer the flexibility to grow
and maintain the network.

Customers can keep their investment in their current workstations and devices
while using the IBM Cabling System with IBM adapters and the 8240.  The 8240
provides ease of expandability and flexibility of attaching copper and fiber
media to the workstation.  Since FDDI supports industry-standard applications
and protocols such as IEEE 802.2, customers can also easily migrate their
current applications to a 100Mbps FDDI network.  In addition, widely used
protocols such as Novell are also supported.

The 8240 is based on the ANSI FDDI Station Management (SMT) 6.2 standard, thus
providing connection and operation in a 100Mbps FDDI network with
standard-based equipment from other vendors.  The 8240 allows the customer to
configure the network into subnetworks for specific applications such as
transaction processing.  With the improved network availability achieved as a
result of automatic network reconfiguration, downtime can be reduced and
problems can be isolated and repaired more quickly, without impacting overall
network operations.

The 8240 can operate as a dual-attached, single-attached, or dual-homed
concentrator.  As a dual-attached concentrator, it can be attached to a primary
and secondary ring.  The primary ring transmits the data, while the secondary
ring provides backup for the primary ring.  FDDI also provides the capability
to structure primary and alternate path connections to attaching devices such
as the 8240, improving the overall reliability, availability, and
serviceability of the network.  It allows the construction of hierarchical
topologies by "cascading" several levels deep and by "dual homing" (i.e.,
attaching an 8240 to each of two other 8240s) to provide optimum network
availability in case of a bypassed network failure. Diagnostic information is
also provided automatically both at the 8240 front panel and at the Maintenance
Facility workstation to enable the user to better maintain and manage the 8240.

Network management will be provided via an FDDI Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) Proxy Agent Program.  This agent will convert SMT to SNMP
protocols for use by AIX Netview/6000 or any original equipment manufacturer
(OEM) SNMP-based network management system.  The SMT protocol will be based on
SMT 6.2, and the Maintenance Facility will provide Remote Program Update
capability for 8240 support of future levels of SMT.

IBM intends to provide an FDDI LAN Management application on AIX NetView/6000
for graphical display of topology information provided by the IBM FDDI SNMP
Proxy Agent Program.  This application will allow the user to see changes and
initiate management functions dynamically.

MODEL 001 For U.S. non-Federal Government and World Trade and includes the main
chassis assembly, one Concentrator Control Module and six Slot Covers.

MODEL 002 Same as Model 001 except for use by the U.S. Federal Government.

The 8240 is designed for Customer Setup (CSU).  Two persons are required to
install the 8240.

The IBM 8240 FDDI Concentrator will allow workstations and other FDDI devices
to attach to a 100Mbps network.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  482.6 mm (19.0 inches)
    Depth:  442.0 mm (17.4 inches)
    Height: 443.7 mm (17.5 inches)
    Weight:
        25.0 kg (56.0 pounds) without modules
        50.0 kg (112.0 pounds) fully configured
    Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
    Wet Bulb:  27C
    Calorific Value:  688 kcal/hour or 2,730 Btu/hour
    Electrical Power:  0.8 kVA
    Capacity of Exhaust:  2.8 cubic meters/minute
    Noise Level:  <70 dB

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The Concentrator Control Module (Part Number 02F9703) is
shipped with each 8240.  The Ring Attachment Module (Feature Number 9773) must
be ordered to provide multimode connection to the FDDI network.  For
workstation attachment to the 8240, order either the Optical Fiber Device
Attachment Module (Feature Number 9783) or the Copper Device Attachment Module
(Feature Number 9793).

Each attachment module provides connection for four devices.  The 8240 can
accommodate any combination of up to six 9783 or 9793 attachment modules for a
total of twenty-four connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. RING ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  02F9773

Feature Code 9773

Bus Master  No

This feature is required for the 8240 and provides multimode attachment to the
FDDI network.  Compatibility Conflicts:  None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
Limitations:  Consult the "IBM FDDI Network Introduction and Planning Guide,"
(GA27-3892) for wiring rules.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order:  Consult
the "Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guide," (GA27-3943).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. OPTICAL FIBER DEVICE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  02F9783

Feature Code 9783

Bus Master  No

FC 9783 and FC 9793 function the same, except for the media in which they
connect.  Each Device Attachment Module has four FDDI master ports for
attachment of up to four devices.  The 8240 supports any combination of up to
six Optical Fiber or Copper Device Attachment Modules for a total of
twenty-four devices attached to the FDDI network.  Compatibility Conflicts:
None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Limitations:  Consult the "IBM FDDI Network
Introduction and Planning Guide," (GA27-3892) for wiring rules.  Field
Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  Consult the "Optical Fiber Planning and
Installation Guide," (GA27-3943).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. COPPER DEVICE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  02F9793

Feature Code 9793

Bus Master  No

FC 9783 and FC 9793 function the same, except for the media in which they
connect.  Each Device Attachment Module has four FDDI master ports for
attachment of up to four devices.  The 8240 supports any combination of up to
six Optical Fiber or Copper Device Attachment Modules for a total of
twenty-four devices attached to the FDDI network.  Compatibility Conflicts:
None.  Customer Setup:  Yes.  Limitations:  Consult the "IBM FDDI Network
Introduction and Planning Guide," (GA27-3892) for wiring rules.  Field
Installable:  Yes.  Cable Order:  Consult the "Optical Fiber Planning and
Installation Guide," (GA27-3943).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. RJ-45 LOBE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  74F4040

Feature Code 5502

Bus Master  No

Provides attachment for from 0 to 20 workstations with RJ-45 connectors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. IBM 16/4 8230 UNSHIELDED MEDIA FILTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  93F2976

Feature Code 2976

Bus Master  No

One 16/4 8230 Unshielded Media Filter is required on all 8230s that have a
workstation attached via Unshielded Twisted Pair Media that is operating at 16
or 4 Mbps. The filter reduces EM emissions to levels that are acceptable under
national emissions regulations.  Maximum Number of Features: One per 8230 base
unit.  Prerequisites: For Family One Adapters an updated copy of the Diagnostic
Diskette and for Family Two Adapters an updated copy of the Options Diskette.
Corequisites: None.  Compatibility Conflicts: None. Customer Set-up: Yes.
Limitations: None.  Field Installable: Yes.  Cable Order: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. IBM 16/4 UNSHIELDED MEDIA LOBE ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  74F4125

Feature Code 4125

Bus Master  No

The purpose of this feature is to provide attachment to the token-ring network
of any device with a 16 or 4 Mbps Token-Ring Network Adapter via an RJ-11
connector. This new feature will allow operation of 16 Mbps on Unshielded
Twisted Pair (UTP) Media with more flexibility of cabling options than with the
current RJ-45 Lobe Attachment Module (LAM).  Corequisites:  The 8230 Model 002
base unit.  The 16/4 Mbps UTP Media Filters are required on their appropriate
devices when using this feature.  Compatibility Conflicts: This feature cannot
be used on the same 8230 base unit with an existing Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)
or RJ-45 LAM.  Customer Set-up:  Yes. Cable Order:  The required cables are
hard wired to the Lobe Attachment Module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. 7855 IBM V.32 MODEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 7855 V.32 modem supports up to 12,000 bps (bits per second) duplex data
rate capability in synchronous data transmission and up to 19.2 Kbps in
asynchronous data transmission over the Public Switched Telephone Networks
(PSTNs) or over Leased Line, provided the line quality is adequate.  Fall back
data rates are:  9.6, 7.2, 4.8, 2.4, and 1.2 Kbps.

The IBM 7855 V.32 modem can be ordered in stand alone or rack-mounted version,
the rack-mounted pack fits the IBM 7866 IBM 7866-01 Modem Housing.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   User productivity can be increased through faster transmission and
        easier operation at a lower cost.
    o   The IBM 7855 V.32 modem is a key element in providing business
        solutions to transfer large files; to access several servers; to
        poll, from a host computer, multiple sites in a given time period;
        or to access some private or public (country-dependent) X.25
        Networks through PSTNs.
    o   Compatibility with current products and compliance with international
        standards help customers with a smooth migration path for managing
        their network growth without equipment obsolescence.
    o   Faster data rate and automated functions are available without
        immediate replacement of the installed base.
    o   The rack-mounted version save floor space and power consumption
        compared to the stand alone and can be plugged in the same enclosure
        as the 7868 or the 5822 packs

The function of this modem is to provide the interface between a data terminal
equipment (DTE) and a voice grade or equivalent communication line (normally a
telephone line) for data transmission.  This modem is designed to communicate
with a DTE complying with  a standard EIA-232-D interface.  This interface may
also be used to modify the configuration setting of the local or remote modem
or to invoke tests of the modem, communication link, and remote modem.  These
tests may be invoked via front panel controls from the 5869 PKD for the
rack-mounted pack or from the the DTE.  The modem's autodial feature allows
dialing from a DTE keyboard; or automatically under software control from a
Personal Computer or Personal System, IBM Communication Controller, 9370
system, AS/400 or RISC Systems/6000.

The IBM 7855 V.32 modem:

    o   Connects telecommunications lines to Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
    o   Is a microprocessor-based asynchronous or synchronous modem
    o   Supports duplex data transfer up to 9600 bps (12000 bps on good
        lines) and 19200bps for compressible asynchronous data.
    o   Operates over switched (dial) and on  2-wire or 4-wire leased or
        privately-owned telephone lines.

and includes:

    o   Synchronous and asynchronous command set support based on CCITT
        V.25 bis recommendation.
    o   Enhanced Attention (AT) command set support in asynchronous mode
    o   Error checking and retransmitting during asynchronous operation.
    o   Data compression when used in asynchronous mode.
    o   Support of fixed DTE speeds while the modem-to-modem speed changes
        (for asynchronous operation).
    o   Support of an external automatic calling unit interface (for U.S and
        Canada only).
    o   LPDA-2 call-out and disconnect commands
    o   Remote configuration support from local modem or DTE under password
        control.
    o   When used on Leased Line, in case of line failure, the IBM 7855 V.32
        modem is able to automatically dial a pre-stored number to
        reestablish the communication link through the Public Switched
        Telephone Network, and to automatically come back to the leased
        line operation after failure recovery.  The Switched Network Back
        -Up function and the automatic return to Leased Line operation
        facility are optionally available depending on the configuration
        setting.

GENERAL FUNCTIONS:

    o   Compatible with CCITT recommendation V.32
    o   Compatible with Bell 212A and 103 standard modems
    o   Compatible with CCITT recommendation V.22 bis.
    o   Compatible with CCITT recommendation V.22
    o   Compatible with CCITT recommendation V.25 bis.
    o   Compatible with CCITT recommendation V.42 providing Error checking
        asynchronous operation compatible with the class 4 of Microcom
        Networking Protocol
    o   Data compression compatible with the class 5 of Microcom Networking
        Protocol
    o   Speed buffering to allow the attached DTE speed to remain constant
        regardless of the modem-to-modem connection speed
    o   Automatically selects V.32, 212A/103 or V.22 bis operation to match
        the remote modem when connection is established.
    o   Modem configuration setting, under password control, from the
        local or remote modem operator panel, from the 5869 PKD for the
        rack-mounted pack or from the DTEs.
    o   Conforms to EIA-232-D
    o   Supports the full AT (Attention) command set.
    o   Supports the LPDA-2 call out and disconnect commands.
    o   Automatic speed and character format detection in asynchronous mode.
        DTE speeds of 75, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200,
        9600, and 19200 bps are automatically detected.
    o   Automatic adaptive equalization when operating at telecommunication
        line speeds of 1200 bps and faster.
    o   Automatic or manual answer capability
    o   Automatic or manual dialing capability
    o   Supports attachment of an external automatic calling unit via
        modular connector.
    o   Dial directory capability
    o   Tone or pulse or adaptive dialing
    o   Built-in speaker for aural monitoring on the Model 010 or Model 01Z
    o   Multiple level directory password function enhances security

DIAGNOSTICS:

    o   Local loop tests (V.54 loop 3)
    o   Local loop self tests
    o   Remote loop tests (V.54 loop 2)
    o   Remote loop self tests
    o   Internal diagnostics
        Power on self test
        Speaker and ring tests for the stand alone and auto-answer test for
        the rack-mounted version.
        Self test with and without cable wrapped

CERTIFICATIONS:

    o   The IBM 7855-10 V.32 Modem is Registered as class B by the Federal
        Communication Commission (FCC)
    o   Canadian Department of Communication (DOC) registered.
    o   Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed
    o   Canadian Standards Association (CSA) certified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. 5853 MODEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 5853 Modem is a stand-alone unit transmitting data, on the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN) in full duplex mode, at the data rate of 0 to 300 bps
in asynchronous mode and at the data rate of 1200 and 2400 bps in synchronous
and asynchronous mode.  Automatic dialing can be controlled from the Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) via either the IBM, the Attention or the V.25 bis
command sets.  Compatibility with an 801-type autocall unit is also provided.
This modem provides error checking and retransmission capability, using MNP* up
to the level 3. *MNP is a trademark of Microcom.

The 5853 Modem provides no Communication Network Management (CNM) functions.

The 5853 Modem is a 2400 bps modem for Switched Network.  It transmits data
from 0 to 300 bps in asynchronous mode and at 1200 and 2400 bps in synchronous
and asynchronous mode.  It operates full duplex according to:

    o   BELL 103 protocol at data rates of 0 to 300 bps.
    o   BELL 212A protocol at data rates of 1200 and 300 bps.
    o   CCITT V.22bis protocol at data rates of 2400 and 1200 bps.

This modem allows performance of auto-call on the Public Switched Network using
the IBM, Attention, and V.25 bis command sets.  The 5853 Modem also provides an
interface to an 801-type external Auto Call Unit (Not supplied by IBM).  This
modem is also equipped with error checking and retransmitting capability in
asynchronous mode using up to level 3 of Microcom Networking Protocol.  It is
classified as Data Communication Equipment (DCE) and functions with Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) utilizing the CCITT V.24/V.28 (EIA RS-232-C/RS-334)
interface.  As such, it can be attached to DTEs supporting that kind of modems.

The modem is attached to the DTE with a cable provided by the DTE.  This cable
must be terminated at the modem end with a standard, male, 25-pin, D-shell
connector.

Through testing, IBM has verified operation of the 5853 Modem with the
following IBM DTEs:  3101, 3161, 3705, 3720, 3725, 3728, S/1, S/36, S/38, IBM
PC and IBM PS/2 Model 30 and 50, ROLM CBX II, 9750.

Automatic/Manual Dialing Data transmission over the public switched network is
initiated after a communication path is established.  Manual or automatic
dialing may be used to establish the communication path for the 5853 Modem.

    o   Manual calls may be initiated by the DTE operator using the Data/
        Talk switch on the modem and a telephone set connected into the
        rear of the modem.  This telephone set must be a standard Bell
        series 500/2500 or equivalent.
    o   Automatic calls may be initiated by the DTE via the RS-232
        interface.  Refer to the Software Requirement section below.
    o   Automatic calls may be initiated by the DTE via an Automatic Call
        Unit (ACU).  This ACU must be:
        -   Functionally equivalent to the Bell type 801C ACU.
        -   Equipped with an 8-pin modular jack interface to attach the
            5853 modem.

The ACU is not provided with the 5853 modem.  The cable to connect the ACU to
the 5853 is provided with the 5853 modem.

It is recommended that the user have available an additional phone at the
opposite end of the switched network to assist in network problem
determination.

Software required to operate the 5853 Modem is dependent on the specific
application of the modem.  IBM systems S/370, 9370, S/1, S/36, S/38 with 3705,
3720 or 3725 Communication Controllers or Integrated Communications Adapters
allowing Half-duplex or Full-duplex synchronous transmission over switched or
leased lines can use the 5853 Modem and no unique software is required.
Current IBM system softwares, including ACF/VTAM with ACF/NCP or ACF/VTAM-E,
also support manual dial and autocall via a RS-366 Autocall interface with an
ACU.  Autocall via the RS-232 data interface is supported on the IBM PC and IBM
PS/2 using either IBM or Attention command set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. IBM 8209 ENHANCED ETHERNET ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  74F8629

Feature Code 5156

Bus Master  No

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Enhanced Ethernet (1) Attachment Module
interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network and an Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
802.3/ISO 802.3 Local Area Network.  The Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module
provides the same function as the original Ethernet Attachment Module plus it
offers enhanced network management on the IBM Token-Ring portion of the
network.  Specifically the Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module offers Ring
Error Monitor, a Configuration Report Server, and Ethernet LLC support for
linking with IBM LAN Manager and IBM LAN Network Manager programs.  The
Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module also provides filtering on both source and
destination addresses, address mapping between LANs, locally administered
addresses and IPX support. (1) Ethernet is a Trademark of XEROX, Inc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Bridges 4 or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network to Ethernet Version 2
        or IEEE 802.3/ISO 802.3 Networks.
    o   Provides Ring Error Monitor Management Server for Reporting IBM
        Token-Ring MAC Frame Error Conditions.
    o   Provides a Configuration Report Server for IBM Token-Ring Networks.
    o   Features Ethernet LLC Support for IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network
        Manager allowing multiple IBM Token-Ring Networks to be managed
        across an Ethernet Backbone.
    o   Filtering Capability on both Source and Destination Addresses.
    o   Compatible with IBM LAN Manager or IBM LAN Network Manager.
    o   IPX support for Nowell Netware products.

The IBM 8209 Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module provides improved IBM
Token-Ring Network Management.  Ring Error Monitor is provided so that
Token-Ring MAC frame errors are reported to the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The 8209 LAN
Bridge uses a feature called the Configuration Report Server to report IBM
Token-Ring Network configuration changes to IBM LAN Manager or IBM LAN Network
Manager.  With this customers can determine what devices are on the IBM
Token-Ring Network through IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager. Ethernet
LLC support allows for IBM LAN Manager programs to link to the Bridge to
provide customers the ability to manage multiple IBM Token-Ring Networks across
an Ethernet backbone with one IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager.
Filtering on both source and destination addresses has been added so that
customers can more efficiently control the information to be transmitted across
the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The remaining functions of the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge remain
unchanged.

The IBM 8209 Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module will support up to a combined
total of 2048 entries in the Token-Ring and Ethernet address data bases.  The
maximum number of Token-Ring data base entries is limited to 1024.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. IBM 8209 TOKEN-RING ATTACHMENT MODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Marketing Part Number  74F8630

Feature Code 8630

Bus Master  No

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module connects two
local IBM Token-Ring Networks into one logical ring.  The connected rings can
be any combination of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Networks.  The
Token-Ring Attachment Module utilizes the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge Base Unit thus
providing this function in a plug and play unit with no keyboard or display.

The IBM 8209 Token-Ring Attachment Module provides the same network management
and similar filtering capabilities as the local IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program Version 2.2.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Compatible with IBM Token-Ring Bridge Program Version 2.2 (local
        Bridging only)
    o   Filtering on Both Source and Destination Addresses
    o   Capability to Write Your Own Filters
    o   Same Network Management as Local IBM Token-Ring Network Program
        Version 2.2
    o   Plug and Play Configuration provides ease of installation.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module offers high
reliability and availability for a local Token-Ring to Token-Ring bridge.  It
is easy to configure and is rack shelf- mountable enabling customers to grow
their LAN environment into new areas.  The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the
Token-Ring Attachment Module is compatible with the IBM Token-Ring Network
Bridge Program Version 2.2 allowing customers to add to their installed base.

This function is provided in response to customer requirements from GUIDE and
SHARE User Groups and from direct customer input.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module provides the same
network management capabilities as the local portion of the IBM Token-Ring
Network Bridge Program Version 2.2.  In addition, the IBM 8209 Token-Ring
Attachment Module allows customers to filter on both source and destination
addresses as well as to write their own filters.  This enables the customer to
control information transmitted over the bridge and to tailor network
management information for the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. 8209 LAN BRIDGE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network and an
Ethernet* Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 Local Area Network.  Systems and workstations
with compatible protocols such as TCP/IP, OSI, SNA, NETBIOS, or IEEE 802.2 can
communicate across this connection.  The IBM 8209 handles all necessary
conversion to route information between the dissimilar LANs.

Token-Ring stations view the 8209 as a bridge to another Token-Ring source
routing bridge.  To Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations, the 8209 LAN Bridge is
functionally transparent.

Novell's Netware protocols (IPX) is supported. * Ethernet is a Trademark of
XEROX, Inc.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge when configured with the Enhanced Ethernet module will
support up to a combined total of 2,048 entries in the Token-Ring and Ethernet
address data bases.  The maximum number of Token-Ring data base entries is
limited to 1,024.

The 8209 LAN Bridge requires customer supplied cables for connection to the
LANs.  Refer to Cable Orders under the Planning Information section for
specifics.  It is recommended the installation of the cable plant for
connection to the Token-Ring Multistation Access Unit (MAU) and the Ethernet
transceiver tap be installed by a qualified installer/technician.

The interconnected LANs and LAN Stations must be compliant with the following
applicable specifications in order to correctly operate with the 8209.

    IBM Token-Ring Network
      Operational MODE 1 - IEEE 802.5 and 802.2
      Operational MODE 2 - IEEE 802.5 and 802.2
    Ethernet
      Operational MODE 1 - "The Ethernet:  A Local Area Network Data Link
      Layer and Physical Layer Specification Version 2," dated September
      1983, and issued by Digital Equipment, Intel, and Xerox Corporations.
      Operational MODE 2 - IEEE 802.3 and 802.2

HIGHLIGHTS

    Bridges 4 or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network to Ethernet Version 2 or
    IEEE 802.3 LANs
    Supports Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 simultaneously
    Appears as a source routing Token-Ring bridge to Token-Ring stations
    Functionally transparent to Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations
    Bridge configurations allow multiple protocols (TCP/IP, OSI, SNA,
    NETBIOS, IEEE 802.2 and IPX)
    Compatible with IBM LAN Manager program
    Suitable for tabletop or rack shelf-mount.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network with an
Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 Local Area Network.  The 8209 handles the
conversion necessary to route information between the dissimilar LANs.  IBM and
non-IBM systems and workstations using this connection require compatible
protocols such as TCP/IP, SNA, NETBIOS, IPX or IEEE 802.2 in order to
communicate.

Basic bridge configuration may be done using switches on the attachment module
or via a utility program shipped with the bridge.  Additional configuration
must be done with the utility.

The IBM 8209 bridges the LAN physical layer differences by providing two LAN
ports, one Token-Ring Network, and the other Ethernet/IEEE 802.3.  The
Token-Ring port operates at either 4 or 16 Mbps.  When the 16 Mbps rate is
selected, Early Token Release will be enabled, unless specifically disabled by
the customer using the 8209 Utility program.  When the 4 Mbps rate is selected,
the Early Token Release function is not supported.

The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port attaches to either an Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
802.3 LAN.  The IBM 8209 accommodates these two CSMA/CD LANs through two modes
of operation.  Mode priority of 1 is used for Ethernet Version 2, while Mode
priority of 2 is used for 802.3 LANs.  In order to support both types of LANs,
an additional setting can be used for automatic mode detection.  The mode of
operation can be determined by configuration switches, or via a utility
program.  With the bridge set for Automatic Mode Detection, the 8209 will
examine the data stream and dynamically adapt to the correct operational mode.
This allows both modes to be used simultaneously.  When going from a Token-Ring
to an Ethernet LAN, if the destination address of the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
attached station is not in the 8209 transparent bridge database, the correct
format cannot be dynamically determined.  In this case, the 8209 will perform
format conversion based on the setting of the "Mode 1/Mode 2 Priority
Operation."

The 8209 LAN Bridge maintains two data bases.  One contains station addresses
for Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations; the other contains Token-Ring station
addresses and routing information.  The Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 data base consists
of static and dynamic entries.  The Token-Ring data base, however, contains
only dynamic entries.  Static entries differ from dynamic entries in that they
are configured, loaded, and retained in non-volatile RAM.  Dynamic entries are
created as part of the IBM 8209's "learning process" and are lost when power is
removed, or when aged based on a configurable time period.

OPERATIONAL MODE 1 MODE 1 is used to bridge Token-Ring to Ethernet Version 2
LANs.  Above the physical layer, Token-Ring and Ethernet Version 2 differ in
Media Access Control (MAC) and user Datagram services.  The Token-Ring MAC
layer complies with IEEE 802.5 while Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple
Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD) and does not specify an 802.2 Logical Link
Control (LLC) interface.  However, a method has been developed to transport LLC
based protocols on Ethernet Version 2.  A type code of '80D5' is used by the
PC-RT, OS/2 EE and LSP to indicate an LLC based protocol.  This means that in
MODE 1, the 8209 will support two different forms of conversion; one for TCP/IP
and the other for LLC based protocol transport to/from an Ethernet Version 2
LAN.  For TCP/IP, a Token-Ring to Ethernet Version 2 conversion will result in
the 802.2 LLC fields being stripped from the frame.  For the '80D5' LLC frame,
these LLC fields will be copied into the Ethernet frames data field.

All Ethernet Version 2 frames forwarded to the Token-Ring, with the exception
of LLC protocol frames, will be transmitted using the SNAP header, thus all
protocols can be supported in a backbone configuration.

The preceeding statement, relative to protocols supported, is applicable to
'single or odd' numbers of 8209 environments only (non-backbone).  When using
'paired' 8209's through a Token-Ring or Ethernet backbone configuration, the
TCP/IP or non-TCP/IP protocol conversion becomes irrelevant because whatever
MODE 1 conversion is done by the first 8209 will be reversed by the second 8209
of the backbone. A slightly more complicated process is used to convert and
forward Ethernet frames onto the Token-Ring network.  The 8209 retrieves
Token-Ring routing information from its data base and inserts it into the
frame.  For TCP/IP, the Sub-Network Access Protocol (SNAP) format is used in
the 802.5 frame. For LLC based protocols the 'standard' 802.2 LLC fields are
carried forward to the 802.5 frame.

MODE 2 interconnects Token-Ring and IEEE 802.3 LANs.  This mode provides IEEE
802.5 (Token-Ring) / IEEE 802.3 MAC level frame conversion.  Protocol layers
above the MAC are transparent to the 8209 LAN Bridge and their data units are
passed through without modification. SNA, NETBIOS, IPX or IEEE 802.2 sessions
between stations on the different LANs are also supported in MODE 2.  (However,
MODE 1 could also be used if Ethernet Version 2 is required for other reasons.)

The 8209 LAN Bridge transparently handles conversions for routing information
between the two LANs, regardless of the operational mode (MODE 1 or 2).  To
stations on the Token-Ring Network, the 8209 appears as a source routing bridge
to another Token-Ring. A station on Token-Ring uses source routing to
communicate with any station on Ethernet/IEEE 802.3.  The 8209 is functionally
transparent to stations on Ethernet/IEEE 802.3, appearing as one or more native
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 stations.  Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 attached stations can
communicate with Token-Ring attached stations as if they were on the same LAN.

After power on initialization, the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 data base is initialized
with static entries.  The 8209 enters the learning state, listens to all frames
on the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port and saves each unique source address in the
data base.  While in this state, the 8209 LAN Bridge will not forward any
frames.  After a few seconds the bridge leaves the learning state and begins
normal operations.  During normal operations the 8209 LAN Bridge updates the
data base when a new source address is detected in an Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
frame.

The Token-Ring data base is dynamically built during normal operations. Entries
will be added to the Token-Ring data base only for stations with frames that
are forwarded on the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port. The 8209 LAN Bridge provides for
a combined total of 2,048 data base entries.

The Token-Ring data base portion of this total may be from 1 to 1,024.  The
number of entries in the Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 data base, however, may range from
1 to 2,047.  An Aging Timer will determine how long inactive Dynamic Entries
will remain in the data base.  Static data base entries are not subject to
removal by the Aging Timer.

Configurable filters are employed to reduce forwarding of unnecessary traffic.
For example, filters may be set up so that only TCP/IP or NETBIOS traffic is
forwarded to either port.  This means that even though general broadcast frames
are received from either port, they will be discarded if not identified as
TCP/IP or NETBIOS.  Filtering improves LAN performance for the LANs attached to
the 8209 by ensuring that no degradation of the attached LANs occurs due to
unnecessary traffic.

The 8209 LAN Bridge ensures that no traffic is held in the bridge longer than
the maximum transit time.  If due to network congestion, the 8209 is unable to
forward traffic and the traffic is held longer than permitted, it will be
discarded.  This function is useful for those high level protocols that
generally retransmit a message unless an acknowledgement is received within a
certain time.

Each 8209 LAN Bridge has a unique MAC address assigned for each port.  The IEEE
universal address administration process will be used to assign the MAC
addresses.

The 8209 LAN Bridge is physically packaged in a table top configuration
suitable for stacking or rack shelf mounting in industry standard racks.  It is
designed, manufactured and packaged to be easily set up and configured by the
customer.  The 8209 LAN Bridge is functionally packaged.  The base unit
contains Token-Ring functions and support for a single attachment to a
Token-Ring LAN.  The feature code specifications under the 8209 provide for two
types of LAN attachments:  An IBM Token-Ring connected to an Ethernet Version 2
or 802.3 LAN via the 8209 (#5156).  The second attachment is for an IBM
Token-Ring connected to an IBM Token-Ring via the 8209 (#8630).  One of these
feature codes must be specified when ordering the 8209.

In most environments LAN Management functions and configuration customization
are not required to install the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The 8209 shipped
configuration adapts itself to the installed environment.

The 8209 LAN Bridge is shipped with configuration variables set as follows:
Operational Mode:  Automatic Mode Selection Enabled with Mode 1 Priority

    Operation
    Token-Ring Speed:   4 Mbps with Early Token Release Disabled
    Token-Ring LAN Number:  One
    Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN Number:  4080
    Initial Bridge Number:  Zero

The basic configuration uses switches, advanced configurations use the utility
program.  To accommodate additional and more complex environments, two
provisions are available.  They are hardware configuration switches on the
attachment module and an 8209 configuration utility program.

The following options can be selected by hardware switches:

    Enable/Disable Automatic Mode Selection
    Mode 1/Mode 2 Priority Operation
    4 or 16 Mbps Token-Ring
    Initial Bridge Number (0, 1, 2, or 3)
    Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN Number.
    The Automatic Mode Selection function allows the 8209 to support both
    Ethernet Version 2 and IEEE 802.3 (Mode 1 and Mode 2) at the same time.
    The determination for mode of operation is done dynamically.

The 8209 provides Token-Ring Network LAN Reporting Mechanism, Ring Parameter
Server, and LAN Bridge Server, Ring Error Monitor and Configuration Report
Server functions (as defined in the "IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture
Reference," SC30-3374).  The 8209, acting as a logical LAN management agent on
the Token-Ring Network, will:

    Keep and report statistical frame traffic information
    Accept and respond to requests for Bridge and End Station status
    Accept and respond to commands which change Bridge configuration
    parameters
    Report Ring Error conditions
    Report configuration changes.

A utility program is shipped with the 8209.  This utility runs under either PC
DOS or OS/2 EE in an IBM PC or PS/2.  The utility, acting as the controlling
LAN Manager, allows the customer to set up filters, static data base entries,
ring numbers, bridge number, and timers which control operation of the 8209 LAN
Bridge.  The PC or PS/2 communicates the configuration parameters to the 8209
over the Token-Ring or Ethernet.  The 8209 Utility

Program allows the customer to examine and modify the following parameters:

    Spanning Tree Parameters
    Operational Mode
    Enable/Disable Early Token Release
    Filter Definitions
    Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Static Database Entries
    Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Port Statistics
    Bridge Number
    Token-Ring LAN Number
    Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN Number
    Plus all the functions listed under "controlling LAN Manager".

In addition to configuration, the 8209 Utility Program provides a means to
collect Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port statistics which are gathered by the 8209.

The LAN MANAGER, acting as the controlling LAN Manager, can set/reset these
configuration parameters:

    Notification interval for performance statistics
    Bridge internal status
    Route active status
    Hop count
    Ring number
    Bridge number
    Enabled functional addresses
    Reporting functional addresses.

The LAN Manager will be installed on a Token-Ring station and will establish a
link to the 8209 LAN Bridge in order to communicate these management functions.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  445mm (17.5 inches)
    Depth:  533mm (21.0 inches)
    Height:  133.35mm (5.25 inches)
    Weight:  9.1kg (20 pounds)

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module connects two
local IBM Token-Ring Networks into one logical ring.  The connected rings can
be any combination of 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Networks.  The
Token-Ring Attachment Module utilizes the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge Base Unit thus
providing this function in a plug and play unit with no keyboard or display.

The IBM 8209 Token-Ring Attachment Module provides the same network management
and similar filtering capabilities as the local IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge
Program Version 2.2.

HIGHLIGHTS Compatible with IBM Token-Ring Bridge Program Version 2.2 (local
Bridging only) Filtering on Both Source and Destination Addresses Capability to
Write Your Own Filters Same Network Management as Local IBM Token-Ring Network
Program Version 2.2 Plug and Play Configuration provides ease of installation.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module offers high
reliability and availability for a local Token-Ring to Token-Ring bridge.  It
is easy to configure and is rack shelf- mountable enabling customers to grow
their LAN environment into new areas.  The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the
Token-Ring Attachment Module is compatible with the IBM Token-Ring Network
Bridge Program Version 2.2 allowing customers to add to their installed base.

This function is provided in response to customer requirements from GUIDE and
SHARE User Groups and from direct customer input.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Token-Ring Attachment Module provides the same
network management capabilities as the local portion of the IBM Token-Ring
Network Bridge Program Version 2.2.  In addition, the IBM 8209 Token-Ring
Attachment Module allows customers to filter on both source and destination
addresses as well as to write their own filters.  This enables the customer to
control information transmitted over the bridge and to tailor network
management information for the network.

The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge with the Enhanced Ethernet (1) Attachment Module
interconnects an IBM Token-Ring Network and an Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
802.3/ISO 802.3 Local Area Network.  The Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module
provides the same function as the original Ethernet Attachment Module plus it
offers enhanced network management on the IBM Token-Ring portion of the
network.  Specifically the Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module offers Ring
Error Monitor, a Configuration Report Server, and Ethernet LLC support for
linking with IBM LAN Manager and IBM LAN Network Manager programs.  The
Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module also provides filtering on both source and
destination addresses, address mapping between LANs, locally administered
addresses and IPX support. (1) Ethernet is a Trademark of XEROX, Inc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    Bridges 4 or 16 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network to Ethernet Version 2 or IEEE
    802.3/ISO 802.3 Networks.
    Provides Ring Error Monitor Management Server for Reporting IBM Token-
    Ring MAC Frame Error Conditions.
    Provides a Configuration Report Server for IBM Token-Ring Networks.
    Features Ethernet LLC Support for IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network
    Manager allowing multiple IBM Token-Ring Networks to be managed
    across an Ethernet Backbone.
    Filtering Capability on both Source and Destination Addresses.
    Compatible with IBM LAN Manager or IBM LAN Network Manager.
    IPX support for Nowell Netware products.

The IBM 8209 Enhanced Ethernet Attachment Module provides improved IBM
Token-Ring Network Management.  Ring Error Monitor is provided so that
Token-Ring MAC frame errors are reported to the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The 8209 LAN
Bridge uses a feature called the Configuration Report Server to report IBM
Token-Ring Network configuration changes to IBM LAN Manager or IBM LAN Network
Manager.  With this customers can determine what devices are on the IBM
Token-Ring Network through IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager.

Ethernet LLC support allows for IBM LAN Manager programs to link to the Bridge
to provide customers the ability to manage multiple IBM Token-Ring Networks
across an Ethernet backbone with one IBM LAN Manager/IBM LAN Network Manager.
Filtering on both source and destination addresses has been added so that
customers can more efficiently control the information to be transmitted across
the 8209 LAN Bridge.  The remaining functions of the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge remain
unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. 8228 TOKEN-RING NETWORK MULTISTATION ACCESS UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Attaches up to eight devices into the IBM Token-Ring Network. The access unit
provides for the attachment of up to eight devices to the network.  Cables from
the attaching devices are simply plugged into the unit.  An access unit can be
interconnected to other access units to form larger networks.  The unit can
automatically bypass an attached device by reacting to the presence or absence
of a signal from the device.

The access unit is designed for installation in a standard 19-inch rack (not
available from IBM) or in a component housing.  The component housing is
available as an optional accessory, and is required for installation of the
access unit on a wall or table top.  A cable bracket is included with the
access unit, and is used to organize and identify the cables attached to a rack
mounted access unit.

The starter kits provide the necessary hardware (excluding workstations) and
software to establish a four workstation token-ring network.  The kits include
an access unit (model 001), housing, four adapters, four adapter cables, four
9.1m (30 ft.) cable assemblies, four copies each of the IBM Local Area Network
Support Program and the IBM PC Local Area Network Program, and an Installation
Guide.  The kits are designed to help the new user quickly setup a small,
expandable pilot network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. 8230 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK CONTROLLER ACCESS UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit is an intelligent access
concentrator which allows connection of from 0 to 80 workstations, via
pluggable lobe attachment modules (LAMS), to a Token-Ring Network. The LAMs
come in two versions, one accepts IBM Cabling System (ICS) connectors and the
other accepts RJ-45 connectors. The 8230 is switchable between 16 and 4
megabits per second (Mbps) and has a media access control (MAC) appearance on
both the main and backup rings. The 8230 is shipped with copper main ring
modules and can be upgraded to fiber by plugging in the Optical Fiber Converter
Module Feature.  The 8230 functions as a repeater in both directions.  The 8230
will be purchased by customers desiring higher ring availability, via automatic
reconfiguration, and better access control and asset management. The 8230, in
most cases, will also allow for longer lobe lengths than the 8228. The
following lobe lengths will be possible

    4 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  375 meters
    16 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  145 meters
    4 Mbps Unshielded Telephone Twisted Pair (UTP):  100 meters (UTP that
    meets or exceeds IBM Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification)

Systems management is improved by:

    Automatic wrap/reconfiguration of failing ring segment, a failing
    lobe, a LAM of the 8230 or the entire 8230.
    LAN Network Manager directed wrap reconfiguration of failing ring
    segment
    Support of LAN Network Manager's configuration table
    Support of LAN Network Manager's access and asset control.
    User interface LEDs and two character hexadecimal error code display
    provide power status, wrap state, 8230 status and insertion state of
    each LAM.

User productivity is enhanced by:

    -   The network being available more often because of reconfiguration
    -   LAN Network Manager's configuration table allowing better use of
        resources.

Power supply meets worldwide requirements

The 8230's ability to wrap out a failure automatically, or upon direction from
LAN Network Manager, in the physical wire or optical fiber cable, a failing
lobe, a failing LAM or the entire 8230, improves the network's availability.

The 8230's support of the LAN Network Manager's configuration table provides
the adapter address, 8230 number, LAM number and lobe number to the LAN
Administrator, so that a particular workstation can be quickly located for
asset control or if there is a problem that requires maintenance or other
attention.

The 8230's support of the LAN Network Manager's access control allows an 8230
port to be disabled via direction from the LAN Network Manager, thus insuring
that only authorized users are allowed on the network.

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit attachment connectors
will support either IBM Cabling System, (ICS), or unshielded telephone twisted
pair, (UTP), as follows:

    The Lobe Attachment Module comes in two versions:
      --  Connections for ICS
      --  Connections for RJ-45

In either case 4 Mbps transmission only is supported when using UTP The IBM
8230 base will function as a repeater in both directions and will have no lobe
connections

From one to four lobe attachment modules, each containing twenty lobe
connectors can be added to the base unit. There will be a media filter allowing
4 Mbps transmission over UTP. One power supply meets worldwide requirements.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

Base Unit:
    Width:  483 mm (19.0 inches)
    Depth:  260 mm (10.25 inches)
    Height: 133 mm (5.25 inches)
    Weight: 6.8 kg (15 lb)
Lobe Attachment Module (ICS):
    Width:  483 mm (19.0 inches)
    Depth:  190 mm (7.48 inches)
    Height: 133 mm (5.23 inches)
    Weight: 3.6 kg (7.9 lb)
Lobe Attachment Module (RJ-45):
    Width:  483 mm  (19.0 inches)
    Depth:  190 mm  (7.48 inches)
    Height: 89 mm   (3.50 inches)
    Weight: 3.2 kg  (7.0 lb)

The IBM 8230 implements a subset of the LAN Station Manager function and is
dependent on the LAN Network Manager for full function.  The station manager
function allows the LAN Network Manager to determine the physical location of
workstations.  The 8230 may reside on a ring that also has 8228s, 8218s, 8219s,
and 8220s. The 8218s, 8219s and 8220s must be operating as repeater pairs. The
8230 will not operate as one half of a repeater pair with these products.  The
maximum number of workstations capable of being attached to an 8230 is 80.

The configuration reporting functions of the IBM 8230 are not compatible with
any of the following devices when such devices are attached to any lobes of the
IBM 8230 Lobe Attachment Modules. The devices will cause these IBM 8230
functions to provide invalid or incorrect data to the IBM LAN Network Manager.

The devices are:

    Adapters that do not participate in normal Token Ring protocols, such
    as the neighbor notification process.
    Fanout devices which attach more than one adapter to a single lobe.

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit will require either a
LAN Network Manager or the IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit
Maintenance Facility for maintenance purposes. The maintenance facility will be
shipped with each 8230.  The maintenance facility is for diagnostics and
control and remote program updates in the absence of LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. 8230 IBM TOKEN-RING NETWORK CONTROLLER ACCESS UNIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM Token-Ring Network 16/4 Unshielded Media Lobe Attachment Module is an
active LAM and is used to connect adapters operating at 16 megabits/second (16
Mbps) or 4 Mbps on Unshielded Twisted Pair Media to the main ring via the 8230
Model 002. This active combination provides customers with more cabling options
to meet their networking needs, including Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) and
Unshielded Twisted Pair Media. The 8230 Model 002 and the 16/4 Unshielded Media
Lobe Attachment Module (LAM) are used in conjunction with the 16/4 Mbps UTP
Media Filters.

The 8230 Model 002 is functionally and electrically equivalent to the Model 001
with the exception of the power supply which has an increased capacity
necessary to support up to four 16/4 LAMs.

The IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit is an intelligent access
concentrator which allows connection of from 0 to 80 workstations, via
pluggable lobe attachment modules (LAMs), to a Token-Ring Network. The LAMs
come in three versions, the LAM which accepts IBM Cabling System (ICS)
connectors, the RJ-45 LAM which accepts RJ-45 connectors and the 16/4 UTP LAM,
which accepts RJ-45 connectors and has active reclocking and retiming hardware.
The 8230 is switchable between 16 and 4 megabits per second (Mbps) and has a
media access control (MAC) appearance on both the main and backup rings. The
8230 is shipped with copper main ring modules and can be upgraded to fiber by
plugging in the Optical Fiber Converter Module Feature.  The 8230 functions as
a repeater in both directions.  The 8230 will be purchased by customers
desiring higher ring availability, via automatic reconfiguration, and better
access control and asset management. The 8230, in most cases, will also allow
for longer lobe lengths than the 8228. The following lobe lengths will be
possible:

    o   4 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  375 meters
    o   16 Mbps Data Grade Media (DGM):  145 meters
    o   4 Mbps Unshielded Telephone Pair (UTP):  100 meters (UTP that
        meets or exceeds IBM Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification
        or EIA/TIA categories 3, 4 and 5)
    o   16 Mbps Unshielded Twisted Pair Media:  100 meters (UTP that meets
        or exceeds EIA/TIA Categories 4 and 5), 90 meters (UTP that meets
        or exceeds EIA/TIA Category 3).

Additional highlights to the Model 001 are:

    o   Increases user productivity by allowing quicker availability of
        information and better utilization of resources.
    o   Enhances growth potential by providing customers more cabling
        options and flexibility to meet their networking needs including
        STP and Unshielded Twisted Pair.
    o   Protects a customer's investment by providing more cabling options
        and flexibility to meet their networking needs including STP and
        Unshielded Twisted Pair.

The IBM 8230 Model 002 and the new IBM LAM's capability to support 16 Mbps
operation on Unshielded Twisted Pair Media will allow the customer to move more
data in a given amount of time, thereby reducing response time. This will allow
the customer to do more work on a given ring than is possible with 4 Mbps
operation.  The increased performance of 16 Mbps allows the customer to have
quicker availability of information.

Most customers that are currently operating a Token-Ring Network at 4 Mbps on
Unshielded Twisted Pair Media will now have more cabling flexibility and
options when upgrading to 16 Mbps networks.

The 8230 Model 002 and 16/4 Unshielded Media Lobe Attachment Module in
conjunction with the 16/4 Mbps filters will allow operation on UTP Media at 16
or 4 Mbps.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   8230 Model 002 Base Unit:
        -   Width:  483 mm (19.0 inches)
        -   Depth:  362 mm (14.25 inches)
        -   Height: 133 mm (5.25 inches)
        -   Weight: 9.5kg (21.0 lbs)

Electrical Specifications:

       Frequency        Nominal          Low     High    Maximum
         Range          Voltage        Voltage  Voltage  Current    Power
         -----          -------        -------  -------  -------    -----
    60 Hz +/-3 Hz   100 to 127 Vrms    90 Vrms  137 Vrms  5.5 A.   0.53 kVA
    50 Hz +/-3 Hz   200 to 240 Vrms   180 Vrms  265 Vrms  2.4 A.   0.53 kVA

  BTU:  Maximum thermal dissipation is 184 BTU/hour for base
        unit and 117 BTU/hour for each 16/4 UTP LAM.

The 8230 Model 002 is required when attaching an active 16/4 Unshielded Media
Lobe Attachment Module (LAM).

The 16/4 Unshielded Media LAM is a feature of the 8230 and is designed to
provide workstation attachment to the token-ring network at either 16 or 4
Mbps.  This active LAM will require the 8230 Model 002.  Active and the passive
RJ-45 LAMs cannot be mixed on the same base unit.  One 16/4 Unshielded Media
Filter will be required per 8230 base unit.  One 16/4 Workstation Filter will
be required at each workstation attached to the ring. One IBM 16/4 Lobe Filter
B will be required at the concentrator port of any UTP attached workstation.
One IBM 16/4 Repeater Unshielded Media Filter is required between any 8230 or
8220 and any 8228 with UTP Lobes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. IBM 8235 DIAL IN ACCESS TO LANS (DIALS) SERVERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 8235 Dial In Access to LANs (DIALs) Servers for Token Ring and Ethernet
is a dedicated multiport, multiprotocol remote access hardware server
supporting remote PC users dialing in to applications in the same way they
would access them from workstations directly attached to a token ring or
Ethernet LAN.  With routing and bridging support for multiple protocols, (i.e.,
Netbios for LAN servers, IPX for Netware, 802.2 LLC for 3270 and SNA, and IP
for TCP/IP applications) a user can remotely access the variety of applications
being accessed in today's multiprotocol environments.  Eight RS-232-D
(V.24/V.28) ports allow attachment of up to eight modems per unit, and with
capability to support asynchronous transmission at 57.6 Kbps simultaneously on
all ports, excellent performance can be achieved using today's high speed data
compression modems.

The corequisite software, IBM Dial In Access to LANs (DIALs) Client for OS/2*
and DOS and Windows (P/N 79G0364) for the remote PC will be available to users
operating with DOS 3.3, Windows 3.1, and OS/2 2.0 (or later versions of these
operating systems).  The software for the remote PC will provide easy dial-up
support for a wide variety of today's modems.  Use of special
filter/compression techniques optimizes performance for the remote user in the
dial-in environment.  With solid state components and no rotating media, the
IBM 8235 can be depended upon for longterm reliable operation.  The use of
downloadable software allows for future function upgrade.

Management of the unit can be accomplished with an simple network management
protocol (SNMP) manager or from a Windows based workstation that has access to
the LAN, locally or remotely.  The IBM 8235 is a standalone unit that can sit
on a tabletop, or be rackmounted in a wiring closet, easily scalable by adding
units and managing them from a single point of control.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Remote dial-in server for Token-Ring or Ethernet LANs
    o   Multiprotocol: Netbios, IPX, IP, 802.2 LLC
    o   Multiport - 8 Modem Connections
    o   Simple to install
    o   SNMP Management or via LAN Workstation
    o   Solid state reliability
    o   Performance tuned
    o   Scalable for larger installations
    o   Password and callback security features

Using standard dial networks, customers with PCs and modems who are remote from
the LAN can gain access to the LAN resources and work with applications
remotely, as if they were working at a locally attached LAN workstation.

Users in the field, such as agents, sales representatives, and employees who
travel or work at home, have the ability to access their applications from any
location that has dial-up phone service, extending the productivity of the
workstation to the remote workplace.  Using standard analog modems and dial-up
phone lines, the IBM 8235 and the IBM DIALs Client for OS/2 and DOS and Windows
operating in the remote PC allow easy access to applications that users
normally run from a workstation connected to a LAN.  With support for multiple
protocols and with high performance filtering and compression techniques,
excellent performance can be achieved when addressing a variety of applications
remotely.

The IBM 8235 provides the ability to remotely access LAN accessible databases
from anyplace where dial-up phone service is available.  With access to
real-time data concerning inventory, prices and rates, a sales representative
or agent at a customer site can determine availability and cost to the customer
for specific offerings in real time, and can then place orders with real time
update to inventory databases and customer files.  Having good, timely
information can be the key to closing a sale and maintaining customer
satisfaction, particularly when the competition cannot provide the same kind of
service.

For service providers, the IBM 8235 can be used to allow customers to access
LAN-based applications maintained by the service provider.  Providing the
customer with specific applications to run on the remote PC and providing the
remote access connection with the IBM DIALs Client for OS/2 and DOS and Windows
enables the customer to access the service provider's LAN-based services in
real time.  The service provider does not need to be directly involved in the
process, making the provider's resources available to address other
opportunities.

MODEL 001 Token Ring LAN support.

MODEL 002 Ethernet LAN support.

CUSTOMER SETUP (CSU) Yes.  Technical assistance is provided by the National
Technical Support Center.  The CSU publications are in English with the
exception of Japan, Germany and Spain.

Standalone or Rack Mounted Remote Dial-In Server.  Serves 4 and 16 Mbit Token
Ring LANs (8235-001) and Ethernet LANs (8235-002).  Eight RS-232-D (V.24/V.28)
ports for connections to 2400 BPS to 57.6 KBPS asynch modems. Managed via a
Windows workstation attached locally or remotely to the LAN (planned
availability of a DOS based version is January, 1994), or via an SNMP manager.
Supports Netbios, 802.2 LLC, IP, and IPX communications protocols for
applications running with the remotely attached PC's, operating with the IBM
Dial In Access to LANs (DIALs) Client for OS/2 and DOS and Windows, connected
via standard dial telephone service and modems.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  43.18 cm
    o   Depth:  25.4 cm
    o   Height: 4.369 cm
    o   Weight: 2.8 kg

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40.0C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
    o   Wet Bulb: 27C
    o   Electrical power: 100V to 240V, 50Hz and 60 Hz, 1.3A maximum, 40
        watts maximum

Installation and Management of the IBM 8235 unit requires a Windows based
workstation loaded with the IBM 8235 Management Software or 8235 is attached.

Installed customers who wish to acquire the DOS version of the 8235 Management
Software should check the IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System, Directory 32,
Network Support Files, at 919-517-0001 after January, 1994, for instructions on
how to obtain it.

For operation with a remote PC dialing in to the LAN to which the IBM 8235 is
attached, the remote PC must have the IBM Dial In Access to LANs (DIALs) Client
for OS/2 and DOS and Windows, ORDERED SEPARATELY, installed and operating under
a DOS 3.3, Windows 3.1 or OS/2 2.0, or later versions, operating system.

The machine is shipped with a diskette for setup and configuration of the
Server units.  Installation and Management of the IBM 8235 unit requires a
Windows based workstation with the IBM 8235 Management Software installed
(planned availability of a DOS based version is January, 1994), or an SNMP
Manager which has access to the same LAN to which the IBM 8235 is attached.

For operation of the Remote PC with the IBM 8235, the IBM Dial In Access to
LANs (DIALs) Client for OS/2 and DOS and Windows, ORDERED SEPARATELY, is
required to be installed on the Remote PC under a DOS 3.3, Windows 3.1, or OS/2
2.0, or later versions, operating system. *Signifies a trademark or registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. 4033 IBM LAN CONNECTION FOR PRINTERS AND PLOTTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LAN CONNECTION FOR PRINTERS IN NOVELL NETWARE ENVIRONMENT

Double click here to display picture

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters provides a direct connection
of parallel and EIA-232-C serial printers and plotters to local area networks
(LANs).  These new models support Novell** NetWare** networks.  The IBM LAN
Connection for Printers and Plotters consists of a network printer adapter unit
that attaches to a LAN and a software utility that resides on the LAN print
server.  The adapter unit has both a serial and a parallel port that can be
used simultaneously to support two printers or a printer and a plotter.

The software utility takes the print data normally sent to the print server's
parallel ports and redirects it to either the parallel or serial port of the
adapter.  The appropriate printer attached to the adapter receives the data and
prints it just as if the printer were attached to the server's printer port.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters software utility supports
remote printing in PSERVER or RPRINTER mode with Novell NetWare 2.2 or 3.11
connected to either a Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) or an Ethernet (IEEE 802.3 or
Ethernet II) LAN.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters supports the following data
streams: IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), Hewlett-Packard Printer
Control Language (HP PCL), IBM/HP Graphics Library (GL), and Adobe
PostScript**.  A user-friendly interface allows the user to easily configure
and maintain one or more adapters on the network.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   PSERVER and RPRINTER support is provided.
    o   The 4033 provides simultaneous support for connecting printers or
        plotters:
        1.  One parallel printer
        2.  One EIA-232-C serial printer or plotter port.
    o   The 4033 Model 011 provides support for Token-Ring 4/16 megabit/
        second (4/16Mbps) data rate (IEEE 802.5).
    o   The 4033 Model 012 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT 10Mbps
        data rate (IEEE 802.3).
    o   The 4033 Model 013 provides support for Ethernet 10Base2 and
        10Base5 10Mbps data rate (IEEE 802.3 or Ethernet II).
    o   Printers and plotters can be located in the user work area, which
        may be remote from the print server.
    o   Multiple eight file servers, two preferred file servers, and
        thirty-two print queue support
    o   The 4033 is compatible with IBM Personal Printer Data Streams
        (PPDS), Adobe PostScript, HP PCL, and IBM/HP GL.

The network utility provides systems management for supported printers and
plotters connected to the IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters remote
from the associated LAN print server.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters allows printers and plotters
to have location freedom.  Printers and plotters are not required to be
directly attached to the network printer server, but can be located anywhere in
network.  Improved print-job throughput may be realized because of faster
communications between the print server and printer.

Customers can add printers and plotters to their existing Novell NetWare LAN
Servers or networks.

With the IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters supporting Novell NetWare
2.2 and 3.11, with Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) and Ethernet (IEEE 802.3 or Ethernet
II) protocols, customers can now attach printers and plotters to their current
networks.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters provides a constant and stable
base so that as the business grows, printers can be connected via multiple
external network adapter units at the location that is best suited to the
users' needs.

MODEL 011 IBM Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) 4/16 Mbs

MODEL 012 Ethernet 10BaseT (IEEE 802.3) 10Mbs

MODEL 013 Ethernet 10Base2/5 (IEEE 802.3) 10Mbs

These machines are customer setup (CSU).

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters is a product which provides
direct Local Area Network (LAN) connectivity for IBM PC Parallel or EIA-232-C
serial printer or plotter.  The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters
consists of an network printer adapter and a software utility which resides on
a LAN print server.  The network printer adapter is approximately 5.75 x 7.75 x
1.5 inches, and contains one serial and one parallel port that can be used
simultaneously to support two printers or a printer and a plotter.

The network printer adapter works in conjunction with software running on the
print server which redirects print data normally destined for a print server's
parallel ports.  The server based software uses IEEE 802.2 data link control
flows to send data to either the serial or parallel port of the network printer
adapter.  The IBM LAN Connection can operate in PSERVER or PPRINTER mode with
Novell Netware 2.2 or 3.11 connected to either an IBM Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5)
or Ethernet (IEEE 802.3 or Eithernet II) LAN.  The IBM LAN Connection has a
user friendly interface which allows the network administrator to easily
configure and maintain one or more network printer adapter on the network.

A user submits a print job to a queue on the print server, as if the
printer/plotter was directly attached to the server and the IBM LAN Connection
redirector software intercepts the output before it reaches the server's LPT
port, and redirects it to the network printer adapter.  The appropriate printer
attached to the network printer adapter receives the data and prints it, just
as if this printer was attached to the server's original LPT port.

The network printer adapter polls the NetWare network operating system (NOS)
software, on the file server, to request print data from the server to the
associated IBM LAN Connection port (parallel or serial).

The IBM LAN Connection provides the above mentioned functions, features, and
flexibility transparent to the originating application and user without
noticeable degradation of spooled printing system performance.  The IBM LAN
Connection for Printers and Plotters supports the following data streams used
by IBM desktop printers, e.g., IBM PPDS, HP PCL, IBM/HP GL, and Adobe
PostScript.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Approximate Dimensions and Weight:
        -   Height:  38mm (1.50 inches)
        -   Width:  197mm (7.76 inches)
        -   Depth:  146mm (5.75 inches)
        -   Weight:  Less than 2.8kg (6 pounds), packaging and power
            supply included.

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  16 to 32C (60.8 to 89.6F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent non-condensing
    o   Max. Wet Bulb:  23C (73.4F)

NON-OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  10 to 43C (50 to 109.4F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent non-condensing
    o   Max. Wet Bulb:  27C (80.6F)
    NOTE: For proper operation, the air vents on the top cover should not
    be covered.

POWER SUPPLY MATRIX Two unique power supplies are provided as defined in the
following tables. All power supply outputs include overcurrent protection.

    IBM LAN Connection
    Machine                 Power Supply
    Type        Model       Part Number
    -------      -----       -----------
    4033         011          1333561
    4033         012          1333561
    4033         013          1333563

POWER SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS

                      1333561         1333563
                    -------------   ------------
    Voltage Range   104 - 127V AC   90 - 265V AC
                    @ 60Hz          @ 50-60Hz
    Output          5V DC +/- 5%    5V DC +/- 5%
    Voltage(s)      (1.5A)          (2.0A) 12V DC
    AC Plug         2-prong NEMA    IEC-320 Appliance
                                    Coupler to accept
                                    any standard Personal
                                    Computer line cord
    DC Plug         3-pin molex     3-pin molex
                    w/strain relief w/strain relief
    Height          63mm (2.48      46mm (1.81
                    inches)         inches)
    Length          150mm (5.91     130mm (5.11
                    inches)         inches)
    Width           72mm (2.83      83mm (3.27
                    inches)         inches)
    Weight          Approx. 2.5     Less than 1.0
                    pounds          pounds
     Both ranges require an external power circuit breaker of
     15A for safe operation.

PRINTER/PLOTTER CABLING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE IBM 4033

    o   Parallel:
        25-pin "Centronics" type parallel cable (P/N 1525612, feature #5612)
    o   EIA-232-C Serial:
        A 9-pin to 25-pin serial adapter connector (P/N 6450242, feature
        #0242) is required to connect to the IBM LAN Connection serial
        connector. There are three serial interface cables that may attach
        to the serial adapter connector:
        -   P/N 8509386, feature 6031, for printers with a 25-pin serial
            connector, such as, IBM 2380, IBM 2381, IBM 4226
        -   P/N 6486685, feature 6685, for printers with a 36-pin Centronics
            connector, such as, IBM 4019 LaserPrinter.
        -   P/N 2719931, feature 5030 for IBM 6180 and 7372 plotters with a
            25-pin serial connector

LAN CABLING REQUIREMENTS IBM 4033 Model 011, Token-Ring:

   o   IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Cable (P/N 6339098), if the LAN
       segment uses IBM Cabling System data grade media and operates at a
       ring data rate of either 4Mbps or 16Mbps.
   o   Type 3 Media Filter Cable, if the LAN segment uses telephone twisted
       -pair media and operates at a ring data rate of 4Mbps.
       NOTE: Cabling distance is as defined in "IBM Token-Ring Network
       Introduction and Planning Guide" (GA27-3677).

IBM 4033 Model 012, Ethernet 10BaseT (IEEE 802.3):

    o   An 8-pin RJ-45 connector is used to attach unshielded twisted-pair
        (telephone) cable.
        NOTE: Cabling distance is as specified in IEEE 802.3 standard for
        Ethernet 10BaseT.

IBM 4033 Model 013, Ethernet 10Base2 (IEEE 802.3):

    o   A BNC jack is used for attaching the BNC-T connector provided with
        the IBM 4033.  This BNC-T connector is then used to connect the
        RG-58 coaxial cable between the networks.
        NOTE: The IBM 4033 attaches directly to the network through the
        BNC-T connector.

IBM 4033 Model 013, Ethernet 10Base5 (IEEE 802.3):

    o   15-pin D-shell connector is used for attaching the IBM 4033 to an
        attachment unit interface (AUI) cable.
        NOTE: AUI Cable distance is as specified in IEEE 802.3 standard for
        Ethernet 10Base5.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

    o   Novell NetWare Version 2.2 or 3.11 is required.
    o   Novell Netware from IBM Version 2.2 and 3.11
    o   Netware for AIX*/6000 from IBM Version 3.11
        -   Allows RISC System/6000* workstations to act as servers for
            Netware LANs.

Two diskettes (3.5-inches only) are provided that contains the LAN printer
utilities.  This utility is installed on the LAN print server by the network
administrator.

* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

** Novel and NetWare are trademarks of Novel, Inc. ** Postscript is a
registered trademark of Adobe System, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. 4033 IBM LAN CONNECTION FOR PRINTERS AND PLOTTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM LAN CONNECTION FOR PRINTERS AND PLOTTERS

Double click here to display picture

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters provides a direct connection
of parallel and EIA-232-C serial printers and plotters to Local Area Networks
(LANs).  The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters consists of a network
printer adapter unit that attaches to a LAN and a software utility that resides
on the LAN print server.  The adapter unit has both a serial and a parallel
port that can be used simultaneously to support two printers or plotters.

The software utility takes the print data normally sent to the print server's
parallel ports and redirects it to either the parallel or serial port of the
adapter.  The appropriate printer attached to the adapter receives the data and
prints it just as if the printer were attached to the server's printer port.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters software utility supports
remote printing via IBM OS/2* Extended Edition (EE) and IBM OS/2 LAN Server for
PS/2* or IBM AIX* Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000* (AIX/6000) server which
is connected to either Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) or Ethernet LAN (IEEE 802.3).

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters operates without noticeable
degradation of printing performance and supports the following data streams:
IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), Hewlett-Packard Printer Control
Language (HP PCL), IBM/HP Graphics Library (GL), and Adobe PostScript(1).  A
user friendly interface allows the user to easily configure and maintain one or
more adapters on the network.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Supported by IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 1.2, 1.3 and IBM AIX
        Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000 direct connection printing
        solutions
    o   Simultaneous support for two connecting printers or plotters:
        1.  Provides one parallel printer or plotter port.
        2.  Provides one EIA-232-C serial printer or plotter port.
    o   The 4033 Model 001 provides support for Token-Ring 4/16 megabit/
        second (4/16Mbps) data rate (IEEE 802.5).
    o   The 4033 Model 002 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT 10Mbps
        data rate (IEEE 802.3).
    o   The 4033 Model 003 provides support for Ethernet 10Base2 and
        10Base5 10Mbps data rate (IEEE 802.3).
    o   Printers/plotters can be located in the user work area, which may
        be remote from the print server.
    o   Redirected support for one or more IBM 4033s on the network
    o   Compatible with IBM Personal Printer Data Streams (PPDS), Adobe
        PostScript, HP PCL, and IBM/HP GL.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters allows printers and plotters
to have location freedom.  Printers and plotters are not required to be
directly attached to the network printer server, but can be located anywhere in
network.  Improved print-job throughput is realized because of faster
communications between the print server and printer.

With the IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters supporting IBM OS/2 LAN
Server and IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000, with Token-Ring (IEEE
802.5) and Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) protocols, customers can now attach printers
and plotters to their current networks.

The network utility provides systems management for supported printers and
plotters connected to the IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters from the
associated LAN print server.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters provides a constant and stable
base so that as the business grows, printers can be connected via multiple
external network adapter units at the location that is best suited to the users
needs.

Customer can add printers/plotters to their existing IBM OS/2 LAN Server or IBM
AIX Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000 networks.

MODEL 001 IBM Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) 4/16 Mbs

MODEL 002 Ethernet 10BaseT (IEEE 802.3) 10Mbs

MODEL 003 Ethernet 10Base2/5 (IEEE 802.3) 10Mbs

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters is a product which provides
direct Local Area Network (LAN) connectivity for IBM PC Parallel or EIA-232-C
serial printer or plotter.  The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters
consists of an network printer adapter and a software utility which resides on
a LAN print server.  The network printer adapter is approximately 5.75 x 7.75 x
1.5 inches, and contains one serial and one parallel port that can be used
simultaneously to support two printers/plotters.

The network printer adapter works in conjunction with software running on the
print server which redirects print data normally destined for a print server's
parallel ports.  The server based software uses IEEE 802.2 data link control
flows to send data to either the serial or parallel port of the network printer
adapter.  The redirector software portion of IBM LAN Connection must reside on
an IBM OS/2 LAN Server or IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000 server
which is connected to either a IBM Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) or Ethernet (IEEE
802.3 CSMA/CD) LAN.  The IBM LAN Connection has a user friendly interface which
allows the network administrator to easily configure and maintain one or more
network printer adapter on the network.

A user submits a print job to a queue on the print server, as if the
printer/plotter was directly attached to the server and the IBM LAN Connection
redirector software intercepts the output before it reaches the server's LPT
port, and redirects it to the network printer adapter.  The appropriate printer
attached to the network printer adapter receives the data and prints it, just
as if this printer was attached to the server's original LPT port.

The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters supports remote printing from
TCP/IP users on the network via the remote print services (lpd) of the IBM RISC
System/6000.  Thus TCP/IP users can submit print jobs to the IBM LAN Connection
by addressing the print job to the remote queue in the IBM RISC System/6000 to
which the IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters is logically attached.

The IBM LAN Connection provides the above mentioned functions, features, and
flexibility transparent to the originating application and user without
noticeable degradation of spooled printing system performance.  The IBM LAN
Connection for Printers and Plotters supports the following data streams used
by IBM desktop printers e.g., IBM PPDS, HP PCL, IBM/HP GL, and Adobe
PostScript.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Approximate Dimensions and Weight:
        -   Height:  38mm (1.50 inches)
        -   Width:  197mm (7.76 inches)
        -   Depth:  146mm (5.75 inches)
        -   Weight:  Less than 2.8kg (6 pounds), packaging and power supply
            included.

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  16 to 32C (60.8 to 89.6F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent non-condensing
    o   Max. Wet Bulb:  23C (73.4F)

NON-OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  10 to 43C (50 to 109.4F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent non-condensing
    o   Max. Wet Bulb:  27C (80.6F)
    NOTE: For proper operation, the air vents on the top cover should not
    be covered.

POWER SUPPLY MATRIX Two unique power supplies are provided as defined in the
following tables. All power supply outputs include overcurrent protection.

    IBM LAN Connection
    Machine                 Power Supply
    Type        Model       Part Number
    -------      -----       -----------
    4033         001          1333561
    4033         002          1333561
    4033         003          1333563

POWER SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS

                      1333561         1333563
                    -------------   ------------
    Voltage Range   104 - 127V AC   90 - 265V AC
                    @ 60Hz          @ 50-60Hz
    Output          5V DC +/- 5%    5V DC +/- 5%
    Voltage(s)      (1.5A)          (2.0A) 12V DC
    AC Plug         2-prong NEMA    IEC-320 Appliance
                                    Coupler to accept
                                    any standard Personal
                                    Computer line cord
    DC Plug         3-pin molex     3-pin molex
                    w/strain relief w/strain relief
    Height          63mm (2.48      46mm (1.81
                    inches)         inches)
    Length          150mm (5.91     130mm (5.11
                    inches)         inches)
    Width           72mm (2.83      83mm (3.27
                    inches)         inches)
    Weight          Approx. 2.5     Less than 1.0
                    pounds          pounds
     Both ranges require an external power circuit breaker of
     15A for safe operation.

LIMITATIONS

    o   The IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters operate only in
        IBM OS/2 LAN Server 1.2 or 1.3 and AIX/6000 Version 3.1.5 or higher.
    o   IBM OS/2 EE 1.2, a maximum of three printers/plotters can be
        redirected per server.
    o   IBM OS/2 EE 1.3, a maximum of seven printers/plotters can be
        redirected per server.
    o   If printing from DOS compatibility mode of an IBM OS/2 EE print
        server, only three printers/plotters can be supported.
    o   For DOS-based work stations:
        -   IBM DOS LAN Requester is required for access to IBM 4033s on
            an IBM OS/2 LAN Server.
        -   IBM AIX Access for DOS Users (AADU) is required for access to
            IBM 4033s for IBM RISC System/6000 servers.
    o   Since IBM RISC System/6000 does not support Ethernet 10BaseT (IEEE
        802.3), the IBM 4033 Model 002 (10BaseT) is not supported.
    o   When using Automatic Emulation Mode Switching (AES), the software
        utility for the IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters must
        be installed after AES is installed.
    o   Novell NetWare is not supported.
    o   Ethernet Version 2 is not supported.

IBM 4033 Models 001, 002, and 003 operate with OS/2 Extended Edition (EE) and
IBM OS/2* LAN Server for PS/2 supporting either IBM Token-Ring IEEE 802.5 or
Ethernet IEEE 802.3.  Models 001 and 003 are supported in the IBM AIX Version
3.1.5 for RISC System/6000 LAN environments.  Model 002 is not.

PRINTER/PLOTTER CABLING REQUIREMENTS FOR THE IBM 4033

    o   Parallel:
        25-pin "Centronics" type parallel cable (P/N 1525612, feature #5612)
    o   EIA-232-C Serial:
        A 9-pin to 25-pin serial adapter connector (P/N 6450242, feature
        #0242) is required to connect to the IBM LAN Connection serial
        connector. There are three serial interface cables that may attach
        to the serial adapter connector:
        -   P/N 8509386, feature 6031, for printers with a 25-pin serial
            connector, such as, IBM 2380, IBM 2381, IBM 4226
        -   P/N 6486685, feature 6685, for printers with a 36-pin
            Centronics connector, such as, IBM 4019 LaserPrinter.
        -   P/N 2719931, feature 5030 for IBM 6180 and 7372 plotters with a
            25-pin serial connector

LAN CABLING REQUIREMENTS IBM 4033 Model 001, Token-Ring:

   o   IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Cable (P/N 6339098), if the LAN
       segment uses IBM Cabling System data grade media and operates at a
       ring data rate of either 4Mbps or 16Mbps.
   o   Type 3 Media Filter Cable, if the LAN segment uses telephone
       twisted-pair media and operates at a ring data rate of 4Mbps.
       NOTE: Cabling distance is as defined in "IBM Token-Ring Network
       Introduction and Planning Guide" (GA27-3677).

IBM 4033 Model 002, Ethernet 10BaseT (IEEE 802.3):

    o   An 8-pin RJ-45 connector is used to attach unshielded twisted-pair
        (telephone) cable.
        NOTE: Cabling distance is as specified in IEEE 802.3 standard for
        Ethernet 10BaseT.

IBM 4033 Model 003, Ethernet 10Base2 (IEEE 802.3):

    o   A BNC jack is used for attaching the BNC-T connector provided with the
        IBM 4033.  This BNC-T connector is then used to connect the RG-58 coaxial
        cable between the networks.
        NOTE: The IBM 4033 attaches directly to the network through the BNC-T
        connector.

IBM 4033 Model 003, Ethernet 10Base5 (IEEE 802.3):

    o   15-pin D-shell connector is used for attaching the IBM 4033 to an
        attachment unit interface (AUI) cable.
        NOTE: AUI Cable distance is as specified in IEEE 802.3 standard for
        Ethernet 10Base5.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

    o   IBM OS/2 Extended Edition Version 1.2, 1.3, or 1.30.1
    o   IBM OS/2 LAN Server Version 1.2, 1.3
    o   IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 for RISC System/6000
    NOTE: Novel NetWare(1) is not supported.

Two diskettes (3.5-inches only) are provided that contains the LAN printer
utilities.  This utility is installed on the LAN print server by the network
administrator. One diskette is formatted for IBM OS/2 EE 1.2 (or 1.3) and the
other diskette is formatted for IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 or higher.

* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

(1) Postscript is a registered trademark of Adobe System, Inc.   (2) NetWare is
a trademark of Novel, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. 4770 IBM IJ TRANSACTION PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 4770 IJ Transaction Printer is an ink jet printer specifically designed to
print on forms used in bank teller transactions and for retail point-of-sale.

The printer uses thermal/bubble ink jet print technology, which results in a
very compact footprint and operation at a very low sound level.  The 4770 IJ
has the ability to print up to six lines on a check-size cut form and/or on
three-inch wide journal roll paper as a journal record or tear off customer
receipt.

The 4770 IJ prints at speeds up to 145 characters per second (cps) in journal
mode using the standard 15.2 characters per inch (cpi) font.  In cut form mode,
print speed is 131 characters per second.  Throughput is approximately 2.5
lines per second.  It attaches to personal computer workstations via the
built-in parallel (Model 002) or serial (Model 001) interface.

The 4770 IJ Transaction Printer supports both DOS and OS/2* environments. The
4770 supports some but not all of the IBM 4712 printer print control commands.
4712 applications not written to recommended procedures may give unexpected
results when run on the 4770.  A technical guide is available with programming
information to assist independent software vendors to modify their software
programs to support this printer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Bi-directional high speed 145 cps printing
    o   Disposable print cartridge with 12 nozzles, provides 10W x 12H
        or 7W x 9H print dot matrix
    o   International characters supported by code page 850
    o   Up to 6 lines of print per cut-form
    o   Standard 4 KB receive buffer
    o   Supports down-loadable character sets and graphic logos
    o   Small footprint, less than 60 square inches
    o   Low noise level, 50 dba
    o   6.6 lpi cut-form spacing
    o   5.5 lpi journal spacing
    o   Top slot for document insertion and removal
    o   Tear bar for exiting journal paper
    o   Separate AC to DC power transformer
    o   Two operator panel LED indicators
    o   LED flashing alarm for quiet signaling

The IBM 4770 IJ Transaction Printer uses a plain paper thermal/bubble ink jet
print-head which results in quiet operation and a compact design.

The quiet operation of the 4770 is a feature that is very desirable in the
teller banking environment.  Just as the non-impact print technology, with its
low noise printing characteristic, has taken over the office environment
displacing the previously dominant impact wire-matrix technology, the 4770 is
positioned to do the same for teller banking.

The compact design feature of the 4770 will be highly valued in the teller
banking environment.  The printer takes up as little as 40 square inches of
counter space. (60 square inches with the journal roll.)  This addresses a
problem frequently raised by bank tellers regarding the significant counter
space requirements of impact dot matrix printers.

Minimal training is necessary to use the 4770 IJ Transaction Printer.  The unit
provides visual feedback to prompt the user when printing is ready. Replacement
of consumables such as roll paper and ink cartridge is accomplished by
following a short procedure contained in the user reference guide.

MODEL 001 Serial interface model.

MODEL 002 Parallel interface model.

The 4770 is a customer setup (CSU) printer.  The CSU information is contained
in the Reference Card which is supplied with the printer.

The 4770 IJ Transaction Printer is a thermal/bubble ink jet printer
specifically designed to print on forms used in bank teller transactions as
well as retail point-of-sale.

The printer uses the thermal/bubble ink jet non-impact print technology, which
results in a compact footprint and operates at a very low sound level. The unit
has the ability to print up to six lines on a check-size cut form and/or on
three-inch wide journal roll paper for a journal record or tear off customer
receipt.

The 4770 IJ prints at speeds up to 145 characters per second (cps) in journal
mode using the standard 15.2 characters per inch (cpi) font.  In cut form mode,
print speed is up to 131 characters per second.  Throughput is approximately
2.5 lines per second.  It attaches to personal computer workstations via the
built-in parallel (Model 002) or serial (Model 001) interface.

The 4770 IJ Transaction Printer supports both DOS and OS/2 environments.  The
4770 supports some but not all of the IBM 4712 printer print control commands.
4770 applications not written to recommended procedures may give unexpected
results when run on the 4712.  A technical guide is available with programming
information to assist independent software vendors to modify their software
programs to support this printer.

The 4770 IJ is a non-impact journal/receipt/validation combination printer with
a very compact design footprint of approximately 60 square inches and a light
weight of 3 lbs.  Ink jet printing is accomplished with a proven disposable
print-head with an encapsulated ink supply.  Power is provided by a 12
Volts/500 milli-Amps wall-mount DC power supply.  Printer power consumption is
very economical at approximately 6 Watts operarting and 1 Watt standby.  The
4770 IJ can print on a check-size cut-form and/or on a three-inch wide roll
paper for a journal record or tear off customer receipt. The unit may be
operated with or without the journal roll.  Without the journal roll in place
the depth of the printer is reduced by approximately 3.5 inches resulting in a
footprint of about 40 square inches.

The 4770 IJ attaches to personal computer workstations through the PC parallel
or serial RS-232C Asynchronous interface.  Speed is approximately 2.5 lines per
second in parallel attachment mode.  When printing the print-head prints at a
rate of up to 1300 (journal) or up to 1170 (cut-form) dots per second.  With
Standard font this translates to print speeds of up to 131 characters per
second for cut forms and up to 145 characters per seconds for journal.  The
unit comes with a standard 4KB of buffer memory.

The 4770 IJ Transaction Printer in validation mode prints by clamping the
cut-form, moving the print-head horizontally (bidirectional) during printing,
and feeding the cut-form vertically to ready it for the next line of print. If
printing is required on the journal roll, this is done after the cut-form is
removed.  One to six, 3.25-inch lines can be printed within a 1-inch high print
area near the bottom of a cut-form.  Cut-forms must be a minimum of 4.75-inch
wide by 2-inch high.  Supported fonts are Standard and Large. Widths are single
and double.  Double-wide, large and large bold are also available under program
control.  A pitch of 5.8, 7.6, 11.6, 15.2, characters per inch is selectable
under program control to provide 16, 21, 32, 42 characters per line.  For
example using Standard font, printing 42 characters per line results in
approximately 15.2 characters per inch, while Large font at 32 characters per
line results in approximately 11.6 characters per inch.

A modified IBM PC U.S. Character set, (code page 437 - 224 characters and
symbols), and International character set (code page 850 - 224 characters and
symbols) are standard.  Additional charcters sets and fonts can be downloaded
as font 1 (224 characters) and font 2 (96 characters) to the printer RAM. Bit
image graphics at 144 dots per inch horizontally by 96 dots per inch
verticvally provide the capability to print a logo or special symbols and
graphics.  Graphics and text may be mixed on a print line.

Using Standard font, the 4770 IJ can print up to 131 cps in cut-form mode and
up to 145 cps in journal.  Using Large font, it prints up to 97 cps in cut-form
mode and up to 108 cps in journal.  These are burst speeds and do not include
any time for head positioning or document movement.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Size and Weight
      Width:  172mm (6.75 inches)
      Depth:  153mm (6.00 inches) Without Journal Paper Roll
      Depth:  241mm (9.50 inches) With Journal Paper Roll.
      Height:  89mm (3.50 inches) Without Journal Paper Roll
      Height: 108mm (4.25 inches) With Journal Paper Roll
      Weight: 1.4kg (3 lbs)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Addressability
      12 (High) X 10 (Wide) dots per inch
      0.094 to 0.125 inch character height (Font dependent)
    Power Consumption
      Operating: 9 Watts
      Standby:   1 Watt
    DC Power Supply
      Power Requirements: 12 to 14 Volts DC @ 500 mA
      Type: Wall-Mount - 2 prongs
      Input: 120 VAC, 60 Hz (US)
             200 - 240 VAC, 50 Hz (WT)
      Output: 12 to 17 Volts DC unregulated, depending on
              current drag.
      Cord: 6 Ft length
    Character Set
      Code Page 437 characters 32 - 255
      Code Page 850 characters 32 - 255
    Print Mechanism
      Type: Replaceable thermal ink jet head
      Ink : Black ink cartridge encapsulated with printhead
      Life: 11 M dots, or approximately 550 K characters
      Contrast : Constant throughout life of cartridge
    Print Speed
      2.5 lines per second approximately
      Up to 145 characters per second burst (Journal printing)
      Up to 131 characters per second burst (Validation printing)
    Line Spacing
      6.6 lines per inch (Cut form media printing)
      5.5 lines per inch (Journal media printing)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    Temperature
      Operating Environment     10 to 40 degrees C (50 to 104 degrees F)
      Non-operating Environment 10 to 40 degrees C (50 to 104 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity
      10 to 90 %  (No Condensation)
    Acoustics
      50 dba printing (1 meter (3 feet), weighted Average, on roll paper)
    Certification
      U/L, CSA, FCC (A)

LIMITATIONS

The journal print field is 70mm (2.75 inches) wide.  The first print position
is 3.2mm(.125 inches) from the left edge.

The validation print field is 83mm (3.25 inches) wide.  The top line is 36mm
(1.4 inches) from the bottom edge of the cut form.  The bottom line is 9mm
(0.35 inches) from the bottom edge of the cut form.

The high temperature limitation for operation of the 4770 IJ Transaction
printer is 40 degrees C (104 degrees F).

Print quality is influenced by individual brands and texture characteristics.
If low print quality is encountered, other papers should be tested to achieve
the desired results.  High quality paper with low cotton content, high opacity
and good bursting strength is recommended.

The 4770 print dot size is small and therefore the built-in fonts may not be
OCR readable.

For serial attachment, a device driver is required.  No driver is needed for
parallel attach.  Order one IBM 4770 Hardware Guide feature #3928 (which
contains the device driver) for each location where the 4770 printers will be
installed with serial interface.

The following IBM Finance software applications have been tested for
compatibility with the 4770 IJ.

    DOS application
    Software
    Publisher   Description                 Version    Driver
    ---------   -----------                 -------   --------
    IBM         IBM Consumer Transaction      1.3     IBM 4770
                DOS Platform
    IBM         IBM Consumer Transaction      1.3     IBM 4770
                DOS Runtime
    IBM         LANDP/DOS                     2.0     IBM 4770

    OS/2 Applications
    Software
    Publisher   Description                  Version    Driver
    ---------   -----------                  -------   --------
    IBM         IBM SAA Consumer Transaction   1.1     IBM 4770
                Definition/2
    IBM         IBM SAA Consumer Transaction   1.1     IBM 4770
                Runtime/2
    IBM         LANDP/2                        2.0     IBM 4770

The IBM 4770 Transaction Printer will operate with the following systems:

    o   DOS Version 3.3 and later
    o   IBM Operating System 2 Version 1.2 and later

HARDWARE GUIDE F/C 3928 The hardware guide P/N 64G3928 contains a device driver
required when using the serial model of the 4770.  The device driver is not
required when the 4770 is attached via the parallel interface.  A Technical
Guide is also included which provides technical specifications, maintenance and
programming information.  It is recommended that at least one of this feature
#3928 be ordered with the 4770 printers at each equipment location if serial
attachment is required.  This feature includes the serial device driver,
license agreement, and the Technical Guide, which contains operation,
maintenance, and programming information. * Signifies a trademark or registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. IBM COLOR JETPRINTER PS 4079 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM(R) Color Jetprinter(TM) PS is the next generation of Color
PostScript(1) compatible Inkjet printers, setting a new price and performance
point for PostScript language color printers.  The IBM 4079 emulates both the
PostScript and GL plotter printing languages for compatibility with all leading
color software applications.  It supports printing on media up to 11" X 17" and
prints at a resolution of 360 X 360 dpi.  The IBM 4079 features superior color
quality by combining its high resolution with an advanced screening technology
called "ColorGrade(2)" to produce smoothly shaded color graphics and even,
unpatterned color fills.  The IBM 4079 comes with 4 M-bytes of RAM, upgradeable
to 16 M-bytes.  Advanced memory compression is built in to efficiently compress
data, allowing the printer to handle complex jobs with only 1/3 the RAM
normally needed to create a page.  The IBM 4079 features excellent
connectivity.  With the optional Y-cable, the printer can be connected to up to
three interfaces at once: serial, parallel, and LocalTalk (without the
connector, one has LocalTalk and a choice of serial or parallel).  All three
ports are active and data sensing.  The printer automatically buffers incoming
data for each interface and it automatically switches between the PostScript
and GL emulation modes.  Users who wish to replace both plotters and PostScript
color output devices, or who have software which supports a mix of these data
streams, will have seamless plug and play operation, with no need to set dip
switches. (R) IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries and is used under
license. (TM) Color Jetprinter is a trademark of International Business
Machines   Corporation in the United States and/or other countries and is used
under   license. (1) PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated,
registered in the   United States. (2) ColorGrade is a trademark of Lexmark
International, Inc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Key Features
       -  New Price/Performance Point for PostScript Driven Color Printing
    o  Quality
       -  Non-impact Color inkjet printer
       -  True 4-Color Process Printing (CYMK)
       -  360 x 360 dots per inch resolution
       -  Millions of brilliant color combinations
       -  144 levels of color
       -  ColorGrade Advanced Screening
       -  Color Balancing to match media type
       -  PANTONE(3) Licensed
    o  Performance
       -  AMD 29200 16MHz full 32-bit advanced RISC Processor
       -  4MB of RAM expandable to 16MB
       -  Advanced Memory Management with data compression produces
           documents with less RAM
    o  Compatibility
       -  PostScript compatible with 35 Type 1 Scalable Fonts
       -  GL (Plotter) Emulation
       -  Windows(4), OS/2(R), AIX(R), Apple(5) Systems 6 and 7(6) drivers
           shipped w/printer
    o  Paper Handling
       -  Auto Sheet Feed adjustable up to 11" x 17" (B-size) standard
       -  Support for Plain Paper, Coated Paper, Transparencies and
           Envelopes
       -  No-U-Turn paper-path
    o  Connectivity
       -  Parallel, Serial and LocalTalk(7) ports
       -  Fastbytes --- Fully supports 4033 LAN Connection
       -  Novell, OS/2 LAN Server, AIX, LAN Manager and AppleTalk(5)
          compatible
       -  All ports active
    o  Usability Features
       -  Easy to Read 32-character LCD Display
       -  Automatic Emulation Detection and Switching
       -  Fast Warm-up (less than a minute)
       -  No dip switches
       -  Small Size and Weight (20.5" x 16.0" x 6.7" and only 22 lbs)
       -  Quiet 44 dB Operation, silent when idle
    o  Reliability
       -  One Year On-Site Warranty
       -  Ink Out Sensing
       -  No-U-Turn Paper-Path
(R) OS/2 and AIX are registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation. (3) PANTONE is a registered trademark of Pantone, Inc. (4) Windows
is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (5) Apple and AppleTalk are registered
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. (6) System 7 is a trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc. (7) LocalTalk is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. registered
in the United   States.

The IBM 4079 printer provides high quality color printing on up to "B" size
media.  The printer uses a RISC processor for fast interpretation of the
Postscript printing language.  Automatic I/O and emulation switching are
supported so that no initialization is required when switching software
applications.

The IBM 4079 printer supports the Postscript and GL languages making it
compatible with all leading color software applications.  Furthermore, the full
complement of type 1 fonts are supported for document compatibility.  An LCD
operator panel provides access to set-up of printer parameters.  The small
size, light, low heat output and extremely quiet operation (44 db) of the IBM
4079 allow it to operate in space sensitive environments such as offices and
small graphics art businesses, as well as crowded rooms where shared printers
often reside.

The IBM Color Jetprinter PS is the next generation of Color Inkjet printers,
setting a new price performance point for PostScript-compatible color printing.
While matching the feature set of more expensive color thermal transfer
printers, the Color Jetprinter PS also provides advanced features such as large
format printing up to 11" x 17".  The Color Jetprinter PS truly makes a new
mark in color printing.

Print Quality:  The superior color printing of the Color Jetprinter PS is
generated by a combination of high resolution output (360 x 360 dots per inch)
and an advanced screening technology called ColorGrade.  The combination
produces 144 levels of color to provide smooth color transitions which show
virtually no banding.  The high resolution produces very fine lines and smooth
curves for detailed line art and technical drawings.  The combination of fine
lines and smooth color blends produce stunning color and halftone quality
normally associated with 600 dpi printers.

The Color Jetprinter PS is PANTONE licensed and uses 4 color process inks
(cyan, yellow, magenta, black -- CYMK) to produce millions of brilliant color
combinations.  The use of true black as one of the primary colors ensures that
the Color Jetprinter PS delivers crisp, dark, laser-quality text and stunning
black fills.  This is as opposed to some color printers which mix colors to
produce black, often resulting in "muddy brown" instead of black.

Performance:  The Color Jetprinter PS uses an AMD 16MHz RISC-based full 32-bit
processor to handle complex color pages.  Advanced Memory Compression is built
in to efficiently compress data, allowing the printer to handle complex jobs
with only 1/3 the RAM normally needed to create a page.  This means that the
Color Jetprinter PS can handle more complex pages in a given memory
configuration.  The printer comes with 4 M-bytes standard and is upgradeable to
16 M-bytes.

Usability:  Superior ease of use is ensured by several design factors.
PostScript compatibility (the de facto standard in color printing) and GL
plotter emulation help ensure that the Color Jetprinter PS will work with all
leading color application software.  The built-in automatic emulation detection
and switching ensures that users will be able to produce quality output of
either PostScript or GL files without dip switch changes or cryptic emulation
switching codes.

The small size, light weight, low heat output and extremely quiet operation (44
db) of the Color Jetprinter PS allow it to operate in space sensitive
environments such as offices and small graphics art businesses as well as
crowded printer rooms where shared printers often reside.

The Color Jetprinter PS has an intuitive, user-tested LCD operator panel which
allows quick access to printer settings and functions, avoiding having to work
with DIP switches and LEDs found on competitive products.  The Color Jetprinter

PS ships with software drivers for the industry's leading operating systems,
including Apple System 6 and System 7 Operating System, Windows, OS/2 and AIX.
Also included are screen fonts which match the fonts in the printer to ensure
WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) printing of text.

Media Support:  The Color Jetprinter PS has excellent paper handling
characteristics.  The single paper tray is equipped to handle anything from
envelopes to B size (11" x 17") paper, and sizes in between.  There are no
expensive options to buy for larger paper sizes.  The Color Jetprinter PS also
features a NO-U-TURN paper path for reliability.

The Color Jetprinter PS prints on a wide range of media including plain paper,
special coated paper, Inkjet transparencies and envelopes.  Acceptable print
quality can be produced on plain paper, but for your print jobs where print
quality is critical, IBM 4079 coated paper is recommended.

Connectivity and Shared Use:  The Color Jetprinter PS is an ideal shared
printer.  With the optional Y-cable (P/N 1331655), up to three interfaces can
be active at once; Parallel, Serial RS-232, and LocalTalk (for connection to
AppleTalk networks).  Each interface has its own receive buffer, allowing it to
receive data while data is being processed from one of the other two
interfaces.  Thus, multiple users can connect and print to the printer
simultaneously (hot ports).  The printer also features SmartSwitch which allows
it to automatically switch between the PostScript and GL emulation modes. Users
who wish to replace both plotters and PostScript color output devices, or who
have software which supports a mix of the two datastreams, will have seamless
plug and play operation, with no need for dip switches or reconfigured drivers.

The Color Jetprinter PS is fully compatible with the IBM 4033 LAN Connection
device, which means that users have instant access to Novell, LAN Manager, OS/2
LAN Server, and AIX.  Support for Fastbytes provides a performance advantage
for users of the Color Jetprinter PS when combined with a 4033 LAN connection.
Fastbytes allows speedy data transfer to clear the LAN of print data quickly
for lower LAN processing overhead and better overall throughput.

The Color Jetprinter PS comes with ink-out sensors for each cartridge, a
tremendous benefit for both stand-alone and shared environments.  When an
out-of-ink condition is detected, the printer automatically pauses and displays
a message informing the operator that a particular cartridge needs replacing.
Upon replacement, printing resumes with no loss of data.  The Color Jetprinter
PS is the only color printer in this price category with this feature.

Reliability:  The reliability of the Color Jetprinter PS is backed with the
strongest service support in the industry:  One year on-site warranty service
from IBM or remarketers!  Add to this the NO-U-TURN paper path for robust media
handling, PostScript compatibility, stunning color quality, excellent
connectivity, small size and ease of use and you truly have a world class
productive business tool.

Physical Specifications

    Width:      520mm (20.5 inches)
    Depth:      406mm (16.0 inches)
    Height:     170mm (6.7 inches)
    Weight:     10kg (22 lbs)

Operating Environment:

    Temperature:        16 to 32 degrees C
                        (61 to 90 degrees F)
                        Non-Operating Environment --
                        10 to 43 degrees C
    Relative humidity:  8 to 80 % (No Condensation)
    Electrical power:   100 -- 120 VAC,
                        50/60 Hz and 200
                        -- 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
    Noise Level:        44 dB at 1 meter
    Certification:      U/L, CSA, FCC (B)

Compatibility:  The IBM 4079 is compatible with applications running under the
following operating systems:

    o  DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0
    o  IBM OS/2 Version 2.0
    o  IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 or Version 3.2 for the RISC/6000
    o  Microsoft Windows 3.0, 3.1
    o  IBM OS/2 Standard Edition 1.30.2 or IBM OS/2 Extended Edition
        1.30.2
    o  Apple System 6 and System 7 Operating System

Limitations: Paper:  Print quality is highly dependent on the type and
composition of the paper used for printing.  Off-the-shelf plain paper can give
variable results. For critical printing needs where high print quality is
essential, IBM 4079 coated paper is recommended.  A plain paper whose
composition at the time of this writing gives acceptable print quality is
Springhill Relay DP 20 lb.

Ink:  Images printed by the IBM 4079 on IBM 4079 coated paper are resistant to
smearing when made wet; however, images printed on plain paper will smear when
made wet.  Images printed with this printer should not be considered to be
archival and printing of negotiable documents with this printer is not
recommended.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. 4070 IBM INK JET PRINTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODEL 001 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JANUARY 28, 1994.)

MODEL 002 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM(R) 4070 IJ is a new addition to the family of IBM Personal Printers. It
is designed for the consumer who is seeking high quality output in a small,
personal desktop printer.  At 83 characters per second in letter quality mode,
the IBM 4070 IJ provides significantly better performance than comparably
priced dot matrix printers printing in letter quality mode.  Its quiet 45 dBA
operation is ideal for the noise sensitive office environment or the home.

The IBM 4070 IJ's 64-nozzle Inkjet printhead provides whisper quiet,
non-impact, laser quality output at up to 360 x 360 dots per inch resolution on
plain cut sheet paper, Inkjet transparencies or envelopes.  It is very small
(only 12.4" x 8.7" x 2.1") and very lightweight (only 4.2 lbs.) allowing it to
easily fit on most desktops.  Its optional battery operation, small size and
light weight make it a good choice for the business person on the go.

Roman, Courier, Sans Serif, Prestige, Script, Orator, Orator-S and Draft fonts,
plus a multitude of print enhancements such as bold, outline, shadow, reverse,
double high, double wide and more, provide the user with the capability to
produce stunning output.

A large 37KB buffer ensures that your printer can run at optimum speed, helping
to free up your PC to do other tasks.  The buffer can also be configured with a
simple dip switch setting as a download buffer for use with downloadable soft
fonts.

The built-in Epson(1) LQ-510, IBM Proprinter(R) X24E and Canon(2) BJ-130E
emulations ensure that there is wide software support available.

The IBM 4070 IJ comes packaged with a 50-sheet automatic cut sheet feeder (on
Model 001 only), a print cartridge, a 3.5-inch diskette with Microsoft(3)
Windows(4) and Works drivers, a User's Reference Guide and an AC Adapter.

The IBM 4070 IJ is provided with a one (1) year Lexmark Express Service
Warranty.

(R) IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corporation in the United States and/or other countries and are   used
under license. (1) Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
(2) Canon is a registered trademark of Canon, Inc. (3) Microsoft is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (4) Windows is a trademark of
Microsoft Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  Product flexibility: Personal desktop printer and Portable printer
    o  Laser quality output with up to 360 x 360 dpi
    o  Very quiet operation (45 dBA)
    o  Compact, light weight, portable design
    o  Fast letter quality operation: 83 characters per second (10 cpi)
    o  High Speed Draft printing: 110 characters per second (10 cpi)
    o  Plain paper, envelopes, and inkjet transparencies supported
    o  Small footprint: 54.6 sq. inches closed, with cut sheet feeder
    o  Light Weight: only 4.2 lbs w/o Cut Sheet Feeder
    o  Optional Battery Operation
    o  8 Built-in fonts: Roman, Sans Serif, Courier, Prestige, Script,
        Orator, Orator-S, Draft
    o  Microsoft Windows and Works drivers included
    o  1 year Lexmark Express Service
    o  Choice of Models: Model 001 with 50 Sheet Cut Sheet Feeder or Model
        002 without

The IBM 4070 IJ printer provides laser-like letter quality printing, near LQ
printing in high speed mode, and stunning graphics in a small, personal desktop
printer.  There are two models available:  001 bundled with a 50 sheet ASF, and
002 with the Auto Sheet Feed as a separate option.  The small size and weight
makes this printer ideal where space, performance, and transportability are
important.  In addition, both models can be used as a true portable when the
optional battery pack is purchased.  There are three emulation/modes and eight
fonts available to the user, making this printer very adaptable to the existing
wire matrix market that it is intended to replace.

The IBM 4070 IJ printer is designed as a small, personal desktop printer where
quality text and graphics are important.  The flexibility of its three
emulation/modes, eight internal fonts, and download capability make this
printer ideal to meet the various needs of user applications.  This printer's
small size and even smaller "non-use" size is an added plus where desk space is
always a premium.

The IBM 4070 IJ printer comes with popular emulation/modes and fonts.  Its
flexible design lets it adapt to an array of changing customer needs:  easy to
move, small footprint, portability, paper handling, and detachable paper feed.
The convenient warranty service is provided by the Lexmark Express Service and
is a 2nd business day exchange program.  One year and three year Lexmark
Extended Express Service programs are available at extra cost.

For the IBM 4070 IJ model 002 printer, the customer can easily move up in
function by purchasing the optional 50-sheet ASF.  This detachable sheet feeder
adds convenience and throughput for the user.  An optional battery pack and
carrying case will also be available for the 4070 printers so they can be used
as true portables.

Physical Specifications: IBM 4070 IJ printer (4070-001) with sheet feed in the
closed, vertical position.

    o  Width:  310mm (12.4 inches)
    o  Depth:  110mm ( 4.4 inches)
    o  Height: 217mm ( 8.7 inches)
    o  Weight: 3.4kg ( 6.8 lbs)

IBM 4070 IJ printer (4070-002) closed in the horizontal position.

    o  width:  310mm (12.4 inches)
    o  Depth:  217mm ( 8.7 inches)
    o  Height:  53mm ( 2.1 inches)
    o  Weight: 1.9Kg ( 4.2 lbs.)

IBM 4070 Automatic Sheet Feeder

    o  Width:  384mm (15.1 inches)
    o  Depth:  292mm (11.5 inches)
    o  Height: 152mm ( 6.0 inches)
    o  Weight: 1.9Kg ( 4.2 lbs.)

Operating Environment Printer only:

    Operating:  41 to 95 Deg F (5 to 35 Deg C) @ 10% to 90% RH
    Storage:    32 to 95 Deg F (0 to 35 Deg C) @  5% to 95% RH

4070 Sheet Feed:

    Operating:  59 to 86 Deg F (15 to 30 Deg C) @ 20% to 80% RH
    Storage:    Same as Printer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. 2380 AND 2381 IBM PERSONAL PRINTER SERIES II IMPACT PRINTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JANUARY 28, 1994.)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM Personal Printer Series II 2380 is a narrow-carriage 9-wire impact
printer. The IBM Personal Printer Series II 2381 is a wide-carriage 9-wire
impact printer. Both printers are designed for attachment to IBM Personal
Computers, IBM Personal Systems and selected IBM displays and processors.

Both are medium-usage printers, offering low-cost ownership and versatile paper
handling with a speed of 320 characters per second in FastDraft mode.

The 2380 and 2381 are excellent choices for customers needing a versatile
forms-handling impact printer.  The printers also offer a new user-friendly
operator panel that can be easily operated by the printer user.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Paper handling
        Cut sheet, continuous forms and envelope paper handling features
        Push and pull mode capability is standard
        Document on Demand is standard
        Front manual cut-sheet slot is standard
        Up to and including 6 part forms are supported
        Paper park function is standard
        Optional Autosheet Feeder available
    o   Speeds
        FastDraft at 320 CPS(10 pitch)
        Draft at 270 CPS(10 pitch)
        Near Letter Quality at 65 CPS(10 pitch)
    o   Multiple typefaces
        Variety of fonts:  Courier, Gothic, Draft and FastDraft
        Variety of resident code pages
        Six pitches:  10, 12, 15, 17, 20, PS
    o   High resolution, (144v X 240h), all points addressable (APA)
        graphics
    o   Functionally accepts the IBM 4201-003 (or 4202-003) datastreams
    o   11 Kb Receive Buffer is standard
    o   Reinking ribbon offering 3.5 million draft characters, user
        adjustable print intensity, easy "clean hands" installation and
        is environmentally sensitive.
    o   Epson(1) FX850/1050 emulation

The IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381) printers provide the user
with cut-sheet, continuous-form, and manual envelope handling capability.

The paper-park feature eliminates the need to reload continuous forms when
switching between paper-handling methods.  The user-friendly operator panel is
designed to enhance operator/user productivity.  The IBM Personal Printer
Series II (2380 and 2381) includes a demonstration that produces a printed page
without system attachment.

Because the IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381) build upon a proven
technology and printer datastream, installation requires minimal changes to the
office environment.

Prior skills of office workers and prior setups of office applications are
carried over into these products.

The improvements made to the setup and operations of these printers reduces
some of the complexities found in previous printers.  These improvements also
lead to improved productivity.

The IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381) provide a constant and
stable base so that as the business grows the printers themselves can continue
to fulfill the needs of the business.

Because these printers are attachable printers across all the IBM platforms,
they provide a very cost-effective printing solution.

MODEL 001

Narrow and wide carriage 9-wire dot matrix impact printers designed for
attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems, selected IBM
displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.

The IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381) printers are customer setup
(CSU). The CSU information is contained in the User's Guide in the National
language, which is supplied with the printers.

The IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381) will print at maximum burst
speed of 320 CPS (10 CPI) and are medium duty printers that are an
outgrowth/improvement of the 4202. Standard character spacing of 10, 12, 15,
17.1, 20 CPIs and Proportional Space are provided. Straight paper path,
multiple- paper paths, Document on Demand, muli-part form handling and a
reinking fabric ribbon cartridge are some of the basic functions of the IBM
Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381).

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380):
        -   Width:  496mm (19.5 inches)
        -   Depth:  286.5mm (11.3 inches)
        -   Height:  200mm (7.9 inches)
        -   Weight:  6.7kg (14.8 lbs)
    o   IBM Personal Printer Series II (2381):
        -   Width:  637.5mm (25.1 inches)
        -   Depth:  286.5mm (11.3 inches)
        -   Height:  200mm (7.9 inches)
        -   Weight:  8.5kg (18.7 lbs)
        -   Acoustics:  55 dBA
        -   Power:  120 vac, 1 phase, 60 Hz.

IBM Personal Printer Series II (2380 and 2381) provides for cut-sheet,
continuous-form paper and envelopes.

Forms Specifications:

                           PPS II (2380)          PPS II (2381)
    Continuous Forms
          Width            76.2 - 254 mm          76.2 - 381 mm
                           3.0 - 10 inches        3.0 - 15 inches
          Length           min 76.2 mm            min 76.2 mm
                           min 3 inches           min 3 inches
    Cut Forms: Manual Insertion
          Width            76.2 - 297 mm          76.2 - 419.1 mm
                           3 - 11.7 inches        3 - 16 inches
          Length           76.2 - 355.6 mm        76.2 - 355.6 mm
                           3 - 14 inches          3 - 14 inches
    Cut Forms: Auto Sheet Feeder
          Width         139.7 - 216 mm         139.7 - 365 mm
                        5.5 - 8.5 inches       5.5 - 14.33 inches
          Length        139.7 - 355.6 mm       139.7 - 355.6 mm
                        5.5 - 14 inches        5.5 - 14 inches
    Envelope: Manual insertion
          Refer to paper weight and thickness

    o   Maximum Envelope Thickness: 0.020-inch
    o   The following standard size envelopes are supported:
        -   No. 6 1/4 Commercial (3.5-inch x 6-inch)
        -   No. 6 3/4 Commercial (3.625-inch x 6.5-inch)
        -   No. 7 3/4 Commercial (3.875-inch x 7.5-inch)
        -   No. 9 Official (3.875-inch x 8.875-inch)
        -   No.10 Official (4.125-inch x 9.5-inch)

    Single part forms:
                     Weight                 Thickness
    Cut form        12 to 24 pound         0.058 to 0.122 mm
                                           0.0023 to 0.0048 inches
    Cut form / ASF  16 to 24 pound         0.076 to 0.122 mm
                                           0.0030 to 0.0048 inches
    Continuous form 15 to 24 pound         0.076 to 0.122 mm
                                           0.0030 to 0.0048 inches

Multipart forms (continuous and cut, excluding ASF)

    Up to 6 part forms not to exceed 0.512 mm (0.02 inches)
    Carbonized and Carbonless paper

                     Weight                 Thickness
    1 to 3 parts  10 to 15 pound         0.048 to 0.074 mm
                                         0.0019 to 0.0029 inches
    4 to 6 parts  10 to 12 pound         0.048 to 0.058 mm
                                         0.0019 to 0.0023 inches
    Carbon        8 pound                0.028 mm or less
                                         0.0011 inches or less

    Continuous Forms must be crimped on both sides
    Metal or tape fasteners along edges are not supported
    Paper hole or cut is not supported in any printable area

The software applications that operate with the IBM Proprinter* III, or IBM
Proprinter IIIXL or Epson FX-850, or 1050 will generally operate with the 2380
and 2381, although they may not support all the capabilities of the 2380 and
2381. The IBM Personal Printer Series II 2380 and 2381 Printers will need to be
in the correct emulation mode for the specific application being used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. 2380 IBM PLUS PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 2380 Plus Printer is a narrow-carriage 9-wire impact printer.  The
printer is designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal
Systems, selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.
It is a medium-usage printer, offering reliable, Near Letter Quality forms
printing, Barcode printing and has excellent paper handling characteristics.
The 2380 Plus is an excellent choice for customers needing a versatile
paper-handling impact printer.

The IBM 2380 Plus is a replacement for the IBM PPS II 2380.  It provides the
paper handling flexibility and reliability of the PPS II straighter paper path
design with exceptional forms printing.  This provides customers with a dual
solution by having an excellent forms printer that is capable of fast, (NLQ)
correspondence.  Functionally, this printer accepts the same data stream as the
PPS II 2380, Proprinter* III and Proprinter III XL.  The printer can emulate
the Epson FX-850 and Epson FX-1050.  It is designed for attachment to IBM
Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems, selected IBM displays and processors,
and compatible non-IBM systems via a parallel or serial (optional) interface.
A parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Resident Barcodes
    o   Forms Macros
    o   Multiple Paper Paths
    o   Variable Forms Length (Standard)
    o   144V X 240H APA Graphics Resolution
    o   4 Resident Fonts
    o   Font, Pitch and Panel Lock
    o   11K Buffer
    o   Parallel cable included
    o   Options
        -   32k Memory
        -   Acoustics Package
        -   Serial Adapter
        -   Auto Sheet Feed
        -   Extended Manual Cut Sheet Guides

The IBM 2380 Plus will provide customers with an affordable solution for
printing professional looking text documents with the ability to handle a wide
variety of forms. User's of the IBM PPS II 2380 will benefit from the common
parts and supplies with the IBM 2380 Plus.

The IBM 2380 Plus is designed to be easy to use.  Printer installation and
setup time is minimal. The User's Reference is shipped with the printer, and
contains the instructions needed for setting up and using the IBM 2380 Plus
printer. Unpacking, setup and start-up are designed to allow the customer to
make the printer operational and/or relocate the printer without special tools
or special operator skills.  A parallel cable is shipped standard with each
printer.

The IBM 2380 Plus provides a low cost solution for users wanting high quality
text and forms printing at an affordable price. The standard ribbon yield of 4
million characters offers a better value for the customer than either the Epson
FX 870 or the Okidata ML320. The IBM 2380 Plus and the IBM PPS II 2380 ribbons
are compat- ible which offers current IBM PPS II user's the advantage of common
supplies with reduced supplies inventory.

SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Operating
        -   Temperature:  50 to 104F (10 to 40C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  80.6F (27C)
    o   Non-Operating
        -   Temperature:  50 to 125.6F (10 to 52C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  80.6F (27C)
    o   Storage
        -   Temperature:  33.8 to 140F (1 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)
    o   Shipping
        -   Temperature:  -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 100% RH (excluding rain)
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature: 84.2F (29C)

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Dimensions Base Printer
        -   Width:  477 mm (18.8 in.)
        -   Depth:  287 mm (11.3 in.)
        -   Height:  191 mm (7.5 in.)
        -   Weight:  7.0 kg (15.4 lb)
    o   Shipping Carton Specifications:
        -   Width:  610 mm (20.7 in.)
        -   Depth:  413 mm (14.0 in.)
        -   Height:  324 mm (12.8 in.)
        -   Weight:  1.1 kg (2.5 lb)
    o   Packaged Base Printer:
        -   Weight: 8.1 kg (17.9 lb)
    o   Operating Clearance:
        -   77mm (3.0 in) on the left and right side
    o   Acoustics:
        -   55 dBA operating
    o   Power Consumption:
        -   120 Watts - Operating
        -   15 Watts - Idle
    o   Electrical Specification:
        -   120 Volts AC 1-Phase; 60 Hz
    o   Certification: U/L, CSA, VDE, FCC(B), CISPR

Printer Specifications:

    o   Maximum Speed: Up to 320 cps in Fast Draft; Up to 270 cps in
        Draft; Up to 65 cps in Letter Quality
    o   Addressability: 240 X 144 dots per inch
    o   Ribbon average yield: 4 Million Characters (DRAFT)
    o   Datastreams: IBM PPS II 238x, Proprinter III, Proprinter III XL,
        Epson FX 850 and Epson FX 1050
    o   Standard Memory: 11K, Expandable to 43K maximum
    o   Fonts:  Resident fonts are supported for code pages 437, 850,
        860, 863, and 865.
        -   Fast Draft
        -   Draft
        -   Gothic
        -   Courier
    o   Interface: Parallel interface with standard Centronics protocol;
        RS-232/RS-422 Serial connection optional
    o   Usage: Average = 1 Million Characters/month; Maximum = 2 Million
        Characters/month
    o   Paper Handling
        Continuous Forms and Manual Cut Sheet/Envelope handling is
        standard. Continuous Forms may be loaded in either the push or
        pull modes. The Auto Sheet Feeder Option is available to
        automatically feed cut sheets and can be used in conjunction
        with continuous forms and manually fed cut sheets or multi-part
        forms.

The IBM 2380 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM Personal Computers and
IBM Personal Systems.

    o   PS/ValuePoint* Systems
    o   IBM Eduquest Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers XT
    o   IBM Personal Computers AT
    o   IBM PS/2 Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Typing System/2
    o   IBM PS/1
    o   IBM PS/2 Notebooks
    o   AMBRA systems

The IBM 2380 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM products:

    o   The 4033 IBM LAN Connection (all models)
    o   IBM ES/9370* and ES/9000* Model 120, 130, 150, 170, and 200
        ASCII Subsystem Controller with IBM 3287 Printer emulation.
        Note: Specify RS-232-C/V.24 Modem interface on the 937X order
        to obtain the correct attachment cable (P/N 92X2785, #3160) on
        the 937X feature.
    o   IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
        with IBM 3287 printer emulation configured as an IBM Proprinter*
        (4201).
    o   IBM RISC System/6000*:
        -   Xstations* 120, 130, and 150
        -   POWERstation/POWERserver* 200, 300, and 500 Series
        -   POWERstation M20, M2A, and 700 Series
        -   POWERserver 900 Series
    o   IBM AS/400 System*
        When attached to the AS/400 as a host attached printer the IBM
        2380 Plus Printer emulates a host attached printer, thus full
        function of the IBM 2380 Pl  us Printer is not realized.

CABLES The following computer cables are available for the printer:

    Part
    Number      Description

    92F3176 *   Parallel Cable
    8509386     Serial Cable (requires serial interface P/N 1363110,
                              F/C #3110)
    1363110     Serial Adapter   (required for serial connection)

    * A parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.
PC parallel and serial attachment are available via the same connector.

The IBM 2380 Plus is compatible with applications running under the following
operating systems:

    o   DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0, 6.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition and IBM OS/2 Extended Edition support
        the IBM 2380 Plus Printer using the IBM 42xx Driver with the IBM
        4207 Proprinter X24E selection as the printer type under printer
        properties. Users of IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.2 or
        IBM Extended Edition Version 1.2 may obtain a copy of the IBM
        42xx Driver through the Electronic Device Driver Distribution
        Mechanism.
        -   Limitations:
            OS/2 Presentation Manager applications will have access to
            printer resident fonts for code pages 437 and 850 for optimum
            text printing performance and print quality. Code pages other
            than 437 and 850 will be supported with OS/2 System Fonts.
    o   AIX*
        -   IBM AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 supports the IBM
            2380 Plus Printer as a parallel or serial (RS-232 or RS-422)
            attached IBM 4207-002 Proprinter X24E (or IBM 4208-002
            Proprinter XL24E).
        -   IBM AIX Version 3.2 "nroff" function support the 2380 Plus
            Printer as a PPDS printer.
        -   The Xstation 120, 130, and 150 supports the IBM 2380 Plus
            Printer as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM
            4207-002 (or IBM 4208-002) printer.
        -   IBM AIX PS/2 Version 1.3 supports the IBM 2380 Plus Printer
            as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM 4207-002 (or
            IBM 4208-002) printer.
    o   IBM 4680 OS all versions support the IBM 2380 Plus Printer as a
        parallel attached IBM 4207 (or 4208) Proprinter in PPDS
        (Personal Printer Data Stream) mode.

The IBM 2380 Plus DOS National Language Support (NLS) is provided through use
of the IBM Quietwriter III (5202) CPI file.

The software applications which operate with the IBM Proprinter, IBM Proprinter
XL, IBM Quietwriter III Printer (5202) and IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001,
E01 and  IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will generally operate with IBM 2380
Plus, although they may not support all the new capabilities (that is, resident
scalable fonts and many of the card fonts, multiple orientation command, font
download feature, and optional paper handling features).  The IBM 2380 Plus
handles some commands and operations differently.

The software applications that operate with the IBM 7372 and HP 7475A color
plotters will generally operate with the IBM 2380 Plus, although they may not
support all the new capabilities of the printer. The IBM 2380 Plus handles some
commands and operations differently.

The IBM 2380 supports a standard parallel interface via a 36-pin host interface
connector.  A serial adapter option is available.

    o   High Speed Parallel Interface
        This interface is used for attachment to an IBM Personal
        Computer or non-IBM personal computer which supports the same 8-
        bit interface and commands.  This interface is also commonly
        referred to as Centronics parallel and is capable of receiving
        data up to 150 Kbytes per second The factory default of the
        printer is the parallel interface. A parallel cable is shipped
        standard with each printer.
    o   Serial Adapter  (EIA-RS-232 and RS-422 support) Features: DSR
        Ignore, Zero Buffer and Robust XON/XOFF
        This adapter is used for attachment to IBM Personal Computers,
        IBM Personal Systems, and other computers supporting the RS-232
        (revision C, D and E) or RS-422-A interface. The adapter is
        configured as a DTE device. The adapter supports DTR (hardware
        handshaking) and XON/XOFF (software handshaking) protocols.
        Data transmission rates up to 19,200 baud are supported for
        RS-232 (38,400 baud for RS-422). The adapter factory defaults
        are 9600 baud DTR protocol, 8 data bits, and no parity in RS-232
        mode. There are 12 switches to allow the user to configure the
        adapter's default settings.

SPECIAL FEATURES EXTENDED MANUAL CUT SHEET GUIDES (#0859) Reduces the
possibility of skewing when manually feeding cut sheets longer than 11 inches.

ACOUSTICS OPTION (NARROW) (#2972) Reduces the decibel level by 2 dBA.

32KB MEMORY (5220) Additional memory allows expansion of the printer buffer
from 11KB to 43KB.

AUTOMATIC SHEET FEED (NARROW) (#3646) Automatically feeds cut sheets.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. 2381 IBM PLUS PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 2381 Plus Printer is a wide-carriage 9-wire impact printer.  The
printer is designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal
Systems, selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.
It is a medium-usage printer, offering reliable, Near Letter Quality forms
printing, Barcode printing and has excellent paper handling characteristics.
The 2381 Plus is an excellent choice for customers needing a versatile
paper-handling impact printer.

The IBM 2381 Plus is a replacement for the IBM PPS II 2381.  It provides the
paper handling flexability and reliability of the PPS II straighter paper path
design with exceptional forms printing.  This provides customers with a dual
solution by having an excellent forms printer that is capable of fast, (NLQ)
correspondence.  Functionally, this printer accepts the same data stream as the
PPS II 2381, Proprinter* III and Proprinter III XL.  The printer can emulate
the Epson FX-850 and Epson FX-1050.  It is designed for attachment to IBM
Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems, selected IBM displays and processors,
and compatible non-IBM systems via a parallel or serial (optional) interface. A
parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Resident Barcodes
    o   Forms Macros
    o   Multiple Paper Paths
    o   Variable Forms Length (Standard)
    o   144V X 240H APA Graphics Resolution
    o   4 Resident Fonts
    o   Font, Pitch and Panel Lock
    o   11K Buffer
    o   Parallel cable included
    o   Options
        -   32k Memory
        -   Acoustics Package
        -   Serial Adapter
        -   Auto Sheet Feed
        -   Extended Manual Cut Sheet Guides

The IBM 2381 Plus will provide customers with an affordable solution for
printing professional looking text documents with the ability to handle a wide
variety of forms. User's of the IBM PPS II 2381 will benefit from the common
parts and supplies with the IBM 2381 Plus.

The IBM 2381 Plus is designed to be easy to use.  Printer installation and
setup time is minimal. The User's Reference is shipped with the printer, and
contains the instructions needed for setting up and using the IBM 2381 Plus
printer. Unpacking, setup and start-up are designed to allow the customer to
make the printer operational and/or relocate the printer without special tools
or special operator skills. A parallel cable is shipped standard with each
printer.

The IBM 2381 Plus provides a low cost solution for users wanting high quality
text and forms printing at an affordable price. The standard ribbon yield of 4
million characters offers a better value for the customer than either the Epson
FX 870 or the Okidata ML320. The IBM 2381 Plus and the IBM PPS II 2381 ribbons
are compat- ible which offers current IBM PPS II user's the advantage of common
supplies with reduced supplies inventory.

SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Operating
        -   Temperature: 50 to 104F (10 to 40C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  80.6F (27C)
    o   Non-Operating
        -   Temperature:  50 to 125.6F (10 to 52C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  80.6F (27C)
    o   Storage
        -   Temperature:  33.8 to 140F (1 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)
    o   Shipping
        -   Temperature:  -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 100% RH (excluding rain)
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Dimensions Base Printer:
        -   Width:  619 mm (24.4 in.)
        -   Depth:  287 mm (11.3 in.)
        -   Height:  191 mm (7.5 in.)
        -   Weight:  8.8 kg (19.4 lbs)
    o   Shipping Carton Specifications:
        -   Width:  749 mm (29.5 in.)
        -   Depth:  413 mm (16.3 in.)
        -   Height: 324 mm (12.3 in.)
    o   Packaged Base Printer:
        -   Weight:  10.2 kg (22.4 lbs)
    o   Operating Clearance:
        -   77mm (3.0 in) on the left and right side
    o   Acoustics:
        -   55 dBA operating
    o   Power Consumption:
        -   120 Watts Operating
        -   15 Watts Idle
    o   Electrical Specification:
        -   120 - 127 Volts  60 Hz
    o   Certification: U/L, CSA, VDE, FCC(B), CISPR

Printer Specifications:

    o   Maximum Speed:  Up to 320 cps in Fast Draft; Up to 270 cps in
        Draft; Up to  65 cps in Letter Quality
    o   Addressability: 240 X 144 dots per inch
    o   Ribbon average yield: 4 Million Characters (DRAFT)
    o   Datastreams: IBM PPS II 2380 and 2381, Proprinter III, Proprinter
        III XL, Epson FX 850 and Epson FX 1050
    o   Standard Memory: 11K Expandable to 43K maximum
    o   Fonts:  Resident fonts are supported for code pages 437, 850,
        860, 863, and 865.
        -   Fast Draft
        -   Draft
        -   Gothic
        -   Courier
    o   Interface: Parallel interface with standard Centronics protocol;
        RS-232/RS-422 Serial connection optional
    o   Usage: Average = 1 Million Characters/month; Maximum = 2 Million
        Characters/month
    o   Paper Handling
        Continuous Forms and Manual Cut Sheet/Envelope handling is
        standard. Continuous Forms may be loaded in either the push or
        pull modes. The Auto Sheet Feeder Option is available to
        automatically feed cut sheets and can be used in conjunction with
        continuous forms and manually fed cut sheets or multi-part forms.

The IBM 2381 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM Personal Computers and
IBM Personal Systems.

    o   PS/ValuePoint* Systems
    o   IBM Eduquest Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers XT
    o   IBM Personal Computers AT
    o   IBM PS/2 Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Typing System/2
    o   IBM PS/1
    o   IBM PS/2 Notebooks
    o   AMBRA systems

The IBM 2381 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM products:

    o   The 4033 IBM LAN Connection (all models)
    o   IBM ES/9370 and ES/9000 model 120, 130, 150, 170, and 200 ASCII
        Subsystem Controller with IBM 3287 Printer emulation.  Note:
        Specify RS-232-C/V.24 Modem interface on the 937X order to obtain
        the correct attachment cable (IBM P/N 92X2785 #3160) on the 937X
        feature.
    o   IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
        with IBM 3287 printer emulation configured as an IBM Proprinter*
        (4201).
    o   IBM RISC System/6000*:
        -   Xstations* 120, 130, and 150
        -   POWERstation/POWERserver* 200, 300, and 500 Series
        -   POWERstation* M20, M2A, and 700 Series
        -   POWERserver 900 Series
    o   IBM AS/400 System*
        When attached to the AS/400 as a host attached printer the IBM
        2381 Plus Printer emulates a host attached printer, thus full
        function of the IBM 2381 Pl  us Printer is not realized.

CABLES The following computer cables are available for the printer:

    Part
    Number      Description

    92F3176 *   Parallel Cable
    8509386     Serial Cable (requires serial interface P/N 1363110,
                              F/C #3110)
    1363110     Serial Adapter (required for serial connection)

    * A parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.

PC parallel and serial attachment are available via the same connector.

    o   Personal Computers
        The parallel printer cable (P/N 92F3176, #3176) is required for
        attachment of the IBM 2381 Plus Printer. One cable is shipped
        with each printer. For PC serial attachment, the printer serial
        cable (P/N 8509386, #6031) should be ordered.  PC/AT* also
        requires a 9 to 25-pin cable adaptor for serial attachment
        (P/N 6450242, #0242).
    o   IBM AS/400
        If ordered for parallel attachment through a display or PC,
        parallel cable (P/N 92F3176, #3176) is shipped with each printer.
        If ordered for serial attachment through a PC, printer serial
        cable (P/N 8509386, #6031) or equivalent is required.
        For serial attachment to the IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation
        Controller, refer to the "IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation Reference
        and Example" manual (SA41-9922) for specific cable information.
        This attachment requires a serial cable selected from the
        referenced manual (SA41-9922) as well as the Serial Adapter P/N
        1363110, #3110.
    o   RISC System/6000
        EIA-232 attachment requires an IBM Asynchronous cable
        EIA-232/V.24 (P/N 6323741, #2936) with a printer/terminal
        interposer EIA-232 (P/N 58F2861, #2937), and a Serial Interface
        Adapter (P/N 1363110, #3110).
    o   IBM ES/9370* and ES/9000* model 120, 130, 150, 170, and 200 ASCII
        Subsystem, Controller.  Printer serial cable (P/N 8509386 #6031).
        Must also have Serial Adapter (P/N 1363110, #3110).
    o   IBM 3174 Subsystem Control Unit Asynchronous Emulation Adapter.

Compatibility:  The IBM 2381 Plus is compatible with applications running under
the following operating systems:

    o   DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0, 6.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition and IBM OS/2 Extended Edition support
        the IBM 2381 Plus Printer using the IBM 42xx Driver with the IBM
        4208 Proprinter XL24E selection as the printer type under printer
        properties. Users of IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.2 or IBM
        Extended Edition Version 1.2 may obtain a copy of the IBM 42xx
        Driver through the Electronic Device Driver Distribution
        Mechanism.
        -   Limitations
            OS/2 Presentation Manager applications will have access to
            printer resident fonts for code pages 437 and 850 for optimum
            text printing performance and print quality. Code pages other
            than 437 and 850 will be supported with OS/2 System Fonts.
        -   AIX*
            --  IBM AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 supports the IBM
                2381 Plus Printer as a parallel or serial (RS-232 or RS-
                422) attached IBM 4207-002 Proprinter X24E (or IBM 4208-
                002 Proprinter XL24E).
            --  IBM AIX Version 3.2 "nroff" function support the 2381
                Plus Printer as a PPDS printer.
            --  The Xstation 120, 130, and 150 supports the IBM 2381
                Plus Printer as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232)
                IBM 4207-002 (or IBM 4208-002) printer.
            --  IBM AIX PS/2 Version 1.3 supports the IBM 2381 Plus
                Printer as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM
                4207-002 (or IBM 4208-002) printer.
        -   IBM 4680 OS all versions support the IBM 2381 Plus Printer
            as a parallel attached IBM 4207 (or 4208) Proprinter in PPDS
            (Personal Printer Data Stream) mode.

The IBM 2381 Plus DOS National Language Support (NLS) is provided through use
of the IBM Quietwriter III (5202) CPI file.

The software applications which operate with the IBM Proprinter, IBM Proprinter
XL, IBM Quietwriter III Printer (5202) and IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001,
E01 and  IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will generally operate with IBM 2381
Plus, although they may not support all the new capabilities (that is, resident
scalable fonts and many of the card fonts, multiple orientation command, font
download feature, and optional paper handling features).  The IBM 2381 Plus
handles some commands and operations differently.

The software applications that operate with the IBM 7372 and HP 7475A color
plotters will generally operate with the IBM 2381 Plus, although they may not
support all the new capabilities of the printer. The IBM 2381 Plus handles some
commands and operations differently.

The IBM 2381 Plus supports a standard parallel interface via a 36-pin host
interface connector.  A serial adapter option is available.

    o   High Speed Parallel Interface
        This interface is used for attachment to an IBM Personal Computer
        or non-IBM personal computer which supports the same 8-bit
        interface and commands.  This interface is also commonly referred
        to as Centronics parallel and is capable of receiving data up to
        150 Kbytes per second The factory default of the printer is the
        parallel interface. A parallel cable is shipped standard with
        each printer.
    o   Serial Adapter  (EIA-RS-232 and RS-422 support)
        Features: DSR Ignore, Zero Buffer and Robust XON/XOFF
        This adapter is used for attachment to IBM Personal Computers,
        IBM Personal Systems, and other computers supporting the RS-232
        (revision C, D and E) or RS-422-A interface. The adapter is
        configured as a DTE device. The adapter supports DTR (hardware
        handshaking) and XON/XOFF (software handshaking) protocols.  Data
        transmission rates up to 19,200 baud are supported for RS-232
        (38,400 baud for RS-422). The adapter factory defaults are 9600
        baud DTR protocol, 8 data bits, and no parity in RS-232 mode.
        There are 12 switches to allow the user to configure the
        adapter's default settings.

SPECIAL FEATURES EXTENDED MANUAL CUT SHEET GUIDES (#0859) Reduces the
possibility of skewing when manually feeding cut sheets longer than 11 inches.

ACOUSTICS OPTION (WIDE) (#2973) Reduces the decibel level by 2 dBA.

32KB MEMORY (#5220) Additional memory allows expansion of the printer buffer
from 11KB to 43KB.

AUTOMATIC SHEET FEED (WIDE) (#3658) Automatically feeds cut sheets. *Signifies
a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. 2390 AND 2391 IBM PERSONAL PRINTER SERIES II IMPACT PRINTERS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JANUARY 28, 1994.)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM Personal Printer Series II 2390 is a narrow-carriage 24-wire impact
printer; the IBM Personal Printer Series II 2391 is a wide-carriage 24-wire
impact printer. Both printers are designed for attachment to IBM Personal
Computers, IBM Personal Systems and selected IBM displays and processors.

Both are medium-usage printers, offering low-cost ownership and versatile
paper-handling with speeds of up to 200 characters per second (CPS) in
FastDraft mode and up to 60 CPS in Letter Quality mode.  The IBM Personal
Printer Series II (PPS II) 2390 and 2391 printers are excellent choices for
customers needing a versatile paper-handling impact printer or entry level,
high resolution desktop graphics printer.  The printers also offer a new
user-friendly operator panel that can be easily operated by the printer user.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Paper-handling versatility:
        Can handle cut-sheet paper, continuous forms and envelopes.
        Standard capabilities include push and pull tractor modes, document
        on demand, front manual cut-sheet slot, and paper-park function.
        One to four part forms are supported
        Automatic Sheet Feed (ASF) feature is optional
    o   Multiple speeds:
        FastDraft - up to 200 CPS (10 pitch)
        Draft - up to 180 CPS (10 pitch)
        Letter Quality - up to 60 CPS (10 pitch)
    o   Multiple typefaces:
        Variety of standard fonts:  Courier, Gothic, Orator, Prestige,
        Presentor and Script
        Variety of resident code pages
        Seven pitches:  10, 12, 15, 17, 20, 24, PS
    o   Graphics resolution (360 x 360 dots per inch)
    o   32-kilobyte (32Kb) Receive Buffer is standard
    o   Environmentally sensitive reinking ribbon offers 3.5 million draft
        characters, user-adjustable print intensity, and easy "clean hands"
        installation.
    o   Functionally accepts the IBM 4207-002 (or 4208-002) data streams.
    o   Epson (1) LQ-850/1050 emulation

The IBM PPS II 2390 and 2391 printers provide users with cut-sheet,
continuous-form, and manual envelope handling capability.  The paper-park
feature eliminates the need to reload continuous forms when switching between
paper-handling methods.  The user-friendly operator panel is designed to
enhance operator/user productivity.  The IBM PPS II includes a demonstration
that produces a printed page without system attachment.

Because the IBM Personal Printer Series II (2390 and 2391) builds upon a proven
technology and printer data stream, installation requires minimal changes to
the office environment.  Prior skills of office workers and prior setups of
office applications are carried over into these products.

The improvements made to the setup and operations of these printers reduces
some of the complexities found in previous printers.  These improvements also
lead to improved productivity.

The IBM PPS II 2390 and 2391 provide a constant and stable base so that as a
business grows the printers themselves can continue to fulfill the needs of
that business.

Because these printers are attachable across all the IBM platforms, they
provide a very cost-effective printing solution.

MODEL 001

Narrow and wide carriage 24 wire dot matrix impact printers designed for
attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems, selected IBM
displays and processors.

The IBM Personal Printer Series II (2390 and 2391) is a customer setup (CSU)
printer. The CSU information is contained in the "User's Guide" which is
supplied with the printer in the National Language.

The IBM Personal Printer Series II (2390 and 2391) will print at maximum burst
speed of up to 200 CPS (10 CPI) and are medium duty printers that is an
outgrowth / improvement of the 4207/4208. Standard character spacing of 10, 12,
15, 17.1, 20, 24 CPIs and Proportional Space are provided. An almost straight
paper path, multiple paper paths, Document on Demand, multi-part form handling,
high resolution graphics, and a reinking ribbon are some of the basic functions
of the IBM Personal Printer Series II (2390 and 2391).

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   2390 printer:
        Width:  496mm (19.5 inches)
        Depth:  286.5mm (11.3 inches)
        Height:  200mm (7.9 inches)
        Weight:  6.5kg (14.3 pounds)
        Acoustics:  55dBA (1 meter average)
        Power:  120 vac, 1 phase, 60 Hz.
    o   2391 printer:
        Width:  637.5mm (25.1 inches)
        Depth:  286.5mm (11.3 inches)
        Height:  200mm (7.9 inches)
        Weight:  8.5kg (18.7 lbs)
        Acoustics:  55dBA (1 meter average)
        Power:  120 vac, 1 phase, 60 Hz.

Paper Description:  The IBM PPS II 2390 and 2391 printers support cut-sheet
paper, continuous-form paper, and envelopes.

Forms specification -- Size:

                             PPS II (2390)          PPS II (2391)

    Continuous Forms
          Width            76.2 - 254mm           76.2 - 381mm
                           3.0 - 10 inches        3.0 - 15 inches
          Length           76.2mm minimum         76.2mm minimum
                           3.0 inches minimum     3.0 inches minimum
    Cut Forms: Manual Insertion
          Width            76.2 - 297 mm          76.2 - 420 mm
                           3.0 - 11.7 inches      3.0 - 16.5 inches
          Length           76.2 - 355.6 mm        76.2 - 355.6 mm
                           3.0 - 14 inches        3.0 - 14 inches
    Cut Forms: Auto Sheet Feeder(ASF)
          Width            139.7 - 216 mm         139.7 - 365 mm
                           5.5 - 8.5 inches       5.5 - 14.3 inches
          Length           139.7 - 355.6 mm       139.7 - 355.6 mm
                           5.5 - 14 inches        5.5 - 14 inches

      Forms Specifications -- Weight and Thickness:

    o   Single part forms

    Description         Weight                 Thickness
    Cut-form            12 to 24 pounds        0.058 to 0.122 mm
                                               0.0023 to 0.0048 inches
    Cut-form/ASF        16 to 24 pounds        0.076 to 0.122 mm
                                               0.0030 to 0.0048 inches
    Continuous form     15 to 24 pounds        0.076 to 0.122 mm
                                               0.0030 to 0.0048 inches

    o   Multipart forms (continuous and cut, excluding ASF)
        -   Up to 4-part forms not to exceed 0.014 inches.
        -   Carbonized and carbonless paper:

    Description        Weight                 Thickness
    1 to 4 parts       10 to 16 pounds        0.0019 to 0.0029 inches
    Carbon             8 pounds               0.0011 inches or less

    -   Continuous forms must be crimped on both sides
    -   Metal or tape fasteners along edges are not supported
    -   Paper hole or cut is not supported in any printable area

Envelope Specifications: Envelopes are inserted manually.

    o   Maximum Envelope Thickness:  0.014 inch
    o   The following standard size envelopes are supported:
        -   No. 6 1/4 Commercial (3.5 inch x 6 inch)
        -   No. 6 3/4 Commercial (3.625 inch x 6.5 inch)
        -   No. 7 3/4 Commercial (3.875 inch x 7.5 inch)
        -   No. 9 Official (3.875 inch x 8.875 inch)
        -   No.10 Official (4.125 inch x 9.5 inch)
        -   ISO/DIN D1 (4.33 inch x 8.66 inch)
        -   ISO/DIN C6 (4.49 inch x 6.38 inch)

The software applications that operate with the IBM Proprinter* 24P, IBM PS/1
Printer, IBM Proprinter* X24E or XL24E, Epson LQ-850, or Epson LQ-1050 will
generally operate with the 2390 and 2391, although they may not support all the
capabilities of the 2390 and 2391. The IBM Personal Printer Series II 2390 and
2391 Printers will need to be in the correct emulation mode for the specific
application being used (IBM or Epson mode).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. 2390 IBM PLUS PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 2390 Plus Printer is a narrow-carriage 24-wire impact printer.  The
printer is designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal
Systems, selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.
It is a medium-usage printer, offering reliable, Letter Quality forms printing,
Barcode printing and has excellent paper handling characteristics.  The 2390
Plus is an excellent choice for customers needing a versatile paper-handling
impact printer, or entry desktop graphics printer because of the high
resolution achieved.

The IBM 2390 Plus is a replacement for the IBM PPS II 2390.  It provides the
paper handling flexibility and reliability of the PPS II straighter paper path
design with the resolution of a 24 wire printer. This provides customers with a
dual solution by having a high resolution printer for quality correspondence
that also has the capability of reliably handling a variety of forms.
Functionally, this printer accepts the same data stream as the IBM PPS II 2390/
2391, PS/1 2390, Proprinter* 24P, PS/1 2205, Proprinter* 24E/ XL24E and IBM
ExecJet. The printer can emulate the Epson LQ-850 and Epson LQ-1050. It is
designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems,
selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems via a
parallel or serial (optional) interface. A parallel cable is shipped standard
with each printer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Resident Barcodes
    o   Forms Macros
    o   Multiple Paper Paths
    o   Variable Forms Length (Standard)
    o   360 X 360 dpsi
    o   8 Resident Fonts
    o   Font, Pitch and Panel Lock
    o   32K Buffer
    o   Parallel cable included
    o   Options:
        -   32k NVRAM
        -   Acoustics Package
        -   Serial Adapter
        -   Auto Sheet Feed
        -   Download Font Module
        -   Extended Manual Cut Sheet Guides

The IBM 2390 Plus will provide customers with an affordable solution for
printing professional looking text documents with the ability to handle a wide
variety of forms. User's of the IBM PPS II 2390 will benefit from the common
parts and supplies with the IBM 2390 Plus.

The IBM 2390 Plus is designed to be easy to use.  Printer installation and
setup time is minimal. The "User's Reference" is shipped with the printer, and
contains the instructions needed for setting up and using the IBM 2390 Plus
printer. Unpacking, setup and start-up are designed to allow the customer to
make the printer operational and/or relocate the printer without special tools
or special operator skills. A parallel cable is shipped with each printer.

The IBM 2390 Plus provides a low cost solution for users wanting high quality
text and forms printing at an affordable price. The standard ribbon yield of 4
million characters offers a better value for the customer than either the Epson
FX 870 or the Okidata ML320. The IBM 2390 Plus and the IBM PPS II 2390 ribbons
are compat- ible which offers current IBM PPS II user's the advantage of common
supplies with reduced supplies inventory.

SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Operating
        -   Temperature:  50 to 104F (10 to 40C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature: 80.6 deg F (27 deg C)
    o   Non-Operating
        -   Temperature:  50 to 125.6F (10 to 52C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  80.6F (27C)
    o   Storage
        -   Temperature:  33.8 to 140F (1 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)
    o   Shipping
        -   Temperature: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 100% RH (excluding rain)
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Dimensions Base Printer:
        -   Width:  477 mm (18.8 in)
        -   Depth:  287 mm (11.3 in)
        -   Height: 191 mm (7.5  in)
        -   Weight: 7.0 Kg (15.4 lbs)
    o   Shipping Carton Specifications:
        -   Width:  610 mm (24.0in)
        -   Depth:  413 mm (16.3in)
        -   Height: 324 mm (12.8in)
        -   Weight: 1.1 Kg ( 2.5 lbs)
    o   Packaged Base Printer:
        -   Weight: 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs)
    o   Operating Clearance:
        -   77mm (3.0 in) on the left and right side
    o   Acoustics:
        -   55 dBA operating
    o   Power Consumption:
        -   120 Watts - Operating
        -   15 Watts - Idle
    o   Electrical Specification:
        -   120 Volts  60 Hz
    o   Certification: U/L, CSA, VDE, FCC(B), CISPR

Printer Specifications:

    o   Maximum Speed: Up to 233 cps in Fast Draft; Up to 210 cps in
        Draft; Up to 70 cps in Letter Quality
    o   Addressability: 360 X 360 dots per inch
    o   Ribbon average yield: 4 Million Characters (DRAFT)
    o   Datastreams: IBM PPS II 2390/2391, PS/1 2390, Proprinter 24P,
        PS/1 2205, Proprinter 24E/XL24E, IBM ExecJet, Epson LQ-850 and
        Epson LQ-1050
    o   Standard Memory: 32K
    o   Fonts:  Resident fonts are supported for code pages 437, 850,
        860, 863, and 865.
        -   Fast Draft
        -   Draft
        -   Gothic
        -   Courier
        -   Prestige
        -   Presentor
        -   Orator
        -   Script
    o   Down Load Font Option - Contains an additional 65 fonts that you
        can download from your computer to your printer.  The 32k NVRAM
        option (P/N 1180725) must be installed on your printer in order
        to use the Down Load Font Option.
    o   Interface: Parallel interface with standard Centronics protocol
        RS-232/RS-422 Serial connection optional
    o   Usage: Average = 1 Million Characters/month; Maximum = 2 Million
        Characters/month
    o   Paper Handling
        Continuous Forms and Manual Cut Sheet/Envelope handling is
        standard. Continuous Forms may be loaded in either the push or
        pull modes. The Auto Sheet Feeder Option is available to
        automatically feed cut sheets and can be used in conjunction
        with continuous forms and manually fed cut sheets and multi-part
        forms.

The IBM 2390 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM Personal Computers and
IBM Personal Systems.

    o   PS/ValuePoint Systems
    o   IBM Eduquest Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers XT
    o   IBM Personal Computers AT
    o   IBM PS/2 Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Typing System/2
    o   IBM PS/1
    o   IBM PS/2 Notebooks
    o   AMBRA systems

The IBM 2390 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM products:

    o   The 4033 IBM LAN Connection (all models)
    o   IBM ES/9370 and ES/9000 model 120, 130, 150, 170 and 200 ASCII
        Subsystem Controller with IBM 3287 Printer emulation.
        Note: Specify RS-232-C/V.24 Modem interface on the 937X order to
        obtain the correct attachment cable (IBM P/N 92X2785 #3160) on
        the 937X feature.
    o   IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
        with IBM 3287 printer emulation configured as an IBM Proprinter*
        (4201).
    o   IBM RISC System/6000*:
        -   Xstations 120, 130, and 150
        -   POWERstation/POWERserver* 200, 300, and 500 Series
        -   POWERstation M20, M2A, and 700 Series
        -   POWERserver 900 Series
    o   IBM AS/400* System
        When attached to the AS/400 as a host attached printer the IBM
        2390 Plus Printer emulates a host attached printer, thus full
        function of the IBM 2390 Plus Printer is not realized.

CABLES The following computer cables are available for the printer:

    Part
    Number      Description

    92F3176 *   Parallel Cable
    8509386     Serial Cable (requires serial interface P/N 1363110,
                F/C #3110)
    1363110     Serial Adapter (required for serial connection)

    * A parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.

PC parallel and serial attachment are available via the same connector.

    o   Personal Computers
        The parallel printer cable (P/N 92F3176 #3176), is required for
        attachment of the IBM 2390 Plus Printer.  One cable is shipped
        with each printer. For PC serial attachment, the printer serial
        cable (P/N 8509386 #6031) should be ordered.  PC/AT* also
        requires a 9 to 25-pin cable adaptor for serial attachment (P/N
        6450242 #0242).
    o   IBM AS/400
        If ordered for parallel attachment through a display or PC,
        parallel cable (P/N 92F3176 #3176) is shipped for each printer.
        If ordered for serial attachment through a PC, printer serial
        cable (P/N 8509386, #6031) or equivalent is required.
        For serial attachment to the IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation
        Controller, refer to the IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation Reference
        and Example manual (SA41-9922) for specific cable information.
        This attachment requires a serial cable selected from the
        referenced manual (SA41-9922) as well as the Serial Adapter P/N
        1363110, F/C 3110.
    o   RISC System/6000
        EIA-232 attachment requires an IBM Asynchronous cable EIA-
        232/V.24 (P/N 6323741, #2936) with a printer/terminal interposer
        EIA-232 (P/N 58F2861,#2937), and a Serial Interface Adapter (P/N
        1363110 #3110).
    o   IBM ES 9370* and ES/9000* Model 120 130, 150 170 and 200 ASCII
        Subsystem Controller. Printer serial cable (P/N 8509386 #0242)
        is required for serial attachment. In addition, the Serial
        Interface (P/N 1363110 #3110) is also required.
    o   IBM 3174 Subsystem Control Unit Asynchronous Emulation Adapter.

The IBM 2390 Plus is compatible with applications running under the following
operating systems:

    o   DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0, 6.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition and IBM OS/2 Extended Edition support
        the IBM 2390 Plus Printer using the IBM 42xx Driver with the IBM
        4207 Proprinter X24E selection as the printer type under printer
        properties. Users of IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.2 or
        IBM Extended Edition Version 1.2 may obtain a copy of the IBM
        42xx Driver through the Electronic Device Driver Distribution
        Mechanism.
        -   Limitations:
            OS/2 Presentation Manager applications will have access to
            printer resident fonts for code pages 437 and 850 for optimum
            text printing performance and print quality. Code pages other
            than 437 and 850 will be supported with OS/2 System Fonts.
    o   AIX*
        -   IBM AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 supports the IBM
            2390 Plus Printer as a parallel or serial (RS-232 or RS-422)
            attached IBM 4207-002 Proprinter X24E (or IBM 4208-002
            Proprinter XL24E).
        -   IBM AIX Version 3.2 "nroff" function support the 2390 Plus
            Printer as a PPDS printer.
        -   The Xstation 120, 130, and 150 supports the IBM 2390 Plus
            Printer as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM 4207-
            002 (or IBM 4208-002) printer.
        -   IBM AIX PS/2 Version 1.3 supports the IBM 2390 Plus Printer
            as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM 4207-002 (or
            IBM 4208-002) printer.
    o   IBM 4680 OS all versions support the IBM 2390 Plus Printer as a
        parallel attached IBM 4207 (or 4208) Proprinter in PPDS (Personal
        Printer Data Stream) mode.

The IBM 2390 Plus DOS National Language Support (NLS) is provided through use
of the IBM Quietwriter III (5202) CPI file.

The software applications which operate with the IBM Proprinter, IBM Proprinter
XL, IBM Quietwriter III Printer (5202) and IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001,
E01 and  IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will generally operate with IBM 2390
Plus, although they may not support all the new capabilities (that is, resident
scalable fonts and many of the card fonts, multiple orientation command, font
download feature, and optional paper handling features).  The IBM 2390 Plus
handles some commands and operations differently.

The software applications that operate with the IBM 7372 and HP 7475A color
plotters will generally operate with the IBM 2390 Plus, although they may not
support all the new capabilities of the printer. The IBM 2390 Plus handles some
commands and operations differently.

The IBM 2390 supports a standard parallel interface via a 36-pin host interface
connector.  A serial adapter option is available.

    o   High Speed Parallel Interface
        This interface is used for attachment to an IBM Personal Computer
        or non-IBM personal computer which supports the same 8-bit
        interface and commands.  This interface is also commonly referred
        to as Centronics parallel and is capable of receiving data up to
        150 Kbytes per second The factory default of the printer is the
        parallel interface. A parallel cable is shipped standard with
        each printer.
    o   Serial Adapter  (EIA-RS-232 and RS-422 support)
        Features: DSR Ignore, Zero Buffer and Robust XON/XOFF
        This adapter is used for attachment to IBM Personal Computers,
        IBM Personal Systems, and other computers supporting the RS-232
        (revision C, D and E) or RS-422-A interface. The adapter is
        configured as a DTE device. The adapter supports DTR (hardware
        handshaking) and XON/XOFF (software handshaking) protocols.  Data
        transmission rates up to 19,200 baud are supported for RS-232
        (38,400 baud for RS-422). The adapter factory defaults are 9600
        baud DTR protocol, 8 data bits, and no parity in RS-232 mode.
        There are 12 switches to allow the user to configure the
        adapter's default settings.

SPECIAL FEATURES EXTENDED MANUAL CUT SHEET GUIDES (#0859) Reduces the
possibility of skewing when manually feeding cut sheets longer than 11 inches.

ACOUSTICS OPTION (NARROW) (#2972) Reduces the decibel level by 2 dBA.

DOWN LOAD FONT OPTION (#0724) Contains an additional 65 fonts that you can
download from your computer to your printer. The 32K NVRAM option (#5219) must
be installed on your printer in order to use the Down Load Font Option.

32KB NVRAM (#5219) Required when using the Down Load Font Option (#0724).  from
11KB to 43KB.

AUTOMATIC SHEET FEED (NARROW) (#3646) Automatically feeds cut sheets.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. 2391 IBM PLUS PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 2391 Plus Printer is a wide-carriage 24-wire impact printer.  The
printer is designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal
Systems, selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.
It is a medium-usage printer, offering reliable, Letter Quality forms printing,
Barcode printing and excellent paper handling characteristics.  The 2391 Plus
is an excellent choice for customers needing a versatile paper-handling impact
printer, or entry desktop graphics printer because of the high resolution
achived.

The IBM 2391 Plus is a replacement for the IBM PPS II 2391.  It provides the
paper handling flexibility and reliability of the PPS II straighter paper path
design with the resolution of a 24 wire printer. This provides customers with a
dual solution by having a high resolution printer for quality correspondence
that also has the capability of reliably handling a variety of forms.
Functionally, this printer accepts the same data stream as the IBM PPS II 2390/
2391, PS/1 2390, Proprinter* 24P, PS/1 2205, Proprinter 24E/ XL24E and IBM
ExecJet. The printer can emulate the Epson LQ 850 and Epson LQ 1050. It is
designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems,
selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems via a
parallel or serial (optional) interface. A parallel cable is shipped standard
with each printer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Resident Barcodes
    o   Forms Macros
    o   Multiple Paper Paths
    o   Variable Forms Length (Standard)
    o   360 X 360 dpsi
    o   8 Resident Fonts
    o   Font, Pitch and Panel Lock
    o   32K Buffer
    o   Parallel cable included
    o   Options
        -   32k NVRAM
        -   Acoustics Package
        -   Serial Adapter
        -   Auto Sheet Feed
        -   Down Load Font Option
        -   Extended Manual Cut Sheet Guides

The IBM 2391 Plus will provide customers with an affordable solution for
printing professional looking text documents with the ability to handle a wide
variety of forms. User's of the IBM PPS II 2391 will benefit from the common
parts and supplies with the IBM 2391 Plus.

The IBM 2391 Plus is designed to be easy to use.  Printer installation and
setup time is minimal. The User's Reference is shipped with the printer, and
contains the instructions needed for setting up and using the IBM 2391 Plus
printer. Unpacking, setup and start-up are designed to allow the customer to
make the printer operational and/or relocate the printer without special tools
or special operator skills. A parallel cable is shipped standard with each
printer.

The IBM 2391 Plus provides a low cost solution for users wanting high quality
text and forms printing at an affordable price. The standard ribbon yield of up
to 4 million draft characters offers a better value for the customer than the
Epson LQ 1070.  The IBM 2391 Plus and the IBM PPS II 2391 ribbons are compat-
ible which offers current IBM PPS II user's the advantage of common supplies
with reduced supplies inventory.

SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Operating
        -   Temperature: 50 to 104F (10 to 40C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature: 80.6F (27C)
    o   Non-Operating
        -   Temperature: 50 to 125.6F (10 to 52C)
        -   Humidity:  8 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature: 80.6F (27C)
    o   Storage
        -   Temperature:  33.8 to 140F (1 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 80% RH
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)
    o   Shipping
        -   Temperature: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
        -   Humidity:  5 to 100% RH (excluding rain)
        -   Maximum wet bulb temperature:  84.2F (29C)

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Dimensions Base Printer:
        -   Width:  619 mm (24.4 in.)
        -   Depth:  287 mm (11.3 in.)
        -   Height: 191 mm (7.5  in.)
        -   Weight: 8.8 Kg (19.4 lbs)
    o   Shipping Carton Specifications:
        -   Width:  749 mm (29.5 in.)
        -   Depth:  413 mm (16.3 in.)
        -   Height:  324 mm (12.8 in.)
        -   Weight:  1.36 Kg (3.0 lbs)
    o   Packaged Base Printer:
        -   Weight:  10.2 kg (22.4 lbs)
    o   Operating Clearance:
        -   77mm (3.0 in) on the left and right side
    o   Acoustics:
        -   55 dBA operating
    o   Power Consumption:
        -   120 Watts - Operating
        -   15 Watts - Idle
    o   Electrical Specification:
        -   120 - 127 Volts  60 Hz
    o   Certification: U/L, CSA, VDE, FCC(B), CISPR

Printer Specifications:

    o   Maximum Speed: Up to 233 cps in Fast Draft; Up to 210 cps in
        Draft; Up to 70 cps in Letter Quality
    o   Addressability: 360 X 360 dots per inch
    o   Ribbon average yield: 4 Million Characters (DRAFT)
    o   Datastreams: IBM PPS II 2390/2391, PS/1 2390, Proprinter 24P,
        PS/1 2205, Proprinter 24E/XL24E, IBM ExecJet, Epson LQ-850 and
        Epson LQ-1050
    o   Standard Memory: 32K Expandable to 64K maximum
    o   Fonts:  Resident fonts are supported for code pages 437, 850,
        860, 863, and 865.
        -   Fast Draft
        -   Draft
        -   Gothic
        -   Courier
        -   Prestige
        -   Presentor
        -   Orator
        -   Script
    o   Down Load Font Option - Contains an additional 65 fonts that you
        can download from your computer to your printer.  The 32k NVRAM
        option (P/N 1180725) must be installed on your printer in order
        to use the FontSet Diskette Option.
    o   Interface: Parallel interface with standard Centronics protocol;
        RS232/RS422 Serial connection optional
    o   Usage: Average = 1 Million Characters/month; Maximum = 2 Million
        Characters/month
    o   Paper Handling: Continuous Forms and Manual Cut Sheet/Envelope
        handling is standard. Continuous Forms may be loaded in either
        the push or pull modes. The Auto Sheet Feeder Option is available
        to automatically feed cut sheets and can be used in conjunction
        with continuous forms and manually fed cut sheets and multi-part
        forms.

The IBM 2391 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM Personal Computers and
IBM Personal Systems.

    o   PS/ValuePoint Systems
    o   IBM Eduquest Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers XT
    o   IBM Personal Computers AT
    o   IBM PS/2 Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Typing System/2
    o   IBM PS/1
    o   IBM PS/2 Notebooks
    o   AMBRA systems

The IBM 2391 Plus Printer attaches to the following IBM products:

    o   The 4033 IBM LAN Connection (all models)
    o   IBM ES/9370 and ES/9000 model 120, 130, 150, 170, and ASCII
        Subsystem Controller with IBM 3287 Printer emulation.  Note:
        Specify RS-232-C/V.24 Modem interface on the 937X order to
        obtain the correct attachment cable (IBM P/N 92X2785 #3160)
        on the 937X feature.
    o   IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
        with IBM 3287 printer emulation configured as an IBM
        Proprinter* (4201).
    o   IBM RISC System/6000*:
        -   Xstations 120, 130, and 150
        -   POWERstation/POWERserver* 200, 300, and 500 Series
        -   POWERstation M20, M2A, and 700 Series
        -   POWERserver 900 Series
    o   IBM AS/400* System
        When attached to the AS/400 as a host attached printer the IBM
        2391 Plus Printer emulates a host attached printer, thus full
        function of the IBM 2391 Plus Printer is not realized.
Following is a list of the attachment methods supported and how each is
configurated.

    o   Utilizing OS/400 Host Print Transform function (available in
        V2R3 or later):  Configure as an IBM 2391 printer
    o   Utilizing IBM PC Support/400 (Workstation Function):  Configure
        as an IBM 2391 printer
    o   Utilizing OS/2 Extended Edition 1.3 or later using the 5250 Work
        Station Feature:  Configure with PFT4208 and 5219 Emulation
    o   Utilizing OS/2 Communications Manager/2 using the 5250 Work
        Station Feature:  Configure using a printer driver compatible
        with this printer
    o   Utilizing the IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controller:
        Configure as 4208 Mod 2 with 5219 emulation (Serial attachment
        only)
    o   Utilizing the IBM Infowindow* 3477:  Configure with Multilingual3
        and 5219 Emulation (Parallel attachment only)
    o   Utilizing the IBM InfowWindow II Displays (3486, 3487, 3488):
        Configure as an IBM 2391 printer (Parallel attachment only)
    o   Utilizing IBM System 36/38 Workstation Emulation Program Version
        1.0: Configure with the IBM2390.PFT and 5219 emulation.
    o   Utilizing IBM Remote 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.0:
        Configure with the IBM5202.PDT and 5219 emulation.
    o   Utilizing the IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.30
        or later and a supported PC:  Configure with the supplied
        IBM2390.PFT and 5219 Emulation.
    o   Utilizing IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Micro Channel
        Support Version 1.0:  Configure with the IBM2390.PDT and 5219
        emulation.
    o   Utilizing IBM Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program PCMCIA Support
        Version 1.0: Configure with the IBM2390.PDT and 5219 emulation.
    o   Utilizing Rumba/400:
    o   Configure with a driver compatible with this printer.
    o   IBM 5520 Administrative System using:
        -   IBM 5520/Personal Computer Attachment Program Version 4.0
        -   IBM 5520 Personal System/2 Attachment Program Version 1.0

CABLES The following computer cables are available for the printer:

    Part
    Number      Description

    92F3176 *   Parallel Cable
    8509386     Serial Cable (requires serial interface P/N 1363110,
                                  F/C #3110)
    1363110     Serial Adapter (required for serial connection)

    * A parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.
PC parallel and serial attachment are available via the same connector.

    o   Personal Computers
        The parallel printer cable (P/N 92F3176, #3176) is required for
        attachment of the IBM 2391 Plus Printer. One cable is shipped
        with each printer. For PC serial attachment, the printer serial
        cable (P/N 8509386 #6031) should be ordered.  PC/AT* also
        requires a 9 to 25-pin cable adaptor for serial attachment
        (P/N 6450242, #0242).
    o   IBM AS/400
        If ordered for parallel attachment through a display or PC,
        parallel cable (P/N 92F3176, #3176) is shipped with each printer.
        If ordered for serial attachment through a PC, printer serial
        cable (P/N 8509386, #6031) or equivalent is required. For serial
        attachment to the IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controller, refer
        to the "IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation Reference and Example"
        manual (SA41-9922) for specific cable information.  This
        attachment requires a serial cable selected from the referenced
        manual (SA41-9922) as well as the Serial Adapter P/N 1363110,
        F/C 3110.
    o   RISC System/6000
        EIA-232 attachment requires an IBM Asynchronous cable
        EIA-232/V.24 (P/N 6323741, #2936) with a printer/terminal
        interposer EIA-232 (P/N 58F2861,#2937), and a Serial Interface
        Adapter (P/N 1363110 #3110).
    o   IBM ES 9370* and ES/9000* Model 120 130, 150 170 and 200 ASCII
        Subsystem Controller. Printer serial cable (P/N 8509386, #0242)
        is required for serial attachment. In addition, the Serial
        Adapter (P/N 1363110 #3110) is also required.
    o   IBM 3174 Subsystem Control Unit Asynchronous Emulation Adapter.

The IBM 2391 Plus is compatible with applications running under the following
operating systems:

    o   DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0, 6.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition and IBM OS/2 Extended Edition support
        the IBM 2391 Plus Printer using the IBM 42xx Driver with the IBM
        4208 Proprinter XL24E selection as the printer type under printer
        properties. Users of IBM OS/2 Standard Edition Version 1.2 or
        IBM Extended Edition Version 1.2 may obtain a copy of the IBM
        42xx Driver through the Electronic Device Driver Distribution
        Mechanism.
        -   Limitations:
            OS/2 Presentation Manager applications will have access to
            printer residnet fonts for code pages 437 and 850 for
            optimum text printing performance and print quality. Code
            pages other than 437 and 850 will be supported with OS/2
            System Fonts.
    o   AIX*
        -   IBM AIX Version 3.2 for RISC System/6000 supports the IBM
            2391 Plus Printer as a parallel or serial (RS-232 or RS-422)
            attached IBM
            4207-002 Proprinter X24E (or IBM 4208-002 Proprinter XL24E).
        -   IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 "nroff" function support the 2391 Plus
            Printer as a PPDS printer.
        -   The Xstation 120 and 130 supports the IBM 2391 Plus Printer
            as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM 4207-002 (or
            IBM 4208-002) printer.
        -   IBM AIX PS/2 Version 1.2.1 supports the IBM 2391 Plus
            Printer as a parallel or serial attached (RS-232) IBM 4207-
            002 (or IBM 4208-002) printer.
    o   IBM OS/2* LAN Server Version 1.2 or 1.3
    o   IBM PCLP (PC Local Area Network) Version 1.33 for DOS Version
        3.3, 4.0, 5.0 and 6.1
    o   IBM 4680 OS all versions support the IBM 2391 Plus Printer as a
        parallel attached IBM 4207 (or 4208) Proprinter in PPDS
        (Personal Printer Data Stream) mode.

The IBM 2391 Plus DOS National Language Support (NLS) is provided through use
of the IBM Quietwriter III (5202) CPI file.

The software applications which operate with the IBM Proprinter, IBM Proprinter
XL, IBM Quietwriter III Printer (5202) and IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001,
E01 and  IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will generally operate with IBM 2391
Plus, although they may not support all the new capabilities (that is, resident
scalable fonts and many of the card fonts, multiple orientation command, font
download feature, and optional paper handling features).  The IBM 2391 Plus
handles some commands and operations differently.

The software applications that operate with the IBM 7372 and HP 7475A color
plotters will generally operate with the IBM 2391 Plus, although they may not
support all the new capabilities of the printer. The IBM 2391 Plus handles some
commands and operations differently.

The IBM 2391 Plus supports a standard parallel interface via a 36-pin host
interface connector.  A serial adapter option is available.

    o   High Speed Parallel Interface
        This interface is used for attachment to an IBM Personal Computer
        or non-IBM personal computer which supports the same 8-bit
        interface and commands.  This interface is also commonly referred
        to as Centronics parallel and is capable of receiving data up to
        150 Kbytes per second The factory default of the printer is the
        parallel interface.  A parallel cable is shipped standard with
        each printer.
    o   Serial Adapter  (EIA-RS-232 and RS-422 support)
        Features: DSR Ignore, Zero Buffer and Robust XON/XOFF
        This adapter is used for attachment to IBM Personal Computers,
        IBM Personal Systems, and other computers supporting the RS-232
        (revision C, D and E) or RS-422-A interface. The adapter is
        configured as a DTE device. The adapter supports DTR (hardware
        handshaking) and XON/XOFF (software handshaking) protocols.
        Data transmission rates up to 19,200 baud are supported for
        RS-232 (38,400 baud for RS-422). The adapter factory defaults
        are 9600 baud DTR protocol, 8 data bits, and no parity in RS-232
        mode. There are 12 switches to allow the user to configure the
        adapter's default settings.

SPECIAL FEATURES AUTOMATIC SHEET FEED (WIDE) (#3658) Automatically feeds cut
sheets. EXTENDED MANUAL CUT SHEET GUIDES (#0859) Reduces the possibility of
skewing when manually feeding cut sheets longer than 11 inches. ACOUSTICS
OPTION (WIDE) (#2973) Reduces the decibel level by 2 dBA. DOWN LOAD FONT OPTION
(#0724) Contains an additional 65 fonts that you can download from your
computer to your printer. The 32K NVRAM option (#5219) must be installed on
your printer in order to use the Down Load Font Option. 32KB NVRAM (#5219)
Required when using the Down Load Font Option (#0724). *Signifies a trademark
or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. 4072 EXECJET PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM ExecJet Printer* is a wide-carriage 64-nozzle letter-quality ink-jet
printer designed for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal
Systems, selected IBM displays and processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.
It is a low-to-medium usage wide-carriage printer offering low-cost ownership,
versatile paper handling, and consistent high-quality printing.

The IBM ExecJet Printer is an excellent choice for customers considering
migrating from wire matrix printers in order to obtain quiet printing, higher
throughput, and better print quality.  The IBM ExecJet Printer offers all that
plus a rich font menu, up to 360 x 360 dpi (dots-per-inch) printing, flexible
paper-feeding capabilities, and emulation of two of the leading printers in the
wire-matrix market.  The IBM ExecJet Printer satisfies the requirements for
printing on single-ply paper with high quality text combined with
high-resolution graphics and quietness in an office environment.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Paper-feed flexibility is a result of the printer having a wide
        carriage, a push tractor, an automatic sheet feed (with optional
        second bin), a front manual-feed slot capable of feeding documents
        up to 17 inches wide, the ability to feed envelopes, labels, and
        transparencies, and paper parking and document tear assist.
    o   Speed/throughput are increased over that of the printers that the
        IBM ExecJet Printer emulates.
    o   Print versatility results from having up to 360 x 360 dpi (dots-
        per-inch) resolution for text and graphics, quality and draft modes,
        18 resident fonts, multiple print enhancements, optional font cards,
        and an optional download memory card.
    o   The IBM ExecJet Printer emulates the IBM 4208-002 Proprinter XL24E,
        the Epson LQ-1050, and the IBM 5202 Quietwriter III.

MODEL 001

Wide carriage 64 nozzle letter quality ink jet printer designed for attachment
to IBM Personal Computers, IBM Personal Systems, selected IBM displays and
processors, and compatible non-IBM systems.

The IBM ExecJet Printer is a customer setup (CSU) printer.  The CSU information
is contained in the User's Guide which is supplied with the printer in the
National language.

The IBM ExecJet Printer features 360 dpi letter quality non-impact printing.
The IBM ExecJet Printer offers IBM 4208, IBM 5202, and Epson LQ emulations, 18
resident fonts, U.S. and multilingual character sets (Code Pages 437 and 850),
a single-bin automatic sheet feed and a push tractor.

The following features are also available:

    o   Automatic Sheet Feed 2nd bin
    o   Serial Interface module (RS-232/RS-422)
    o   Three font cards with four typestyles each
    o   128K Static RAM download memory card with battery backup

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Printer with no Sheet Feed bins installed:

    Width:  618.0mm (24.33 inches)
    Depth:  343.0mm (13.50 inches)
    Height:  152.0mm ( 5.98 inches)
    Weight:  8.63kg (19.00 pounds)

Printer with Automatic Sheet Feed 1st bin installed:

    Width:  618.0mm (24.33 inches)
    Depth:  385.0mm (15.16 inches)
    Height:  364.0mm (14.33 inches)
    Weight:  10.9kg (24.00 pounds)

Printer with Automatic Sheet Feed 1st and 2nd bins installed:

    Width:  618.0mm (24.33 inches)
    Depth:  452.0mm (17.80 inches)
    Height:  369.0mm (14.53 inches)
    Weight:  11.64kg (25.60 pounds)

Electrical Specifications:

    Description      Line Voltage
    Low Voltage      100V-127V, 50/60Hz
    Certification:  U/L, CSA, FCC(B)

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS

    o   IBM 4208-002 Proprinter* XL24E emulation.
    o   IBM 5202-001 Quietwriter* emulation.
    o   Epson LQ-1050 emulation.
    o   Maximum print line width 345mm (13.6 inches).
    o   30KB print buffer.
    o   Resident fonts:  Courier, Prestige, Gothic.
    o   Character spacing: 5, 6, 8.57, 10, 12, 15, 17.1, 20 CPI, and
        proportional spacing.
    o   Print speeds:
        -   Letter quality mode:
          --  Up to 150 CPS at 10 CPI
          --  Up to 180 CPS at 12 CPI
          --  Up to 225 CPS at 15 CPI
          --  Up to 255 CPS at 17.1 CPI
          --  Up to 300 CPS at 20 CPI
        -   Draft mode:
          --  Up to 300 CPS at 10 CPI
          --  Up to 360 CPS at 12 CPI
          --  Up to 450 CPS at 15 CPI
          --  Up to 510 CPS at 17.1 CPI
          --  Up to 600 CPS at 20 CPI
    o   APA graphics (in vertical by horizontal dots per inch):
           60 x 60    120 x 120   180 x 60    360 x 120
           72 x 60    240 x 240   180 x 120   360 x 180
           72 x 120               180 x 180   360 x 240
           72 x 240               180 x 360   360 x 360
    o   Programmable features:
        -   Line spacing
        -   Line width
        -   Forms length
        -   Margins
        -   Tabs
        -   Selectable character sets
        -   Underscoring
        -   Double underscoring
        -   Overscoring
        -   Double overscoring
        -   Single strike-through
        -   Double strike-through
        -   Superscript
        -   Subscript
        -   Italics print
        -   Emphasized print
        -   Double-wide print
        -   Double-high print
        -   Double-strike print
        -   Shadow print
        -   Outline print
        -   Background shading
        -   Reverse image print
    o   Resident character sets: IBM PC character set, IBM multilingual
        character set.
    o   Printer warm-up time is 17 seconds.
    o   Easily installed "clean hands" High-Yield Ink Cartridge with an
        average yield of 1 million characters in letter quality mode or 2
        million characters in draft quality mode.
    o   Interface: IBM PC Parallel provided, and optional RS-232/RS-422.

PAPER HANDLING FEATURES Multiple paper handling features are available:

    o   Front slot cut sheet feed - standard.
    o   Tractor feed for continuous forms - standard.
    o   100 sheet Automatic Sheet Feed 1st bin - standard.
    o   100 sheet Automatic Sheet Feed 2nd bin - optional.

Automatic Sheet Feed Bin Capacity: First bin (supply and exit):  100 sheets of
20-pound paper or 20 envelopes (20-pound) Second bin:  100 sheets of 20-pound
paper A3 maximum size is 280 x 432mm (11 x 17 inches)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. 4076 IBM EXECJET II PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer is a general purpose monochrome ink-jet printer
which provides high quality text and graphics printing along with flexible
media handling.  The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer will be used primarily in a
business or home workstation environment where high quality text and graphics
printing is required.

The IBM ExecJet II is capable of speeds up to 3PPM, 600 X 300 dots per inch
(DPI) resolution using Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) capability.
The IBM ExecJet II uses the 256KB Volatile, 256KB and 1MB Flash memory, module
options for download.

A 56 nozzle, customer-replaceable print cartridge is shipped with the printer.
Support for the Hewlett-Packard DeskJet (PCL3) Printer language is standard.
The IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) is also standard but may not
support all the capabilities of the ExecJet II.

The printer comes with 3 resident scalable typefaces. A Centronics parallel
interface is standard, an optional serial adapter is available.  A parallel
cable is shipped with each printer.

The printer input capacity is approximately 150 sheets of 20 pound paper.
Manual input capability which can be used for insertion of heavy media or paper
up to 9 inches wide, is provided.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Low cost near-laser quality printing
        -   600 x 300 text and graphics resolution using PQET
        -   PQET smooths edges in both graphics and text
    o   Quiet Operation - As low as 45 dBA
    o    Easy to use
    o   Bilevel operator panel
    o   PC-based op panel/setup program
    o   Speed
        -   Up to 167 cps in Letter quality mode(10 pitch font)
        -   Up to 300 cps in Draft mode(10 pitch font)
    o   Selection of fonts
        -   3 scalable typefaces (4-128 pt for proportional fonts, 30 to
            0.90 for fixed pitch fonts
        -   HP Deskjet 500 compatible bitmap download
        -   Scalable font download
        -   Fonts printable in both Portrait and Landscape orientation
    o   Emulations
        -   HP Deskjet 500 Superset
        -   IBM ProPrinter X24E
    o   Integral Automatic Sheet Feeder
        -   Supports a variety of media types and sizes
        -   Supports automatic envelope feeding of some envelopes
        -   Approximately 150 sheet capacity
    o   Integral Inkjet Printhead and Ink Cartridge
    o   Parallel cable included
    o   Options
        -   Serial Interface (RS-232, RS-422)
        -   Volatile (RAM) and Non-volatile (FLASH) SIMMs for font
            download

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer provides an affordable answer to price
sensitive businesses and home users who need laser-like quality printing,
excellent paper handling features, and simplicity of use in a small package

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer provides excellent print quality through PQET
(Print Quality Enhancement Technology), a quality feature which is found in the
best laser printers.

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer is designed to be easy to use.  Printer
installation and setup time is minimal.  A start up kit contains easy
instruction manuals including instructions for accessing needed information
quickly. A printer installation utility and drivers for some of the popular
software applications are included to get the user up and running quickly.

A bi-level operator panel leads the user through the available printer
functions.  The flash memory option will allow the user to download font
selections which remain in the printer until removed. A parallel cable is
shipped standard with each printer.

The standard datastreams will provide a migration path for customers moving
from dot matrix and competitive ink jet printers by providing compatibility
with software applications.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Temperature and Humidity
        The recommended environment for this printer is class "B".
    In general the following requirements apply to the class "B"
    environment:
    o   Air Temperature (B)
        -   Product Operating:  60 to 90F (15.6 to 32.2C)
        -   Product Power Off:  50 to 110F (10.0 to 43.0C)
    o   Air Relative Humidity (B)
        -   Relative Humidity  8 to 80%
    o   Wet Bulb Temperature (B)
        -   Product Operating:  73F (22.8C) maximum
        -   Product Power Off:  80F (26.7C) maximum
    o   Ink Cartridge Shipping Environment
        The shipping temperature range for the replaceable ink cartridge
        is -40 to 140F.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Dimensions Base Printer
        -   Width:  363 mm (14.3 in.)
        -   Depth:  282 mm (11.1 in.)
        -   Height: 269 mm (10.6 in.)
    o   Shipping Carton Specifications Packaged Base Printer:
        -   Width:  490 mm (19.3 in.)
        -   Depth:  375 mm (14.8 in.)
        -   Height: 400 mm (15.7 in.)
        -   Weight: 6.5 Kg (14.3 lbs)
    o   Unpackaged Weight: 5 kg (11 lbs)
    o   Operating Clearance:
        -   63.5mm (2.5 in) on both sides.
    o   Acoustics:
        -   45 dBA operating
        -   0 dBA idle
    o   Power Consumption:
        -   Less than 25 watts operating (12 Watts average while
            printing)
        -   Less than 7.5 watts idle
        -   Less than 2 watts with power off
    o   Electrical Specification:
        -   90 to 259 volts at 50 to 60 Hz (Worldwide Universal Power
            Supply)
    o   Certification: U/L, CSA, VDE, FCC(B), CISPR

Printer Specifications:

    o   Maximum Speed: Up to 3 PPM Draft
    o   Maximum Speed: Up to 2 PPM Letter Quality
    o   Print Line: 8 Inches
    o   Addressability: 300 X 300 dots per inch
    o   Print cartridge average yield: Up to 1000 pages at 5% coverage;
        Up to 1,700 pages at 2.8% coverage
    o   Datastreams: IBM Personal Printer Datastream; Hewlett Packard
        Deskjet 500 (PCL3) Language
    o   Input Buffer Memory: 21K (Not Expandable)
    o   Flash Download Memory: 256 Kb and 1 MB Options
    o   Volatile Download Memory: 256 Kb
    o   Fonts:
        Typeface  Orientation  Pitches      Point       Type      Stroke
                                            Sizes       Style     Weight
        --------  -----------  -------      -----       -------   ------
        Letter    Portrait &   12,24        6,12        Upright,  Medium,
        Gothic    Landscape                             Italics   Bold
        Courier   Portrait &   30 -         Not         Upright,  Medium,
                  Landscape    0.90         Applicable  Italics   Bold
        CG Times  Portrait &   Typographic  4-128       Upright,  Medium,
                  Landscape                 Scalable    Italics   Bold
        Univers   Portrait &   Typographic  4-128       Upright,  Medium,
                  Landscape                 Scalable    Italics   Bold
    o   Font Download:
        The ExecJet II printer a llows download of both bit mapped and
        scalable fonts.  Fonts may be downloaded into either the optional
        Random Access SIMM Memory or the optional FLASH SIMM Memory using
        the Toolkit provided with the printer.
    o   PPDS Emulation Mode
        The ExecJet II printer will support the fonts required to fully
        emulate Proprinter, with the exception that the ExecJet II does
        not support download fonts for the PPDS datastream.
        The fonts supported in PPDS mode are:
        -   Courier 10 Draft (replaces X24E DP 10 -san serif)
        -   Courier 10 LQ
        -   Letter Gothic 12 Draft (replaces X24E DP 12 san serif)
        -   Letter Gothic 12 (replaces X24E Prestige)
        -   Courier Proportional LQ
        The following character spacings are supported by the ExecJet II
        printer in PPDS mode:
        -   5 pitch (double wide 10 pitch)
        -   6 pitch (double wide 12 pitch)
        -   8.55 pitch (double wide 17.1 pitch)
        -   10 pitch
        -   12 pitch
        -   17.1 pitch
    o   NLS Support:
        All machines will contain two resident codepages in PPDS mode,
        437 and 850.
    o   Interface: Parallel interface with standard Centronics protocol
        and Fastbytes protocol; RS-232/RS-422 Serial connection optional
    o   Usage: Average = 250 pages/month; Maximum = 2,000 pages/month
    o   Paper or Supply Capacities:
        The input and exit paper capacities of the printer are specified
        in terms of stack height.  A sheet quantity is provided for
        reference only.
    o   Input Bin And Envelope Capacities:
                    Stack     Sheet
                    Height    Capacity
                    ------    ------------
          Paper     15 mm     Approximately
                              150 Sheets
          Foils     15 mm     Approximately
                              50 Foils
          Labels    15 mm     Approximately
                              50 Sheets
          Envelope  15 mm     Approximately
                              15 Envelopes
    o   Exit Tray Capacity:
        The exit is designed for use as the output for paper envelopes,
        foils, etc.  The output copies will be reverse collated.  The
        approximate capacities of the exit tray are:
          Type       Capacity
          ----       --------
          Paper     75 Sheets
          Foils     1 Foil
          Labels    10 Sheets
          Envelope  15 Envelopes

The IBM ExecJet II supports a standard parallel interface via a 36-pin host
interface connector.  A serial adapter option is available.

    o   High Speed Parallel Interface
        This interface is used for attachment to an IBM Personal Computer
        or a non-IBM personal computer which supports the same 8-bit
        interface and commands.  This interface is also commonly
        referred to as Centronics parallel and is capable of receiving
        data up to 150 Kbytes per second. The factory default of the
        printer is the parallel interface.  A parallel cable is shipped
        standard with each printer.
    o   Serial Interface
        This interface is used for attachment to an IBM Personal Computer
        or a non-IBM personal computer which supports the same interface
        and commands. It is also used for attachment to some systems.
        DTR/DSR, DTR and XON/XOFF protocols are supported. This interface
        supports data transmission rates up to 38,400 bps. When the
        serial interface is selected, the printer factory defaults are
        9600 bps baud rate, DTR protocol, 8 data bits, and no parity.
        serial adapter option has a 12 position DIP switch selection to
        provide the user with the ability to change the sngs on the
        adapter.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Base Printer
        -   Width:  363 mm (14.3 in.)
        -   Depth:  282 mm (11.1 in.)
        -   Height:  269 mm (10.6 in.)
    o   Shipping Carton Specifications Packaged Base Printer:
        -   Width:  490 mm (19.3 in.)
        -   Depth:  375 mm (14.8 in.)
        -   Height: 400 mm (15.7 in.)
        -   Weight: 6.5 Kg (14.3 lbs)
    o   Unpackaged Weight: 5 kg (11 lbs)
    o   Operating Clearance:
        -   63.5mm (2.5 in) on both sides.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer attaches to the following
IBM Personal Computers and IBM Personal Systems.

    o   PS/ValuePoint* Systems
    o   IBM EduQuest Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Computers XT
    o   IBM Personal Computers AT
    o   IBM PS/2 Personal Computers
    o   IBM Personal Typing System/2
    o   IBM PS/1
    o   IBM PS/2 Notebooks
    o   AMBRA systems

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer attaches to the following IBM products:

    o   The 4033 IBM LAN Connection (all models)
    o   IBM ES/9370 and ES/9000 model 120, 130, 150 and 170 ASCII
        Subsystem Controller with IBM 3287 Printer emulation.  Note:
        Specify RS-232-C/V.24 Modem interface on the 937X order to obtain
        the correct attachment cable (IBM P/N 92X2785, #3160) on the 937X
        feature.
    o   IBM 3174 Establishment Controller Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
        (#3020) with IBM 3287 printer emulation configured as an IBM
        Proprinter* (4201).
    o   IBM RISC System/6000*:
        -   Xstations* 120, 130, and 150
        -   POWERstation/POWERserver* 200, 300, and 500 Series
        -   POWERstation M20, M2A, and 700 Series
        -   POWERserver 900 Series
    o   IBM AS/400* System
        When attached to the AS/400 as a host attached printer, the IBM
        ExecJet II 4076 Printer emulates a host attached printer, thus
        full function of the IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer is not realized.

CABLES The following computer cables are available for the printer:

    Part
    Number      Description

    92F3176 *   Parallel Cable
    8509386     Serial Cable (requires serial interface P/N 1363110,
                              F/C #3110)
    1363110     Serial Adapter (required for serial connection)

    * A parallel cable is shipped standard with each printer.

PC parallel and serial attachment are available via the same connector.

    o   Personal Computers
        The parallel printer cable (P/N 92F3176, #3176) is required for
        attachment of the IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer. One cable is
        shipped with each printer. For PC serial attachment, the printer
        serial cable (P/N 8509386, #6031) should be ordered.  PC/AT* also
        requires a 9 to 25-pin cable adapter for serial attachment (P/N
        6450242, #0242).

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer is compatible with applications running under
the following operating systems:

    o   DOS Version 3.3, 4.0, 5.0, 6.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Version 2.0
    o   IBM AIX Version 3.1.5 or Version 3.2 for the RISC/6000
    o   Microsoft Windows 3.0, 3.1
    o   IBM OS/2 Standard Edition 1.3.2 or IBM OS/2 Extended Edition
        1.3.2
    o   IBM AIX/6000

The IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer has PPDS support for the IBM OS/2 Presentation
Manager and non-Presentation Manager applications using the IBM 4019 device
driver available with IBM OS/2 Version 1.30.1.

IBM Print Services Facility/2 Version 1.00 and 1.10 supports the IBM ExecJet II
4076 Printer as an IBM 4019 LaserPrinter.

On the RISC System/6000 using IBM AIX Print Services Facility/6000 Version 1,
the IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer is supported by printer tables provided for use
with AIX* Version 3.1.5 for the RISC System/6000.  The printer should be
configured as a "other parallel" or "other serial" printer depending on the
interface selection. Then, the virtual printer selection should be "IBM ExecJet
II."

IBM AIX PS/2 1.2.1 supports the IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer as an IBM 4019
LaserPrinter.

The IBM 4680 Operating System (all versions) supports the IBM ExecJet II as a
parallel-attached IBM 4202 Proprinter in the Personal Printer Data Stream
(PPDS).

The IBM ExecJet II DOS National Language Support (NLS) is provided through use
of the IBM Quietwriter III (5202) CPI file.

The software applications which operate with the IBM Proprinter, IBM Proprinter
XL, IBM Quietwriter III Printer (5202) and IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001,
E01 and IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will generally operate with IBM ExecJet II
4076 Printer, although they may not support all the new capabilities (that is,
resident scalable fonts and many of the card fonts, multiple orientation
command, font download feature, and optional paper handling features).

The software applications that operate with the HP LaserJet Series II Printer
will generally operate with the IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer with the standard
PCL4 language emulation.

The software applications that operate with the IBM 7372 and HP 7475A color
plotters will generally operate with the IBM ExecJet II 4076 Printer, although
they may not support all the new capabilities of the printer.  The IBM ExecJet
II handles some commands and operations differently.

The Primary datastream for the ExecJet II printer will be LPCL3, which is a
superset of the level of PCL 3 supported by the HP Deskjet 500 printer. All
printer functions including scalable fonts will be supported by this
datastream. This datastream will be the factory default.

The Secondary datastream for the ExecJet II will be 4207 level PPDS (IBM
Proprinter X24E). This datastream is for backward compatibility only, and will
not support all the features of the ExecJet II printer.

The user will be able to switch between the datastreams with  the setup program
or by sending the printer a Set Initial Conditions command.

SPECIAL FEATURES 256 KB RAM MEMORY MEMORY (#7139, P/N 1367139) The standard
machine is shipped with 21KB of memory. This is usable for the receive buffer
only and can not be increased. Additional printer memory is available for the
more complex graphic applications. Only one slot is available for this feature;
therefore, only one feature can be installed at a time.

1/4 MB FLASH MEMORY (#5283, P/N 1325283) Flash memory provides the ability to
store download fonts which will remain in the printer when it is powered off.
Only one slot is available for this feature; therefore, only one feature can be
installed at a time.

SERIAL ADAPTER (#3110, P/N 1363110) Required when using serial cable P/N
8509386. *Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. 4019 LASERPRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODEL 001 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

MODEL E01 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF JANUARY 28, 1994.)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM LaserPrinter and LaserPrinter E are compact nonimpact desk top page
printers designed and manufactured by IBM for attachment to IBM Personal
System/2 products, IBM Personal Computers, IBM displays, IBM systems, and many
non-IBM systems.  Refer to "IBM Personal Printers Marketing Reference Guide"
for detail.  It is capable of producing letter quality text and graphics at up
to 300 x 300 dots per inch (dpi), and are suited for applications that do not
exceed 20,000 pages per month (12,000 pages for the IBM LaserPrinter E).  Its
speed, function, compact size, high yield print cartridge and extensive font
and paper handling features make the IBM LaserPrinter an excellent workstation
page printer for use in office and business professional environments.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Prints up to ten pages per minute, up to 300 dpi for text and image
        on a variety of stationery supplies, in either portrait or landscape
        orientation.
    o   Compact size - 360 mm x 469 mm (14.2 x 18.5 in.) footprint
    o   Single-element High Yield Cartridge with an average of 10,000 page
        yield in typical text printing applications*
    o   Single-element High Yield + Cartridge with an average of 15,000 page
        yield in typical text printing applications*
    o   200-sheet auto feeder standard, 500-sheet second drawer and auto
        envelope feeders optional
    o   Support for IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), Hewlett-Packard
        LaserJet series II emulation, and plotter emulation (IBM 7372 and HP
        7475A color plotters)
    o   Extensive font support:  resident, downloadable fonts and font cards
    o   Font card cover
    o   PostScript Option with Automatic Emulation Switching, is available
        with a choice of 17 or 39 outline fonts.
    o   512Kb memory standard, expandable to 1.5Mb, 2.5Mb, or 4.0Mb
    o   Can be shared by up to 6 PCs via the Printer Sharing Option.

DESCRIPTION

    o   Versatile printing
      -   Data stream support modes:
          --  IBM Personal Printer Data Stream for PC, PS/2, and other
              ASCII devices
          --  Hewlett-Packard LaserJet series II emulation (HP Printer
              Command Language)
          --  Plotter emulation - IBM 7372 and HP 7475A color plotters
      -   Font support:
          --  Portrait or landscape printing orientation without special
              fonts
          --  Variable pitches and point sizes (6 to 30 in most fonts,
              some to 60)
          --  Two font card slots
          --  Resident fonts, downloadable fonts, and font cards supported
              for IBM PPDS and Hewlett-Packard LaserJet series II emulation
          --  Font card covers (optional)
          --  National language support
          --  Resident typefaces available in both portrait and landscape
            o   IBM PPDS: Courier 10, 12, 17.1, Courier Bold 10, Boldface
                PS
            o   HP LaserJet series II emulation: Courier 10, Courier 10
                Bold, Courier 16.7 (substituted for Lineprinter 16.7).

The following are supported for IBM PPDS:

    o   Two resident code pages - IBM PC Character Set (Code Page 437) and
        IBM PC Multilingual Character Set (Code Page 850)
    o   Text enhancement printing: double high, double wide, double high
        and wide, emphasize, superscript/subscript, auto underscore/
        overscore.
    o   All points addressable (APA) graphics.
    o   Versatile paper handling
        -   200-sheet auto feeder standard, 500-sheet second drawer and
            auto envelope feeders optional
        -   Manual paper and envelope feed standard
        -   Sequenced and unsequenced output trays standard
        -   Legal-size input paper trays available
        -   Envelope, transparency, labels, special purpose papers printing

The IBM LaserPrinter and LaserPrinter E are compact nonimpact desktop page
printers designed to attach to IBM Personal System/2s, IBM Personal Computers,
IBM displays, IBM systems with parallel and serial interfaces, and compatible
non-IBM systems.

The IBM LaserPrinters support three data stream modes, selectable from either
the front control panel, or through software commands.

    o   IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)
    o   Hewlett-Packard LaserJet series II emulation
    o   Plotter emulation - IBM 7372, HP 7475A color plotters

The IBM LaserPrinters will automatically print a page containing both text and
graphics in either portrait or landscape orientation without the need for
special fonts or application programming considerations.  They are capable of
printing on a variety of paper types and sizes, transparencies, gummed labels,
and envelopes designed for laser printers.

A 200-sheet automatic feed paper tray and a manual feed tray (for infrequently
used papers or envelopes) are standard equipment.  A 100-sheet output tray
located on the top of the printer is used for sequenced output, while an
alternate output tray at the front of the machine is provided for output of
special size or weight.

Optional paper handling accessories are 500-sheet secondary drawer, legal-size
paper trays (200-and 500-sheet), 200-sheet letter-size paper tray, 200-sheet
heavy duty letter-size paper tray, 500-sheet letter-size paper tray, and
automatic envelope feeder.

The IBM LaserPrinter's operator panel can be used for a variety of tasks. The
default font, paper source and size, and print orientation selections can be
set via the panel. In printer configuration mode, the operator selects parallel
or serial interface, and chooses the parameters required for serial attachment.
Tray linkage mode, Form feed timeout and auto adjust line spacing are enabled
and disabled via the front panel.  The panel is also used to initiate self test
and for diagnostics.

The IBM LaserPrinter's High Yield + Cartridge is a single-element
customer-replaceable supply item which yields an average of 15,000 pages at 2.8
percent page coverage.

The IBM LaserPrinter's High Yield Cartridge is a single-element customer-
replaceable supply item which yields an average of 10,000 pages at 2.8 percent
page coverage.

The IBM LaserPrinter offers various typewriter-style fonts as well as an
extensive array of typographic fonts in both the soft (download font) format
and the plug-in font cards.  Optional font card covers

Optional font card covers are offered to deter the removal of the font cards
from the printer.  Two font card covers are included.  The IBM LaserPrinter's
512Kb resident user memory can be expanded by adding a 1Mb, 2Mb, or 3.5Mb
optional memory card.

The IBM LaserPrinter can be shared by up to six personal computers via the
Printer Sharing Option.

All IBM LaserPrinter features and supplies are customer-installable, except for
the Model Upgrade used to convert Model E01 to Model 001, P/N 1320030.

The IBM LaserPrinter supports US English and National Languages for UK English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Danish, Norwegian, and Canadian
French.  A Guide to Operations for the IBM LaserPrinter is available in the
above languages.  A Downloadable Fonts Guide to Operations is available in the
above languages except UK English, and Danish.  All other features have
customer documentation in at least French, German, Spanish and Italian in
addition to US English.  NLS font cards support the character sets for Greek
(CP 851), Turkish (CP 853 and 857), Hebrew (CP 862 and its subset), Katakana
(CP 911), Eastern European languages - Cyrillic alphabet (CP 855), and Latin
alphabet (CP 852), Canadian French (CP 863).  Arabic (CP 864) is supported via
both the font cards and a downloadable font package.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Dimensions:
             Base Printer            Maximum Featured       Note
     Width   360 mm (14.2 in.)       360 mm (14.2 in.)
     Depth   521 mm (20.6 in.)*      860 mm (33.9 in.)        1
     Height  266 mm (10.5 in.)       445 mm (18.0 in.)        2
    *  With manual feed paper tray

    Notes: 1) Equipped with front exit tray and optional Envelope Feeder
          2) Equipped with optional 500-sheet second drawer and
             envelope feeder

    Weight:  15.3 kg (33.6 lb)  (without paper or print cartridge)
    Acoustics:
       50 dBA printing
       38 dBA idle
    Electrical specification:
       Low Voltage                100V-127V, 50/60Hz
    Certification:  U/L, CSA, FCC(B)

The printer requires 152 mm (6 in.) of clearance on all four sides and 292 mm
(11.5 in.) on top for proper operation.

Printer Specifications:

    o   Maximum print rate:  10 PPM (5 PPM for 4019-E01)
    o   Addressability:  300 dots per inch (horizontal and vertical)
    o   Printer warm-up time is less than 35 seconds
    o   Minimum time to first page (after warm-up time):
        -   279.4 mm (11 in.) page from primary paper tray:  20.0 seconds
        -   279.4 mm (11 in.) page from optional Second Drawer:  21.0
            seconds
        -   Envelope from optional envelope feeder:  19.5 seconds
    o   Minimum time between subsequent 297.4 mm (11 in.) pages is 6.0
        seconds (12.0 seconds for the IBM LaserPrinter E)
    o   Easily installed "clean-hands" High Yield + Cartridge with an
        average yield of 15,000 pages at 2.8 percent page coverage
    o   Easily installed "clean-hands" High Yield Cartridge with an average
        yield of 10,000 pages at 2.8 percent page coverage
    o   Interface:  IBM PC Parallel and RS-232-C serial interfaces provided
    o   For additional technical information, please see the "IBM Laser-
        Printer Technical Reference" (P/N 1058224, SA40-0562).

Stationery Supplies Specifications:

    o   Paper:
      -   Manual feed:
        --  Width:  98.4 to 215.9 mm (3.875 to 8.5 in.)
        --  Length:  190.5 to 355.6 mm (7.5 to 14 in.)
        --  Weight:  60 grams per square meter (g/sqm) to 135 g/sqm (16
            to 35 lb)
        --  Thickness:  0.070 to 0.190 mm (0.0028 to 0.0075 in.)
      -   Automatic feed:
        --  Width:  182 to 215.9 mm (7.2 to 8.5 in.)
        --  Length:  257 to 355.6 mm (10.1 to 14 in.)
        --  Weight:  60 to 90 g/sqm (16 to 24 lb)
        --  Thickness:  0.070 to 0.125 mm (0.0028 to 0.0049 in.)
      Recycled paper less then 80 g/sqm is not recommended for this printer
    o   Envelopes:
      -   Manual feed:
        --  Width:  92.1 to 215.9 mm (3.625 to 8.5 in.)
        --  Length:  190.5 to 355.6 mm (7.5 to 14 in.)
        --  Weight:  75 to 105 g/sqm (20 to 28 lb)
      -   Automatic feed:
        --  Width:  98.4 to 176 mm (3.875 to 6.93 in.)
        --  Length:  190.5 to 241.3 mm (7.5 to 9.5 in.)
        --  Weight:  75 to 90 g/sqm (20 to 24 lb)
    o   Transparencies:
      -   Size:  A4 (210 x 297 mm) and letter (215.9 x 279.4 mm)
      -   Weight:  138 to 146 g/sqm (37 to 39 lb)
      -   Thickness:  0.099 to 0.109 mm (0.0039 to 0.0043 in.)
    o   Labels:
      -   Size:  A4 (210 x 297 mm) and letter (215.9 x 279.4 mm)
      -   Sheet weight:  135 +/-10 g/sqm (36 +/-3 lb)
      -   Sheet thickness:  0.135 +/-0.01 mm (0.0053 +/-0.0004 in.)

500 Sheet Second Drawer Physical Description:

    o   Height:  155 mm (6.1 in.)
    o   Width:  360 mm (14.2 in.)
    o   Depth:  400 mm (15.7 in.)
    o   Weight:
        2.3 kg (5 lb) (without paper tray)
        4.1 kg (9 lb) (with letter-size paper tray)
        4.5 kg (9.8 lb) (with legal-size paper tray)

Envelope Feeder Physical Description:

    o   Height:  114 mm (4.5 in.)
    o   Width:  312 mm (12.3 in.)
    o   Depth:  330 mm (13 in.)
    o   Weight:  1.4 g (3 lb).

Paper and Supply Capacities:

    o   Input capacities:
    Source          Item           Stack Height   Reference Capacity
    Primary Tray    Paper             20 mm       200 sheets @
                                                      75 g/sqm (20 lb)
                    Transparency       6 mm        50 transparencies
                    Labels             7 mm        50 sheets
    Second Drawer   Paper             50 mm       500 sheets @
                                                      75 g/sqm (20 lb)
    Envelope Feeder Envelopes         55 mm        75 envelopes @
                                                      75g/sqm (20 lb)
    o   Output capacities:
    Exit            Item            Capacity
    Top Tray        Paper           100 sheets @ 75 g/sqm (20 lb)
                    Transparency     50 transparencies
                    Labels           50 sheets
                    Envelopes        15 envelopes
    Front Tray      Paper            20 sheets @ 75 g/sqm (20 lb)
                    Transparency     10 transparencies
                    Labels           10 sheets
                    Envelopes         5 envelopes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. 4029 LASERPRINTER SERIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MODEL 010 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

MODEL 021 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

MODEL 022 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

MODEL 040 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

MODEL 041 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

MODEL 042 (FOR IBM US, NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS OF SEPTEMBER 29, 1993.)

Double click here to display picture

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series is a family of compact nonimpact desktop page
printers for attachment to IBM Personal Computers, IBM PS/2* products, IBM RISC
System/6000* computers, IBM displays, and IBM systems.  Refer to "IBM Personal
Printers Marketing Reference Guide for details".  The IBM LaserPrinter 4029
Series includes the LaserPrinter 5E, which prints up to 5 pages per minute
(PPM), the LaserPrinter 6, up to 6 PPM and the LaserPrinter 10 and LaserPrinter
10L, with printing speeds of up to 10 PPM.  The LaserPrinter 4029 Series has
addressable resolution of 300x300 dots per inch (DPI), with 600x600 DPI
capability on the LaserPrinter 6, LaserPrinter 10 or LaserPrinter 10L when the
PostScript Option and 4Mb memory option are installed.

The printers have 1Mb of resident memory, print quality enhancement technology
(PQET) hardware, 16 standard outline fonts which are rendered with Adobe
technology, 10 bit-mapped fonts, and high speed parallel and serial interfaces.
The printers use the same single-element, customer-replaceable, High Yield +
Cartridge as currently available with the IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001 and
E01. The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Models 010 and 020 are shipped with a Starter
Cartridge and the Models 030 and 040 are shipped with a High Yield + Cartridge.

Support for IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), Hewlett-Packard LaserJet
series II (PCL 4) emulation, and plotter emulation are standard with the 4029
Series.  Their speed, function, compact size, High Yield + Cartridge and
extensive font and paper handling features make the 4029 Series printers
excellent workstation page printers for use in office, professional, shared
printer and LAN environments.

HIGHLIGHTS

All IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series printers share in common the following
features:

    o   Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET)
    o   High-resolution, 300 dot-per-inch printing
    o   Expansion of the 1Mb resident user memory by adding 1Mb, 2Mb or
        4Mb optional memory cards, expandability up to 9Mb
    o   Raster Port interface with image decompression mode
    o   User friendly 16 character LCD operator panel
    o   Full range of automatic paper-handling trays (with automatic paper-
        size sensing)
    o   Standard software-switchable emulations, including IBM Personal
        Printer Data Stream (PPDS), Hewlett-Packard (HP) LaserJet Series
        II (PCL4) emulation, plotter emulation (IBM 7372 and HP 7475A
        color plotters)
    o   Optional software emulations include Hewlett-Packard (HP) LaserJet
        Series III (PCL5) emulation, and PostScript.
    o   Superior font offerings -- 16 built-in outline typeface styles.
    o   High speed parallel, serial interfaces standard.
    o   Small operating footprint.
    o   Member of the IBM LaserPrinter family with full compatibility of
        supplies and features (except additive memory features, PostScript,
        and PCL5 emulation).

The IBM LaserPrinter 5E and IBM LaserPrinter 6 have:

    o   Controller card with a Motorola M68000 processor

The IBM LaserPrinter 10 and 10L have:

    o   Auto-size sensing trays (also available on the LaserPrinter 6)
    o   High-resolution, 600 dot-per-inch PostScript printing (also
        available on the LaserPrinter 6).
    o   High-performance Motorola M68020 processor
    o   Envelope enhance hardware for reduced wrinkling of envelopes

The 4029 will provide customers with an industry-leader printer in terms of
price/performance.  This will improve the customer's ability to efficiently
produce in-house published documents, including newsletters, brochures,
presentations, and business graphics.

The 4029 offers the most popular industry-standard connections:  serial and
parallel.  As a result,customers will realize a high level of flexibility with
the 4029 including the ability to relocate the printer to a wide range of
workstations, such as IBM Personal Computers, IBM PS/2 computers, IBM Advanced
Workstations, and IBM PC Compatibles.

Customers will find installation and setup of the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series
easy and simple.

The high-performance MC68020-based controller contained in the LaserPrinter 10
and 10L provides increased throughput when compared to the IBM LaserPrinter
4019 models and to competitive, similarly attached printers.

The expandable memory (up to 9Mb) will increase productivity because of the
improved performance achieved by facilitating scalable font cache and
rastorized fonts, images and forms stored in the printer memory.

Automatic emulation switching drivers provided with each 4029 printer allows
users to change emulation modes from their workstations instead of using
hardware switches on the printer, which is common in the industry today.  This
is especially important in a LAN or other shared environments.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series printers are compatible with all the supplies,
options and features (except memory and optional software emulations) of the
other printers in the IBM LaserPrinter family.

Customers will be able to choose from application software packages which take
advantage of the attributes of the PPDS data stream.  With the PostScript
option installed, customers will be able to choose from over 600 PostScript
application software packages which take advantage of the attributes of the
PostScript page description language.  With the PCL 5 Emulation option
installed, customers will be able to choose from application software packages
which take advantage of the attributes of the PCL 5 language.  The Software
Driver/Application Manual contains information about software application which
support the different modes and emulations of the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series
printers.  This manual (SB40-0202) is included with every printer.

A wide variety of field installable features enable growth in speed and
function as required. For example the IBM LaserPrinter 6, can be field upgraded
to an IBM LaserPrinter 10 which prints up to 10 PPM. Function enhancements
include Post Script, PCL5, Envelope + Feeder, etc.

Like the IBM LaserPrinter 4019 printers the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series offer
customers the ability to switch emulation modes from their workstation.
Supplied in the supplemental utility option is an Automatic Emulation Switching
device driver.  When using this driver, a mixture of emulation data streams can
be accepted by the printer without intervention at the printer or host.  The
driver code simulates a different printer for each application data stream and
is designed to work over the parallel and serial interfaces.

Supplied with each IBM LaserPrinter 4029, models 020, 030, and 040, are
optional screen fonts.  Users who wish to take full advantage of the Windows
(DOS) or Presentation Manager* (OS/2*) environment should install the screen
fonts.

Screen font diskette package: Three - 3.5 inch diskettes containing:

    o   17 outline fonts
    o   Symbol font for download to printer
    o   LaserDriver software utility

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series is compatible with IBM's other Laser Printers
as follows:

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series is basically plug-compatible with the IBM
LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001 and E01.

Replacing the IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001 or E01 with an IBM LaserPrinter
4029 is simply a matter of printer substitution.

The operating systems and software applications that support the IBM
LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001 and E01 (also with the PostScript option
installed), will support the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series in the same way. If
the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 is replacing an IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models 001 or
E01 and the device driver for automatic emulation switching is being used, the
customer must load the installation utility (which includes new device drivers)
shipped in the Supplemental Utilities.

In addition, the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series printers are compatible with
drivers that support either the Hewlett Packard LaserJet series II or Hewlett
Packard LaserJet series III when the optional PCL 5 Emulation Option is
installed.

A wide variety of features and options are field installable and can be set up
by the customer.

    o   Downloadable Font features
    o   500 Sheet Second Drawer (letter and legal)
    o   Optional Paper Trays
    o   Envelope + Feeder
    o   Printer Sharing Option
    o   100-Sheet Auxiliary Feeder
        Provides an additional paper source to the standard tray or the
        second drawer. The 100-Sheet Auxiliary Feeder is installed in the
        back of the machine, in place of the manual input tray.
    o   Scalable Font Card (for both PPDS and PostScript mode)
    o   Font Cards
    o   Memory Options
        Memory Options extend the IBM Laser Printer 4029 1Mb user memory
        and provide increased font cache capabilities.  These features are
        recommended for situations in which large numbers of soft fonts are
        to be downloaded to the printer.  One, two and four megabyte options
        are offered.  These features provide for up to 9Mb of resident
        memory in the printer.
        The Memory Options are different from the other IBM LaserPrinter
        4019 Models 001 and E01 features and are not interchangeable with
        the LaserPrinter 4019 models.
    o   PostScript Option
        The PostScript Option upgrades the printers to work in an additional
        emulation mode. The PostScript Option contains the Adobe PostScript
        Page Description Language interpreter (Level 1 Version 52.4). This
        option gives the customer the ability to generate complex page
        designs and quality desktop output. The Adobe Type Manager font
        rendering technology, standard in the PostScript option provides
        sharp, clear, outline screen fonts. The PostScript option supports
        multiple resolution printing at 300 and 600 dots-per-inch.
    o   PCL 5 Emulation
        The PCL 5 Emulation option upgrades the printers to operate in
        the Page Control Language (PCL) 5 emulation, which supports the
        Hewlett Packard(R) LaserJet III command language.

IBM LASERPRINTER 5E 4029-010

A 5PPM laser printer with a Motorola M68000 microprocessor, one font slot and
one emulation option connector.  It does not support auto-paper size sensing or
the 500 sheet second drawer. The LaserPrinter 5E does not have a front exit and
supports collated output only.

IBM LASERPRINTER 6 4029-020

A 6PPM laser printer with a Motorola M68000 micro processor, 2 font slots, 2
emulation option connectors, auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer
support and 600 DPI resolution PostScript capability.  Face-up or collated
output is provided.

IBM LASERPRINTER 10 4029-030

A 10 PPM laser printer with a Motorola M68020 micro processor, 2 font slots, 2
emulation option connectors, auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer
support, 600 DPI resolution PostScript capability and envelope enhance.
Face-up or collated output is provided.

IBM LASERPRINTER 10L 4029-040

A 10 PPM laser printer with a Motorola M68020 micro processor, 2 font slots, 2
emulation option connectors, auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer
standard, 600 DPI resolution PostScript capability and envelope enhance.  250
sheet output tray with output full sensing standard. Face-up or collated output
is provided.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series and all its features are customer set-up.

A model upgrade feature is offered for the IBM LaserPrinter 6. It will upgrade
the IBM LaserPrinter 6 to an IBM LaserPrinter 10. It consists of a system card,
fuser modification hardware, installation instructions, and logo plates.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will print at maximum rated speeds of:

    o   IBM LaserPrinter 5E  -  5 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 6   -  6 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10  - 10 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10L - 10 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 5E  -  12,000 pages per month
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 6   -  14,000 pages per month
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10  -  20,000 pages per month
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10L -  20,000 pages per month

They are an outgrowth/improvement of the IBM LaserPrinter 4019 Models. Standard
outline fonts are Courier, Times New Roman, Helvetica, and Helvetica Narrow
(these are offered in normal, italic, bold and bold italic), print quality
enhancement technology (PQET), a user friendly 16 character LCD operator panel,
multiple resolution print quality capabilities (300 and 600 DPI) and versatile
paper handling options are some of the basic functions of the IBM LaserPrinter
4029 Series.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Dimensions:
         IBM LaserPrinter 5E, 6, 10
              Base Printer               Maximum Featured            Notes
      Width   360 mm (14.2 inches)       360 mm (14.2 inches)
      Depth   522 mm (20.6 inches)       860 mm (33.9 inches)         2,3
      Height  266 mm (10.2 inches)       405 mm (16.2 inches)         1
      Weight  15.3 kg (33.6 lb)          21 kg (46 lb)                4

         IBM LaserPrinter 10L
              Base Printer               Maximum Featured            Notes
      Width   360 mm (14.2 in)           360 mm (14.2 in)
      Depth   522 mm (20.6 in)           860 mm (33.9 in)             2,3
      Height  421 mm (16.8 in)           445 mm (17.8 in)             1
      Weight  19.4 kg (43 lb)            21 kg (46 lb)                4

Note: 1) The printer stands at maximum height when it is equipped with the
500-Sheet Second Drawer and optional Envelope + Feeder Option. The Model 5E
does not support the 500-Sheet Second Drawer.

2) The base printer depth dimension includes the letter/A4 size paper tray and
the manual feed tray.  When an optional legal size paper tray is used, the base
depth dimension is 579 mm (22.8 inches).

3) The printer is at maximum depth, when it has both the front exit tray and
the optional Envelope + Feeder installed. There is no front exit on the Model
5E.

4) Weight without paper or print cartridge.

Electrical specification:

            Voltage
    -----------------------
    100 V - 127 V, 50/60 Hz

    Certification: U/L, CSA, FCC(B)

Four new models have been added to the IBM Laserprinter 4029 Series.  All are
equipped with an Adobe** PostScript** interpreter, 39 Type 1 formatted outline
fonts on Models 021, 041 and 042, with 17 fonts standard on the Model 022,
Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET), and additional memory. Models 021
and 022 have addressable resolution of 300 x 330 dots per inch(DPI) with
upgradeability to 600x600 DPI.  Models 041 and 042 have 600 x 600 DPI
resolution as standard.  The LaserPrinter A Series, Models 021 and 041, are
compatible with Apple** and Macintosh** systems and/or AppleTalk** Network
connectivity. The LaserPrinter P Series, Models 022 and 042, support the IBM
Personal Printer Data Stream(PPDS), Hewlett-Packard LaserJet** Series II(PCL4),
and plotter emulation.

The following features are also provided on the LaserPrinter models specified.

    o   39 Type 1 outline fonts (6A, 10A, and 10P)
    o   17 Type 1 outline fonts (6P)
    o   Enhanced performance with an AppleTalk network interface (6A and
        10A)
    o   A controller card with a 10-MHz Motorola MC68000** processor (6A
        and 6P)
    o   A high-performance controller card with a 16.7-MHz Motorola
        MC68020** processor (10A and 10P)
    o   2MB of standard random access memory (6A and 6P)
    o   5MB of standard random access memory (10A and 10P)
    o   Enhanced envelope hardware for reduced wrinkling of envelopes (10A
        and 10P)
    o   A 250-sheet output bin with tray full sensing (10A and 10P)
    o   Standard high-speed parallel and serial interfaces (6P and 10P)
    o   Standard software-switchable emulations, between Adobe PostScript,
        IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), Hewlett-Packard (HP)
        LaserJet Series II (PCL4) emulation, and plotter emulation (IBM
        7372 and HP 7475A color plotters) (6P and 10P)
    o   Optional Hewlett-Packard (HP) LaserJet Series III (PCL5) emulation
        (6P and 10P).

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 A Series provides Apple Macintosh computer customers
with industry leading 600 x 600 DPI printing with a standard Adobe PostScript
interpreter with up to 39 Type 1 Adobe outline fonts available.  This will
improve the customer's ability to efficiently produce in-house published
documents, including newsletters, brochures, presentations, and business
graphics.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 P Series provides the popular industry-standard
connections -- high-speed parallel (standard), high-speed serial (standard) --
and attachment to systems or local area networks (LANs) (optional), via the IBM
LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters. As a result, customers will realize a
high level of flexibility with the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 P Series including the
ability to relocate the printer to a wide range of workstations, such as IBM
Personal Computers, IBM PS/2(R) computers, IBM Advanced Workstations, IBM PC
Compatibles, and networked systems.  Additionally, industry leading 600 x 600
DPI print quality improves the quality of business documents, especially image
intensive material.

Customer setup time has been decreased and the task has been simplified with
the addition the IBM LaserPrinter A and P 4029 Series to the current IBM
LaserPrinter 4029 Series family.  All four new models have Adobe PostScript
interpreter and additional printer memory installed at the factory.
Additionally, the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 A Series printers add an AppleTalk
network interface.

Increased IBM LaserPrinter 4029 A Series print job throughput is provided with
the implementation of a bi-directional (parallel in and serial out) printer
AppleTalk network interface.

The expandable memory (up to 9MB) can increase productivity with improved
performance achieved by facilitating the scalable font cache, images, and forms
stored in the printer memory. Automatic emulation and mode switching drivers,
provided in the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 P Series Printers Supplemental Utility
option, allow users to change emulation and modes from their workstations
instead of using hardware switches on the printer, which is common in the
industry today.  This is especially important in a LAN or other shared
environment.

An "Open Me First" diskette with PostScript printer drivers is provided with
the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 P Series printers for leading desktop publishing and
word processing applications.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series printers are compatible with all the supplies,
options, and features (except memory and optional software emulations) of the
other printers in the IBM LaserPrinter family.

As with the current IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series the new A Series and P Series
printers can be tailored to the customer's current and future needs by the
addition of customer-installable options.  Available features are:

    o   500-Sheet Second Drawer (letter and legal)
    o   Envelope+ Feeder
    o   100-Sheet Auxiliary Feeder
    o   Optional Paper Trays
    o   Additional Memory Options
    o   PCL5 Emulation Option (P Series)

With Adobe PostScript installed, the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series printers will
be supported by many PostScript applications.  Customers will be able to choose
from many PostScript application software packages that take advantage of the
attributes of the PostScript page description language.

IBM LASERPRINTER 6A 4029-021 The printer comes pre-assembled from the factory
with the following options installed: IBM LaserPrinter Option for AppleTalk
Networks, 1 MByte of optional printer memory, Adobe PostScript Interpreter and
the 22 Font Scalable Card. A 6PPM laser printer with a 10 MHz Motorola
MC68000** microprocessor, two font slots, two emulation option connectors,
auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer support, 600 dpi resolution
PostScript capability (with 4 Meg of additional memory), PQET hardware.
Face-up or collated output is provided.

IBM LASERPRINTER 6P 4029-022, The printer comes pre-assembled from the factory
with the following options installed:  1 MByte of optional printer memory, and
the Adobe PostScript Interpreter. A 6PPM laser printer with a 10 MHz Motorola
MC68000 microprocessor, two font slots, two emulation option connectors,
auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer support, 600 dpi resolution
PostScript capability (with 4 Meg of additional memory), PQET hardware.
Face-up or collated output is provided.

IBM LASERPRINTER 10A 4029-041 The printer comes pre-assembled from the factory
with the following options installed: IBM LaserPrinter Option for AppleTalk
Networks, 4 MByte of optional printer memory, Adobe PostScript Interpreter and
the 22 Font Scalable Card. A 10 PPM laser printer with a 16.7 Mhz Motorola
MC68020** microprocessor, two font slots, two emulation option connectors,
auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer support, 600 dpi resolution
PostScript capability, envelope enhance and PQET hardware.  Face-up or collated
output is provided.

IBM LASERPRINTER 10P 4029-042 The printer comes pre-assembled from the factory
with the following options installed:  4 MByte of optional printer memory,
Adobe PostScript Interpreter and the 22 Font Scalable Card. A 10 PPM laser
printer with a 16.7 Mhz Motorola MC68020 microprocessor, two font slots, two
emulation option connectors, auto-paper size sensing, 500-sheet second drawer
support, 600 dpi resolution PostScript capability, envelope enhance, PQET
hardware, 250 sheet output tray with output full sensing.  Face-up or collated
output is provided.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 A Series and IBM LaserPrinter 4029 P Series are
customer setup (CSU) printers. The CSU information is contained in the "Getting
Started" manual which is supplied with the printer in the National language.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IBM LaserPrinter 6A

                Base Printer             Maximum Featured           Notes
        Width   360 mm (14.2 inches)     360 mm (14.2 inches)
        Depth   522 mm (20.6 inches)     860 mm (33.9 inches)        2,3
        Height  300 mm (11.8 in)         510 mm (20.1 in)            1
        Weight  15.5 kg (34.1 lb)        20.9 kg (46 lb)             4

IBM LaserPrinter 6P

                Base Printer             Maximum Featured           Notes
        Width   360 mm (14.2 inches)     360 mm (14.2 inches)
        Depth   522 mm (20.6 inches)     860 mm (33.9 inches)        2,3
        Height  300 mm (11.8 in)         510 mm (20.1 in)            1
        Weight  15.2 kg (36.6 lb)        20.9 kg (46 lb)             4

IBM LaserPrinter 10A

                Base Printer           Maximum Featured       Note
        Width   360 mm (14.2 in)       360 mm (14.2 in)
        Depth   522 mm (20.6 in)       860 mm (33.9 in)         2,3
        Height  310 mm (12.2 in)       510 mm (20.1 in)         1
        Weight  16.3 kg (36.0 lb)      22.2 kg (49 lb)          4

IBM LaserPrinter 10P

                Base Printer           Maximum Featured       Note
        Width   360 mm (14.2 in)       360 mm (14.2 in)
        Depth   522 mm (20.6 in)       860 mm (33.9 in)         2,3
        Height  310 mm (12.2 in)       510 mm (20.1 in)         1
        Weight  16.1 kg (35.5 lb)      22.2 kg (49 lb)          4

1) The printers are at maximum height when they are equipped with the optional
500-Sheet Second Drawer and Envelope+ Feeder. 2) The base printer depth
dimension includes the letter/A4 size paper tray and the manual feed tray.
When an optional legal size paper tray is used, the base depth dimension is 579
mm (22.8 inches). 3) The printer is at maximum depth when it has both the front
exit tray and the optional Envelope+ Feeder installed. 4) Weight without paper
or print cartridge.

Operating Clearance The printer requires 152 mm (6.0 inches) on all four sides
and 305 mm (12.0 inches) on top for proper operation.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series will print at maximum rated engine speeds for
8 1/2 x 11 inch pages in 300 dpi print resolution

    o   IBM LaserPrinter 6A  -  6 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 6P  -  6 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10A - 10 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10P - 10 PPM
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 6A  -  14,000 pages per month
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 6P  -  14,000 pages per month
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10A -  20,000 pages per month
    o   IBM LaserPrinter 10P -  20,000 pages per month

Standard outline fonts are Courier, Times Roman**, Helvetica**, and Helvetica
Narrow, ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, New Century Schoolbook,
Palatino**, and ITC Zapf, print quality enhancement technology (PQET), a user
friendly 16 character LCD operator panel, multiple resolution print quality
capabilities (300 and 600 dpi) and versatile paper handling options are some of
the basic functions of the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 Series.

Addressability - dots per inch (horizontal and vertical)

    300 x 300 dots per inch (all models)
    600 x 600 dots per inch (all models with a minimum of 5MB of
                             printer memory installed)

LaserPrinter 6A and 6P come with an installed "clean-hands" Starter Cartridge
with an average yield of 6,000 pages at 2.8 percent page coverage (4,000 pages
at 5 percent page coverage).

LaserPrinter 10A and LaserPrinter 10P come with an installed "clean-hands" High
Yield + Cartridge with an average yield of 15,000 pages at 2.8 percent page
coverage (9,500 pages at 5 percent page coverage).

    o   LocalTalk** Interface  Models 6A and 10A
    o   Interface  High-speed IBM PC Parallel, RS-232C serial, and raster
        interfaces provided (Models 6P and 10P).
    o   For additional technical information, please see the "IBM Laser-
        Printer 4029 Series Technical Reference" (P/N 1195520, SA40-0603).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. 4039 LASERPRINTER SERIES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

Lexmark(TM) announces the next generation of laser printers, with the built-in
intelligence to adapt to customers' needs today -- and grow with them tomorrow.

There are five new LaserPrinters with print speeds ranging from 10 to 16 pages
per minute.  Each model is built with a fast RISC processor, has a compact,
space-saving footprint and can be configured with an optional snap-on duplexing
attachment.

PCL5 and PostScript(1) compatible emulations are standard

SmartSwitch is built in too, so when using PostScript or PCL5, the printer can
choose the right language for each job, automatically.

Sharp 600 x 600 dots per inch resolution is standard, with Print Quality
Enhancement Technology for smoother curves.  PictureGrade(3) advanced screening
produces sharp images with up to 100 levels of gray scale.

Drivers for popular software packages are included, along with Lexmark's
special driver for faster Windows printing.  So is Lexmark's Quick Start
utility to choose and load the right drivers, automatically.

A large, intuitive, multi-line operator display makes installation and use
easier.

Inside these LaserPrinters, upgradeable code lets customers add new
capabilities as they become available from Lexmark, without buying a new
machine.  Customers can also store frequently used forms, logos, signatures,
and fonts permanently -- yet change them instantly, with optional flash memory.

For LAN users, Lexmark's optional Internal Network Adapter (INA) cards work
concurrently with multiple network operating systems.  LocalTalk(4) cards are
available for AppleTalk(4) networks also.  Customers can even update LAN
software remotely.  Bi-directional communication lets a LAN Administrator check
printer status from across the LAN.  And the LaserPrinter connects
simultaneously to serial, parallel, and optional network inputs, for maximum
flexibility.

Each new 4039 uses the same supplies.  The long life print cartridge comes
standard in the 10R, 10R/Duplex, 12R and 12L for up to 10,000 pages(5).  The
16L comes standard with the print cartridge with marathon performance, offering
customers up to 20,000 pages between changes.

The 4039s also use the same paper handling options including a 100-sheet
auxiliary feeder and an envelope feeder.

And, each 4039 LaserPrinter is backed by the quality and responsiveness of
Lexmark, the independent, worldwide company that manufactures IBM(R) personal
printers, IBM typewriters, related supplies, and keyboards. (TM) Trademark of
Lexmark International, Inc. (1) PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe
Systems, Inc. (2) Based on list price, dealer prices may vary. (3) PictureGrade
is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc. (4) LocalTalk and AppleTalk are
registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. (5) Pages based on 2.8% coverage.
(R) IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries and is used under
license.

Lexmark has included PostScript and PCL5 compatible emulations standard on all
4039s.  The customer can change back and forth between the two data streams
automatically via the 4039 "SmartSwitch" and save new job set-up time.

The customer should not have to make special provisions for the 4039 because
they will "plug and play" in PCL5 and PostScript applications.

IBM 4039 LaserPrinters are equally effective working for PC-compatibles,
Macintosh(6) computers, other workstations, or a mix of all three. (6)
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

Built-in parallel and serial ports equip IBM 4039 LaserPrinters to plug in to
existing print-servers simply and quickly.  Even better, optional internal
network adapters enable these printers to connect directly to a LAN, which
means close proximity to a print-server is no longer a requirement.  You can
place a 4039 LaserPrinter wherever it's best for you.

Lexmark offers a choice of smart, internal network adapters (INAs) as options
to interface with each of the three major network types:

    o  Token-Ring
    o  Ethernet
    o  LocalTalk

We also offer our network-loadable Quick Start utility that prompts you through
installing, configuring and testing your new LaserPrinter -- even from a remote
administrator's workstation.  And you can easily change these associations at
any time.

Flexible connectivity enables the new IBM LaserPrinters to seamlessly support
printing jobs from a variety of sources on a network -- using multiple paths
and protocols, and accommodating different hardware platforms and network
operating systems.

Separate adapters are not needed because multiple protocols can be concurrently
maintained with a single Lexmark Internal Network Adapter (INA).  Our
Token-Ring INA, for example, provides all the protocol support needed to print
four different ways.  Lexmark INAs provide protocol support for:

    o  NetWare(7)
    o  OS/2(R) LAN Server
    o  Microsoft(8) LAN Manager
    o  AIX(R)
    o  TCP/IP (Available 4Q93)
    o  Banyan(9) Vines(9) (Available 4Q93)
    o  TokenTalk(10) (Available 4Q93)
    o  EtherTalk(10) (Available 4Q93)
(7) NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. (R) OS/2 and AIX are
registered trademarks of International Business Machines   Corporation. (8)
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. (9) Banyan and
Vines are registered trademarks of Banyan Systems, Inc. (10) TokenTalk and
EtherTalk are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

The latest Lexmark advance in paper handling is the modular (customer
installable) duplex option.  This option allows customers to save paper and
postage expense.

The duplex option can be installed on any of the four 4039 models.  The
customer can duplex in both the LAN and the general office environment.

The option is easy to install and can be moved to another 4039 printer when
required, saving the customer from having to call a service person.

Intelligent paper-handling design equips IBM 4039 LaserPrinters to efficiently
meet the varied needs of users all around your LAN while keeping maintenance
requirements low.  Paper-handling features include:

    o  Simultaneous support for up to three separate paper sources.
    o  Automatic sensing of paper size (no requirement for multiple trays).
    o  Large capacity and automatic tray linking to reduce frequency of refills.
    o  Automatic "bin full" sensing to prevent overflows (available on 12L and
       16L).
    o  Automatic collating to keep documents in perfect order as they emerge.
    o  Envelope conditioning for printing wrinkle-free envelopes (standard on 12R,
       12L, and 16L).

There are currently three major expansion opportunities: 1. The PCL5,
PostScript data streams, and the fonts are on a customer   replaceable SIMM.
As Lexmark keeps pace with the industry, so can our   customers.  This is an
alternative to replacing their printers, and allows   for true investment
protection.

2. The 1 or 2 Megabyte flash memory option allows customers using PCL to put
forms, logos, signatures and fonts online saving the time to download from
their PC or workstation.

3. 4039 internal network adapters can be upgraded online.  Systems/network
administrators will save time and can be assured that the updates have been
made in each printer.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4039 can grow as the customer's needs change.  They just
fill out the registration form supplied with their printer.  They will then be
notified of advances and expansion offerings at special introductory prices.
The 4039 customers can use their printer longer, delaying printer replacement
expense and related business disruption.  This program is similar to upgrade
programs successfully employed by applications developers.

The advances in ease-of-use in the 4039 family result from three generations of
Lexmark LaserPrinter development.  Every aspect of installation, set-up and
program installation has been maintained or improved while increasing the
printing performance and flexibility of the 4039 printers.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4039 Series offers Print Quality Enhancement Technology
(PQET) in both 300 and 600 dpi that yields smooth, natural looking edges and
curves.

The introduction of the 12 and 16-page per minute models positions Lexmark as
the "complete" supplier of LaserPrinters for the customer.  Combine these
higher speed printers with Lexmark's new connectivity, expandability and paper
handling and Lexmark can do it all!

The 4039 duplexing can save the customer up to 50% of the cost of paper,
storage, and mailing of multiple page documents while saving trees in the
process.

The new IBM 4039 Print Cartridge with Marathon Performance (up to 20,000 pages)
reduces the amount of times a cartridges must be replaced. "Operation Resource"
helps the customer dispose of the print cartridge safely and easily.

The 4039 power saver mode can be selected to reduce energy usage and expense.

Flash Memory:  The IBM LaserPrinter 4039 family incorporates flash memory which
gives the PCL user the ability to store forms, fonts, macros, signatures, and
logos within the printer in non-volatile storage.  Print jobs that require
downloading of frequently used forms and fonts may be completed quicker and
easier.

Available in 1 and 2 meg options, flash memory maintains downloaded data when
the printer is powered off or the memory SIMM is removed from the printer.

Upgradeable Internal Network Adapters:  Lexmark's Optional Internal Network
Adapters are customer upgradeable via the network administrator, downloadable
from diskette.  This allows the network administrator to implement new/updated
network protocols online without replacing printer hardware.

Customer Replaceable Printer Microcode:  The LaserPrinter 4039 printer
microcode is stored on a customer replaceable SIMM (Single In-Line Memory
Module).  By storing datastream, operator panel, and other advanced printer
function on a SIMM, the customer has the ability to update their printer with
the latest advances.  Registered users will be notified of new advances at
special introductory prices.  This allows the customer to update printer
function and software as new releases are developed.

IBM 4039 Print Accelerator for Windows:  The IBM 4039 Print Accelerator for
Windows(11) is a 300 and 600 dpi print driver that dramatically improves print
performance for Windows applications.

The Print Accelerator is now incorporated as a feature within our standard PCL5
Windows driver.  Only one driver has to be loaded, and the user may choose to
operate in Print Accelerator mode or standard (PCL5) driver mode, depending on
their operating environment.  The 4039 Print Accelerator can be activated by
selecting the "Print Accelerator" box on the Setup panel of the driver.

The 4039 Print Accelerator incorporates Advanced Raster Technology, a Lexmark
developed technique for achieving high speed Windows printing.

The 4039 Print Accelerator also fully utilizes the Fastbytes parallel interface
implemented on the 4039.  Data transfer rates of nearly 400kb/sec have been
measured on the parallel interface when using the 4039 Print Accelerator.

PictureGrade:  PictureGrade allows the user to easily produce optimal print
quality of scanned images on the first try with no adjustments.  The user can
now avoid the difficult process of adjusting images and print parameters to
achieve acceptable results.

When printing grays and scanned images, laser printers use a process called
digital halftoning to represent gray levels.  In a halftone image, the factors
affecting output quality are screen frequency, number of grays, and gray
accuracy.

All three of these factors may be maximized when using the Lexmark PictureGrade
feature so that near photographic quality may be achieved.  In 600dpi
resolution and PictureGrade mode, the 4039 alters the standard default
PostScript "setscreen" and "settransfer" functions to produce optimal print
quality.

Memory Management:  Using Lexmark's advanced memory management system, the
LaserPrinter 4039 will print complex graphics and text with significantly less
memory.  This enables all models of the 4039 family to print 600dpi without the
user purchasing additional memory.

Duplex Decurl:  The LaserPrinter 4039 Duplex option includes a self-adjusting
decurl mechanism that feeds 16 lb. to 24 lb.  paper flatter and increases
printer reliability.  This results in fewer paper jams, duplexing within a
wider variety of duplexing applications, and delivers a flat original to the
user.

Warranty Period:  One year. Customer Setup:  Yes. Warranty Service:   IBM or
Dealer On-Site Repair (16L and 12L)   Customer Carry-in (10R and 12R and
10R/Duplex)

SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Dimensions:

             Base Printer                   Maximum Featured     Notes
    Width    378 mm (14.9 in)               378 mm (14.9 in)
    Depth    533 mm (21.0 in)               872 mm (34.3 in)       2
    Height   407 mm (16.0 in)(16L and 12L)    533 mm (21.0 in)       1
    Height   299 mm (11.8 in)(12R and 10R)    425 mm (16.7 in)       1
    Weight   21.0 kg (46.0 lb)(16L and 12L)   26.5 kg (58 lbs)       3
    Weight   18.2 kg (40.0 lb)(12R and 10R)   23.7 kg (52 lbs)       3

Notes: 1. The printers are at maximum height when they are equipped with the
optional   500-Sheet Second Drawer. 2. The printer is at maximum depth, when it
has both the front exit tray (or   duplex) and the optional Envelope + Feeder
installed. 3. Add 6 lbs for duplex.

Acoustics:

    50 dba printing
    33 dba idle

Operating Clearance: The printer requires 152 mm (6.0 inches) on all four sides
and 305 mm (12.0 inches) on top for proper operation.

Electrical Specification:

    Description         Line Voltage
    Low Voltage         100V-127V, 50/60Hz

Certification: U/L, CSA, FCC(A) (12L and 16L) FCC(B) (12R, 10R and 10R/Duplex)

Printer Specifications Maximum print rate: Rate print engine speed for 8 1/2 x
11 inch paper at 300 x 300 DPI print resolution:

    IBM LaserPrinter 16L               16 PPM
                     12L and 12R         12 PPM
                     10R and 10R/Duplex  10 PPM

Rated print engine speed for 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper at 600 x 600 DPI print
resolution:

    IBM LaserPrinter 4039 (all models):  8 PPM

Addressability: Dots per inch (horizontal and vertical)

    300 x 300 dots per inch, with PQET and
    600 x 600 dots per inch, with PQET
Printer warm-up time is less than 35 seconds.

Maximum recommended duty cycle:

    IBM LaserPrinter 4039 16L            Up to 75,000 pages per month
    IBM LaserPrinter 4039 12L            Up to 50,000 pages per month
    IBM LaserPrinter 4039 12R            Up to 35,000 pages per month
    IBM LaserPrinter 4039 10R            Up to 25,000 pages per month
    IBM LaserPrinter 4039 10R/Duplex     Up to 25,000 pages per month

The IBM 4039 LaserPrinter 16L comes with an installed "clean-hands" print
cartridge with marathon performance which yields an average of 20,000 pages at
2.8% page coverage (12,800 pages at 5% page coverage).

The IBM 4039 LaserPrinter 12L, 12R, and 10R 10R/Duplex comes with an installed
"clean hands" print cartridge which yields an average of 10,000 pages at 2.8%
coverage (7,000 pages at 5% coverage).

Paper Handling Options:  The 500 Sheet Second Drawer Options for LaserPrinter
4039 Series (P/Ns 1195836 and 1195830) may be used with the LaserPrinter 4029
Series and 4019 Series.  However, the 500 Sheet Second Drawer Options for the
4029 and 4019 Series (P/Ns 1183365 and 1183366) may not be used with the 4039
Series.

The Envelope + Feeder and the Auxiliary Sheet Feeder are compatible across the
4019, 4029, and 4039 family of products.

Printer Performance:  As is the case with most page printers in this class,
printer performance depends on:

    o  Interface to host
    o  Host system and application
    o  Complexity and content of page
    o  Available memory
All models of the 4039 family top print speed in 600 dpi mode is 8 ppm.

Software Compatibility:  IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) is not
supported.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. 4226 IBM MODEL 302 PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The IBM 4226 Model 302 is a heavy-duty, unattended, serial dot matrix printer
with speeds up to 533 characters/second (CPS).  It is program compatible with
the IBM 4202-003 Proprinter* III XL and the Epson(1) DFX-5000 printers.

The IBM 4226 Model 302 Printer can be attached to IBM Personal Computers; IBM
PS/2* computers; IBM displays with ASCII ports; AS/400* and System/370* with
ASCII control units or adapters; RISC System/6000* computers.

The 4226 fills a customer need for a low cost, high-speed, heavy-duty,
unattended, impact, continuous-form (up to six-part) printer that is attachable
to the PS/2 and other IBM systems with an ASCII interface.

Program compatibility with the IBM 4202 and Epson DFX-5000 protects the
customer's software investment.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   533 CPS maximum draft speed
    o   Unattended operation
    o   IBM PPDS (Personal Printer Data Stream) and Epson DFX-5000 Emulation
    o   Heavy-duty printer (multipart forms, up to six-part)
    o   EIA-232/EIA-422 Serial and Parallel Attachments are Standard
    o   22 Kb Receive Buffer is standard
    o   "Clean Hands" 15 Million Character Yield Ribbon

The IBM 4226 Printer provides the user with unattended continuous-form printing
capability.  The automatic emulation switching (via SIC Code Commands)
eliminates the need for operator intervention between jobs sent to the printer.
The user-friendly operator panel is designed for the operator/user having
limited printer experience.  The IBM 4226 Printer provides a demonstration that
is easy to invoke and produces a printed page without system attachment.

The IBM 4226 Model 302 Printer can attach to IBM PS/2 via a parallel or serial
attachment.  In addition, further flexibility has been provided with
connectivity through the ASCII LPTx and COMx ports to the following system
environments  AS/400, RISC System/6000, and System/370.

The IBM 4226 Model 302 is Customer Setup (CSU).

The 4226 Printer is offered in one model, the 4226-302.  The 4226-302 Printer
is (533/400/100 CPS) 9-wire serial dot matrix heavy duty entry system printer.

The 4226-302 Printer offers multiple quality levels of printing  Fast Draft,
Draft, NLQ, and Raster Graphics.  Character design for the multiple qualities
are based on the same matrix as IBM 4202 models.  The print quality of each
level is equal to or better than that achieved with the IBM 4224 and Epson
DFX-5000 printers.

The 4226-302 Resident Fonts and Character Spacings available in the printer
when set in the "Proprinter Mode" are listed below:

    o   10 CPI (Fast Draft, Draft, Gothic, Courier)
    o   12 CPI (Fast Draft, Draft, Gothic, Courier)
    o   15 CPI (Draft)
    o   17.1 CPI (Draft)
    o   20 CPI (Draft)
    o   Proportional Spacing (Draft, Gothic)

The following list shows the various Resident Fonts and Character Spacings
available in the 4226-302 Printer when set in the "Epson Emulation mode":

    o   10 CPI (Fast Draft, Draft, Gothic, Courier)
    o   12 CPI (Draft, Gothic, Courier)
    o   15 CPI (Draft)
    o   17.1 CPI (Draft)
    o   20 CPI (Draft)
    o   Proportional Spacing (Draft, Gothic, Courier)

The printer Receive Buffer size is 22K.

The burst speed for the 4226-302 is 533 CPS in Fast Draft Mode, 400 CPS in
Draft Mode.

Line spacing of six or eight Lines Per Inch (LPI) or increments of 1/144-inch.
Several modes of print emphasis are provided  Emphasized (Bold), Double Wide,
Double High, Double Strike, Underscore, Overscore, and Super/ Subscripts.

There is a resident demo in the 4226-302 Printer which consists of a two page
print demo (stored in ROS) and is easily accessible through the operator panel.
This demo is available to the marketing personnel to assist them in explaining
the 4226-302 Printer's features and to the customer and the CE for verifying
printer functions during Customer Setup and servicing.

The 4226-302 user is not required to adjust their continuous forms, press
buttons, or in any way oversee the operation of the printer once it has been
properly setup to run a print job and the printer has started printing.  The
4226-302 Printer will complete multiple jobs without intervention (even
switching automatically between IBM and Epson emulation modes) provided there
are sufficient continuous forms available to complete the tasks being sent to
the printer.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  642 mm (25.3 inches)
    Depth:  280 mm (11.0 inches)
    Height: 271 mm (10.7 inches)
    Weight:  21 kg (46.0 lbs)
    Electrical power:  100 to 127 V AC (50 or 60 Hz)
    Noise Level:  55 dBA Operating (Four position average)

The 4226 Printer is not offered with a Twinaxial + ASCII or a Coaxial + ASCII
interface resident in the printer.  This interface (protocol converter) may be
obtained from third-party vendors if direct connection to the host is required.

The IBM 4226 Model 302 Printer is designed for continuous forms only.  For
proper feeding, registration, and print quality, the forms used in the IBM 4226
Model 302 Printer should meet the following specifications:

Continuous forms must meet the following requirements:

    Width  -   minimum 3-inch ( 76.2 mm)
               maximum 16-inch (406.4 mm)
    Length -   minimum 2-inch ( 50.8 mm)
               maximum 14-inch (355.6 mm)
    Number of copies:
        --  minimum:  One (original)
        --  maximum:  Six  (original plus 5 copies)
    Single Part Forms:
        --  Paper Weight:  56 to 90 g/sq m  (15 lb to 24 lb)
        --  Thickness:  .0028-inch to .0045-inch
    Multi-part Forms:
        --  Maximum total paper thickness:  0.0204-inch (0.518 mm)
    Paper weight of individual sheets:
        --  2 Part Forms:  45 to 60 g/sq m  (12 lb to 16 lb)
        --  3 to 6 Part Forms:  45 to 56 g/sq m  (12 lb to 15 lb)
    Carbon Paper weight:   30 g/sq m  (8 lb or less)
    Fastening limitation:  Spot glue multi-part forms and crimped forms
    must meet the following specifications:
        --  Gluing On Multi-part:  Spot gluing should be even on
            both right and left edges without significant crumples.
        --  Crimped Form must be fixed on both sides.  Crimping must be in
            the direction of paper motion.  The crimp of the first-part
            paper must extend behind the last part paper.
        --  Metal or tape fasteners along the edges are not supported.
    Feed holes must be free of chads and crimps to avoid real/false
    paper jams.
    Paper hole or cut is not supported in any printable area.
    Perforation Strength - Strong enough for normal operation.
    The tent at fold perforation must be
    less than 1 mm high.

Notes: Form length exceeding 11 inches may not stack correctly. Forms less than
6 inches in length or width should be tried for satisfactory stacking and may
require operator assistance. Cut Sheet paper is not supported (Continuous Form
Paper Only, up to 6 part).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. IBM LASERPRINTER 4029-600 DPI UPGRADE KIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Introducing Additional 600 dpi Solutions for the IBM LaserPrinter 4029 A
microcode change is required to the LaserPrinter 4029 to support these new
600dpi printing functions.  This change has been implemented on all newly
manufactured applicable models of the LaserPrinter 4029.  Those end users who
have LaserPrinter 4029's installed may purchase an upgrade kit containing the
new printer microcode and diskettes containing the three newly announced
drivers.  Resellers who did not receive the diskette in their printer accessory
kit may obtain the 4029 Print Accelerator/600 and/or the new Open Me First
Diskette directly from Lexmark.  See Transition Plan below for details.

The IBM LaserPrinter 5E does not support 600 dpi printing and will continue to
be shipped with the IBM 4029 Print Accelerator.

    Part
    Number      Description
    1374166     IBM LaserPrinter 4029-600
                DPI Upgrade Kit
                for LaserPrinter 6 and 6P
    1374036     IBM LaserPrinter 4029-600
                DPI Upgrade Kit
                for LaserPrinter 10, 10L, and 10P


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. 3816 IBM PAGE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 3816 Page Printer is a multi-function, non-impact page printer of
table-top design.  It provides letter-quality text and all-points-addressable
graphics at a maximum speed of 24 pages (impressions) per minute, and it is
designed to produce an average usage of 40,000 pages (impressions) per month.

The IBM 3816 has the capability to produce up to 80,000 pages (impressions) per
month.  However, continuous printing in this mode will impact product life.
Text and full-page graphics are printed at 240 dots per inch.  The IBM 3816
Page Printer's attachment capability allows the printer to offer high function
printing in small, intermediate, or large host systems, along with being shared
by large work groups or clusters, local area networks, and remote job
operations.  The customer has the flexibility to attach the 3816 to different
host environments by removing one attachment feature and replacing it with
another attachment feature.  High capacity paper input and output are available
features.  A variety of papers and other print media may be used for printing
including xerographic and non-xerographic papers, transparencies, card stock,
and labels.

MODEL 01S

Simplex

MODEL 01D

Duplex

Note:  There is no model conversion from the Model 01S to the 01D.

The IBM 3816 page printable area is limited within 4.2mm (0.165 inch.)  of any
page edge.  Attempts to print to the paper edge may result in loss of
information or print quality degradation within this boundary and paper
handling degradation.

The use of some non-xerographic papers may affect feed reliability or print
quality.  The print on a non-xerographic paper may appear lighter than on a
xerographic paper.  Also, non-xerographic papers that are printed on both sides
of a page (duplex), may have a different level of darkness when one side of the
page is compared to the other.

IBM Personal Systems Attachment:

    o   The PC Attach (#7651) is required.
    o   IBM Personal System/2 via its standard serial port.
    o   IBM PC AT (except AT/370) or 3270 PC AT, each with a Serial/Parallel
        Adapter (#0215).
    o   IBM PC, PC XT (except XT/370), or 3270 PC, each with an Asynchronous
        Communications Adapter (#2074).

Duplex support is provided by the ASCII datastream.  To activate duplexing
without datastream control, a duplex switch is available on the 3816 Operator
Panel.

The IBM 3816 Page Printer has been designed to be compatible with the IBM 5202
Quietwriter III.  Printer evaluation by IBM indicates that the printer commands
that perform correctly with the Quietwriter III should produce similar results
when issued to the IBM 3816.  Application software programs that are currently
compatible with the Quietwriter III should also be compatible with the IBM
3816.  A specific version of an application program may not take advantage of
all of the IBM 3816 capabilities or the new features such as font selection,
the Set Initial Condition (SIC) command, and the IBM Multilingual Character Set
(Code Page 850).

CUSTOMER SET-UP (CSU)

Yes.  Setup procedures for the customer will be shipped with each machine. The
Marketing Representative must advise the customer of their responsibilities
before receipt of the machine.

Because of the weight of the machine and packaging, the IBM 3816 is shipped to
a consolidation center, which will deliver and unpack the printer from its
shipping packaging, and set the printer in place.  The printer then becomes
customer setup.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Up to 24 pages (impressions) per minute
    o   Attachment Flexibility
    o   Advanced Function Printing (AFP) Family Printer
    o   Duplex Printing (Model 01D)
    o   High Capacity Paper Input/Output
    o   Printing on Xerographic and Non-Xerographic papers
    o   Accommodates Average Usage of 40,000 Pages (Impressions) per Month
    o   Quiet Operation (Model 01S - 53 dbA, Model 01D - 55 dbA)

The IBM 3816 Page Printer offers 1.5Mb of memory for printer operations and
resident font storage and 2Mb (Model 01S) and 4Mb (Model 01D) for page map
storage.

The IBM 3816 Page Printer operating software, fonts, and diagnostics are
contained on a 3.5-inch 1.4Mb diskette, which is inserted into a diskette drive
in the printer.  The operating diskette differs with each system attachment
feature.

When attached to an IBM Personal System, the printer provides a high volume
multi-user, shared environment for a letter quality printer in local area
networks with cluster-shared PCs.  The IBM 3816 emulates the IBM 5202
Quietwriter that provides an extensive list of personal system compatible
software applications.  Duplexing is provided by the ASCII datastream or by the
duplex switch on the 3816 Operator Panel.  The 3816 also supports Page Map
Primitives (PMP) commands to control its many advanced functions such as font
selection, rotation, duplexing, and vector graphics.

Mono-spaced, proportional, and typographic fonts (up to 61 fonts) are shipped
with the printer on the featured systems operational diskette.  Fonts and code
page support vary with system attachment.

The IBM 3816 Page Printer has two input paper cassette feed slots.  Labels,
transparencies, and card stock feed from the top cassette only.  There is one
available top slot cassette type:

    o   Primary Cassette:  550/525 cut sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb)
        paper of any supported size (not intermixed), 150 sheets of
        transparencies or card stock, or 100 sheets of labels.

There are two available bottom slot cassette types:

    o   Alternate Cassette:  250/235 cut sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb)
        paper of any supported size (not intermixed) or
    o   High Capacity Paper Input (feature):  1200/1140 cut sheets of
        75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper of letter or A4 size.

When two standard cassettes are used, the total input capacity is 800/760
sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper.  When the standard top cassette and the
optional high capacity paper input are used, the total capacity is 1750/1665
sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper.  The primary cassette, alternate
cassette, and high capacity paper input support duplex operation.

There are two available output types:

    o   Standard Output Tray:  550/525 cut sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb)
        paper or 150 sheets of special media (transparencies, card stock,
        or labels), printed side down, in sequential order.  Special media
        may experience stacking degradation.
    o   High Capacity Paper Output (feature):  1400/1300 cut sheets of
        75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper, 800 cut sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
        legal size paper, or 300 sheets of special media (transparencies,
        card stock, or labels), printed side down, in sequential order.
        Stacking performance is enhanced over the standard output.  For
        special media, stacking may be degraded. Paper handling and/or
        paper stacking capacity may not be acceptable with a relative
        humidity below 15 per cent (test for your application).  The
        high capacity paper output supports a minimum paper weight of
        70 g/m2 (18.7).

Under software control, printed sheets or sets delivered into either output can
be offset during stacking for easier handling and job identification.  A user
may elect to feed separator sheets from the alternate cassette using colored or
legal sized paper.  Also, a user may select the same paper cassette and use a
marked form.

The paper handling capabilities of the IBM 3816 include cut sheet paper,
transparencies, card stock, and labels.  Highest reliability and print quality
are realized with xerographic papers.  The printer will also operate
satisfactorily with some non-xerographic office papers, although feed
reliability and print quality might not be optimal.

The IBM 3816, like the IBM 3812, offers the unique strategy of making key
machine parts user replaceable supplies (toner, photoconductor/charge
corona/filter, developer, fuser, and cleaning unit).  This results in improved
price/performance, lower service costs, and more machine up-time.

The IBM 3816 supports the printing of bar codes via IPDS.  Bar code symbology
capabilities include 2 of 5 (Industrial, Interleaved, and Matrix), 3 of 9, MSI,
UPC/EAN, and Codabar.  Also, the IBM 3816 prints the OCR-A and OCR-B fonts with
the same high quality as other type styles.  Due to variability of bar code and
OCR applications and scanning equipment, IBM advises that customers evaluate
the IBM 3816 output in their application environment with the intended media.
OCR printing is supported in simplex operation.

The IBM 3816 uses an electrophotographic imaging process to produce clear,
sharp images on a variety of paper sizes.  Because this is a non-impact form of
printing, the IBM 3816 provides quiet operation with less than 5.5 bels (38
dbA) - Models 01S and 01D in standby mode and less than 7.0 bels (53 dbA) -
Model 01S, 7.0 bels (55 dbA) - Model 01D in printing mode.

The IBM 3816 is capable of sustained throughput up to 24 pages/impresssions
(sides of the page, printed or not) per minute (IPM) on 8.5 x 11 inch or A4
paper and up to 16 (15-Model 01D in duplex mode) pages/impressions per minute
for 8.5 x 14 inch paper.  Actual throughput can be significantly affected by
the application, host environment, communication link, and nature of the print
job.  A maximum speed of 24 IPM can be achieved with a job composed of pages of
simple text (up to 4,000 characters per page when fonts are resident (or have
been loaded) in the printer's program memory).  Throughput degradation will
result based upon the complexity of the page/pages; a mix of text, graphics,
and image will print slower than those of a single type of print object.  Due
to the inherent paper transport times when duplexing, the 3816 will generally
print faster in the simplex mode as compared to the duplex mode of printing.
The IBM 3816 will provide performance improvements over the 3812 that will
range from two times (in simple text applications) to slight improvement (in
complex applications).  The IBM 3820 with its additional processing power
provides greater throughput in complex job applications.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    o   Throughput:
    -   Up to 24 pages(impressions)-per-minute for letter or A4 size paper
        depending on application and page complexity.
    -   Up to 16 (15-Model 01D in duplex mode) pages (impressions) per
        minute for legal-size paper depending on application and page
        complexity.
    o   Usage:
    -   40,000 Pages (Impressions) per month average usage
    -   Capable of up to a maximum of 80,000 Pages (Impressions) per month.
        Continuous printing in this mode will impact product life.
    o   Paper Weights:
                     SIMPLEX OPERATION         DUPLEX OPERATION
    Cut Sheet        60-90 g/m2 (16-24 lb)     70-90 g/m2 (18.7-24 lb)
    Card Stock       94-170 g/m2 (25-45 lb)    Not Supported
    Labels           120-160 g/m2 (32-42 lb)   Not Supported
    Transparencies
     (Including
     paper backing)  170-225 g/m2 (45-60 lb)   Not Supported
    o   Cut Sheet Sizes (S=Simplex/D=Duplex):
    -   Letter:  216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11.0 inches) (S/D)
    -   Legal:  216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14.0 inches) (S/D)
    -   Executive:  178 x 267 mm (7.0 x 10.5 inches) (S)
    -   Executive:  184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) (S)
    -   Executive:  190 x 267 mm (7.5 x 10.5 inches) (S)
    -   ISO/JIS A4:  210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches) (S/D)
    -   JIS B5:  183 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches) (S)
    -   Money Transfer:  210 x 318 mm (8.27 x 12.5 inches) (S)
    o   Transparencies, Labels or Card Stock:
    -   Letter:  216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11.0 inches)
    -   ISO/JIS A4:  210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)

NOTE: The reverse side of the transparencies must have a paper backing
attached.  The paper weight should be between 60-90 g/m2 (16-24 lb).

    o   Input Cassette Capacity:
    -   Primary:  550/525 cut sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper of any
        supported size (not intermixed), or 150 sheets of card stock or
        transparencies, or 100 sheets of labels
    -   Alternate:  250/235 cut sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper of
        any supported size (not intermixed) or
    -   Optional High Capacity Paper Input:  1,200/1140 cut sheets (letter
        or A4) of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper.
    o   Output Capacity
    -   Standard:  550/525 cut sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper
        (printed side down, sequenced and offset)
    -   High Capacity Paper Output Feature:  1400/1300 cut sheets of 75/80
        g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper or 800 cut sheets of 75g/m2 (20 lb) legal
        size paper (printed side down, sequenced and offset)

NOTE: Supports minimum paper weight of 70 g/m2 (18.7 lb).  Paper handling
and/or paper stacking capacity may not be acceptable with a relative humidity
below 15 percent (test for your application).

    Special Media:
                            Standard               High Capacity
                            Output Tray            Paper Output
        Transparencies,     150 Sheets             300 Sheets
        Card Stock, or
        Labels

NOTE: Stacking performance may be degraded for special media.

    o   Print Quality
    -   Letter Quality:  240 x 240 dots per inch
    -   Graphics Resolution: 240 x 240 dots per inch
    o   Imaging Tolerances
    -   Plus or minus 1.5mm registration

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    o   Dimensions/Weight:
        Width
            67.5cm (27 inches) without standard cassettes
            121.5cm (47.8 inches) with standard cassettes
        Depth
            51.0cm (20.1 inches) - Model 01S
            52.3cm (20.6 inches) - Model 01D
        Height
            37.5cm (14.8 inches) - Model 01S
            41.6cm (16.4 inches) - Model 01D
        Weight
            63kg (139 lbs) with standard paper trays(without paper)
            72kg (159 lbs) with paper in standard input trays - Model 01S
        Weight
            69kg (152 lbs) with standard paper trays(without paper)
            78kg (172 lbs) with paper in standard input trays - Model 01D
    o   Acoustics:
        Operating
            LWAd (Bels)  - 7.0 Model 01S and Model 01D
            {LpA}m (dbA) - 53 Model 01S; 55 Model 01D
        Idle
            LWAd (Bels)  - 5.5 Models 01S,01D
            {LpA}m (dbA) - 38 Models 01S,01D
    o   Power Consumption:
        Operating:  568 Watts
        Idle:  242 Watts


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. 4028 LASERPRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 is a compact, nonimpact, desktop page printer
designed and manufactured by IBM. It provides letter quality text at print
speeds of up to ten pages per minute with 300 by 300 pel-per-inch all points
addressability within the printable area of the media. The print cartridge is a
single-element, customer-replaceable supply item consisting of an optical
photoconductor drum, a toner supply, a cleaning station, and a charge corona.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model NS1 attaches by coaxial cable to the IBM 3174
Establishment Controller (3174 Subsystem Control Unit), IBM 3274 Control Unit,
IBM ES/9370* Work Station Subsystem Controller, IBM Micro Channel* 370 3270
Adapter, IBM 4361 Workstation Adapter, and the IBM 4321, 4331 or 4361
Display/Printer Adapter.

The IBM 4028 provides a 200-sheet letter/A4-size input tray and an output bin
with an output full sensor. The output bin can hold approximately 250 sheets of
paper in sequenced order face down.

Options include a 1 megabyte memory, several paper handling features, and a
large variety of font cards.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Excellent printing performance through the use of an internal
        RISC processor for complex data such as image, bar code, and
        graphics
    o   Print speed of up to 10 pages per minute with 300 by 300 pel per
        inch all points addressability within the printable area
    o   Single-element high-yield cartridge enhances reliability and
        maintainability
    o   Versatile paper handling options including envelope support as
        well as increased paper output capacity (compared to the IBM
        4019) with an output full sensor
    o   Supports 32 fonts internally and two font card slots
    o   Support for the Systems Application Architecture* (SAA*), data
        stream, Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
    o   Supports 16 different bar codes through IPDS
    o   National language support is provided through the internal fonts
        and/or pluggable font cards for single-byte character set
        languages.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 provides excellent print performance for documents
containing image, graphics, and bar code through the use of an internal RISC
processor with print speeds of up to ten pages per minute.  The print
addressability is 300 by 300 pels per inch to provide enhanced print definition
of text and graphic characters.

An envelope option allows automatic feeding of a wide range of envelopes with
an input capacity of up to 75 envelopes.  The ability to feed paper or
envelopes manually through the printer is also provided.

A single-element, customer-replaceable, high-yield print cartridge provides
reliability and easy maintenance for users of the IBM 4028.  When the cartridge
is replaced, most of the imaging parts (the optical photoconductor, the toner
supply, the developing station, the cleaning station, and the charge corona)
are replaced.

Selected options and features are interchangeable with the IBM 4019
LaserPrinter, increasing customer flexibility and minimizing expense.

Dependent upon host software, the IBM LaserPrinter 4028 supports a wide variety
of typestyles including but not limited to Times(1) Roman, Helvetica(1),
Optima(1) and Palatino(1). Traditional typewriter styles such as Prestige
Elite, Courier, and Letter Gothic are also available to give the user the
typestyle needed to meet most application and user requirements and to allow
printing in most national languages.

An optional 1MB Memory card affords simple customer upgradeability to meet
unique requirements for downloaded resources.  User selection of bold or fine
line operating modes offers the ability to adjust the degree of print
definition of your output for text, graphic characters, and bar codes.

Selection of a larger printer buffer (1K byte) size, over the 256 byte default
selectable through the printer configuration settings, offers potential
improvements in printer performance when the IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model AS1 is
attached to the AS/400 or the IBM 5394 Remote Control Unit.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 supports the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS)
which is one of the SAA printer data streams.

Extensive error handling and reporting is supported for the IBM LaserPrinter
4028 Model NS1. Vital Product Data responses for the printer machine type,
model number, serial number and plant of manufacture are also supported to give
the user greater flexibility in asset inventory. (Model NS1 only). (1)
Trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.

MODEL NS1 Laser printer - coaxial cable attachment

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 and all its features are customer setup.

The IBM LaserPrinter "Guide to Operations" contains directions for setup of the
printer and its features, options and supplies and is available in the
following languages:  US English, Canadian French, Danish, Dutch, French,
German, Italian, Norwegian, Spanish and Swedish.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model NS1 is a compact, nonimpact, desktop, page
printer designed to attach to the 3174 Establishment Controller, the 3274
Control Unit Models 41x and 61x, the ES/9370 Work Station Subsystem Controller,
Micro Channel 370 3270 Adapter, 4361 Workstation Adapter, and the 4321, 4331 or
4361 Display/Printer Adapter by coaxial cable.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model NS1 supports the Intelligent Printer Datastream
(IPDS) as well as the DSC (Data Stream Compatible), DSE (Data Stream Emulation)
and SCS (SNA Character String) data streams.  The attachment to the IBM 4321,
4331 and 4361 Processors via the Display/Printer Adapter supports the DSC
datastream only.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 is capable of printing on a variety of paper types
and sizes, transparencies, labels and other supplies designed for use with
laser printers. A 200-sheet (20 lb) automatic feed paper tray and a manual tray
(for infrequently used paper and envelope) are standard equipment. A 250-sheet
(20 lb) output tray with an output full sensor located on the top of the
printer is used for sequenced output, while an alternate output tray at the
front of the printer is provided for output of special sizes or weights.

Optional paper handling features are a 500-sheet (20 lb) Second Drawer,
legal-size paper trays (200- and 500- sheet, 20 lb), letter/A4-size paper trays
(200- and 500- sheet, 20 lb), 200-sheet A5 paper tray, heavy duty paper tray
(Letter, A4, B5, Executive) and an automatic Envelope Feeder (75 envelopes, 20
lb). These optional features are the same as those provided for the IBM 4019
LaserPrinter.

Optimal paper weights for the printer are 20 lb or 80 g/sqm.

The High Yield Cartridge (also used by the IBM 4019) is a single-element,
customer-replaceable supply item which consists of an optical photoconductor
drum, a toner supply, a cleaning station and a charge corona. This cartridge
prints up to 10,000 pages at 2.8 percent page coverage (7,500 pages at 4.0
percent page coverage).

The High Yield + Cartridge (also available for the IBM 4019) is a
single-element, customer-replaceable supply item which can print up to 15,000
pages at 2.8 percent page coverage (10,500 pages at 4.0 percent page coverage).

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 offers 1MB of memory for printer operations and
resource storage and 2MB for page map storage.  There is an optional feature to
increase the available memory for resource storage by an additional 1MB.

A configuration setting allows selection of bold or fine line print modes which
determine the degree of definition of text, graphic characters, and bar codes.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 offers 32 internal fonts which consist of 7 Courier
family fonts, 7 Prestige family fonts, 13 Times Roman fonts as well as OCR-A,
OCR-B, APL, Boldface PS and Letter Gothic 20 cpi.  Symbol support is provided
for 10 and 12 cpi fonts. (Additional symbol support is available with the
Symbol font card.)  Two font card slots are supported. Selected IBM 4019
LaserPrinter font cards are supported by the IBM LaserPrinter 4028 and provide
various typewriter style fonts as well as an extensive array of typographic
fonts. Refer to the "Supplies/Options Catalog" for a complete list of the fonts
and code pages supported by the IBM 4028.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 can print up to ten pages per minute at 300 by 300
pel per inch all point addressability, with the actual throughput depending on
the complexity of the page. Actual throughput can be significantly affected by
the application, host environment, communication link, paper size, and the
nature of the print job. The IBM 4028 provides excellent performance for image,
graphics and bar code printing. A print speed of 10 pages per minute can be
achieved with a job composed of simple text (up to 7,000 characters per page)
on 8.5 by 11 inch paper.  Image throughput will be reduced with images scanned
at resolutions other than 300 pel. Throughput degradation may result based on
the complexity of the page. Pages with a mix of text, graphics, image or bar
code may print slower than those with a single type of print object.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 has the capability to produce up to a maximum of
1,000 pages per day or 20,000 pages per month.  However, continuous printing in
this mode may impact product life.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 has a no print border of 4.1 mm (0.16 inch) at the
top and bottom of a page and 4.1 mm (0.16 inch) on both sides of any size
media.

The IBM 4028 supports the printing of 16 bar codes via IPDS. Bar code symbology
capabilities include 2 of 5 (Industrial, Interleaved, and Matrix), 3 of 9, MSI,
UPC/EAN, Code 128, POSTNET and Codabar.  Also, the IBM 4028 prints the OCR-A
and OCR-B fonts with the same high quality as other typestyles.  Due to
variability of bar code and OCR applications and scanning equipment, IBM
advises the customer to evaluate the IBM 4028 output in their application
environment with the intended media.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS This product uses only existing attachment interfaces.

    Base Printer and Maximum with features:
            Base Printer                  Maximum with Features    Notes
    Width:  360 mm (14.2 inches)          360 mm (14.2 inches)
    Depth:  522 mm (20.6 inches)          860 mm (33.9 inches)      2,3
    Height: 306 mm (12.1 inches)          445 mm (17.5 inches)      1
    Weight: 15.5 kg (34 lb)               21 kg (46 lb)             4
    Note 1. The printer is at maximum height when it is equipped with
            the optional 500-Sheet Second Drawer and optional Envelope
            Feeder.
    Note 2. The base printer depth dimension includes the letter/A4-size
            paper tray and the manual feed tray. When an optional legal-
            size paper tray is used, the base depth dimension is 579 mm
            (22.8 inches).
    Note 3. The printer is at maximum depth, 860 mm (33.9 inches), when
            it has both the front exit tray and the optional Envelope
            Feeder installed.
    Note 4. Weight without paper or print cartridge.
    o   Acoustics:
            50 dBa printing, 38 dBa idle
            6.2 bels printing, 5.0 bels idle
    o   Operating Clearance:
            The printer requires 152 mm (6.0 inches) on all four sides
            and 305 mm (12.0 inches) on top for proper operation.

 Electrical Specifications:

    Description          Power
    --------------      ----------------
      Low Voltage       100V-127V, 50/60Hz
    Certification:      U/L, CSA, FCC (A)

 Printer Specifications:

    -   Maximum print rate: 10 pages per minute
    -   Addressability: 300 dots per inch (horizontal and vertical)
    -   Printer warm-up time: Less than 35 seconds
    -   Minimum time to first page (after warm-up time):
             279.4 mm (11 inch) page from 200-sheet paper tray 20.0 sec
             297 mm (11.7 inch) page from 200-sheet paper tray 21.3 sec
             279.4 mm (11 inch) page from 500-sheet paper tray 21.0 sec
             297 mm (11.7 inch) page from 500-sheet paper tray 22.3 sec
             Envelope from optional Envelope Feeder            19.5 sec
    -   Minimum time between subsequent 279.4 mm (11 inch) pages: 6.0 sec
    -   Minimum time between subsequent 297 mm (11.7 inch) pages: 6.4 sec
        (A4)
    -   New 'Clean hands' High Yield + Cartridge with an average yield of
        15,000 pages at 2.8 percent page coverage (average yield of
        10,500 pages at 4 percent page coverage).
    -   'Clean hands' High Yield Cartridge with an average yield of
        10,000 pages at 2.8 percent page coverage (average yield of
        7,500 pages at 4 percent page coverage).

The LaserPrinter 4028 provides advanced printing capability for Automatic
Identification (AI) applications where information must be printed in
machine-readable form. With the appropriate programming support, the IBM 4028
can produce bar codes that meet the current standards of major industry groups
such as:

    o   Automotive Industry Action Group (AIAG)
    o   Department of Defense Logistics Applications of Automated Marking
        and Reading Symbols (LOGMARS)
    o   Health Industry Bar Code Council (HIBCC)
    o   American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
    o   European Article Numbering (EAN)
    o   Uniform Product Code Council (UPCC)
    o   US Postal Service, POSTNET only.

The highest densities evaluated at the default element width for these bar
codes are given below.  Other densities, both higher and lower, are also
available.

    *----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------*
    |                |    Average    |    Wide to    |  Maximum      |
    | Bar Code Type  | Narrow Element|  Narrow Ratio | Character     |
    |                | Width (mils)  |               | Density (CPI) |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | Code 3 of 9    |      15       |2.00-3.00 to 1 |     4.90      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | Interleave 2/5 |      15       |2.00-3.00 to 1 |     9.00      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | MSI Plessey    |      15       |  2.00 to 1    |     5.55      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | Industrial 2/5 |      15       |2.00-3.00 to 1 |     5.37      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | Matrix 2 of 5  |      15       |2.00-3.00 to 1 |     7.93      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | Codabar        |      15       |2.00-3.00 to 1 |     5.74      |
    *----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------*
    | Code 128       |      15       |     N/A       |     6.06      |
    *----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------*

The characters per inch data in the table above are calculated based on a
narrow element width of 15 mils, and a wide-to-narrow ratio of 2.2, except for
MSI, which has a wide-to-narrow ratio of 2.

    *----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------*
    |                |    Average    |               |  Maximum      |
    | Bar Code Type  | Narrow Element| Magnification | Character     |
    |                | Width (mils)  |               | Density (CPI) |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | UPC/EAN        |      15       |     1.15      |     9.95      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    *----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------*
    |                |    Average    |    Pitch      |  Maximum      |
    | Bar Code Type  | Narrow Element|(Bars per Inch)| Character     |
    |                | Width (mils)  |               | Density (CPI) |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+
    | POSTNET        |      20       |     21        |     4.99      |
    +----------------+---------------+---------------+---------------+

Bar code element width is selectable in 4-mil increments within a range from
approximately 8 mils to approximately 53 mils.  The ratio of wide-to-narrow
elements is selectable in increments within a range from 2.0 to 1 to 3.0 to 1.
Bar code height is selectable in increments up to a total height of the
printable area on the media selected (page or envelope).  The use of check
digits and printing of human-readable information are optional where allowed by
bar code standards.

Because an element width of 8 mils is not compatible with UPC/EAN bar code, IBM
does not recommend its use for those applications.  When the 8 mil element size
is selected, the user should be careful to select a font for the human-readable
part of the bar code symbol which provides adequate readability.

The 4028 is capable of integrating bar codes with standard text, large
characters, optical character recognition (OCR), graphics, and logos where
these elements are required in formating of envelopes, labels, and documents.

The customer is responsible for the following:

    o   Evaluation of 4028 bar code quality for application suitability
        on the intended media, including compliance with applicable
        industry standards and practices
    o   Keeping the printer properly maintained
    o   Using quality forms and label stock designed for use with laser
        printers
    o   Replacing supplies to maintain minimum print contrast signal
        allowed for the user's application.

For a successful automatic identification application, the customer should be
knowledgeable of industry practices and recommendations for implementing
quality control procedures for monitoring the printing quality of bar code
labels and documents.

For maximum bar code readability, the user should evaluate paper and label
stock carefully for satisfactory printing and handling.  Card stock is not
supported.

Bar codes printed by the 4028 are compatible with recognition equipment
operating with visible (B633 nm), near-infrared (B800 nm), and infrared (B900
nm) light sources.

Bar code printing and label formatting are supported on the System/36 via the
IPDS Advanced Functions PRPQ P84094 (5799-CGK) for 5360/62 and P84095
(5799-CGL) for 5363/64.  The IPDS PRPQ supports bar code, except POSTNET,
Codabar and Code 128.  For the AS/400, Data Description Specifications (DDS)
keywords support bar code, except POSTNET.

Bar code printing and label formatting are supported by the AIform* Program
Offering.

Although the 4028 will print bar code images, IBM does not warrant that a
specific bar code reader will be able to read the bar code images as printed.
Customers are responsible for determining the acceptability of the bar codes as
printed for their specific application on the intended media.

The IBM 4028 provides the following OCR character sets:

    o   The OCR-A character set according to ISO Standard 1073/I amended
        with the 'greater than' sign (>) as defined by the German
        National Standard DIN 66008 Part 6.
    o   The OCR-B Extended Alphanumeric Subset, Options Subset, and
        Erase Characters according to ISO Standard 1073/II amended with
        the lower case characters 'a diaeresis', 'o diaeresis', and 'u
        diaeresis' as defined by the German National Standard DIN 66009.

The OCR-A and OCR-B printed characters are designed according to the ISO print
quality standard 1831-1980(E) using the tolerance limits specified by the
Y-range. Printing done within 8.64 mm (0.34 inches) of any page edge may not
satisfy all OCR requirements.

Since Code 128 has its own EBCDIC character set, Code 128 is not compatible
with the OCR fonts.  To print Code 128 bar codes, the customer should specify
code page 037.

Although the IBM 4028 will print OCR characters, IBM does not warrant that a
specific OCR reader will be able to read the OCR characters as printed.
Customers are responsible for determining the acceptability of the OCR
characters as printed for their application environment on the intended media.

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    Temperature:  15.6 to 32.2C (60 to 90F)
    Relative Humidity: 8 to 80 percent
    Wet Bulb:  22.8C (73F)

Some reduction in print quality may occur at the extremes of this operating
environment. With higher humidity environments (over 50%), envelopes may seal
during printing.

LIMITATIONS: The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 printable area is limited to within 4.1
mm (0.16 inches) of any edge of the media. Any information which is placed
within 4.1 mm (0.16 inches) of the edge will not print (except A4 paper). For
A4 paper, any information which is placed within 3.4 mm (0.13 inches) of either
side or 4.1 mm (0.16 inches) of either the top or bottom of the media will not
print.

In addition to this unprintable area, it is recommended that information should
not be placed within 8.6 mm (0.34 inches) of the top or bottom edge of any
sheet of paper, or 10.2 mm (0.4 inches) from the left or 38.1 mm (1.5 inches)
from the right edge of an envelope.  Attempts to print in this area may result
in print quality degradation.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 can print up to ten pages per minute with the actual
throughput dependent on the complexity of the page, application, host
environment, communication link, paper size and nature of the print job.

For optimum performance, use a label recommended for bar code applications.
Refer to "The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Introduction and Planning Guide",
S544-4258, for more information.

Either the manual input paper tray or the optional Envelope Feeder must always
be installed on the printer to prevent light from reaching the print cartridge
resulting in degraded print quality.

Sonoran Serif (2) and Sonoran Sans Serif (3) type style families and character
sets (code pages) are supported through font download for Model NS1 only.

Times Roman or Helvetica type styles are substituted when Sonoran Serif or
Sonoran San Serif type styles are selected with Model AS1.

Refer to the "Supplies/Options Catalog for the IBM LaserPrinter 4028",
S544-4256, for information on supported type style families, character sets,
and code pages.

Fonts in the following pitches are not available as resident fonts:  5, 13.3,
and 27. Substitution will occur when fonts in these pitches are selected for
the Model AS1. All pitches are not available in all character sets (code
pages). (1) Registered Trademark of Monotype Corporation, plc. (2) Trademark of
Monotype Corporation, plc.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model NS1 attaches to the following devices by
coaxial cable:

    o   3174 Establishment Controller (3174 Subsystem Control Unit) via
        Terminal Port with Configuration Support-A Release 5.1 or later
        or Configuration Support-B Release 1.0 or later
    o   3274 Control Unit Models 41x and 61x via Category A Terminal Port
        Configuration Support-D Release 65.1 or later or Configuration
        Support-C Release 49.0 or later
    o   ES/9000 Work Station Subsystem Controller (feature #6120)
    o   ES/9370 Work Station Subsystem Controller (features #6120 and
        #6020/6021)
    o   Micro Channel 370 (9371) 3270 Adapter (feature #6120)
    o   4361 Workstation Adapter
    o   4321, 4331 or 4361 Display/Printer Adapter
    o   3299 Multiplexor

The "IBM Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference" (S544-3417) and the "IBM
LaserPrinter 4028 IPDS Handbook" (S544-4260) will assist users in adapting
their print driver applications to take advantage of the advanced printing
functions offered by the IBM LaserPrinter 4028.

Consideration should be given to the unprintable area and the printer
addressability (300 pel) and its effect on existing applications in those
environments which support other resolution printers. Documents and resources
generated for use with 240 pel printers may have to be reformatted or modified
for use with the IBM 4028.

Programming support is provided for the IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model NS1 by the
following:

    o   Print Services Facility (PSF)/VM Version 2 Release 1.0.
    o   Print Services Facility (PSF)/MVS Version 2 Release 1.0.
    o   DisplayWrite*/370 Version 1 Release 2.1 or DisplayWrite/370
        Version 2 Release 1
            In the MVS/CICS environment as an SCS datastream printer.
            In the VSE/CICS environment as an SCS datastream printer.
    o   DisplayWrite/370 Version 2 Release 1
            Through PSF/VM Version 2 Release 1 as an IPDS printer.
            Through PSF/MVS Version 2 Release 1 as an IPDS printer.
    o   Document Composition Facility (DCF) Version 1 Release 4 through
        PSF/MVS Version 2 Release 1 or PSF/VM Version 2 Release 1.
    o   AIform Program Offering.
    o   JES/328X Print Facility Version 2 Release 2
    o   RSCS Version 2 Release 3 or later

Refer to "3270 Programming Guide and Reference Manual for the IBM LaserPrinter
4028 Model NS1" for complete information on fonts and character sets (code
pages) supported by the printer.

The IBM LaserPrinter 4028 Model NS1 is not supported by the IBM VM3812 Program
Product or the IBM 3812/3816 Font Management System.

Power cord for Chicago only, specify FC 9986 (P/N 1339535).  All other power
cords are no-specify items.

SPECIAL FEATURES 1MB MEMORY OPTION (#2180) This Memory Option extends the IBM
LaserPrinter 4028 user memory. Limitations: None. Maximum: Only one memory
option can be installed in the printer. Field Installation: Yes. Customer
Set-up: Yes.

500-SHEET SECOND DRAWER (#9530) This device provides an alternate automatic
paper feed source. It is installed at the base of the printer. It comes with a
500-sheet letter-size (A4) paper tray. The optional 500 sheet legal-size paper
tray can also be used with this device. Printer height is increased by 127 mm
(5 inches). Limitations: None. Maximum: Only one Second Drawer can be installed
on the printer. Field Installation: Yes. Customer Set-up: Yes.

PAPER TRAYS Optional paper trays provide customers with the ability to have
different sizes or types of stationery available in the printer.

    o   A5-Size 200-Sheet paper tray (#8200)
    o   Letter-Size (A4) 200-Sheet paper tray (#9440)
    o   Letter-Size (A4) Heavy Duty paper tray (#8495)
    o   Letter-Size (A4) 500-Sheet paper tray (#9450)
    o   Legal-Size 200-Sheet paper tray (#9570)
    o   Legal-Size 500-Sheet paper tray (#9590).

(#8200):

    o   Standard size supported: A5
    o   Maximum paper size: 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.3 inches)

(#8495):

    o   Standard sizes supported: Letter, A4, B5, and Executive
    o   Paper weight supported is 75 g/m2 and 165 g/m2
Note: 2 indicates the superscript 2 (square)

(#9440, #9450):

    o   Standard sizes supported: Letter, A4, B5 and Executive
    o   Maximum paper size: 215.9 x 297.2 mm (8.5 x 11.7 inches)
    o   #9450 requires #9530

(#9570, #9590):

o   Standard sizes supported: Legal, Letter, A4, B5 and Executive
o   Maximum paper size: 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
o   #9590 requires #9530

ENVELOPE FEEDER (#9606) The Envelope Feeder is installed on the back of the
printer, in place of the manual feed tray.  It allows the customer to
automatically feed envelopes to be printed. It has a capacity of approximately
75 envelopes of 75 g/sqm (20 lb) stock. With this feature installed, the height
of printer is increased by 61 mm (2.4 inches) and the depth is increased by 147
mm (5.8 inches).  A slot located on the Envelope Feeder allows feeding of paper
manually without removing the Envelope Feeder.  Limitations: The manual feed
tray must be removed to install the Envelope Feeder. Maximum: Only one Envelope
Feeder can be installed on the printer. Field Installation: Yes.  Customer
Setup: Yes.

CABLES FOR MODEL NS1 IBM Cabling System or coaxial cable is required for
attachment of the IBM 4028 Model NS1 to the 3174, 3274, ES/9370 Work Station
Subsystem Controller, Micro Channel 370 3270 Adapter, 4361 Workstation Adapter
or the Display/Printer Adapter.  For information on IBM Cabling System, see
"IBM Cabling System-Planning and Installation Guide", (GA27-3361).  For
information on coaxial cabling, see "IBM 3270 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning", GA27-2787.  Cable and associated accessories may be purchased from
IBM or a customer-selected source.  The customer is responsible for
installation and maintenance of the cable and associated accessories. The
coaxial cabling when ordered from IBM is as follows:

    Description          Assembled P/N       Bulk P/N  (No Connectors)
    --------------        -------------       -------------------------
    Coaxial Cables
    Indoor                   2577672             0323921 (Note 1)
    Indoor/Outdoor           1833108             5252750 (Note 2)
    Plenum                   4154741             4885584
    Connectors                       Part Number
    ----------                       ------------------
    Kit of
     two indoor cable connectors       1836418 (Note 1)
     one indoor cable connector        1836444
    Kit of
     two outdoor cable connectors      1836419 (Note 2)
     one outdoor cable connector       1836447
    Kit of
     two Plenum cable connectors       1743508 (Note 3)
     one Plenum cable connector        4449035
    Cable to Cable Adapter             5252643 (Note 6)
    Station Protectors               Part Number
    -------------------              ----------------
    Kit for outdoor cable            1830818 (Note 4)
    installation(includes
    two station protectors)
    Station Protector                1833106 (Note 5)
    Attachment Kit(includes
    two attachment adapters)
    Replacement station              5252899
    protector element
    (one connector)
    Notes:
    1.  Coaxial wire and connector kits (including
        two connectors P/N 1836444).  Required for each cable assembly.
    2.  Coaxial wire and connector kits
        (includes two connectors P/N 1836447).
        Required for each cable assembly.
    3.  Coaxial wire and connector kits (includes
        two connectors P/N 4449035).
        Required for each cable assembly.
    4.  Must be used with outdoor cable assembly when installed outdoors
       (either above or below ground level).  One kit required for each
        cable assembly.
    5.  Use to attach outdoor cable to station protector. One kit is
        required for each cable assembly.
    6.  Use to join two P/N 2577672 or two P/N 1833108 or two P/N 4154741
        cable assemblies together.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. (1) Trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries. (2)
Registered trademark of Monotype Corporation. (3) Trademark of Monotype
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. 3820 PAGE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3820 Page Printer is a high quality, laser printer which provides cut-sheet
duplex printing for distributed printing applications in the following
operating system environments:

    o   MVS - MVS/ESA V3 and V4, MVS/XA, and MVS/370 with JES2 or JES3
        on both S/370 and S/390 processors
    o   VSE - VSE/SP or VSE/AF with VSE/POWER on S/370 mode processors
    o   VM - VM/SP or VM/SP HPO on S/370 mode processors
    o   DPPX-DPPX/370 on 9370 processors
    o   OS/400 on AS/400 processors.

The 3820 Page Printer operates at speeds up to 20 pages per minute for
single-sided printing, recommended usage of up to 100,000 impressions per
month.

It can be attached via Token-Ring, SDLC communications, or directly to a
System/370 channel in the MVS, VSE, and VM environments.  All attachments are
driven through VTAM/SNA.  It can be attached via SDLC communications or
Token-Ring in the OS/400 environment.  The 3820 Page Printer can also be
attached to an IBM PC connected to an IBM PC Network or a Corvus OMNINET* local
area network. * OMNINET is a trademark of Corvus Systems, Inc.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Advanced Function Printing capability
    o   All Points Addressable printing
    o   240 x 240 pel
    o   Up to 20 pages per minute
    o   Remote printing via SDLC communications facilities
    o   S/370 channel attachment via VTAM
    o   PC-LAN attachment
    o   Duplex printing
    o   Token-Ring attachment
    o   Supports IPDS data stream

The 3820 Page Printer functions as a remotely-attached printer via Token-Ring,
SDLC communications, or channel attach through VTAM in an SNA environment under
MVS/ESA V3 and V4, MVS/XA and MVS/370 with JES2 or JES3; under VSE/SP or VSE/AF
with VSE/POWER; under VM with VM/SP or VM/SP HPO; under DPPX/370 Release 2;
under OS/400.  The 3820 Page Printer can also be attached to an IBM PC Network
or a Corvus OMNINET local area network via SDLC communication attachment to an
IBM PC.

The 3820 Page Printer supports a wide variety of paper sizes and weights, which
are country dependent.  The paper path is set to the size of paper which the
printer will be handling (Letter or A4) by the plant of manufacture and the IBM
Service Representative.  The 3820 Page Printer prints on the following size
paper:  Letter (8-1/2 x 11), Legal (8-1/2 x 14), A4 (210mm x 297mm), B4 (257mm
x 365mm), B5 (182 x 257mm), and Executive (7 x 10.5, 7.25 x 10.5, and 7.5 x
10.5).  Paper weights for simplex printing range from 20 to 24 pounds (75 to 90
G/m2) for legal size paper and from 16 to 24 pounds (60 to 90 G/m2) for other
supported paper sizes.  Additionally, self-adhesive label sheets and 2-, 3-,
and 4-hole punched paper are supported as print media.

Documents are printed as single sets, and pages exit the printer face down in
transmitted page sequence.  Multiple sets require retransmission from the host.
Duplex printing is provided in both normal mode and tumble mode.  Each may be
specified by page.  Paper weights supported for duplex are 20 to 24 pound (75
to 90 G/m2).

The 3820 Page Printer provides a single font (Prestige Elite) as standard and
receives other fonts via downloading from the host.  Up to 32 single byte fonts
per sheet may be stored and printed, depending upon available Pattern Storage,
with fonts available from IBM in sizes from 4 points to 36 points. (A point is
a typesetting measure of character size and is approximately 1/72 of an inch.)

Normal typewriter fonts are also supported in 10 and 12 pitch.  Fonts may be
printed in any of four orientations:  0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees.

The 3820 Page Printer provides the capability of processing single and double
byte fonts, selectable by the customer.  This allows the use of double byte
character sets, such as required for Kanji, in addition to the smaller
character sets characteristic of US fonts.

The following font offerings are available for the 3820 Page Printer in MVS,
VSE, VM, or DPPX/370 environments:

    o   All 3800 Model 3 (or Model 8 in AP, Canada and IBM LA)
        Compatibility Fonts, including selected 6670 Fonts, provide
        compatible fonts for alphanumeric and selected graphic
        applications.  The 3820 Page Printer prints the OCR-A and OCR-B
        fonts with the same high quality as other type styles.  However,
        due to variations in print registration and reader requirements,
        IBM does not warrant that these characters are readable by OCR
        reading devices.  Users of these fonts should thoroughly test
        read-write compatibility before implementing the 3820 Page
        Printer for OCR.
    o   IBM Typographic Fonts which are available for the 3800 Model 3
        (or Model 8 in AP, IBM LA and Canada only) and provide Sonoran
        Serif Fonts* (5771-ABA), (Data derived under license from The
        Monotype Corporation, Limited), Sonoran Sans Serif Fonts
        (5771-ABB), Pi and Special Fonts (5771-ABC), APL2 Fonts
        (5771-ADB), and Datal Fonts (5771-ADA).  This offering allows
        support for 11 languages and font sizes from 4 to 36 points.

The National Address Information Center of the United States Postal Service
awarded POSTNET barcode certification to the IBM 3820 Page Printer on April 29,
1991.  The 3820 is certified for the "9-digit" and "ABC" barcodes and for the
"bottom right" and "address block" positions.  The 3820 certification number is
9107200086. (1) Functional equivalent of Monotype Times New Roman, which is a
trademark of The Monotype Corporation plc.  Monotype is a registered trademark
of The Monotype Corporation, plc. (2) Functional equivalent of Monotype Arial,
which is a registered trademark of The Monotype Corporation, plc. (3) Trademark
of The Monotype Corporation, plc. (4) Trademark of American Type Foundry. (5)
Registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation. (6) Trademark of
International Typeface Corporation.

The IBM LAN PrintManager program includes 54 (IBM supplied) 240 by 240 pel (A
pel is defined as a picture element) per square inch fonts, including
representations of the 5152 Graphics Printer fonts.

The 3820 Page Printer supports the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) only.
Other data streams are supported through the Print Services Facility for the
printer.  See the "Programming Section of the Sales Manual Pages" for details.

The 3820 Page Printer is configurable by the customer.  The Control Panel is
used to specify changes or unique operating and printing requirements.  The
following may be specified at installation, or at any time the customer needs
change:

    o   Country of operation.
    o   Display support for text message in French (Canadian), French
        (France), English (US), German, Spanish (Spain), or Italian.
        For non-supported languages, numeric messages may be displayed.
    o   Default paper sizes.
    o   Type of SDLC communication attachment.

In addition, the Control Panel is also used for initiating printer diagnostics,
creating duplicate or back-up internal diskettes, and controlling the printer.

PRINTER

    o   All points addressable printing at 240 by 240 picture elements
        (pels) per square inch is supported.
    o   Prints at speeds up to 20 pages per minute for single-sided
        printing on letter and A4 size paper.  Actual speed depends on
        the application, host programming support and communication
        facility.  Refer to the "IBM 3820 Page Printer Introduction and
        Planning Guide", G544-3520, for additional details.
    o   Two side printing (duplexing) at speeds of up to 10 pages (20
        sides) per minute is supported for letter or A4 size paper.  Two
        modes of duplexing, normal and tumble, are available.
    o   Two paper supplies:  A hopper holding 1,100 sheets of paper, and
        a cassette holding 250 sheets of paper.
    o   One output stacker holding 1,250 sheets, in transmitted page
        sequence.
    o   Automatically offsets printed jobs 1/2 in. for easy job
        separation.
    o   Up to 32 single byte fonts per sheet may be stored and printed,
        depending upon available Pattern Store, with fonts ranging in
        size from 4 points to 36 points.
    o   Supported as an SNA/SDLC remote printer via communications in
        S/370 environments under MVS/SP-JES2 and JES3 Version 1 Release
        3.4 or higher; XA environments under MVS/SP-JES2 and JES3 Version
        2 Release 1.2 or higher; in VSE environments under VSE/SP 1.1.0
        or VSE/SP 2.1.0 with VSE/POWER; in VM environments under VM/SP
        Release 4 or higher, or VM/SP HPO Release 4.2 or higher, in
        DPPX/370 environments under DPPX/370 Release 2.
    o   Supported as a direct S/370 Channel attach printer through
        VTAM/SNA, in System/370 environments under MVS/SP-JES2 and JES3
        Version 1 Release 3.4 or higher, XA environments under MVS/SP-
        JES2 and JES3 Version 2 Release 1.2 or higher; ESA environments
        under MVS/SP-JES2 and JES3 Version 3 Release 1.1 or higher; in
        VSE environments under VSE/SP 2.1.4 or VSE/AF 2.1.3 with
        VSE/POWER 2.2; in VM environments under VM/SP Release 4 or
        higher, or VM/SP HPO Release 4.2 or higher.
    o   Supported as a Token-Ring Attach printer under the following
        host software:
        -   PSF/MVS Versions 2 or Version 1 Release 3.1 or subsequent
            releases, with the 3820 attachment feature (MVS only)
        -   PSF/VM Version 2 or subsequent releases (VM only)
        -   PSF/VSE Version 2 or subsequent releases (VSE only)
        -   ACF/VTAM Release 3.1.1 or subsequent releases (MVS and VM)
        -   ACF/VTAM Release 3.2.0 or subsequent releases (VSE only)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 4.2.0 or subsequent releases (MVS and VM
            with 3720 or 3275)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.1.0 or subsequent releases (MVS with 3745)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0 or subsequent releases (VM with 3745)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 4.3.1 or subsequent releases (VSE with 3720
            or 3725)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0 or subsequent releases (VSE with 3745)
    o   Supported as an SDLC communications printer when attached to an
        IBM PC connected to an IBM PC Network under DOS 3.1 or a Corvus
        OMNINET under DOS 2.0 or DOS 3.0 with appropriate prerequisite
        support on Corvus OMNINET.

CONTROL PANEL

    o   Primary user interface for control of the printer, diagnostics,
        and printer configuration information.
    o   Display supports any of the following languages plus numeric
        codes for user interaction with the printer:  French (Canadian),
        French (France), English (US), German, Spanish (Spain), Italian.
        Language is selected by configuration options and may be changed
        as required.
    o   22 active keys on the keypad.
    o   32-character vacuum fluorescent display for displaying messages.
    o   Audible alarm for user feedback when keying information and for
        alerting the user to various conditions needing attention.  The
        alarm has a volume control which may be adjusted for the printer
        environment.

ATTACHMENTS

    o   S/370 and S/390
        -   Channel Attachment through VTAM
            --  3274 Model A "like" Attachment.
            --  SNA protocol identical to a communications attachment
                with ACF/VTAM.
            --  Channel commands carry both the printer data stream and
                SNA protocol.
        -   SDLC Communications:
            --  SNA via ACF/VTAM, PU Type 2.0 and LU Type 6.2 supporting
                APPC (Application Program to Program Communication).
        -   Token-Ring:
            --  Token-Ring attachment requires PSF/MVS Version 1 Release
                2.1, PSF/VM Version 2, PSF/VSE Version 2 or subsequent
                versions or releases.  The Token-Ring attachment package
                consists of a PS/2 system unit and display with Remote
                PrintManager Version 2.0.4 and pre-requisite PS/2
                software to allow attachment to an SNA network.  The
                components of this package may also be ordered
                separately.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width: 152cm (60 in) including cassette and hopper
    Depth: 67cm (26.5 in)
    Height: 119cm (47 in) including Control Panel
    Weight:  272Kg (600 lbs)

Print Services Facility/MVS (5665-275), Print Services Facility/VSE (5666-319),
or Print Services Facility/VM (5664-198), and their prerequisite Licensed
Programs are required for the operation of the 3820 Page Printer. See the
"Programming Section of the Sales Manual" for detailed information.

IBM Personal Computer Local Area Network.  The IBM Local Area Network
PrintManager is required.  See the "Programming Section of the Sales Manual"
for detailed information.

Print Services Facility support is integrated into DPPX/370 Release 2
(5660-292).

It is the customer's responsibility to allocate the appropriate space and
electrical requirements to properly accommodate the 3820 Page Printer.  See
"IBM 3820 Page Printer Introduction and Planning Guide", G544-3520, for
additional details.

It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the availability of the necessary
supply items for the operation of the 3820 Page Printer, and to
replenish/replace supplies as needed, with the exception of the developer mix.
Customer supplied developer mix must be installed/replaced by a service
representative when replacement is needed.

It is the customer's responsibility to provide the appropriate attachment
facilities including modems, communication facilities, attachment cables. **
Trademarks of The Monotype Corporation, Limited.

The 3820 Page Printer is supported by the Advanced Function Software Licensed
Programs shown below:

    o   Print Services Facility/MVS, Release 1.1, (5665-275).
    o   Print Services Facility/VM, Release 1.0, (5664-198).
    o   Print Services Facility/VSE, Release 1.2, (5666-319).
    o   Print Management Facility/MVS, Release 1.1, (5665-307).
    o   Print Management Facility/VM, Release 1.0, (5664-310).
    o   Overlay Generation Language/MVS, Release 1.0 plus PTF,
        (5665-308).
    o   Overlay Generation Language/VM, Release 1.0, (5664-293).
    o   Overlay Generation Language/VSE, Release 1.0, (5666-324).
    o   Print Services Access Facility/MVS, Release 1.1, (5665-340).
    o   Print Services Access Facility/VM, Release 1.0, (5664-312).
    o   Page Printer Formatting Aid/VM, Release 1.0, (5664-199).
    o   Page Printer Formatting Aid/VSE, Release 1.0, (5666-327).
    o   Page Printer Formatting Aid/MVS, Release 1.0, (5665-351).
    o   Document Composition Facility, Release 3.0 plus PTF, (5748-XX9).
    o   Graphical Data Display Manager/VM, Version 2.1, (5664-200).
    o   Graphical Data Display Manager/MVS, Version 2.1, (5665-356).
    o   Graphical Data Display Manager/VSE, Version 2.1, (5666-328).
    o   Font Library Service Facility, Release 1.0, (5668-890).
    o   3820 Page Printer Local Area Network PrintManager, (5875-XXX
        Feature Code #9396).

MODEL 1  001 Provides support for languages and paper sizes.

PREREQUISITES

    o   MVS - Print Services Facility/MVS (5665-275)
    o   VSE - Print Services Facility/VSE (5666-319)
    o   VM - Print Services Facility/VM (5664-198)
    o   DPPX-DPPX/370 Release 2 (5660-292)
    o   PC-LAN - PrintManager (5875-XXX)

SPECIFY

    60Hz 20 Amps (120V)  #9010
    English      #9050
    EIA Interface (#3050) and System/370 Channel Interface (#3055).
    EIA Interface Cable-Long (12m)  #3040
    EIA Interface Cable-Short (6m)  #3045
    Channel Interface Cable Group #0185
    Power Sequence and Control Cable Group #1178
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. 3825 PAGE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 3825 Page Printer joins a growing family of IBM Advanced Function
Printers.  The IBM 3825 is a cut sheet, duplex, non-impact, all-points
addressable page printer with a rated speed of 58 impressions per minute and
recommended usage of up to 1,000,000 impressions per month.  The IBM 3825
produces high quality printed output.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Non-impact, all-points addressable, Advanced Function Printer.
    o   Electrophotographic laser print process.
    o   MVS, VSE and VM operating system environments.
    o   Touch sensitive CRT operator interface.
    o   Machine resident diagnostics for quick problem analysis.
    o   Compact design - small floor space requirement.
    o   Duplex printing capability from either paper supply.
    o   Token-Ring attachment.
    o   Supports IPDS data stream.

DESCRIPTION

    o   Print speed:  up to 58 impressions (sides) per minute.  Factors
        such as page complexity may affect speed.
    o   Recommended usage:  of up to 1,000,000 impressions per month.
    o   Paper sizes:  supported: (S=simplex, D=duplex)
              (Additional paper sizes are available via RPQ.)
          Letter  8.5 x 11 in.    (215.9 x 279.4mm)     S/D
          Legal   8.5 x 14 in.    (215.9 x 355.6mm)     S/D
          A4      210 x 297mm     (8.3 x 11.7 in.)      S/D
          B4      257 x 364mm     (10.1 x 14.3 in.)     S (at 26 ipm)
          B5      182 x 257mm     (7.2 x 10.1 in.)      S/D
          Other   210 x 317.5mm   (8.3 x 12.5 in.)      S/D
    o   Paper weights and types supported:  (S=simplex, D=duplex)
              (Additional paper weights are available via RPQ.)
                          Letter  Legal  A4   B4   B5   Other
          64g/sqm (17 lb)   S/D    S/D   S/D  S    S/D   S/D
          75g/sqm (20 lb)   S/D    S/D   S/D  S    S/D   S/D
          80g/sqm (21 lb)   S/D    S/D   S/D  no   S/D   S/D
          90g/sqm (24 lb)   S/D    S/D   S/D  no   S/D   S/D
          163g/sqm (90 lb)  S      S     S    no   no    S
          199g/sqm (110 lb) S      S     S    no   no    S
    o   Supply types supported are perforated, pre-punched (2, 3, and 4-
        hole), pre-printed (electrophotographic tolerant), and some
        paper labels.
          Perforated       S/D    S/D   S/D  no   S/D   S/D
          Pre-punched      S/D    S/D   S/D  no   S/D   S/D
          Pre-printed      S/D    S/D   S/D  S    S/D   S/D
          Labels           S      no    S    no   no    no
    o   Dual input paper supply:  Primary (bottom) supply capacity
        approximately 2600 sheets.  Alternate (top) supply capacity
        approximately 500 sheets. Letter and A4 sizes supported from
        primary (bottom) supply, excluding 90 and 110 lb (163 and 199
        g/sqm) weights of paper.  All sizes and weights supported from
        alternate (top) supply.
    o   Selectable continuous operation capability with same paper in
        both supplies.
    o   Single output stacker capacity of approximately 3150 sheets with
        offsetting, "jogging",  capability.
    o   Electronic forms (overlays) generated at the host and merged with
        text at the printer.
    o   Image printing including signatures, logos and halftoning.
    o   Character size:  4 to 72 point (1/18" to 1").
    o   Print orientations of 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees.
    o   Up to 63 down-loaded single-byte fonts per page, provided
        adequate pattern storage.
    o   Print quality: 240 pel addressability with character edge
        smoothing and character fine-line (single pel) enhancement.
        -   Print density:  Machine self adjusts for stable density.
    o   Operator control and on-line help via touch sensitive display
        (CRT) control panel.
    o   Machine resident diagnostics for problem analysis.
    o   Machine footprint:  12 square feet (1.11 square meters) at floor.
    o   Paper labels, OCR and Bar Code support for many applications.
        Refer to the IBM 3825 Page Printer Paper Reference Guide for
        specific considerations.  Due to variability of OCR applications
        and readers, Bar Code applications and scanners, and paper label
        characteristics, IBM advises that customers evaluate the IBM
        3825 output in their application environment.
    o   Attachment to AS/400 and channel and remote attachment to
        System/370 and System/390
    o   The National Address Information Center of the United States
        Postal Service awarded POSTNET barcode certification to the IBM
        3825 Advanced Function Page Printer on April 29, 1991.  The 3825
        is certified for the "9-digit" and "ABC" barcodes and for the
        "bottom right" and "address block" positions.  The 3825
        certification number is 9107200085.

The IBM 3825 Page Printer operator control panel supports U.S. English plus one
of the following national languages:  U.K. English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, Canadian French, Japanese, Korean, Chinese (Taiwan), and Chinese
(PRC).  The information viewed on the control panel (CRT) is supported by
character sets for each of the listed languages.  Safety labels and
instructions will be in national languages as required by country standards.
The IBM 3825 can print any of the available language fonts.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width:  148cm (58.3 in.) + 19cm (7.5 in.) fold-down output tray
    Depth:  75cm (29.5 in.)
    Height:  109cm (43 in.) + 30 x 30 x 32cm (12 x 12 x 13 in.) top
    mounted CRT
    Weight:  635kg (1400 lbs)
    Acoustics:
                      LWAd     <LpA>m
                     (bels)     (dB)
    50Hz Operating      7.8        61
         Idle           7.0        53
    60Hz Operating      7.8        61
         Idle           7.0        53
    Heat Load Dissipated:     Nominal     Maximum
    (operating)               9,898       10,921 BTU/hr
    Power consumption:        Nominal     Maximum
    (operating)               2900        3200 watts

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    Temperature:  15.6 to 29.4C, (60 to 85F)
    Relative Humidity:  15 to 65 percent

The IBM 3825 Page Printer attachment to the IBM 4331, 4341 and 9370 processors
via the IBM 3044 Fiber Optics Channel Extender is not supported. Attachment to
the IBM 4361 High Speed Channel is supported only in single tag interlock mode.

The 3825 Printer supports a maximum channel cable length of 122 meters (400 ft)
with only 1 control unit on the interface.  Each additional control unit (8
max.) reduces support by 4.6 meters (15 feet).  Reference "IBM S/370 General
Information Manual:  Installation Manual - Physical Planning" (GC22-7072).

With the B4 paper size, there can be no print within 9mm of the bottom edge of
the paper and there may be print degradation or loss of information within 17mm
of the trailing edge of the paper. Refer to the Introduction and Planning Guide
for further information concerning printing close to the paper edges.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS (S/370 AND S/390)

    o   For parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a
        parallel block multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 4331,
        4341, 4361, 4381, 308X, 3090, ES/9370, or ES/9000 processor.
        For parallel channel attachment to the Micro Channel 370 (9371)
        a High Speed Printer Adapter is required on the Micro Channel
        370.
        For attachment to ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter
        Model 1 mode, an IBM 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1 is required.
        Up to eight parallel channel I/O control units can be multi-
        dropped from one IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  An ESCON channel
        operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode must be dedicated to
        each IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  The following systems support
        ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode:
        -   ES/3090 180J and above except for Model 250
        -   ES/3090-9000T models
        -   ES/900
    o   The IBM 3825 may also be attached to the remote (D01 unit) end
        of an IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender, which can extend
        the standard channel interface by up to 2000 meters (6562 feet).
        The following IBM Systems are supported by IBM 3044 Channel
        Extender attachment (Block Multiplexer Channel):
        -   4381, 3081, 3083, 3084, 3090 and 4361. (4361 High Speed
            Channel attachment is supported in single tag interlock mode
            only.)
    o   The 3825 can transfer data in one of the following modes:
        Single-tag interlock, High-speed transfer, Data streaming 1.25
        Mb/sec, Data streaming 2.5 Mb/sec.
    o   The IBM 3825 may be attached to an SNA network via the IBM Token
        -Ring. Support is provided by the Token-Ring attachment package.
        PSF/MVS Version 1, Release 2.1, PSF/MVS Verison 2, PSF/VM Version
        2, or PSF/VSE Version 2 is required.
        The following are minimum required components of a Token-Ring
        Network:
        -   An IBM 8228 Multi-station Access Unit and appropriate cabling
            to connect the 37XX communication controller or 3174
            Establishment Controller and personal computer system to the
            multi-station access unit.
            Refer to the chosen controller and feature specifications to
            determine the appropriate cabling product requirements.
        -   A 3720, 3725, or 3745 Communications Controller (with a Token
            -Ring feature) or a 3174 Establishment Controller (with a
            Token-Ring Gateway feature) supporting a Token-Ring Local
            Area Network (LAN) connection to the personal computer
            system.
    o   The IBM 3825 may also be attached to an SNA network via the IBM
        Token-Ring or an SDLC line using Remote PrintManager (RPM Version
        2 or 3). PSF/MVS Version 1, Release 3, PSF/MVS Verison 2, PSF/VM
        Version 2, or PSF/VSE Version 2 is required.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS (AS/400)

    o   The IBM 3825 may be attached to the AS/400 systems through the
        Token-Ring attachment package.  OS/400 Version 1 Release 2 or a
        subsequent version or release is required.  The following are
        minimum required components of a Token-Ring Network:
        -   An IBM 8228 Multi-station Access Unit and appropriate cabling
            to connect the Token-Ring network adapter or feature and
            personal computer system to the multi-station access unit.
            Refer to the chosen Token-Ring Network Adapter or Token-Ring
            Network Subsystem specifications to determine the appropriate
            cabling product requirements.
        -   One of the following host system features is required for a
            Token-Ring:
            --  A 4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, feature number
                6160 (AS/400 9404 System Unit only).  This adapter
                requires OS/400 Version 1 Release 2 or subsequent
                versions or releases.
            --  A 4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem, feature
                number 6240 (AS/400 9406 System Unit only).  This
                subsystem requires OS/400 Version 1 Release 2 or
                subsequent versions or releases.
            --  A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, feature
                number 2636 (9402, 9404, 9406 System Units).  This
                adapter requires OS/400 Version 2 Release 1 or
                subsequent versions or releases for the 9406 System Unit.
                It requires OS/400 Version 1 Release 3 or subsequent
                versions or releases for the 9402 and 9404 System
                Units.
            --  A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, feature
                number 2626 (9404 and 9406 System Units).  This adapter
                requires OS/400 Version 2 Release 1 or subsequent
                versions or releases.
            --  A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem, feature
                number 6242 (9406 System Unit only).  This subsystem
                requires OS/400 Version 1 Release 3 or subsequent
                versions or releases.
    o   The IBM 3825 will attach to the AS/400 systems through the IBM
        Token Ring Network with the Remote PrintManager Version 2.0.3.

NOTE: The OS/400 software support for the 3825 uses the same interfaces
currently used for the IBM 3812 and 3816 Page printers, including selection of
fonts, page rotation, computer output reduction, drawer and code page. The
OS/400 and OfficeVision/400 programs are enhanced to allow selection of duplex
printing.  For full function AFP printing the AS/400 native application must
generate the Advanced Function Printing Data Stream (AFPDS) or the AS/400
system must be used as a remote print server for System/370 generated AFPDS.

The following describes requirements for the MVS, VSE, and VM and OS/400
operating system environments.  Later programming releases and modification
levels are supported unless announced otherwise.

    o   MVS operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5665-275) Version 1
            Release 2.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5695-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VSE operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5666-319) Version 1
            Release 2.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 1
            Release 2.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VM operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5664-198) Version 1
            Release 3.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.

Remote attachment of the IBM 3825 Page Printer requires the following IBM
licensed programs.  Later releases and modification levels are supported unless
otherwise stated.

    o   MVS Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5665-275) Version 1 Release 3.0
            (PSF/MVS), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812) or
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5695-040) Version 2 Release 1.0
            (PSF/MVS), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812)
    o   VM Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0
            (PSF/VM), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812)
    o   VSE Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 1.0
            (PSF/VSE), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812)
    o   The following host software is required for the Token-Ring
        network:
        -   PSF/MVS, Version 2 or Version 1 Release 3.1 or subsequent
            releases, with the Group 3 attachment feature (MVS only)
        -   PSF/VM, Version 2 or subsequent releases (VM only)
        -   PSF/VSE, Version 2 or subsequent releases (VSE only)
        -   ACF/VTAM, Release 3.1.1, or subsequent releases (MVS and VM)
        -   ACF/VTAM, Release 3.2.0, or subsequent releases (VSE only)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 4.2.0, or subsequent releases (MVS and VM
            with 3720 or 3725)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.1.0, or subsequent releases (MVS with
            3745).
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0, or subsequent releases (VM with 3745)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 4.3.1, or subsequent releases (VSE with 3720
            or 3725)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0, or subsequent releases (VSE with
            3745)

SPECIFY Unless indicated otherwise, the following specify and order codes are
available only at time of manufacture. VOLTAGE/POWER CORD

    o   Voltage:
        Voltage specify codes will not be required when ordering an IBM
        3825 Page Printer. With no specify, the appropriate default will
        be ordered based on the 3-digit country code.  The Default
        parameter is:
            60Hz 208V AC 3-Phase
        For special power requirements, one of the following codes should
        be specified: (intended for raised floor computer room)
            60Hz 208V AC 3-Phase Specify #9905
            60Hz 240V AC 3-Phase Specify #9908
    o   Power cord:
        -   Default 4.3m (14') with Russellstoll RS3730MP plug.
        -   Chicago only, specify #9986 - 1.83m (6') cord.
        -   Default Russellstoll RS3744FP receptacle.
    o   Language:
        The IBM 3825 Page Printer Control Panel supports two languages.
        The default is US English primary, Spanish alternate.  For
        optional language requirements, select primary language from
        the list below.  (US English is alternate)
          US English        Specify #2924
          UK English        Specify #2927
          French            Specify #2928
          German            Specify #2929
          Italian           Specify #2932
          Spanish           Specify #2931
          Japanese          Specify #2930
          Chinese (Taiwan)  Specify #2939
          Chinese (PRC)*    Specify #2939
          Korean            Specify #2943
          Canadian French   Specify #2935
* Except for PRC the Specify #2939 will order Taiwan Chinese.

SPECIAL FEATURES The following features are available and can be ordered with
new machines or as MES field upgrade:

TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FEATURE (#4020) The Two Channel Switch feature allows
connection of the IBM 3825 to a second channel interface.  The IBM 3825 can
maintain a connection with either of the channels as a single device.  The 3825
can be configured for either 'manual' (operator selected) or for 'dynamic' (on
demand from the host) switching.  In manual mode, the channels may be connected
to the same host or to two independent hosts, with one channel being enabled at
a time.  In dynamic mode, the two channels may be connected to the same host or
to two hosts that are tightly coupled.

PATTERN STORAGE FEATURES (#4030 - 2MB MEMORY AND #4040 - 4MB MEMORY) The
Pattern Storage features may be ordered in addition to the 2Mb memory shipped
standard with each printer.  The number of memory slots in the printer (4)
governs the maximum pattern storage.  Total pattern storage beyond 4Mb is
intended for, but not limited to, users of ideographic (double-byte) fonts.

ADVANCED FUNCTION IMAGE AND GRAPHICS (FACTORY #4200/FIELD #4201) Improves text
performance by up to 50 percent and IM1 image performance by up to 75 percent.
Supports IOCA data streams with printer image mapping functions, such as scale
to fit, center and trim, and position and trim. Supports IOCA decompression
(MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4, and ABIC) in the printer.  Responds to GOCA vector
graphics orders at the DR/2VO standards level.  Is able to correct the
resolution of an input image to match the IBM 3825's 240 pel resolution.
Customers may need to order additional Pattern Store to help achieve desired
performance with image-intensive applications. Maximum:  One.  Field
Installation:  Yes.

CABLES All required attachment cables are included in the purchase price of the
machine/feature, however cables must be ordered separately and will ship
separately.  The following are available from IBM and included in the price of
the machine:

    o   Channel Interface Cable (2) Group #0185
    o   Optional Power Sequence and Control Cable (1) Group #1178

The following are available from IBM and included in the price of the Two
Channel Switch feature (#4020):

    o   Channel Interface Cable (2) Group #0185
    o   Optional Power Sequence and Control Cable (1) Group #1178
    o   Optional Remote Channel Enable/Disable Cable (1) Group #1178
Contact installation representatives for cable length and quantity
requirements. *Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. 3827 PAGE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3827 Page Printer is a channel attached, high speed, non-impact, cut sheet
duplex printer which provides high quality Advanced Function Printing. It uses
an electro-photographic process on a variety of paper sizes to print at speeds
up to 92 impressions per minute.  The 3827 Page Printer is a member of the
advanced function printer family including the 3820 Page Printer, the 3825 Page
Printer, the 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer, the 3835 Page Printer and the
3900 Advanced Function Printer.  Advanced Function Printing software support is
available for the 3827 Page Printer under MVS, VM, VSE, and OS/400.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Non-impact, all points addressable, advanced function printer.
    o   240 pel addressability using LED printhead technology.
    o   Cut sheet paper with duplex (2-sided) printing capability from
        the primary (lower) input supply only.  (See RPQ 8A5051 to
        duplex from the secondary (upper) paper supply.)
    o   High speed (up to 92 impressions per minute).
    o   High capacity (average usage of 1,000,000 impressions per month,
        capacity of up to 2,000,000 impressions per month).
    o   Two-megabyte (2MB) pattern storage for image storage is
        standard with up to 16MB available.
    o   Operator control using a visual display unit with keyboard.
    o   Machine resident diagnostics for quick problem analysis.
    o   Variety of xerographic papers sizes and weights.
    o   Advanced Function Printing support on MVS/ESA, MVS/370, and
        MVS/XA with MVS/JES2 and MVS/JES3; under VM/SP, VM/SP HPO, and
        VM/XA; and under VSE with VSE/POWER.
    o   Support for Advanced Function Image and Graphics Applications
    o   Token-Ring Attachment
    o   Supports IPDS data stream
    o   Hardware performance-assist for image decompression

DESCRIPTION

    o   Dual input supply capacity -- 2,500 sheets in the primary (lower)
        drawer and 1,000 sheets in the secondary (upper) drawer when
        using 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic paper.
    o   Single output stacker paper capacity -- 2,500 sheets, in which
        paper is stacked face down in the proper page order.
    o   Xerographic paper sizes supported* simplex and duplex:
        -   203 x 254mm (8.0 x 10.0 in.)
        -   203 x 267mm (8.0 x 10.5 in.) (Available only on 60 Hz)
        -   215.9 x 279.4mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
        -   210 x 297mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.) A4
        -   210 x 317.5mm (8.3 x 12.5 in.) (Available only on 50 Hz)
        -   215.9 x 330mm (8.5 x 13.0 in.)
        -   215.9 x 355.6mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
            *  The word "supported" does not mean that the 3827 Page
            Printer can print on the entire length of all paper sizes
            listed.  The maximum print length of the 3827 Page Printer
            is 12.8 inches.
    o   Paper weights supported:
        -   Simplex - 60 g/m2 (16 lb.) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb.)  and 199 g/m2
            (110 lb. index).
        -   Duplex - 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) to 105 g/m2 (28 lb.).
    o   Preprinted papers (forms and letterheads), which are electro-
        photographic tolerant, may be used.  Perforated paper may be
        used. Refer to "3827 Page Printer Paper Reference" for specific
        considerations.
    o   Pre-punched paper with standard 2-, 3-, 4-, or 5-hole punches
        may be used.
    o   Continuous operation while loading paper of the same type in
        both input drawers while running in simplex mode.
    o   Offsets printer jobs for easy job separation as directed by host
        software.
    o   Capability to print at speeds up to 92 impressions per minute.
        Actual speed depends on many factors, for example, type of data
        being printed, amount of data, the host program used to drive
        the printer, switching between paper input supplies or switching
        modes (simplex/duplex).
    o   The 3827 Page Printer has a recommended usage up to 2,000,000
        impressions per month (average usage of 1,000,000 impressions
        per month).
    o   Capability to print electronic forms generated at the host and
        to merge text and/or data with the form.
    o   Image printing, including signatures and logos, is supported.
    o   Print orientations of 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees.
    o   Up to 63 down-loaded single-byte fonts can be printed per page.
        Double-byte fonts are also supported.
    o   The 3827 Page Printer can be used to print some xerographic paper
        labels and polymer coated, paper based labels that are suitable
        for electro-photographic processing.  IBM recommends testing a
        sample of labels in your 3827 Page Printer before purchasing
        production quantities for a given application.  Refer to the
        "3827 Page Printer Paper Reference" for specific label
        considerations.
    o   The 3827 Page Printer can be used to print documents for use in
        OCR applications.  The 3827 Page Printer has been tested using
        OCR fonts in the IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition
        Licensed Program (5688-021).  Due to the variability of OCR
        applications and readers, IBM advises that customers evaluate
        the 3827 Page Printer OCR output in their application
        environment.  Refer to the "3827 Page Printer Paper Reference"
        for OCR specific information.
        -   IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed Program
            (5688-021) contains the OCR A character set according to ISO
            Standard 1073/1 amended with "greater than" sign as defined
            by the German National Standard DIN 66008 Part 6.
        -   IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed Program
            (5688-021) contains the OCR B extended alphanumeric subset,
            options subset, and erase characters according to ISO
            Standard 1073/2 amended with the lower case characters "a
            diaeresis", "o diaeresis", and "u diaeresis" as defined by
            the German National Standard DIN 66009.
    o   The 3827 Page Printer can be used to print bar code documents.
        The 3827 Page Printer has been tested using the bar code fonts
        in the the IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed
        Program (5688-021).  The IBM Bar Code/Optical Character
        Recognition Licensed Program (5688-021) contains the following
        bar codes:
            EAN 8 UPC E Interleaved 2 of 5
            EAN 13 Industrial 2 of 5 Code 39*
            UPC A Matrix 2 of 5 MSI
            * Code 39 is a trademark of Interface Mechanisms, Inc.
        Due to the variability of bar code applications and scanners,
        IBM advises that customers evaluate the 3827 Page Printer bar
        code output in their application environment.  Refer to the "IBM
        3827 Page Printer Paper Reference" for bar code specific
        information.
    o   The National Address Information Center of the United States
        Postal Service awarded POSTNET barcode certification to the 3827
        on April 29, 1991. The 3827 is certified for the "9-digit" and
        "ABC" barcodes and for the "bottom right" and "address block"
        positions.  The 3827 certification number is 9109400127.
    o   The Advanced Function Image and Graphics feature improves text
        performance by up to 50% and image performance by up to 75%
        compared to an IBM 3827 without either it or the Performance
        Enhancement RPQ (8A5038).  This feature supports the FS10
        function set of IOCA data streams with printer image mapping
        functions, such as scale to fit, center and trim, and position
        and trim.  This allows images to be trimmed and scaled as
        desired by the user.  This feature also supports IOCA resolution
        mapping in the printer, which allows, for example, a scanned
        image to be printed at original size, even if the scanner has
        a different pel resolution than the printer.  This feature
        supports IOCA
        decompression (IBM MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4, and ABIC) in the
        printer. For image-intensive applications this can provide a
        savings in host processor cycles, DASD space for applications
        files and spool data sets, and utilization of the channel or TP
        link to the printer.  Finally, this feature responds to GOCA
        vector graphics orders at the DR/2V0 level, which eliminates
        the need for host rasterization of these objects prior to
        printing.  Customers may need to order additional Pattern
        Storage to help achieve desired performance with image-intensive
        applications.  The IM1 performance improvements are supported by
        Print Services Facility/MVS 1.3, Print Services Facility/VM 1.3,
        or Print Services Facility/VSE 2.1. Support for the FS10 function
        set of IOCA is provided by Print Services Facility/MVS 1.3 with
        APAR OY34885, Print Services Facility/VM 2.1, and Print Services
        Facility/VSE 2.1.  GOCA support at the DR/2V0 level is provided
        by Print Services Facility/MVS 2.1 and Print Services Facility/
        VM 2.1.  OS/400 1.2 supports all functions in this feature.
        Remote PrintManager also supports all functions of this feature,
        but it must be at the Version 2.0.4 or 3.0.5 level or higher to
        support GOCA at the DR/2V0 level.  Remote PrintManager does not
        support this feature under PSF/VM 1.3.
    o   Environment Supported (Refer to the "IBM 3827 Introduction and
        Planning Guide")
        -   Temperature - 15.6 to 29.4C (60 to 85F)
        -   Relative Humidity - 20 to 80 percent
    o   The Decompression Performance Enhancement Feature improves
        performance of IOCA images using IBM MMR or CCITT Group 3 or
        Group 4 compression compared with the Advanced Function Image
        and Graphics Feature (#4200), which is a pre-requisite.  Support
        for the FS10 function set of IOCA is provided by Print Services
        Facility/MVS 1.3 with APAR OY34885, Print Services Facility/VM
        2.1, Print Services Facility/VSE 2.1, OS/400 1.2, and Print
        Services Facility/2 Version 1.  Remote PrintManager also
        supports all functions of this feature.  Remote PrintManager V.3
        is not supported under OS/400.
    o   Primary operator interface to the 3827 Page Printer is a visual
        display unit with keyboard.
    o   The IBM 3827 Page Printer may be attached directly to parallel
        block multiplexer channels, to a High Speed Printer Adapter
        (Micro Channel 370), to ESCON channels operating in ESCON
        Converter Model 1 mode through an IBM 9034 ESCON Converter
        Model 1, or to an SNA network using the Remote PrintManager in
        the MVS, VM or VSE environment via the IBM token ring or an SDLC
        line.  Data may be transferred in one of the following modes:
        -   Single-tag interlock (normal speed)
        -   Double-tag interlock (high speed transfer)
        -   Data streaming (1.25M bps)
        -   Data streaming (2.5M bps)
        3044 Channel Extenders are also fully supported on the 3090,
        308X, and 4381 processors.  On the 4361, the 3044 is supported
        in block multiplex mode, but only in single-tag mode on high
        speed channel.  The 3044 is not supported on the 4331, 4341,
        or 9370 processors.
    o   Hardware attachment  (channel) - 4331 , 4341, 4361, 4381, 3081,
        3083, 3084, 3090, ES/9000, 9370, Micro Channel 370 (9371).
    o   Hardware attachment  (Token-Ring) - AS/400, 4331, 4341, 4361,
        4381, 3081, 3083, 3084, 3090, ES/9000, 9370.
    o   Support under MVS, VM, VSE, and OS/400.

LIMITATIONS

    o   Duplex is available from the lower (primary) paper supply only.
        (See RPQ 8A5051 to duplex from the secondary (upper) paper
        supply.)
    o   The 3044 Fiber Optics Channel Extender does not support the 3827
        Page Printer on the 4331, 4341, or 9370 processors.  Support on
        the 4361 is limited to single tag interlock mode, only.
    o   The 3827 will print up to 12.8 inches in length.
    o   Actual printer print speed depends on many factors, for example,
        type of data being printed, amount of data, the host program
        used to drive the printer, switching between paper input
        supplies or switching modes (simplex/duplex).

For parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a parallel block
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 4331, 4341, 4361, 4381, 308X, 3090,
ES/9370, or ES/9000 processor.  A High Speed Printer Adapter is required on the
Micro Channel 370 for each attached 3827.

For attachment to ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode, an
IBM 9034 ESCON Converter (ESCC) Model 1 is required.  Up to eight parallel
channel I/O control units can be multi-dropped from one IBM ESCON Converter
Model 1.  An ESCON channel operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode must be
dedicated to each IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  The following systems support
ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode:

    o   ES/3090 180J and above except for Model 250
    o   ES/3090-9000T models
    o   ES/9000

The IBM 3827 Page Printer may be attached to the remote (D01 or D02 unit) end
of an IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender, which can be used to extend the
standard channel interface by up to 2000 meters (6,562 feet).  The following
IBM processors are supported by 3044 Fiber Optics Channel Extender attachment
(block multiplexer channel):

    o   4361 (High Speed Channel attachment is supported only in single
        tag interlock mode), 4381, 308X, and 3090.

Attachment to AS/400 or remote attachment to S/370 or S/390 via the Token-Ring
attachment package.  The following are minimum required components of a
Token-Ring network:

    o   IBM 8228 Multi-station Access Unit and appropriate cabling to
        connect the 37XX communication controller, 3174 Establishment
        Controller, or AS/400 and personal computer system to the multi-
        station access unit.
        Refer to the chosen controller and adapter specifications to
        determine the appropriate cabling product requirements.

One of the following host system features is required for a Token-Ring Network:

    o   A 3720, 3725, or 3745 Communications Controller (with a Token-
        Ring feature) or a 3174 Establishment Controller (with a Token-
        Ring gateway feature) supporting a Token-Ring Local Area Network
        (LAN) connection to the personal computer system (S/370 or S/390
        only).
    o   A 4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, feature number 6160
        (AS/400 9404 System Unit only).  This adapter requires OS/400
        Version 1 Release 2 or subsequent versions or releases.
    o   A 4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem, feature number 6240
        (AS/400 9406 System Unit only).  This subsystem requires OS/400
        Version 1 Release 2 or subsequent versions or releases.
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, feature number 2636
        (9402, 9404, 9406 System Units).  This adapter requires OS/400
        Version 2 Release 1 or subsequent versions or releases for the
        9406 System Unit.  It requires OS/400 Version 1 Release 3 or
        subsequent versions or releases for the 9402 and 9404 System
        Units.
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, feature number 2626
        (9404 and 9406 System Units).  This adapter requires OS/400
        Version 2 Release 1 or subsequent versions or releases.
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem, feature number
        6242 (9406 System Unit only).  This subsystem requires OS/400
        Version 1 Release 3 or subsequent versions or releases.

The IBM 3827 may also be attached to an SNA network via the IBM Token-Ring or
an SDLC line not using the Token-Ring attachment package.  Remote PrintManager
(RPM Version 2 or 3) is required in the MVS environment (PSF/MVS Version 1
Release 3 or PSF/MVS Version 2), VM environment (PSF/VM Version 2) and VSE
environment (PSF/VSE Version 2).

The IBM 3827 will attach to the AS/400 systems through the IBM Token Ring
Network with the Remote PrintManager Version 2.0.3. NOTE: The OS/400 software
support for the 3827 uses the same interfaces currently used for the IBM 3812
and 3816 Page printers, including selection of fonts, page rotation, computer
output reduction, drawer and code page. The OS/400 and Office licensed programs
are enhanced to allow selection of duplex printing.  For full function AFP
printing the AS/400 native application must generate the Advanced Function
Printing Data Stream (AFPDS) or the AS/400 system must be used as a remote
print server for System/370 generated AFPDS.

The following describes requirements for the MVS, VSE, and VM operating system
environments.  Later programming releases and modification levels are supported
unless announced otherwise.

    o   MVS operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5665-275) Version 1
            Release 2.0 and its prerequisites.  (See IBM Programming
            Announcement 288-038.)
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5695-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VSE operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5666-319) Version 1
            Release 2.0 and its prerequisites.  (See IBM Programming
            Announcement 286-319.)
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VM operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5664-198) Version 1
            Release 3.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.

Remote attachment of the IBM 3827 Page Printer requires the following IBM
licensed programs.  Later releases and modification levels are supported unless
otherwise stated.

    o   MVS Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5665-275) Version 1 Release 3.0
            (PSF/MVS), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812).
            or
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5695-040) Version 2 Release 1.0
            (PSF/MVS), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812).
    o   VM Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0
            (PSF/VM), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812).
    o   VSE Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 1.0
            (PSF/VSE), its prerequisites, and
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
            --  Remote PrintManager Version 3.0 (49F4-812).
    o   The following host software is required for the Token-Ring
        network:
        -   PSF/MVS, Version 2 or Version 1 Release 3.1 or subsequent
            releases, with the Group 3 attachment feature (MVS only)
        -   PSF/VM, Version 2 or subsequent releases (VM only)
        -   PSF/VSE, Version 2 or subsequent releases (VSE only)
        -   ACF/VTAM, Release 3.1.1, or subsequent releases (MVS and VM)
        -   ACF/VTAM, Release 3.2.0, or subsequent releases (VSE only)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 4.2.0, or subsequent releases (MVS and VM
            with 3720 or 3725)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.1.0, or subsequent releases (MVS with
            3745)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0, or subsequent releases (VM with 3745)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 4.3.1, or subsequent releases (VSE with 3720
            or 3725)
        -   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0, or subsequent releases (VSE with
            3745)

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    Width  - 2,240mm  (88 inches)
    Depth  - 790mm  (31 inches)
    Height - 1,270mm (50 inches)
    Weight - 830 kg  (1,830 pounds)
    Power (operating) - 5 kVA
    Power (idle) - 2.25 kVA
    Acoustics
                             LWAd     LpA m
                            (bels)    (dB)
    60 Hz Machine
      Operating              8.6       68
      Idle                   7.5       57
      Impulsive Noise - No
      Prominent Noise - No

LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of
machines.  LpA m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure
emission levels at the one M position for a production series of machines.

    Heat Load Dissipated - 14,500 BTU per
                           hour (operating)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    Temperature:  15.6 to 29.4C (60 to 85F)
    Relative Humidity:  20 to 80 percent
    Wet Bulb Temperature:  22.8C (73F)
    Class 1 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Environment

SPECIFY

    o   Configuration 001, Specify #9951
        -   60 Hz, 120/208V 3-phase-neutral
        -   14 ft power cord (5-wire) with Russelstoll(R) DS3516MP plug
        -   English Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  UL/CSA
    o   Configuration 002, Specify #9952
        -   50 Hz, 346/380/400/415V 3-phase-neutral
        -   14 ft power cord (5-wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  IEC 380/435
    o   Configuration 003, Specify #9953
        -   50 Hz, 346/380/400/415V 3-phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5-wire) without a connector
        -   German Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  IEC 380/435
    o   Configuration 004, Specify #9954
        -   50 Hz, 346/380/400/415V 3-phase-neutral
        -   14 ft power cord (5-wire) without a connector
        -   French Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  IEC 380/435
    o   Configuration 005, Specify #9955
        -   60 Hz, 200V 3-phase
        -   14-ft power cord (4-wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  UL/CSA
    o   Configuration 006, Specify #9956
        -   50 Hz, 200/220V 3-phase
        -   14 ft power cord (4-wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  IEC 380/435
    o   Configuration 007, Specify #9957
        -   50 Hz, 346/380/400/415V 3-phase-neutral
        -   14 ft power cord (5-wire) without a connector
        -   Spanish Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  IEC 380/435
    o   Configuration 008, Specify #9958
        -   60 Hz, 120/208V 3- phase-neutral
        -   14-ft power cord (5-wire) with Russelstoll(R) DS3516MP plug
        -   French Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  UL/CSA
    o   Configuration 009, Specify #9959
        -   60 Hz, 120/208V 3-phase-neutral
        -   14-ft power cord (5-wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
        -   Agency approvals:  UL/CSA
    o   Voltage:
        Specify codes will not be required when ordering the 3827 Page
        Printer. The automatic default based on the 3-digit country code
        will order Configuration 001 (60 Hz 120/208V 3-Phase, English
        Console, and power cord described below).  Exceptions to
        configuration content should be submitted as RPQ's.  If the
        configuration default is not desired, the marketing
        representative must ensure that required safety approvals for
        the machine being ordered are consistent with country
        requirements before ordering.  It is recommended that the plant
        of control be contacted before overriding country defaults.
    o   Power Cord:
        -   4.3M (14-ft), 5-wire power attachment cord with Russellstoll
            (R) DS3516MP plug.
        -   1.8M (6-ft), 5-wire power attachment cord for Chicago.
            Specify #9986.
        -   Receptacle:  Russellstoll(R) DS3516FR or Connector:
            Russellstoll(R) DS3516FP.
    o   Language (for ship-group publications):
        The 3827 Page Printer will be shipped with English as the
        Console language (Configuration 001).  Labels and ship-group
        customer publications will be in English.
    o   Tool Kit:
        -   For first 3827 Page Printer ordered, Specify #9950.
        -   If unit ordered is second or higher 3827 Page Printer to be
            installed, no additional tool kit is required.  If physical
            locations of machines in multiple machine installations
            requires a tool kit for the second (or higher) machine
            ordered, Specify #9950.
        -   May be ordered with the machine, or as an MES.

SPECIAL FEATURES TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#4020) The Two Channel Switch feature
allows attachment of the 3827 to a second channel interface.  The 3827 can
maintain a connection with either of the channels as a single device.  Either
dynamic or manual switching is selected at the time of configuration.  Dynamic
switching allows the host system to select either Channel A or Channel B
automatically.  When set in the dynamic mode, two-channel switching operates in
one of two ways:

    o   Tightly coupled multiprocessing
    o   Single processor using both channels

The two channels may be connected to the same host system or to two central
processing units that use the same operating system.  Manual mode allows
logical connection to only one of the two channels at a time.  Selection is
done using the Enable/Disable switches on the 3827.  The Two Channel Switch
feature may be ordered with the machine, or as a MES, and will be field
installed.

PATTERN STORAGE FEATURE (2MB MEMORY #4030) OR (4 MB MEMORY #4040) Pattern
Storage feature (2Mb or 4Mb) may be ordered in addition to the 2Mb memory
shipped standard with each printer.  The number of memory slots in the printer
(4) governs the maximum number of pattern storage features that can be
installed.  16Mb is the maximum amount of pattern storage.  Total pattern
storage beyond 4Mb is intended for, but not limited to, users of ideographic
(double-byte) fonts.  Note that the Decompression Performance Enhancement
feature (#4202) requires one memory slot, limiting maximum pattern storage to
12 Mb.

ADVANCED FUNCTION IMAGE AND GRAPHICS FEATURE (#4200) The Advanced Function
Image and Graphics Feature improves text performance by up to 50% and IM1 image
performance by up to 75%, compared to an IBM 3827 Advanced Function Page
Printer without either it or Performance Enhancement RPQ 8A5038.  This feature
supports the FS10 function set of IOCA data streams with printer image mapping
functions, such as scale to fit, center and trim, and position and trim.  It
supports the FS10 subset of IOCA decompression (IBM MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4,
and ABIC) in the printer and responds to GOCA vector graphics draw orders at
the DR/2V0 level.  It is able to correct the resolution of an input image to
match the IBM 3827 Advanced Function Page Printer's 240 pel resolution.
Customers may need to order additional Pattern Storage to help achieve desired
performance with image-intensive applications.  This feature includes the
Performance Enhancement RPQ (#8A5038).  See Feature #4210 for IBM 3827 Advanced
Function Page Printers that already have RPQ #8A5038 installed on them.
Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.

DECOMPRESSION PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT FEATURE (#4202) The Decompression
Performance Enhancement Feature improves performance of IOCA images that are
compressed by the IBM MMR or CCITT Group 3 or Group 4 algorithm compared to the
Advanced Function Image and Graphics Feature (#4200).  The Advanced Function
Image and Graphics Feature (#4200) is a prerequisite for the Decompression
Performance Enhancement Feature.  Note that the combination of the Performance
Enhancement RPQ (#8A5038) and the Advanced Function Image and Graphics Feature
(#4210) is equivalent to the Advanced Function Image and Graphics Feature
(#4200).  The Decompression Performance Enhancement feature requires a memory
slot in the printer, limiting maximum pattern storage (#4030, #4040) to 12 Mb.
Maximum:  One. Field Installation:  Yes.

ADVANCED FUNCTION IMAGE AND GRAPHICS FEATURE (#4210) This feature is for
machines that already have the Performance Enhancement RPQ (#8A5038) installed.
For IBM 3827 Advanced Function Page Printers without this RPQ, the performance
enhancement of the RPQ and the function of this feature can be obtained with
Feature #4200 (see above).  Supports the FS10 function set of IOCA data streams
with printer image mapping functions, such as scale to fit, center and trim,
and position and trim.  It supports the FS10 function set of IOCA decompression
(IBM MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4, and ABIC) in the printer and responds to GOCA
vector graphics orders at the DR/2V0 level.  It is able to correct the
resolution of an input image to match the IBM 3827 Advanced Function Page
Printer's 240 pel resolution. Customers may need to order additional Pattern
Storage to help achieve desired performance with image-intensive applications.
Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.

CABLES The 3827 Page Printer supports a maximum parallel channel cable length
of 122M (400 ft) if it is the only control unit on the interface.  For each
additional control unit (up to a maximum of eight control units total) this
measurement is reduced by 15 ft.

The following items are available from IBM, and are included in the price of
the machine.

    o   Channel Interface Cable (2), Group #0185
    o   Optional Power Sequence and Control Cable (1), Group #1178

The following items are available from IBM, and are included in the price of
the Two Channel Switch feature (#4020).

    o   Channel Interface Cable (2), Group #0185
    o   Optional Power Sequence and Control Cable (1), Group #1178
    o   Optional Remote Enable/Disable Cable (1), Group #1178
Contact installation representatives for lengths required. An AC power cord is
supplied with all machines.  This cord is 4.3M (14 ft) long with the exception
of printers that will be used in Chicago, Illinois (U.S.), where the cord is
1.8M (6 ft) long.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. 3828 ADVANCED FUNCTION MICR PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is a member of the growing family
of high-quality, high-volume page printers supported by Advanced Function
Printing (AFP) software.  It provides the ability to produce output that is
readable by Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) equipment primarily used
by financial institutions to route and identify checks and other documents.
The IBM 3828 offers customers who are now printing checks, bank control
documents, remittance documents, or pre-authorized drafts the ability to reduce
their costs and improve their responsiveness for these critical applications.
The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is a channel-attached, cut-sheet
duplex, non-impact AFP printer that can run at up to 92 impressions per minute.
The IBM 3828 has a 14-inch printhead with 240 picture element (pel)
addressability and improved character edge smoothing enhancements for superior
print quality.  It supports the ANSI standard E-13B and ISO standard CMC 7 MICR
fonts while retaining the AFP capability to print graphic images such as
signatures and logos as well as OCR forms and bar-code documents.  Special
magnetic toner and a developer with extended performance replenishment are used
for all printing by the IBM 3828.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Non-impact, Advanced Function Printer with MICR capability using
        the ANSI Standard E-13B font, or ISO Standard CMC 7 font.  (An
        E-13B outline font is provided for job preparation.)
    o   High speed (up to 92 impressions per minute).
    o   Cut sheet paper with duplex (two-sided) printing capability from
        both the primary(lower) and secondary(upper) input paper
        supplies.
    o   High capacity (average usage of 1,000,000 impressions per month,
        capacity of up to 2,000,000 impressions per month).
    o   Supports Advanced Function Image and Graphics applications
    o   14-inch 480 pel (240 x 2) light-emitting diode printhead with
        compensation control for uniform high quality printing.
    o   240 picture element (pel) addressability with improved character
        edge smoothing and fine line enhancements.
    o   High-performance printer control which has the ability to
        process more complex pages at rated speed than previous standard
        implementations.
    o   Two-megabyte (2MB) pattern storage for image storage is standard
        with up to 16MB available.
    o   Token-Ring Attachment.
    o   Supports IPDS data stream.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is a high-volume, high-speed, page
printer that can produce a complete range of high-quality print, including MICR
documents.  Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) is a font of uniquely
shaped characters printed with magnetic ink and used primarily in the
commercial banking industry for automated document interchange.  The MICR
characters printed by the IBM 3828 conform to the published standards of the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).  The IBM 3828 Advanced Function
MICR Printer can print checks, explanation of benefits (EOB) and other payment
documents in a single application step that can be centrally controlled for
maximum security.  This capability can improve the productivity of a company's
check-writing applications by eliminating many of the separate steps in a
semi-automatic process.  The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer can take
blank or preprinted security paper and in a single pass of that paper, print
customer data, company logo, bank routing data, authorizing signature and other
company-to-customer messages to create a finished document ready for mailing.
The IBM 3828 combines these capabilities in a single unit which requires a
small floor space for high-volume production operation.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is another printer in the IBM
family of cut-sheet and fan-fold printers supported by the common platform of
IBM's Advanced Function Printing system.  Those customers who are users of AFP
will be able to quickly exploit the capabilities of the IBM 3828 through AFP's
common application and system support.  With AFP, the IBM 3828 can be used to
backup other compatible IBM Page Printers running any applications while also
enabling MICR unique applications.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer will allow a customer to print
unique and varied documents that will present a high-quality company image to
their customer base.  A 14-inch-wide 480 pel printhead with a finely positioned
set of light-emitting diodes works with the printer control to enhance the very
dark print of the IBM 3828.  Each individual pel has been fine-tuned to ensure
a consistent uniform output across the full length of the printhead.  New print
enhancement algorithms smooth the edges of diagonal character lines (such as in
the N) to give the characters a pleasing, crisp appearance.  The new algorithms
automatically turn off while printing images that would loose detail if the
edges were smoothed.  With the 14-inch printhead, a pair of 7-inch documents
can be printed side-by-side on a single sheet of paper to help reduce customer
printing and mailing costs.

The processing power of the IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer has been
improved to help reduce the time required to prepare pages for print.  Faster
microprocessors, faster control and pattern storage, and more streamlined
microcode all contribute to allow the IBM 3828 to run more complex jobs at or
near rated speed.  Complex jobs are those that use many characters per page,
have many positioning controls and font changes per page, or print large images
and logos.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR printer supports bilevel IOCA FS10 data
streams with printer image mapping functions, such as scale to file, center and
trim, and position and trim.  This allows images to be trimmed and scaled as
desired by the user.  The 3828 also supports IOCA resolution mapping in the
printer, which allows, for example, a scanned image to be printed at original
size, even if the scanner has a different pel resolution than the printer.  The
3828 supports IOCA decompression (MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4, and ABIC) in the
printer.  For image-intensive applications this can provide a savings in host
processor cycles, DASD space for applications files and spool data sets, and
utilization of the channel or TP link to the printer. Finally, the 3828
responds to GOCA vector graphics orders at the DR/2V0 level, which eliminates
the need for host rasterization of these objects prior to printing.

To help improve the productivity of an enterprise's print resource, the IBM
3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer can operate continuously in simplex or
duplex mode as duplex printing is supported from both paper input supplies.
This will help keep the IBM 3828 at a high level of productive use during
critical print windows.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is a high-speed, cut-sheet printer
that supports Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) print at speeds up to
92 impressions per minute.  The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is
supported by IBM's AFP software and is compatible with the 3816, 3820, 3825,
3827, and 3835 family of IBM page printer products.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer will print MICR characters of the
E-13B font, designed to the ANSI specifications, and an outline font of the
E-13B characters to aid in document design and test.  It will also print MICR
characters of the CMC 7 font designed to the ISO specifications.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer has an addressability of 240 x 240
picture elements (pels) or dots-per-inch (dpi) extending the length of the
14-inch 480 pel light emitting diode (LED) printhead.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer prints both fixed and proportional
spaced fonts from 4 to 72 points (1/18 to 1 inch).  Only one copy of a font is
required for all orientations (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees) in the printer as
the fonts are oriented for printing at print time.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer has two input drawers that can be
individually selected by host software and each supports single pass duplex
printing.  The output stacker supports offset stacking (jogging) on command
from host software.  If both input sources have paper identified by the same
name and the pre-stacker station is properly implemented then the IBM 3828 will
support continuous operations.

    o   Input Paper Capacity
        -   Upper paper supply - 1,000 sheets of 20 lbs. bond
        -   Lower paper supply - 2,500 sheets of 20 lbs. bond
    o   Output Paper Capacity
        -   Pre-stacker station - 50 sheets of 20 lbs. bond
        -   Output stacker - 2,500 sheets of 20 lbs. bond

The IBM 3828 supports a wide variety of commonly accepted cut sheet paper,
preprinted forms, security paper, prepunched paper, perforated paper and
certain label stock.  The IBM 3828 supports the following paper sizes:

            8.0 x 10.0 inches   (203 mm x 254 mm)
            8.0 x 10.5 inches   (203 mm x 267 mm)
    Letter  8.5 x 11.0 inches   (216 mm x 279 mm)
    A4      8.3 x 11.7 inches   (210 mm x 297 mm)
            8.5 x 13.0 inches   (216 mm x 330 mm)
    Legal   8.5 x 14.0 inches   (216 mm x 356 mm)

The following paper weights are supported by the IBM 3828:

    o   Primary paper supply (lower drawer)
        -   Simplex - 20 to 32 lb. bond (75 to 120 g/sqm)
        -   Duplex - 20 to 28 lb. bond (75 to 105 g/sqm)
    o   Secondary paper supply (upper drawer)
        -   Simplex - 20 to 52 lb. bond (70 to 199 g/sqm)
        -   Simplex - 90 and 110 lb. index (163 or 199 g/sqm)
        -   Duplex - 20 to 28 lb. bond (75 to 105 g/sqm)

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer monthly print volume will be in the
range of 500K to 2.0M impressions per month with the average expected to be 1M.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is managed by a high performance
printer control, that is functionally common to IBM's family of high speed
printers and helps ensure cross-printer compatibility within hardware limits.
The IBM 3828 contains 2MB of pattern storage to store font and image resources
required to print a page.  If required, up to 16MB of additional pattern
storage is available to accommodate large resource requirements and to provide
more storage to help maintain the IBM 3828's print speed.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer includes the Advanced Function
Image and Graphics functions.  For print applications running below rated
speed, this capability improves text performance by up to 50 percent and IM1
image performance by up to 75 percent compared to previous IBM printers, such
as the IBM 3827 Advanced Function Page Printer without either the Advanced
Function Image and Graphics Feature (#4200) or the Performance Enhancement RPQ
(8A5038).  It supports bilevel IOCA FS10 data streams with printer image
mapping functions, such as scale to fit, center and trim, and position and
trim.  It supports IOCA decompression (MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4, and ABIC) in
the printer.  It responds to GOCA vector graphics orders at the DR/2V0 level
and is able to correct the resolution of an input image to match the IBM 3828's
240 x 2 pel resolution.  Customers may need to order additional Pattern Storage
to help achieve desired performance with image-intensive applications.  Bilevel
IOCA FS10 data streams are supported by Print Services Facility/MVS V1 R3.0,
Print Services Facnility/VSE V2 R1.0, Print Services Facility/VM V2 R1.0, and
(unless otherwise announced) by later versions and releases of these licensed
programs.  GOCA DR/2V0 is supported by Print Services Facility/MVS V2 R1.0,
Print Services Facility/VM V2 R1.0, and (unless otherwise announced) later
versions and releases of these licensed programs.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer's primary operator interface is
through the operator display console and keyboard.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer takes approximately 19.0 square
feet (1.77 square meters) of floorspace.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer may be attached directly to
parallel block multiplexer channels, or to ESCON channels operating in ESCON
Converter Model 1 mode through an IBM 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1.  It may be
attached to an OS/2 system or Local Area Network using Print Services
Facility/2.  It may also be attached remotely to an MVS, VM, or VSE system via
an SDLC line or Token-Ring using either Print Services Facility/2 or Remote
PrintManager.  Finally, the 3828 may be attached remotely to an OS/400 system
via Token-Ring using either Print Services Facility/2 or Remote PrintManager.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer will print documents for use in OCR
and bar code applications.  The IBM 3828 Printer has been tested using OCR and
bar code fonts in the IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed
Program (5688-021).

The following OCR character sets are included:

    o   OCR-A character set according to ISO Standard 1073/1 amended
        with the "greater than" sign as defined by the German National
        Standard DIN 66008 part 6.
    o   OCR-B extended alphanumeric subset, options subset, and erase
        characters according to ISO Standard 1073/2

The following bar codes are included in the program product:

    o   EAN 8 and EAN 13
    o   UPC A and UPC E
    o   Industrial 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5, 2 of 5 Interleaved
    o   3 of 9
    o   MSI Plessey
    o   Code 128

Because of the variability of OCR readers and Bar Code scanners, it is
advisable to evaluate the IBM 3828 output in the customer's application
environment.

The National Address Information Center of the United States Postal Service
awarded POSTNET barcode certification to the 3828 on April 29, 1991. The 3828
is certified for the "9-digit" and "ABC" barcodes and for the "bottom right"
and "address block" positions.  The 3828 certification number is 9107200083.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer uses
existing hardware and software attachment interfaces.

    o   Width:  224 cm (88 inches)
    o   Depth:  79 cm (31 inches)
    o   Height:  127 cm (50 inches)
    o   Height, work surface:  105 cm (41 inches)
    o   Weight:  830 kg (1,830 pounds)
    o   Power: 5 kVA (operating)
    o   Power: 2.25 kVA (idle)
    o   Acoustics:  LWAd
            Operating:  8.6 bels
            Idle:  7.5 bels
    o   Heat load dissipation:  14,500 BTU per hour (operating)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  15.6 to 29.4C (60 to 85F)*
    o   Relative humidity:  20 to 65 percent*
    o   Wet bulb temperature:  22.8C (73F)
    o   Class 1 electrostatic discharge (ESD) environment
* Some combinations of high humidity and high temperature are not supported.
See the "IBM 3828 MICR Printer Introduction and Planning Guide" (G544-3359) for
specific operating environment information.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer attachment to the IBM 9370
processors via the IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender is not supported.
Attachment to the IBM 4361 High Speed Channel via the 3044 Fiber Optic Channel
Extender is supported only in single tag interlock mode.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer supports a maximum channel cable
length of 122 meters (400 feet) with only one control unit on the interface.
Each additional control unit (8 maximum) reduces supported cable length by 4.6
meters (15 feet).  Refer to the "IBM System/370 General Information:
Installation - Physical Planning" (GC22-7072).

Actual printer print speed depends on many factors, for example, type of data
being printed, amount of data, the host program used to drive the printer,
switching between paper input supplies or switching modes (simplex/duplex).

For parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a parallel block
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 4331, 4341, 4361, 4381, 308X, 3090,
ES/9370, or ES/9000 processor.  A High Speed Printer Adapter is required on the
Micro Channel 370 (9371) for each attached 3828 printer.

For attachment to ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode, an
IBM 9034 ESCON Converter (ESCC) Model 1 is required.  Up to eight parallel
channel I/O control units can be multi-dropped from one IBM ESCON Converter
Model 1.  An ESCON channel operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode must be
dedicated to each IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  The following systems support
ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode:

    o   ES/3090 180J and above except for Model 250
    o   ES/3090-9000T models
    o   ES/9000

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer may be attached to the remote (D01
or D02 unit) end of an IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender, which can be used
to extend the standard channel interface by up to 2000 meters (6,562 feet).
The following IBM processors are supported by 3044 Fiber Optics Channel
Extender attachment (block multiplexer channel):

    o   4361 (High Speed Channel attachment is supported only in single
        tag interlock mode), 4381, 308X, and 3090.

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR printer may be attached remotely using the
Token-Ring attachment package.  This package consists of a PS/2 system unit and
display with Remote PrintManager Version 2.0.4 and prerequisite software to
allow attachment to an SNA network.

The following are minimum required components of a Token-Ring network:

    o   IBM 8228 Multi-station Access Unit and appropriate cabling to
        connect the 37XX communication controller or 3174 Establishment
        Controller and personal computer system to the multi-station
        access unit.

Refer to the chosen controller and feature specifications to determine the
appropriate cabling product requirements. The following are host system
requirements for a Token-Ring Network:

    o   A 3720, 3725, or 3745 Communications Controller (with a Token-
        Ring feature) or a 3174 Establishment Controller (with a Token-
        Ring gateway feature) supporting a Token-Ring Local Area Network
        (LAN) connection to the personal computer system (S/370 or S/390
        only).
    o   A 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, #6160 (AS/400 9404 System
        Unit only)
    o   A 4Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem, #6240 (AS/400 9406
        System Unit only)
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter, #2636 (AS/400 9402,
        9404, 9406 System Units)
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter/A, #2626 (AS/400 9406,
        9404, and selected 9402 System Units)
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Subsystem, #6242 (AS/400 9406
        System Unit only)
    o   A 16/4 Mbps IBM Token-Ring Network Adapter/HP, #2619 (AS/400
        9406, 9404, and selected 9402 System Units)

The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer may also be attached to a Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) network via IBM Token-Ring or a Synchronous Data
Link Control (SDLC) line using Remote PrintManager in the MVS, VM, and VSE
environment.  In addition, the 3828 may be attached to a SNA network via IBM
Token-Ring using Remote PrintManager in the OS/400 environment.

The following describes requirements for the OS/400, OS/2, MVS, VSE, and VM
operating system environments.  Later programming releases and modification
levels are supported unless announced otherwise.

    o   MVS operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5665-275) Version 1
            Release 3.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5695-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VSE operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VM operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5664-198) Version 1
            Release 3.0 and its prerequisites.  Note:  PTF UL79441 is
            required.
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   OS/2 operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2) Version 1.10 (5871-AAA
            feature 2563, P/N 20G0732) and its prerequisites

Remote attachment of the IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer requires the
following IBM licensed programs.  Later releases and modification levels are
supported unless otherwise stated.

    o   MVS Operating Environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5665-275) Version 1 Release 3.0
            and Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) and their
            prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5695-040) Version 2 Release 1.0
            and Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) and their
            prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (5695-040 (Version 2 Release 1.0
            with APAR OY51438 and Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2)
            Version 1.10 (5871-AAA feature 2563, P/N 20G0732) and their
            prerequisites.
    o   VM Operating Environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0
            and Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) and their
            prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/Vm (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0
            with APAR PN23680 and Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2)
            Versions 1.10 (5871-AAA feature 2563, P/N 20G0732) and their
            prerequisites.
    o   VSE Operating Environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 1.0
            and Remote PrintManager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) and their
            prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 2.0
            and Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2) Version 1.10 (5871-AAA
            feature 2563, P/N 20G0732) and their prerequisites.

The following host software is required for the Token-Ring network:

    o   PSF/MVS, Version 2 or Version 1 Release 3.1 or subsequent
        releases, with the Group 3 attachment feature (MVS only)
    o   PSF/VM, Version 2 or subsequent releases (VM only)
    o   PSF/VSE, Version 2 or subsequent releases (VSE only)
    o   ACF/VTAM, Release 3.1.1 or subsequent releases (MVS and VM)
    o   ACF/VTAM, Release 3.2.0 or subsequent releases (VSE only)
    o   ACF/NCP, Version 4.2.0 or subsequent releases (MVS and VM with
        3720 or 3725)
    o   ACF/NCP, Version 5.1.0 or subsequent releases (MVS with 3745)
    o   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0 or subsequent releases (VM with 3745)
    o   ACF/NCP, Version 4.3.1 or subsequent releases (VSE with 3720 or
        3725)
    o   ACF/NCP, Version 5.2.0 or subsequent releases (VSE with 3745).
    o   OS/400 Version 2 Release 1 or subsequent versions or releases.

SPECIFY FEATURES The IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer is available in
the following configuration:

    o   120/208 volt AC, 60 Hz, 3 phase with neutral
    o   4.3 meters (14 feet), five-wire power attachment cord with
        Russellstoll (R) DS3516MP plug
    o   English Operator Console
    o   Agency approvals:  UL/CSA

MICR FONT TAPE Allows the selection of the tape format in which the MICR fonts
(E-13B, E-13B Outline and CMC 7) will be packaged.  A single font tape is
supplied at no charge with each IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer.  One
of the following must be specified:

    o   #5850  1600 BPI
    o   #5851  6250 BPI
    o   #5852  3480 Cartridge
    o   #5854  1/4 inch Tape Cartridge
    o   #5855 8mm Cassette
Maximum:  One.

TOOL KIT

    o   For the first IBM 3828 Advanced Function MICR Printer ordered,
        Specify #9950.
    o   If the ordered machine is the second or higher IBM 3828 Advanced
        Function MICR Printer to be installed, no additional tool kit is
        required.  If physical locations of machines in multiple machine
        installations requires a tool kit for the second (or higher)
        machine ordered, Specify #9950.
    o   May be ordered with the machine, or as a no charge MES.

POWER CORD

    o   1.8 m (6 feet), five-wire power attachment cord for Chicago only.
        Specify #9986.
    o   Receptacle:  Russellstoll (R) DS3516FR or, Connector:
        Russellstoll (R) DS3516FP

SPECIAL FEATURES The following features are available and can be ordered with
new machines or as an MES field upgrade:

THE TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#4020) Allows connection of the IBM 3828 Advanced
Function MICR Printer to a second channel interface.  The IBM 3828 can maintain
a connection with either of the channels as a single device.  The IBM 3828 can
be configured for either 'manual' (operator selected) or for 'dynamic' (on
demand from the host) switching.  In manual mode, the channels may be connected
to the same host or to two independent hosts, with one channel being enabled at
a time.  In dynamic mode, the two channels may be connected to the same host or
to two hosts that are tightly coupled.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation
Yes.

PATTERN STORAGE (#4030 - 2MB MEMORY) AND/OR (#4040 - 4MB MEMORY) May be ordered
in addition to the 2MB pattern storage shipped standard with each printer.  The
number of memory slots in the printer governs the maximum number of pattern
storage features that can be installed (up to four in any combination).  16MB
is the maximum amount of additional pattern storage. Total pattern storage
beyond 4MB is intended for, but not limited to, users of ideographic
(double-byte) fonts.  Maximum:  Four.  Field Installation: Yes. * Signifies a
trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. 3829 IBM ADVANCED FUNCTION PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM/Pennant* 3829 Advanced Function Printer is a channel attached,
non-impact, all-points-addressable printer that has a 14-inch light-emitting
diode (LED) printhead.  It uses an electrophotographic process on a variety of
paper sizes to print at speeds up to 92 impression per minute.  The print
density is 480 x 480 pels per square inch; the 240 x 240 pels source is doubled
and enhanced in the printer.

Standard features for the 3829 include:

    o   4MB pattern storage
    o   Advanced Function Image and Graphics
    o   Duplex printing from both paper supplies
    o   Skew detect
    o   Operator Alert Light

The IBM 3829 is a member of the advanced function printer family including the
3820 Page Printer, the 3825 Page Printer, the 3827 Page Printer, the 3828
Advanced Function MICR Printer, the 3835 Page Printer and the 3900 Advanced
Function Printer.  Advanced Function Printing software support is available for
the 3829 AF Printer under MVS, VM, VSE, OS/2, and AIX/6000.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Non-impact, Advanced Function Printer.
    o   High speed (up to 92 impressions per minute).
    o   Cut sheet paper with duplex (two-sided) printing capability from
        both the primary(lower) and secondary(upper) input paper
        supplies.
    o   14-inch 480 pel (240 x 2) light-emitting diode printhead with
        compensation control for uniform high quality printing.
    o   240 picture element (pel) addressability with improved character
        edge smoothing and fine line enhancements.
    o   Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG) support.
    o   High-performance printer control unit which has the ability to
        process more complex pages at rated speed than previous standard
        implementations.
    o   4MB pattern storage for image storage is standard. Up
         to 16MB available (12MB if Decompression Performance Enhancement
         feature (#4202) is installed).
    o   High capacity (recommended monthly usage is 500K to 1.5M
        impressions per month. With the capacity of up to 2M impressions
        per month).
    o   Operator Alert facility.
    o   Token-Ring Attachment RPM or PSF/2.
    o   Supports IPDS data stream.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer is a channel-attached, nonimpact,
all-points addressable printer that uses a 14-inch light-emitting diode (LED)
printhead and an eletrophotographic process to create printed output.  The
print density is 480 x 480 picture elements (pels) per square inch.

The console is used to display messages and operator instructions.  The
keyboard, is used to access various operator procedures and to enter
information.

The 3829 has two input paper supplies. The lower paper supply can hold
approximately 2500 sheets of 20 lb paper.  The upper paper supply can hold
approximately 1000 sheets of 20 lb paper.

The stacker holds up to 2500 sheets of 20 lb paper.  Printed jobs can be offset
from each other to allow for easy separation of jobs.

The Decompression Performance Enhancement Feature (DPE, #4202) supports printer
hardware image decompression of image object content architecture (IOCA) data
streams that were compressed using standard compression routines - CCITT Group
3 and 4 and IBM MMR.  The DPE capability improves the decompression performance
offered with the Advanced Function Image and Graphics Function by up to eight
times.

The use of DPE for decompressing IOCA images in the printer has printer
performance implications that depend upon the customer application environment
- the total number of image pages to be printed in a given period of time, the
ratio of image pages to text pages, the complexity of the images and text, the
compression algorithm and compression ratio, along with the amount of printing
for one given image printing application as related to the total print
requirement.  Additional Pattern Storage (#4030 or #4040) may be required for
best performance.

The operational characteristics of the 3829 are improved by the addition of the
Operator Attention Light; the customer may select a flashing or non-flashing
mode for indication that operator attention is required.  This Operator
Attention Light sits on the rear part of the operator console, providing 360
degree visibility from the highest point on the printer.

With the Advanced Function Image and Graphics function included as standard on
all 3829s and with the Decompression Performance Enhancement (#4202) feature,
the 3829 enables the printing of applications that produce the IBM Systems
Applications Architecture* IOCA image or GOCA graphics formats.  This gives the
customer the flexibility to choose between decompressing CCITT Group 3 or 4, or
IBM MMR compressed images in the processor or in the printer; the choice of
storing either compressed or decompressed images on the spool; and the
rasterizing of GOCA graphics orders in the processor or sending them to the
3829 for rasterizing. NOTE: The 3829 AFIG and DPE performance predictions will
be the same as the IBM 3827 Page Printer.  See the Large System FLASH #9242 for
the latest information.

Job turnaround may be reduced as a result of faster printer throughput with the
Advanced Function Image and Graphics function, or Decompression Performance
Enhancement Feature.

The current applications that create graphics require that these graphics be
rasterized in the processor before being sent to the printer.  With the use of
the Advanced Function Image and Graphics function, standard on all 3829s, GOCA
graphics orders may be sent directly to an IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer
and rasterized in the printer control unit, saving processor time.

The 3829 will meet the customers needs for high print quality in central and
distributed printing. Some distributed applications require the heavy duty,
high reliability of a high quality 480 pel cut sheet duplex printer.  The 3829
is positioned to meet their needs.

With the use of AFIG and DPE, the adherence to Systems Application
Architecture/SAA* and the added image performance, the customer is assisted in
improving application development.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer uses existing hardware and software
attachment interfaces.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  224cm (88 inches)
    o   Depth:  79cm (31 inches)
    o   Height:  127cm (50 inches)
    o   Height, work surface:  105cm (41 inches)
    o   Weight:  830kg (1,830 pounds)
    o   Power (operating):  9kVA
    o   Acoustics:  LWAd

WORLD TRADE 50HZ MACHINE

    o   Operating:  8.7 bels
    o   Idle:  7.4 bels

WORLD TRADE 60HZ MACHINE

    o   Operating:  8.7 bels
    o   Idle:  7.4 bels
Heat load dissipation:  14,500 BTU per hour (operating)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:  15.6 to 29.4C (60 to 80F)*
    o   Relative humidity:   20 to 80 percent*
    o   Wet Bulb temp:  22.8C (73F)
    o   Class 1 electrostatic discharge (ESD) environment
* Some combinations of high humidity and high temperature are not supported.
See the "IBM 3829 Advanced Function Introduction and Planning guide"
(GA32-0256) for specific operating environment information.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer will allow a customer to print unique
and varied documents that will present a high-quality company image to their
customer base. The 14-inch-wide printhead with a finely positioned set of
light-emitting diodes works with the printer control to enhance the very dark
print of the IBM 3829.  Each individual pel has been fine-tuned to ensure a
consistent uniform output across the full length of the printhead.  New print
enhancement algorithms smooth the edges of diagonal character lines (such as in
the N) to give the characters a pleasing, crisp appearance.  The new algorithms
automatically turn off while printing images that would lose detail if the
edges were smoothed.  With the 14-inch printhead, a pair of 7-inch documents
can be printed side-by-side on a single sheet of paper to help reduce customer
printing and mailing costs.

Edge smoothing is the smoothing of 1xn steps along the edges of print.

Fine fidelity protect refers to the protection of fine details in the print,
consisting primarily of avoiding the fill-in of single-pel white areas while
allowing the solid areas to be developed.  It also includes the extra exposure
of single-pel features.  This is of greatest benefit in the reproduction of
font serifs and the preservation of the details of narrow intersections of
lines.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer has two input drawers that can be
individually selected by host software and each supports single pass duplex
printing.  The output stacker supports offset stacking (jogging) on command
from host software.

    o   Input Paper Capacity
        -   Upper paper supply - 1,000 sheets of 20lbs bond
        -   Lower paper supply - 2,500 sheets of 20lbs bond
    o   Output Paper Capacity
        -   Output stacker - 2,500 sheets of 20lbs bond

The IBM 3829 supports a wide variety of commonly accepted cut sheet paper,
preprinted forms, security paper, prepunched paper, perforated paper, and
certain label stock.

The IBM supports the following paper sizes:

    203 x 254 mm        (8.0 x 10.0 in.)
    203 x 267 mm        (8.0 x 10.5 in.)  - Available on 60 Hz only
    210 x 297 mm        (8.3 x 11.7 in.)  - A4
    210 x 317.5 mm      (8.3 x 12.5 in.)  - Available on 50 Hz only
    215.9 x 279.4 mm    (8.5 x 11.0 in.)  - Letter
    215.9 x 330 mm      (8.5 x 13.0 in.)
    215.9 x 355.6 mm    (8.5 x 14.0 in.)  - Legal

The following paper weights are supported by the IBM 3829:

    o   Primary paper supply(lower drawer)
        -   Simplex - 16 to 52lb bond (60 to 120 g/sqm)
        -   Duplex - 20 to 28lb bond (75 to 105 g/sqm)
    o   Secondary paper supply(upper drawer)
        -   Simplex - 16 to 52lb bond (60 to 120 g/sqm)
        -   Simplex - 90 to 110lb bond (163 to 199 g/sqm)
        -   Duplex - 20 to 28lb bond (75 to 105 g/sqm)

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer has the monthly print capacity of 2
million but, it is recommended to keep the monthly volume between 500 thousand
to 1.5 million impressions per month.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer is managed by a high performance printer
control, that is functionally common to IBM's family of high speed printers and
helps ensure cross-printer compatibility within hardware limits. The 3829
contains 4MB of pattern storage to store font and image resources required to
print a page.  If required, up to 16MB of pattern storage is available to
accommodate large resource requirements and to provide more storage to help
maintain the 3829's print speed.

The IBM Advance Function Printer's primary operator interface is through the
operator display console and keyboard.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer takes approximately 19.0 square feet
(1.77 square meters) of floor space.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer my be attached directly to parallel
block multiplexer channel or to ESCON channels operating in ESCON converter
Model 1 mode through an IBM 9034 ESCON Converter Model 1, or to an SNA network
using the Remote PrintManager in the MVS, VM or VSE environment via the IBM
token ring or an SDLC line.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer will print documents for use in OCR and
bar code applications. The IBM 3829 Printer has been tested using OCR and bar
code fonts in the IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed Program
(5688-021).  The 3829 supports Postal Bar Codes (requires local certification
by USPS).  Refer to the "3829 Page Printer Paper Reference" (GA32-0257) for
more detailed OCR and bar code information.

The following OCR character sets are included:

    o   OCR-A character set according to ISO Standard 1073/1 amended
        with the "greater than" sign as defined by the German National
        Standard DIN 66008 part 6.
    o   OCR-B extended alphanumeric subset, option subset, and erase
        characters according to ISO Standard 1073/2.

The following bar codes are included in the program product:

    o   EAN 8 and EAN 13
    o   UPC A and UPC E
    o   Industrial 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5, 2 of 5 Interleaved
    o   3 of 9
    o   MSI Plessey
    o   Code 128

Because of the variability of OCR readers and Bar Code scanners, it is
advisable to evaluated the IBM output in the customer's application
environment.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer attachment to the IBM 9370 processors
via the IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender is not supported.  Attachment to
the IBM 4361 High Speed Channel via the 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender is
supported only in single tag interlock mode.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer supports a maximum channel length of 122
meters(400 feet) with only one control unit on the interface.  Refer to the IBM
Systems/370 General Information:  Installation Manual-Physical Planning
(GC33-7072).

The S/370 Channel Emulator/A adapter supports a Block Multiplexer Channel cable
length up to 61 meters (200 feet).

The S/370 Channel Emulator/A adapter (feature 2759) is available on selected
RISC System/6000 systems.

For parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a parallel block
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 4331, 4341, 4361, 4381, 308X, 3090,
ES/9370, or ES/9000 processor.

For attachment to ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode, an
IBM 9034 ESCON Converter (ESCC) Model 1 is required.  Up to eight parallel
channel I/O control units can be multi-dropped from one IBM ESCON Converter
Model 1.  An ESCON channel operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode must be
dedicated to each IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  The following systems support
ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode:

    o   ES/3090 180J and above except for Model 250
    o   ES/3090-9000T model
    o   ES/9000

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer may be attached to the remote (D01 or
D02 unit) end of an IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel Extender, which can be used to
extend the standard channel interface by up to 2000 meters (6,562 feet). The
following IBM processors are supported by 3044 Fiber Optics Channel Extender
attachment (block multiplexer channel):

    o    4361 (High Speed Channel attachment is supported only in single
         tag interlock mode), 4381 ,308X, and 3090.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer may also by attached to a Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) network via IBM Token-Ring or a Synchronous Data
Link Control (SDLC) line using Remote PrintManager 2.0 or PSF/2 1.10 in the
MVS, VSE, or VM environment.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer may be attached to selected RISC
System/6000 systems via the S/370 Channel Emulator/A adapter (feature 2759).

The 3829 is supported by the following operating system environments.  Later
programming versions, releases, and modification levels are supported unless
announced otherwise.

    o   MVS operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5695-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites with APAR #OY60184 when
            Hardware Configuration Dialog is used
    o   VM operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   VSE operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   Operating environments for Remote PrintManager (RPM) Version 2.0:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5695-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   OS/2 operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2) Version 1.10 (5871-AAA
            feature 2563, P/N 20G0732) and its prerequisites.
    o   IBM AIX/6000 operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/6000 (5765-140) Version 1 Release 1.0

SPECIFY FEATURES Unless indicated otherwise, the following specify and order
codes are only available at time of manufacture.  The 3829 Advanced Function
Printer is available in ten different Configurations (combinations of power,
operator console language, and power cord), shown below.  If the configuration
default is not desired, the marketing representative must ensure that required
safety approvals for the machine being ordered are consistent with country
requirements before ordering.  It is recommended that the plant of control be
contacted before overriding country defaults.

    o   Configuration 001             Specify #9951
        -   60 Hz, 208 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) with Russellstoll DS3516MPDP plug
        -   English Operator Console
    o   Configuration 002             Specify #9952
        -   50 Hz, 220/380 or 240/415 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
    o   Configuration 003             Specify #9953
        -   50 Hz, 220/380 or 240/415 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) without a connector
        -   German Operator Console
    o   Configuration 004             Specify #9954
        -   50 Hz, 220/380 or 240/415 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) without a connector
        -   French Operator Console
    o   Configuration 005             Specify #9955
        -   60 Hz, 200 volt 3 phase
        -   14 foot power cord (4 wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
    o   Configuration 006             Specify #9956
        -   50 Hz, 200 volt 3 phase
        -   14 foot power cord (4 wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
    o   Configuration 007             Specify #9957
        -   50 Hz, 220/380 or 240/415 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) without a connector
        -   Spanish Operator Console
    o   Configuration 008             Specify #9958
        -   60 Hz, 208 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) with Russellstoll DS3516MPDP plug
        -   French Operator Console
    o   Configuration 009             Specify #9959
        -   60 Hz, 208 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) without a connector
        -   English Operator Console
    o   Configuration 010             Specify #9960
        -   60 Hz, 208 volt 3 phase-neutral
        -   14 foot power cord (5 wire) without a connector
        -   Spanish Operator Console
All Standards will be provided at the current level by GA.

Specify codes will not be required when ordering the IBM 3829 Advanced Function
Printer.  The automatic default based on the 3-digit country code will order
Configuration 001 (60Hz 208 AC 3 Phase, English Console, and power cord
described below).  Exceptions to configuration content should be submitted as
RPQs.  If the configuration default is not desired, the Pennant Systems
printing specialist or the IBM marketing representative must ensure that
required safety approvals for the machine being ordered are consistent with
country requirements before ordering.  It is recommended that the plant of
control be contacted before overriding country defaults.

Power Cord:

    o   4.3 m (14 feet), five-wire power attachment cord with
        Russellstoll DS3516MP plug.
    o   1.8 m (6 feet), five-wire power attachment cord for Chicago.
        Specify 9986.
Receptacle: Russellstoll DS3516FR or Connector: Russellstoll DS3516MPDP.

The IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer will be shipped with English as console
language (Configuration 001).  Labels and ship-group customer publications will
be in English.

Tool Kit:

    o   For first IBM 3829 Advanced Function Printer ordered, Specify
        #9950.
    o   If unit ordered is second or higher IBM 3829 Advanced Function
        Printer to be installed, no additional tool kit is required.  If
        physical locations of machines in multiple machine installations
        requires a tool kit for the second (or higher) machine ordered,
        specify #9950.
    o   May be ordered with the machine, or as an MES.

SPECIAL FEATURES The following features are available and can be ordered with
new machines or as MES field upgrades:

    o   The Two Channel Switch feature - #4020
        This feature allows connection of the 3829 to a second channel
        interface. The 3829 can maintain a connection with either of the
        channels as a single device.  The 3829 can be configured for
        either 'manual' (operator selected) or for 'dynamic' (on demand
        from the host) switching.  In manual mode, the channels may be
        connected to the same host or to two independent hosts, with one
        channel being enabled at a time.  In dynamic mode, the two
        channels may be connected to the same host or to two hosts that
        are tightly coupled.  Maximum:  One.  Field installation:  Yes.
    o   Pattern Storage features - #4030 (2MB memory) #4040 (4MB memory)
        May be ordered in addition to the 4MB memory shipped standard
        with each printer.  The number of memory slots in the printer (4)
        governs the maximum pattern storage features that can be
        installed (up to four in any combination (three, if feature 4202
        is installed)).  16 MBytes is the maximum amount of additional
        pattern storage (12MBytes if feature 4202 is installed). Total
        pattern storage beyond 4MBytes is intended for, but not limited
        to, users of ideographic (double-byte) fonts.  Maximum:  Four.
        Field installation:  Yes.
    o   The Decompression Performance Enhancement feature - #4202
        Improves decompression of CCITT Group3/Group4 or IBM MMR IOCA
        images by up to eight times over the Advanced Function Image
        and Graphics function. Maximum:  One.  Field installation: Yes.
    o   Relocation/Discontinuance Kit - #4050
        This feature must be used to prepare the printer for transport
        when original packaging is not available.  Maximum:  One.  Field
        installation: MES only.

The following RPQ is available and can be ordered with new machines or as MES
field upgrades:

    o   The 3829 Post Processing Interface - #8A5053
        This RPQ provides an electro-mechanical interface from the IBM
        3829 Advanced Function Printer that supports direct attachment
        of a wide variety of OEM post processing equipment such as:
        cutters, folders, stuffers, etc. with this RPQ installed, a
        continuous output operation can be established to automate one
        more part of the IBM print system.  This RPQ supports English
        only.  Maximum:  One.  Field installation.
    o   The 3829 Post Processing Interface world trade - 8B4310
        This RPQ provides an electro-mechanical interface from the IBM
        3829 Advanced Function Printer that supports direct attachment
        of a wide variety of OEM post processing equipment such as:
        cutters, folders, stuffers, etc. with this RPQ installed, a
        continuous output operation can be established to automate one
        more part of the IBM print system.  This RPQ supports three
        languages:  French, German, and Spanish.  Maximum: One.
        Field installation.
    o   The Token-Ring Attachment for EMEA - #8B3900
        This RPQ provides a pre-packaged, pre-loaded PS/2 configuration
        that supports remote connection via a Token-Ring LAN to System/
        370* or System/390* processors.
* Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. 3835 ADVANCE FUNCTION PRINTER MODEL 002 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM/Pennant Systems* Enhanced 3835 Page Printer Model 2 provides a new
level of performance and print quality as compared to the existing 3835 Model
1.  Beyond increasing the speed from 88 to 91 impressions per minute, the
Enhanced Model 2 provides, as standard, the control unit functions of the
Enhanced 3900 Page Printer.  These include 4 megabytes (4MB) of pattern
storage, increased control unit processing speed, the enhanced operator alert
facility, fuser preheat platen temperature control function, and the Advanced
Function Image and Graphics Feature.  The Enhanced Model 2 also provides
improved print quality by providing greater optical density (darker text and
greater uniformity of solid area fill) and providing for print quality
enhancement (edge smoothing, fine details, and boldness control).

The print quality enhancement hardware will not be available at the general
availability of the 3835-002.  All 3835-002s shipped prior to the general
availability of the print quality enhancement hardware will be automatically
scheduled for the addition of this hardware after general availability.

An installed 3835 Model 1 may be upgraded to the enhanced 3835 Model 2.  The
upgrade will be available June 30, 1993 thru June 30, 1994.  The model upgrade
includes replacement of the control unit and changes to the print engine.  Any
features or RPQs installed on the 3835 should be reviewed with a Pennant
Systems printing specialist to verify that the upgraded 3835 Model 2 retains
the same capabilities as the 3835.

HIGHLIGHTS Control Unit Function:

    o   3900 Control Unit compatibility (Function or Features)
        -   Increased control unit performance
        -   Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG)
        -   Print-to-perforation capability with roll-feed input
        -   Support for print lengths up to 17 inches
        -   4MB of pattern storage
        -   An enhanced operator alert facility.
        -   Decompression Performance Enhancement (DPE) (Feature)
        -   Pre/Post Processing Interface (Feature)
        -   Advanced Function Post-Processing Interface (Feature)
    o   Print quality enhancement
    o   A stacker-end control panel for improved operational
        characteristics
        -   STOP
        -   READY
        -   NPRO (Nonprocess Run Out)
        -   ONE PAGE (page advance)
        -   Preheat temperature control.

Print Engine Function:

    o   New dual roll developer for improved optical density with
        greater uniformity on solid area fill ( New toner and
        developer).
    o   A preheat platen temperature control to allow the user
        flexibility in paper stock choices.

The IBM 3835-002 Advanced Function Printer offers a wider range of applications
with the improved optical density and greater uniformity of solid area fill,
and through the new capabilities of print-to-perforation, 17-inch print length
support, and advanced function post-processing.

With the 3900-compatible Pre/post-processing Interface features available on
the 3835-002, #4710 for normal pre/post-processing and #4720 for advanced
function post-processing (for example, additional printing with
non-electrophotographic technology, magnetic ink character recognition (MICR)
impact printing, selectable color printing, and so on), the customer can move
into new application arenas.  (Note: If MICR fonts are required, please refer
to the "Specify Features" section of the Sales Manual.)

The Decompression Performance Enhancement Feature (DPE, #4202) supports printer
hardware image decompression of Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) data
streams that were compressed using standard compression routines - CCITT Group
3 and 4 and IBM MMR.  The DPE capability improves the decompression performance
offered with the Advanced Function Image and Graphics Function by up to 8
times.

The use of DPE for decompressing IOCA images in the printer has printer
performance implications that depend upon the customer application environment
- the total number of image pages to be printed in a given period of time, the
ratio of image pages to text pages, the complexity of the images and text, the
compression algorithm and compression ratio, along with the amount of printing
for one given image printing application as related to the total print
requirement.  Additional Pattern Storage (#4030 or #4040) may be required for
best performance.

The operational characteristics of the 3835-002 are improved by the addition of
the enhanced Operator Alert, which includes an audible alarm with volume
control, a flashing attention light located on top of a pedestal, approximately
8 inches above the top of the printer, and a jack/plug for remote attachment of
operator attention equipment (using customer-supplied equipment and power).

With the Advanced Function Image and Graphics function included as standard on
all 3835-002s and with the Decompression Performance Enhancement (#4202)
feature, the 3835-002 enables the printing of applications that produce the IBM
Systems Applications Architecture* IOCA image or GOCA graphics formats. This
gives the customer the flexibility to choose between decompressing CCITT Group
3 or 4, IBM MMR or IBM ABIC compressed images in the processor or in the
printer; the choice of storing either compressed or decompressed images on the
spool; and the rasterizing of GOCA graphics orders in the processor or sending
them to the 3835-002 for rasterizing.

The following table gives approximate performance information. Data given is
for page performance, not APPLICATION performance.  If an application is
composed of pages that follow similar characteristics, application performance
closely matches page performance.  However, if an application is composed of a
mix of pages, application performance may not resemble page performance at all.
For a mixed-page application, performance numbers for the various types of
pages in the mix cannot be "averaged" together because of complex buffering
schemes used to maximize performance. In general, if text pages are mixed with
image or graphics pages, APPLICATION performance can be significantly better
than the image or graphic PAGE performance.

                         Throughput (pages/minute) (1) (2) (3)
                          ------ 3835 -------   -- 3835 002 --
                                        AFIG+
    Page Type            Base    AFIG   DPE      BASE    DPE
    ----------------------------------------------------------
    SIMPLE TEXT:
      14K chars/page      88      88      88       91      91
      32K                 88      88      88       91      91
    COMPLEX TEXT:
      with 1 table        88      88      88       91      91
      with 6 tables       88      88      88       91      91
      with large image    88      88      88       91      91
    IM IMAGE:
      24 sqin/page        88      88      88       91      91
      50                  88      88      88       91      91
      87                  54      79      79       85      85
    IOCA IMAGE:  CR = Compression Ratio
      16 sqin CR=16      n/s      88      88       91      91
              CR= 4      n/s      84      88       87      91
      32 sqin CR=16      n/s      88      88       91      91
              CR= 4      n/s      43      88       44      91
    GOCA GRAPHICS:
      2000 lines/page    n/s      72      72       74      74
      4000               n/s      51      51       53      53
      32 sqin area       n/s      88      88       91      91
      64 fill/page       n/s      62      62       63      63
    IOCA CCITT G4 COMPRESSED IMAGES (FULL 8.5" x 11" PAGES):
      CR  4.6            n/s      11      88       10      91
      CR 10.4            n/s      20      88       20      91
      CR 24.1            n/s      35      88       36      91
      CR 49.7            n/s      51      88       52      91
    CHECK IMAGE PRINTING APPLICATIONS (10 check images/page
    uncompressed):
      2 coded/3 image     88     ---     ---       91      91
      Image only          81     ---     ---       91      91
    CHECK IMAGE PRINTING APPLICATIONS (10 check images/page in CCITT
    G4):
      2 coded/1 image    n/s      88      88      ---      91
      2       2          n/s      69      88      ---      91
      2       3          n/s      59      88      ---      91
     (1)  Most of this data was published in Washington Systems Center
          (WSC) Flash 9242.  An updated WSC Flash will be published at
          a later date.
     (2)  For detail information on AS/400 printing performance please
          see the "IBM AS/400 Performance Capabilities Reference"
          (ZC41-8166).
     (3)  3835-002 performance analysis done with 16 MB of Pattern
     Storage n/s  Not supported.
     ---  Not  currently available.

Job turnaround may be reduced as a result of faster printer throughput with the
use of the new 3900 control unit capability, Advanced Function Image and
Graphics function, or Decompression Performance Enhancement Feature.

With the improved pre/post-processing interfaces available on the IBM 3835-002
Advanced Function Printer, the customer may achieve greater throughput and
reliability than is achievable with normal box paper input.

The current applications that create graphics require that these graphics be
rasterized in the processor before being sent to the printer.  With the use of
the Advance Function Image and Graphics function, standard on all 3835-002s,
GOCA graphics orders may be sent directly to an IBM 3835-002 Advanced Function
Printer and rasterized in the printer control unit, saving processor time.

By enabling additional applications and improving performance, the IBM 3835-002
Advanced Function Printer, will allow the customer to expand his application
base.

With the use of AFIG and DPE, the adherence to Systems Application Architecture
(SAA*) and the added image performance, the customer is assisted in improving
application development.

The ability to order an upgrade MES for current 3835s protects the customer's
investment in the 3835.

The 3835-002 is a high-speed, continuous form, page printer that operates at
speeds up to 91 impressions per minute (IPM).  The 3835-002 is supported by
IBM's Advanced Function Printing* (AFP*) software.

The 3835-002 has an addressability of 240 x 240 pels or dots per inch (DPI).
The print darkness will exceed that of the IBM 3800, particularly in dark area
fill.  Print contrast controls, similar to those on the IBM 3900, allow the
operator to adjust print darkness.

The IBM 3835-002 Advanced Function Printer print quality enhancement consists
of three items:  edge smoothing, fine fidelity protect, and boldness control.

Edge smoothing is the smoothing of 1xn steps along the edges of print, similar
to that done on the IBM 3825 and 3828 Advanced Function Printers.

Fine fidelity protect refers to the protection of fine details in the print,
consisting primarily of avoiding the fill-in of single-pel white areas while
allowing the solid areas to be developed.  It also includes the extra exposure
of single-pel features.  This is of greatest benefit in the reproduction of
font serifs and the preservation of the details of narrow intersections of
lines.

Boldness control allows control over the print boldness that is independent of
the settings of the machine parameters so that those parameters can be adjusted
to compensate for other changing conditions within a printer without affecting
the boldness quality which the user desires.  This allows for bolder-looking
print without using extra toner and for darker solid areas without filling in
the fine white details.

The 3835-002 has higher print density (minimum of 1.2 optical density at C5)
than the 3835.  The solid areas are also darker and more uniform than previous
continuous form printers.

The 3835-002 is capable of printing up to 1.3 million feet of paper per month.

PAPER HANDLING

    o   Input fanfold
        The 3835-002 will have a paper supply capacity of 16 inches
        (406 mm) of fanfold paper.
    o   Output fanfold
        The 3835-002 will have a pendulum type of stacker with a maximum
        paper capacity of up to 13 inches (330 mm) in height.  The actual
        height may be operator adjusted to limit the weight of the output
        stack of paper.  The stacker can only stack paper with lengths
        between 3 and 14 inches (76 and 356 mm).  The stacker has a
        motor-driven swing arm which forces the paper to fold in the
        proper direction.  Synchronization with the fold in the paper is
        set up by a switch accessible from the front of the printer. This
        mechanism is used to improve stacking performance for some kinds
        of papers that have inner perforations, holes, and label forms,
        and so on. The ability to attach pre- and post-processing
        equipment (#4710 and #4720) allows additional input and output
        capabilities.

PAPER SIZES

    o   Width:
        6.5 to 16 inches(165 to 406 mm) (continuously variable).  The
        maximum print width is 15 inches (381 mm).
    o   Length:
        3 to 14 inches (76 to 356 mm) (in 1/3 and 1/2 inch increments)
        are supported by the standard stacker.  Additionally, a forms
        length of 17 inches (431.8 mm) may be printed but cannot be
        stacked with the standard stacker.  Feature #4710 must be
        installed to disable the standard stacker when printing this
        form length.  Suitable post-processing equipment is recommended
        for the latter form length.
NOTE: Lengths less than 7 inches (178 mm) are folded in multiples by the forms
supplier and by the stacker.  (For example, forms 3.5 inches in length may be
folded every 7 inches.)

Paper weights between 16 and 42 pound (60 and 160 g/m2) bond are supported.

The 3835-002 can print on normal fanfold paper, roll-feed paper, preprinted
forms, and some label stock.

It should run a broader range of labels than the IBM 3800 printer due to the
3835's teflon coated, silicon wicked, hot roll fuser.  The wicking improves the
release properties of the hot roll and helps to prevent detaching of labels on
to the hot roll.  IBM advises that customers evaluate label stock on the 3835
prior to committing to large label orders.

Certain applications, for example label printing, may cause excessive wear or
premature failure of some components of the 3835-002 and, in these situations,
a customer  with maintenance provided under the IBM Customer Agreement and the
Attachment for Rental of IBM Machines may be liable for increased maintenance
charges.

The 3835-002 can be used to print optical character recognition (OCR) and bar
code documents.  The 3835-002 has been tested using OCR A, OCR B, and bar code
fonts of the IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed Program
(5688-021).  The OCR and bar code produced by the 3835-002 is intended to meet
OCR and bar code printing standards.  However, because of the variability of
OCR readers and bar code scanners, IBM advises that customers evaluate the
3835-002's OCR and bar code output in their application environment.  The
3835-002 supports Postal Bar Codes (requires local certification by USPS).
Refer to the "3835-002 Forms Design Reference" (GA32-0247) for more detailed
OCR and bar code information.

COMMON CONTROL UNIT (CCU) FUNCTIONS

    Character Generator:  APA
    Font Downloading:  Yes
    Permanent Font Storage:  Yes - only one
    User Interface:  Control Panel Display, Alphanumeric
    Electronic Forms:  Yes (limited by memory)
    Image Print:  Yes (limited by memory)

Printer performance at rated speed is 91 pages per minute (13 inches or 0.330
meters per second).

The 3835-002 is able to print both fixed and proportional spaced fonts from 4
to 72 points.  Customers should verify the legibility of 4-point font sets in
their application.  Only one copy of a font is required for all rotations in
the printer.  The font is oriented for printing at print time.

IBM provides one resident font to satisfy minimal data processing requirements.

The 3835-002 and all Group 3 printers use bounded box fonts.  The 3800 uses
unbounded box fonts.  The two formats are not compatible so both font libraries
must be maintained if both types of printers are in use (except in VM where
only bounded box font libraries are required:  PSF/VM converts bounded box
fonts to unbounded box fonts for 3800 printing).  Any customized 3800 fonts
must be reformatted into a bounded box font for use on a 3835. Reformatting may
be done by service vendors or the customer using an AFP utility such as PMF or
FLSF.  PMF can be used to build bounded box fonts directly from source fonts.
FLSF can be used to design characters from scratch, and build them into bounded
box fonts.

Some fonts that were designed to take advantage of 3800 print characteristics
may appear to have lighter and darker characters when printed on the 3835-002
printer, especially when characters are clustered as in header and trailer page
designs.  A set of fonts, GL10, GL12, and GL15, is available with PSF and
provides thinner characters equivalent to those in fonts GT10, GT12, and GT15.
Use the GL fonts in situations such as header and trailer page printing.

The 3835-002 will utilize the Common Control Unit which has control storage,
pattern storage, and page buffer storage. Control Storage

    o   Control storage is standard on the Enhanced 3835 at 1.25 MB.

Page Buffer Storage

    o   Page buffer storage is standard on the 3835 at 2MB.

Pattern Storage

    o   The 3835-002 has 4MB standard pattern storage. The customer may
        purchase additional 2MB or 4MB increments up to a maximum of
        16MB.

The 3835-002 is designed for efficient ease of operation, service, and
installation.  Accepted human factors principles have been applied specifically
to frequent access areas such as paper threading and the operator panel.

The 3835-002 operates in a class A1 environment and will meet or exceed all US,
AP, Canada, IBM LA, and EMEA regulations as they apply to "environmental
impact" for business machines of this type.

    Temperature:  15.6 to 29.4C (60 to 85F)
    Relative Humidity:  20 to 80 percent
    Wet Bulb:  23C (73F)

The acoustic levels for the 3835-002 measured running with 20 pound (75 gm/m2)
paper are:

                         Sound Power
                     60 Hz         50 Hz
    Idle             7.3 bels      7.1 bels
    Operating        8.1 bels      7.9 bels
                     Sound Pressure*
                     60 Hz        50 Hz
    Idle             54 dB        52 dB
    Operating        63 dB        59 dB
    * At one meter (bystander position)

ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMENT INFORMATION

    o   Volatile organic compounds emitted from the 3835-002 printer pose
        no health concern either singularly or collectively at various
        toner coverages tested.
    o   The 3835-002 toner and developer mix does not present an
        environmental problem (or environmental problems), provided the
        same care is taken with them as with other electrophotographic
        materials of a similar nature.
    o   The toner collected in the toner waste bottle and fines filter
        pose no health and environmental problems, provided the same
        care is taken with them as with other similar
        electrophotographic materials.
    o   The selenium carryout with used brushes poses no disposal
        problems as per the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
        guidelines.  The used brushes can be disposed of in the normal
        trash to be disposed in the local landfill.
    o   The photoconductor fleece cloth poses no disposal problems as
        per the EPA guidelines.
    o   The photoconductor drum data obtained to date reveals no concerns
        to the environment. A drum return plan is being developed to
        assure all the used drums are returned to the manufacturer.
    o   The dermal and hypersensitivity tests with the toner reveal no
        health concerns. These studies were conducted utilizing (or
        implementing) the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) good
        laboratory practices regulations.

The 3835-002 is designed to print to the perforation at rated speed.  As with
other print-to-perforation printers, print quality degradation will occur near
the perforation with fanfold paper which 'tents' (that is retains a 'memory' of
the fold).  There will be no degradation at distances from the perforation of
1/3 inch (8.5 mm) for character data, OCR, or bar codes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
for solid area fill, logos, or images.  With a roll-feed paper input no change
in print quality should be apparent within 2mm of the perforation.

The 3835-002 occupies approximately 18.4 square feet (1.7 square meters) of
floor space.

The 3835-002's display and operator input functions are provided via the main
operator panel, similar to the 3835.  The main operator panel is the primary
control panel utilized by both operator and IBM customer engineer.

The 3835-002 is also provided with a stacker-end operator panel which has
controls that duplicate some of the function provided on the main operator
panel, for operator convenience.  It also provides control for the new,
standard, preheat temperature control.

The controls duplicated on the stacker-end control panel from the main operator
control panel are STOP, READY, NPRO, and ONE PAGE and the functions of each are
identical to the function provided by these controls on the main operator
control panel.

The preheat temperature control portion of the stacker-end operator panel
includes a selector knob for operator selection of the desired preheat
temperature for optimum toner adhesion.  An indicator is provided to show
operation at normal preheat temperature.  A second indicator is provided to
show operation at any of the three preheat temperatures other than normal. Two
settings are below and one setting is above the normal preheat temperature
setting.

    o   The display:
        -   Is vacuum fluorescent
        -   Displays 32 alphanumeric, 5 x 12 matrix characters
        -   Displays green light-emitting diode (LED) indicators for
            channel enable functions.
    o   Input touch panel with plastic overlays consists of:
        -   A set of 12 control and function keys
        -   A hex keypad to input information, 17 hex keys ("0" through
            "F" and "." (decimal point)).
        -   An audio alarm to provide input key activation
            acknowledgement 'feedback' and an 'attention' signal to the
            operator.
    o   The stacker-end operator panel consists of:
        -   A set of four control and function keys
        -   A temperature selection knob for preheat control
        -   Two indicators for preheat temperature settings.
    o   In addition, an operator alert facility includes an audible alarm
        with volume control, a flashing light located on top of a
        pedestal, approximately 8 inches (200mm) above the top of the
        printer, and a jack/plug for remote attachment of operator
        attention equipment (using customer-supplied power).

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

                Printer                  Control Unit
    Depth         840 mm (33.1 inches)     840 mm (33.1 inches)
    Height      1,413 mm (55.6 inches)   1,413 mm (55.6 inches)
    Length      1,524 mm (60 inches)       510 mm (20 inches)
    Weight        700 kg (1,540 lb)        148 kg (326 lb)
    Power:    4.9 kVA (60 Hz Printer and Control Unit-Operating w/20 lb
              forms)
              6.2 kVA (60 Hz Printer and Control Unit-Operating w/42 lb
              forms)
              6.0 kVA (50 Hz;Printer and Control Unit-Operating w/42 lb
              forms)
    Heat
    Dissipation: 15.4 kBTU/Hr (60 Hz Printer and Control Unit-Operating
                 20 lb)
                 20.5 kBTU/Hr (60 Hz Printer and Control Unit-Operating
                 42 lb)
                 19.5 kBTU/Hr (50 Hz Printer and Control Unit-Operating
                 42 lb)

The 3835-002 may be used as a direct output device (direct-printing) when
attached to an MVS host system.  When the 3835-002 is used in direct-printing
mode, Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) provides exclusive use of the
printer for a particular application.  The user with direct control of the
3835-002 cannot take advantage of system-assisted restart, data set
checkpointing, multiple data set processing, or use of operator commands
available through JES to control the printer.

Additional items should be considered when a user attaches the 3835-002
directly to his program.  Please consult the "IBM 3835-002 Advanced Function
Printer Product Description Guide" (GA32-0249) or the "PSF System Programmers
Guide" for the appropriate software level for additional information concerning
using the 3835-002 for direct-printing applications.

The 3835-002 supports a maximum cable length of 122meters (400 ft) if it is the
only control unit on the interface.  For each additional control unit (up to a
maximum of eight control units) this measurement is reduced 4.6m (15 ft).
Further information regarding cable limitations is in the "IBM System/370
General Information - Installation -- Physical Planning" manual (GC22-7072).

For parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a parallel block
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 4361, 4381, 3090*, ES/9370*, or
ES/9000* processor.  A High Speed Printer Adapter is required on the Micro
Channel* 370 (9371).

For attachment to ESCON* channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode, an
IBM 9034 ESCON Converter (ESCC) Model 1 is required.  Up to eight parallel
channel I/O control units can be multi-dropped from one IBM ESCON Converter
Model 1.  An ESCON channel operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode must be
dedicated to each IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  The following systems support
ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode:

    o   ES/3090* 180J and above except for Model 250
    o   ES/3090-9000T models
    o   ES/9000.

The IBM 3835-002 Advanced Function Printer may also be attached to a Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) network via IBM Token-Ring using Remote Print
Manager 2.0 in the MVS, VSE, VM, or OS/400* environment.  For printing
performance information in the AS/400* environment, please see the "IBM AS/400
Performance Capabilities Reference" (ZC41-8166).

The 3835-002 is supported by the following operating system environments. Later
programming versions, releases and modification levels are supported unless
announced otherwise.

    o   MVS operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5665-275) Version 1
            Release 3.0 and its prerequisites with the Group 3 attachment
            feature.  Does not support the Set Medium Modification (SMM)
            subset of the Advanced Function Post-processing feature.
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5695-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.  Support for the SMM
            subset of the Advanced Function Post-processing feature
            requires APAR OY56083.
    o   VM operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.  Does not support the SMM
            subset of the Advanced Function Post-processing feature.
    o   VSE operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.  Does not support the SMM
            subset of the Advanced Function Post-processing feature.
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 2 and its prerequisites.  Support for the SMM subset
            of the Advanced Function Post-processing feature requires
            APAR DY42336 available June, 1993.
    o   Operating environments for RPM Version 2.0: (Does not support
        the SMM subset of the Advanced Function Post-processing
        feature.)
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5665-275) Version 1
            Release 3.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VM (PSF/VM) (5684-141) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
        -   Print Services Facility/VSE (PSF/VSE) (5686-040) Version 2
            Release 1.0 and its prerequisites.
    o   OS/2 operating environment:
        -   Print Services Facility/2 (PSF/2) Version 1.10 (5871-AAA
            Feature #2563, P/N 20G0732) and its prerequisites.  Does not
            support the SMM subset of the Advanced Function Post-
            processing feature.

SPECIFY FEATURES POWER #9923 208/220/230/240 volt 60 Hz.

POWER CORD #9986 6 Foot (1.8M) four-wire power attachment cord for Chicago.

TOOL KIT #9950 Tool kit

    o   For the first 3835, Specify #9950.
    o   If unit ordered is the second or higher 3835-002 to be installed,
        no additional tool kit is required.  If physical locations of
        machines in multiple machine installations requires a tool kit
        for the second (or higher) machine ordered, Specify #9950.
    o   May be ordered with the machine, or as a no cost MES at any
        time.

MICR FONT TAPES

    o   #5850  1600 BPI Tape
    o   #5851  6250 BPI Tape
    o   #5852  3480 Tape Cartridge
    o   #5854  1/4-inch Tape Cartridge

TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#4020) This feature allows connection of the 3835-002 to a
second channel interface. The 3835-002 can maintain a connection with either of
the channels as a single device.  The 3835-002 can be configured for either
'manual' (operator selected) or for 'dynamic' (on demand from the host)
switching.  In manual mode, the channels may be connected to the same host or
to two independent hosts, with one channel being enabled at a time.  In dynamic
mode, the two channels may be connected to the same host or to two hosts that
are tightly coupled.

PATTERN STORAGE (#4060 - 16MB MEMORY) (#4030 - 2MB MEMORY) (#4040 - 4MB MEMORY)
These features may be ordered in addition to the 4MB memory shipped standard
with each printer.  The number of available memory slots in the printer (three)
governs the maximum pattern storage, for example, three features #4040 provide
the maximum of 16MB of pattern storage or an initial order of #4060 for the
maximum of 16MB of pattern storage.

DECOMPRESSION PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT (#4202) Improves decompression of CCITT
Group3/Group4 or IBM MMR IOCA images by up to eight times over the Advanced
Function Image and Graphics function.

PRE/POST-PROCESSING INTERFACE (#4710) Provides the electrical interface for
attachment of OEM pre- and post-processing equipment to the IBM 3835-002
Advanced Function Printer similar to RPQ 8A5019 for the IBM 3800 and Feature
4710 on the IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer.  This feature provides control
of add-on pre/post processing devices (such as continuous forms stackers,
envelope inserting equipment, roll-feed equipment, among others).
Additionally, this feature disables the standard stacker functions.  This
feature includes the function of RPQ #8A5022 and cannot be installed with this
RPQ.

When moving pre/post-processing equipment from a 3835 to a 3835-002, changes to
the pre/post-processing equipment interface will be required.  Please contact
the pre/post-processing vendor for discussion on the requirements necessary to
complete the migration.

Suitable vendor post-processing equipment is required when printing forms
longer than 14 inches (355 mm) and less than 17 inches (431 mm) in length. Note
that this feature must be installed to disable the standard stacker for these
form lengths.

ADVANCED FUNCTION POST-PROCESSING INTERFACE (#4720) Provides the electrical
interface for attachment of OEM post-processing equipment to the IBM 3835-002
Advanced Function Printer similar to RPQ 8B4400 for the 3835-001.  This feature
provides architected software and communications control of add-on
post-processing devices such as printers using non-electrophotographic
technology, MICR impact printers, or selectable color printers.

This feature may co-reside with one of feature #4710 or RPQ 8B3901. Note.If
MICR fonts are desired, please refer to the "Specify Features" section in the
Sales Manual.) * Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. 8A5024 SPLICING STATION STANDARD RPQ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

THIS RPQ ADDS THE PHYSICAL HARDWARE AND PRINTER CONTROL CODE TO CAUSE THE IBM
3835 PAGE PRINTER TO STOP ON THE END OF FORMS INDICATOR WITH THE PAPER"S
TRAILING EDGE POSITIONED CONVENIENT TO THE SPLICING STATION.  THE ACTUAL
SPLICING STATION PROVIDES PAPER HOLD DOWN AND ALIGNMENT CAPABILITY TO ASSIST
THE OPERATOR WITH THE SPLICING/TAPING OPERATION.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. 8A5053 3827/3828 POST PROC INTF STANDARD RPQ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

THIS RPQ PROVIDES AN ELECTRO-MECHANICAL INTERFACE FROM THE IBM 3827 PAGE
PRINTER, THE IBM 3829 ADVANCED FUNCTION PRINTER OR THE IBM 3828 ADVANCED
FUNCTION MICR PRINTER THAT SUPPORTS DIRECT ATTACHMENT OF A WIDE VARIETY OF OEM
POST PROCESSING EQUIPMENT SUCH AS; CUTTERS, FOLDERS, STUFFERS, ETC.. WITH THIS
RPQ INSTALLED A INSTALLED, A CONTINUOUS OUTPUT OPERATION CAN BE ESTABLISHED TO
AUTO- MATE ONE MORE PART OF THE IBM PRINT SYSTEM.

SPECIFICALLY, THIS RPQ MODIFIES THE PAPER PATH AT THE EXIT SLOT TO ALLOW THE
PRINTED PAPER TO EXIT IN A HORIZONTAL PLANE APPROXIMATELY 43 1/2 INCHES ABOVE
FINISHED FLOOR. A SIMPLE STANDARDIZED ELECTRICAL INTERFACE IS INCLUDED TO ALLOW
A POST PROCESSING MACHINE OR CONTROL CONSOLE TO BE ATTACHED UP TO 100 FEET FROM
THE IBM PRINTER.  IN AD- DITION TO THE NORMAL START/STOP CONTROLS THE RPQ
IMPLEMENTS FUNCTION- AL COMMUNICATION AS WELL.

THE POST PROCESSOR ACTION (VS. THE NORMAL PRINTER STACKING MODE OF OPERATION)
IS INITIATED/TERMINATED THROUGH OPERATOR COMMANDS USING THE PRINTER CONSOLE.
THE CUSTOMER ENGINEER CAN SPECIFY WHICH SIDE OF THE PAPER IS TO BE UP OR DOWN
AS THE PAPER EXITS THE IBM PRINTER. THE PAPER EXITS IN A PORTRAIT MODE AS
VIEWED FROM THE FRONT OF THE PRINTER.

UP TO A TWO SECOND DELAY (FOUR SHEETS OF PAPER) BETWEEN SELECTED OUTPUT SHEETS
CAN BE SET BY THE CUSTOMER ENGINEER.

LIMITATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS: ADEQUATE SPACE, POWER, AND SERVICE AREA TO HANDLE
ADDITIONAL HARDWARE REQUIRED BY THE POST PROCESSING VENDOR.

THE POST PROCESSING MACHINES MUST BE ABLE TO SUPPORT THE IBM PAPER EXIT SPEED
OF APPROXIMATELY 52 1/2 INCHES PER SECOND.

AVAILABLE ONLY IN THE COUNTRIES WHERE THE PRINTER IS AVAILABLE FOR SALE.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. 3900 IBM ADVANCED FUNCTION PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The new IBM Enhanced 3900 builds upon the original IBM 3900 Advanced Function
Printer, by incorporating new features into the standard machine with no
increase in price.  The new standard features in the Enhanced IBM 3900 Advanced
Function Printer are:

    o   New memory technology providing up to 20 percent improvement in
        performance
    o   Four megabytes (MB) of standard pattern storage (twice that
        provided in the current 3900)
    o   A preheat platen temperature control to allow the user more
        flexibility in paper stock choices
    o   An enhanced operator alert facility.

HIGHLIGHTS The Enhanced IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer incorporates into
the base 229 Impressions Per Minute (IPM) printer the following new standard
features:

    o   New memory technology providing up to 20 percent performance
        improvement
    o   Four megabytes of standard pattern storage (twice that provided
        in the current 3900)
    o   A preheat platen temperature control to allow the user more
        flexibility in paper stock choices
    o   An enhanced operator alert facility.

The Enhanced IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer, with the new standard
features, offers improved price/performance and a wider range of applications
through the use of the Preheat Platen Temperature Control (#9400/4400) and the
Increased Memory Performance (IMP, #9400/4220).

The Preheat Platen Temperature Control allows the customer to adjust the
temperature on the preheat platen within a range of 176F (80C) to 275F (135C)
to ensure good toner adhesion on more types of papers.  The 3900 offers a Forms
Select Adjustment for adjusting the fuser roll temperature from the standard
374F (190C) down to 338F (170C) (the 'plastic' setting) for handling special
label requirements.

With the improved pre/post-processing Interface features available on the 3900,
#4710 for normal pre/post-processing and #4720 for Advanced Function
Post-processing (for example, additional printing with non-electrophotographic
technology, magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) impact printing,
selectable color printing, and so on), the customer can move into new
application arenas.

With the addition of the Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG, #4200) and
the Decompression Performance Enhancement (DPE, #4202) features, other new
areas of ImagePlus* Applications are now available.

AFIG (#4200) supports printer microcode image decompression of Image Object
Content Architecture (IOCA) data streams that were compressed by industry -
standard compression routines - CCITT Group 3 and 4, IBM Modified Modified Read
(MMR) and Adaptive Bilevel Image Compression (ABIC). IBM Advanced Function
Image and Graphics support is able to correct the resolution of an input image
to match the printer's 240-pel resolution and thereby provide input resolution
independence for scanned input.  Image scaling is supported to expand or
contract images in the printer.  Scale to fit, center and trim, and position
and trim are some of the additional image mapping functions supported in the
printer.  Images can be clipped in the printer as well as rotated 90, 180, or
270 degrees.  Graphics Object Content Architecture (GOCA) graphics commands are
supported at the DR/2V0 level for execution by the printer control unit.

DPE (#4202) supports printer hardware image decompression of IOCA data streams
that were compressed using standard compression routines - CCITT Group 3 and 4
and IBM MMR.  The DPE capability improves the decompression performance offered
with the AFIG feature by up to 12 times (The AFIG feature, #4200, is a
prerequisite).  The use of AFIG or DPE with AFIG for decompressing IOCA images
in the printer has printer performance implications that depend upon the
customer application environment - the total number of image pages to be
printed in a given period of time, the ratio of image pages to text pages, the
complexity of the images and text, the compression algorithm and compression
ratio, along with the amount of printing for one given image printing
application as related to the total print requirement. Additional Pattern
Storage (#4030 or #4040) may be required for best performance.

The operational characteristics of the 3900 are improved by the addition of the
enhanced Operator Alert (#9400/4900), which includes an audible alarm with
volume control, a flashing attention light located on top of a pedestal,
approximately 8-inches above the top of the printer, and a jack/plug for remote
attachment of operator attention equipment (using customer-supplied equipment
and power).

With the addition of the Advanced Function Image and Graphics (#4200) and the
Decompression Performance Enhancement (#4202) features, the 3900 enables the
printing of applications that produce the IBM Systems Applications
Architecture* IOCA image or GOCA graphics formats.  This gives the customer the
flexibility to choose between decompressing CCITT Group 3 or 4, IBM MMR or IBM
ABIC compressed images in the processor or in the printer; the choice of
storing either compressed or decompressed images on the spool; and the
rasterizing of GOCA graphics orders in the processor or sending them to the
3900 for rasterizing.

The following table gives approximate performance information.  Data given is
for page performance, not APPLICATION performance.  If an application is
composed of pages that follow similar characteristics, application performance
closely matches page performance.  However, if an application is composed of a
mix of pages, application performance may not resemble page performance at all.
For a mixed-page application, performance numbers for the various types of
pages in the mix cannot be "averaged" together because of complex buffering
schemes used to maximize performance.  In general, if text pages are mixed with
image or graphics pages, APPLICATION performance can be significantly better
than the image or graphic PAGE performance.

  *                  Throughput (pages/minute)
                   + 3800-3  --------3900--------   ----ENHANCED 3900----
                                            AFIG            IMP+ IMP+AFIG
  Page Type          SEF     BASE    AFIG   +DPE     IMP    AFIG    +DPE
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  SIMPLE TEXT:
    14K chars/page   112     229     229     229     229     229     229
    32K              ---     139     153     153     ---     183     183
  COMPLEX TEXT:
    with 1 table     159     229     229     229     229     229     229
    with 6 tables    ---     152     156     156     192     195     195
    with large image 102     178     171     171     ---     203     203
  IM1 IMAGE:
    24 sqin/page     170     184     229     229     225     229     229
    50                88      94     132     132     ---     148     148
    87                53      54      79      79     ---      85      85
  IOCA IMAGE:  CR = Compression Ratio
    16 sqin CR=16    n/s     n/s     221     229     n/s     ---     229
            CR= 4    n/s     n/s      84     229     n/s     ---     229
    32 sqin CR=16    n/s     n/s     117     229     n/s     ---     229
            CR= 4    n/s     n/s      43     229     n/s     ---     229
  GOCA GRAPHICS:
    2000 lines/page  n/s     n/s      72      72     n/s     ---      74
    4000             n/s     n/s      51      51     n/s     ---      53
    32 sqin area     n/s     n/s     110     110     n/s     ---     115
    64 fill/page     n/s     n/s      62      62     n/s     ---      63
  IOCA CCITT G4 COMPRESSED IMAGES (FULL 8.5" x 11" PAGES):
    CR  4.6          n/s     n/s      11     144     n/s     ---     155
    CR 10.4          n/s     n/s      20     165     n/s     ---     170
    CR 24.1          n/s     n/s      35     169     n/s     ---     175
    CR 49.7          n/s     n/s      51     170     n/s     ---     177
  CHECK IMAGE PRINTING APPLICATIONS (10 check images/page uncompressed):
    2 coded/3 image  125     122     ---     ---     ---     206     206
    Image only        75      81     ---     ---     ---     146     146
  CHECK IMAGE PRINTING APPLICATIONS (10 check images/page in CCITT G4):
    2 coded/1 image  n/s     n/s      98     229     n/s     ---     229
    2       2        n/s     n/s      69     229     n/s     ---     229
    2       3        n/s     n/s      59     229     n/s     ---     229
    n/s - Not supported
    --- - Not  currently available
     +  - 3900 Performance testing was done with 16 MB Pattern Storage
          3800 Storage Expansion Feature (SEF) is maximum memory for
          the 3800
     *  - Most of this data was published in Washington Systems Center
          (WSC) Flash 9139.  An updated WSC Flash will be published at
          a later date.

Job turnaround may be reduced as a result of faster printer throughput with the
use of IMP, AFIG, and DPE.

With the improved pre/post-processing interfaces available on the Enhanced IBM
3900 Advanced Function Printer, the customer may achieve greater throughput and
reliability than is achievable with normal box paper input.

The current applications that create graphics require that these graphics be
rasterized in the processor before being sent to the printer.  With the use of
AFIG, GOCA graphics orders may be sent directly to an Enhanced IBM 3900
Advanced Function Printer and rasterized in the printer control unit, saving
processor time.

By enabling additional applications and improving performance, the Enhanced IBM
3900 Advanced Function Printer, the customer will allow the customer to expand
his application base.

With the use of AFIG and DPE, the adherence to SAA* and the added image
performance, the customer is assisted in improving application development.

The ability to order all of the new features for current 3900s protects the
customer's investment in the 3900.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer is a high speed, continuous form, page
printer that operates at speeds up to 229 PPM.  The IBM 3900 Advanced Function
Printer is supported by IBM's AFP software.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer has an addressability of 240 x 240 pel
or dots per inch (DPI).  The print darkness will exceed that of the IBM 3835
and 3800 particularly in dark area fill.  Print contrast controls, similar to
those on the IBM 3835, allow the operator to adjust print darkness.

Whenever the IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer is stopped, any exposed toner
under the fusing station may appear darker than exposed toner fused during
normal paper motion.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer is capable of printing up to four
million feet of paper per month.

PAPER HANDLING

    o   Input fanfold
        The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer will have a paper supply
        capacity of 16 inches (406 mm) of fanfold paper.
    o   Output fanfold
        The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer will have a pendulum type
        of stacker with a maximum paper capacity of up to 16 inches (406
        mm) in height.  The actual height may be operator adjusted to
        limit the weight of the output stack of paper.  The stacker can
        only stack paper with lengths between 3 (76 mm) and 14 (356 mm)
        inches.  The stacker has a motor driven swing arm which forces
        the paper to fold in the proper direction.  Synchronization with
        the fold in the paper is set up by a switch accessible from the
        front of the printer.  This mechanism is used to improve stacking
        performance for some kinds of papers which have inner
        perforations, holes and label forms, etc. The ability to attach
        pre- and post-processing equipment allow additional input and
        output capabilities.  See Feature #4710/#4720.
    o   Splicing station
        There is a standard splicing station to minimize waste and
        increase operator efficiency with boxed paper.

PAPER SIZES

    Width:      6.5 (165 mm) to 16 (406 mm) inches (continuously
                variable).  The maximum print width is 15 (381 mm)
                inches.
    Length:     3 (76 mm) to 14 (356 mm) inches (in 1/3 and 1/2 inch
                increments) are supported by the standard stacker.
                Additionally a forms length of 16 and 2/3 inches (423mm)
                may be printed but can not be stacked with the standard
                stacker. Feature #4710 must be installed to disable the
                standard stacker when printing this form length.
                Suitable post-processing equipment is recommended for the
                latter form length.

A3 paper (297 mm x 420 mm) falls within the preceding guidelines as it must be
printed with the 420 mm dimension as the length.

Note:  Lengths less than 7 (178 mm) inches are folded in multiples by the forms
supplier and by the stacker, (e.g., forms 3.5 inches in length may be folded
every 7 inches.)

Paper weights between 16 (60 g/m2) and 42 (160 g/m2) pound bond are supported.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer can print on normal fanfold paper, roll
feed paper, preprinted forms and some label stock.

It should run a broader range of labels than the IBM 3800 printer due to the
3900's teflon coated, silicon wicked, hot roll fuser.  The wicking improves the
release properties of the hot roll and helps to prevent detaching of labels on
to the hot roll.  IBM advises that customers evaluate label stock on the 3900
prior to committing to large label orders.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer can be used to print OCR and bar code
documents. The 3900 has been tested using OCR A, OCR B, and bar code fonts of
the IBM Bar Code/Optical Character Recognition Licensed Program (5688-021). The
OCR and bar code produced by the 3900 is intended to meet OCR and bar code
printing standards.  However, because of the variability of OCR readers and bar
code scanners, IBM advises that customers evaluate the 3900's OCR and bar code
output in their application environment.  Refer to the "IBM 3900 Advanced
Function Printer Forms Design Reference" (GA32-0137) for more detailed OCR and
bar code information.

COMMON CONTROL UNIT (CCU) FUNCTIONS

    Character Generator             APA
    Font Downloading                Yes
    Permanent Font Storage          Yes - only one
    User Interface                  Control Panel Display
                                    Alphanumeric
    Electronic Forms                Yes (limited by memory)
    Image Print                     Yes (limited by memory).

Printer performance at rated speed is 229 pages per minute (2.70 feet or .824
meters per second).

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer is able to print both fixed and
proportional spaced fonts from 4 to 72 points.  Customers should verify the
legibility of 4 point font sets in their application.  Only one copy of a font
is required for all rotations in the printer.  The font is oriented for
printing at print time.

IBM provides one resident font to satisfy minimal data processing requirements.

The 3900 and all Group 3 printers use bounded box fonts.  The 3800 uses
unbounded box fonts. The two formats are not compatible so both font libraries
must be maintained if both types of printers are in use (except in VM where
only bounded box font libraries are required:  PSF/VM converts bounded box
fonts to unbounded box fonts for 3800 printing).Any customized 3800 fonts must
be reformatted into a bounded box font for use on a 3900. Reformatting may be
done by service vendors or the customer using an AFP utility such as PMF or
FLSF.  PMF can be used to build bounded box fonts directly from source fonts.
FLSF can be used to design characters from scratch, and build them into bounded
box fonts.

Some fonts which were designed to take advantage of 3800 print characteristics
may appear to have lighter and darker characters when printed on the 3900
printer, especially when characters are clustered as in header and trailer page
designs.  A new set of fonts, GL10, GL12, and GL15, are available with PSF and
provide thinner characters equivalent to those in fonts GT10, GT12, and GT15.
Use the GL fonts in situations such as header and trailer page printing.

When compared to many other printers (using the same font) the 3900 more
accurately reproduces the pel size and stroke widths. These other printers tend
to broaden the strokes. This may cause the 3900 prints to appear lighter
because the characters and drawings have finer lines.  This characteristic
produces better OCR and BAR CODE's, but can be a concern for fine lines in
drawings (CAD/CAM).

Large solid areas tend to have a non-uniform appearance. This characteristic is
not uncommon to high speed continuous form, electrophotographic printers. To
minimize the non-uniform appearance:

    o   Control the size of solid areas by keeping them as small as
        possible
    o   Use gray scales or dot patterns (OGL)
    o   Use outline characters and designs for logos
    o   Use cross hatching rather than solids
    o   Keep the longer dimension of solid areas perpendicular to the
        tractor feed motion.

Thin lines and solid areas may smear if the form is rough. The 3900 needs
smoother forms than the 3800. The "Forms Design Reference" (GA32-0137) contains
guidance on form selection for best performance.

The customer should be aware of the following print characteristics of the 3900
Advanced Function Printer and should consider them when deciding to print an
application on the 3900.

The 3900 has higher print density (1.2 OD) than previous continuous forms
printers (3800, 3835). The solid areas are also darker than previous continuous
forms printers (1.0 OD), but less than the cut sheet printers (3825, 3827,
3828).

The 3900 has been certified as 'Forgery Proof' by the government of Germany.
This indicates that any alteration of 3900 printed characters on normal papers
would lead to noticeable destruction of the paper itself and therefore be
detectable.  This is an important certification for customers who intend to
print checks on the 3900.

Control Store is standard on the 3900 at 1.25MB.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer will utilize the Common Control Unit
which has control storage, pattern storage, and page buffer storage. Control
Storage

    o   Control Storage is standard on the Enhanced 3900 at 1.25 MB.

Page Buffer Storage

    o   Page Buffer Storage is standard on the 3900 at 2MB.

Pattern Storage

    o   The Enhanced IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer has a 4MB
        standard pattern storage. The customer may purchase additional
        2MB or 4MB increments up to a maximum of 16MB.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer is designed for efficient ease of
operation, service and installation.  Accepted human factors principles have
been applied specifically to frequent access areas such as paper threading
(auto-load) and the operator panel.  The auto-load capability of the 3900 will
automatically load most paper between 20 pounds (70 g/m2) and 24 pounds (90
g/m2).  Other weight paper may have to be loaded manually.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer operates in a class A1 environment and
will meet or exceed all US, AP, IBM LA, Canada, and EMEA regulations as they
apply to "environmental impact" for business machines of this type.

The acoustic levels for the IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer measured running
with 20 pound (75 gm/m2) paper are:

                                     Sound Power
                                     60 Hz        50Hz
    Idle                             8.3 Bels     7.7 Bels
    Operating                        8.7 Bels     8.4 Bels
                                      Sound Pressure *
                                     60 Hz        50Hz
    Idle                             58 dB        57 dB
    Operating                        65 dB        65 dB.
    * At one meter (bystander position)

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer is designed to print to the perforation
at rated speed.  As with other print-to-perforation printers, print quality
degradation will occur near the perforation with fanfold paper which 'tents'
(i.e. retains a 'memory' of the fold).  There will be no degradation at
distances from the perforation of 1/3 inch (8.5 mm) for character data, OCR, or
barcodes and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) for solid area fill, logos, or images.  With a
roll feed paper input no change in print quality should be apparent up to the
perforation.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer occupies approximately 22.1 square feet
(2.1 square meters) of floorspace.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer's display and operator input functions
are provided via the main operator panel, similar to the 3835.  The main
operator panel is the primary control panel utilized by both operator and IBM
Customer Engineer.  It is described below:

    o   Display
        -   Vacuum fluorescent
        -   32 alphanumeric, 5 x 12 matrix characters
        -   Green LED indicators for channel enable functions
    o   Input touch panel with plastic overlays consisting of:
        -   A set of 12 control and function keys
        -   A hex keypad to input information, 17 hex keys ("0" through
            "F" and "." (decimal point)).
    o   Audio alarm to provide input key activation acknowledgement
        'feedback' and an 'attention' signal to the operator.
    o   In addition, an operator-alert indicator lamp is available to
        signal when operator attention is required.

A standard automatic paper loading capability has been added as an operator
convenience. It will handle most supported paper sizes and weights.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width: 2,313 mm (91 inches) to 2,402mm (94 inches), dependent on
        stacker setting.
    o   Depth: 890 mm (35 inches)
    o   Height: 1,420 mm (56 inches)
    o   Weight: 996 kg (2,196 pounds)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature: 15.6 to 29.4C (60 to 85F)
    o   Relative Humidity: 20 to 80 percent
    o   Wet Bulb: 23C (73F)

The 3900 may be used as a direct output device (direct-printing) when attached
to an MVS host system.  When the 3900 is used in direct-printing mode, Print
Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) provides exclusive use of the printer for a
particular application.  The user with direct control of the 3900 cannot take
advantage of system-assisted restart, data set checkpointing, multiple data set
processing, or use of operator commands available through JES to control the
printer.

The following additional items should be considered when a user attaches the
3900 directly to his program:

    1.  EXCP is not supported
    2.  Installation exits are not supported, except for user exit 16,
        the 'direct attach exit'
    3.  PSF does not return interrupts for channel 9 or 12 carriage
        control conditions
    4.  Error Recovery is the responsibility of the user program
    5.  Printer jams and Machine checks
        At the time of a paper jam all pages buffered in the control
        unit are discarded and PSF is relied upon to re-transmit. In
        direct attach, PSF cannot request the application to resend the
        pages, so the print job is terminated.
        The 3900 will allow the operator to indicate to the control unit
        that paper jam and print engine machine check recovery are to be
        under operator control. When the Ready key is pressed following
        a jam or print engine machine check the operator will be prompted
        to indicate whether to discard pages and rely on host error
        recovery or to re-start printing from the next queued sheet,
        thus the operator assumes responsibility for re-printing of
        sheets that may have been lost or partially printed at the
        time of a jam or print engine machine check.
    6.  Print Adjust
        The current control unit implementation discards all buffer
        pages upon entry to and exit from print adjust mode. In a Direct
        Attach environment these pages are not retransmitted by PSF and
        thus are lost and the job is terminated.
        This has the disadvantage that print may be pushed out of the
        valid printable area and be undetected. Subsequent pages built
        with the new adjustment values would indicate printing outside
        the Valid Printable Area (VPA).
    7.  One Page Key
        The current control unit implementation discards all buffer pages
        when One Page followed by Ready is pressed. This is because this
        indicates entry to print adjust mode.
        A configuration option has been implemented to allow One page -
        Ready to merely print one page and stop as though the stop key
        had been pressed. No pages are discarded.
    8.  Allow printing outside Valid Printable Area
        A configuration option has been implemented to allow printing up
        to 40 pels outside the Valid Printable Area (VPA) without an
        error being detected.
    9.  PSF Exits
        a.  Header exit - Not Supported
        b.  Trailer Exit - Not Supported
        c.  Separator - Not Supported
        d.  Record Exit - Not Supported
        e.  SMF 6 Exit - Not Supported
        f.  Message Exit - Not Supported
        g.  Resource Exit - Not Supported
        h.  Direct-print Exit - Supported
            This implies that exits to suppress Eject To Front Facing
            are ineffective.
            A configuration option has been implemented to allow inhibit
            EFF from the operator panel.

The 3900 supports a maximum cable length of 122m (400 ft) if it is the only
control unit on the interface. For each additional control unit (up to a
maximum of eight control units) this measurement is reduced by 4.6m (15 ft).
Further information regarding cable limitations is in the "IBM System/370
General Information Installation Physical Planning" (GC22-7072).

For parallel channel attachment, a control unit position on a parallel block
multiplexer channel is required on an IBM 4361, 4381, 3090*, ES/9370* or
ES/9000* processor.  A High Speed Printer Adapter is required on the Micro
Channel 370 (9371).

For attachment to ESCON* channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode, an
IBM 9034 ESCON Converter (ESCC) Model 1 is required.  Up to eight parallel
channel I/O control units can be multi-dropped from one IBM ESCON Converter
Model 1.  An ESCON channel operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode must be
dedicated to each IBM ESCON Converter Model 1.  The following systems support
ESCON channels operating in ESCON Converter Model 1 mode:

    o   ES/3090 180J and above except for Model 250
    o   ES/3090-9000T models
    o   ES/9000.

The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer may also be attached to a Systems
Network Architecture (SNA) network via IBM Token Ring or a Synchronous Data
Link Control (SDLC) line using Remote Print Manager 2.0 in the MVS, VSE, or VM
environment.

System/370* or System/390* direct channel attachment requires one of the
following IBM licensed programs, with the appropriate prerequisites, to operate
the IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer.  Later programming releases and
modification levels are supported unless announced otherwise.

    o   MVS Operating Environment
        -   Print Services Facility/MVS (PSF/MVS) (5665-275) Version 1
            Release 3.0, with the Group 3 attachment feature.
        -   PSF/MVS (5695-040) Version 2 Release 1.0.
            Advanced Function Post-processing Interface feature requires
            PSF/MVS Version 2 Release 1.0 and will be supported beginning
            October 30, 1992.
    o   VSE Operating Environment
        -   PSF/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 1.0.
            Advanced Function Post-processing Interface feature will
            require a later release of PSF/VSE and will be supported on
            a later schedule.
    o   VM Operating Environment
        -   PSF/VM (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0.
            Advanced Function Post-processing Interface feature will be
            supported on a later schedule.
    o   OS/2 Operating Environment
        -   PSF/2 (20G0-720) Version 1.00 or higher.
            Advanced Function Post-processing Interface feature is not
            supported.

The Token-Ring Attachment package requires the following host software with the
appropriate prerequisites for Token-Ring Networks.  Later programming releases
and modification levels are supported unless announced otherwise. (In EMEA:
RPQ #8B3900 includes all of the hardware and software necessary for the
Token-Ring Attachment package.)

    o   PSF/MVS (5665-275) Version 1 Release 3.0, with the Group 3
        attachment feature.
    o   PSF/MVS (5695-040) Version 2 Release 1.0.
    o   PSF/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 1.0.
    o   PSF/VM (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0.
    o   ACF/VTAM* Version 3 Release 1.1 (MVS and VM).
    o   ACF/NCP Version 4 Release 2.0 (MVS and VM with 3720 or 3725).
    o   ACF/NCP Version 5 Release 1.0 (MVS with 3745).
    o   ACF/NCP Version 5 Release 2.0 (VM with 3745).
    o   Remote Print Manager Version 2.0 (25F5-944).

Remote attachment of the IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer requires the
following IBM licensed programs, with the appropriate prerequisites.  Later
programming releases and modification levels are supported unless announced
otherwise.  (The restrictions for the Advanced Function Post-processing
Interface feature in the respective operating environments apply.)

    o   MVS Operating Environment
        -   PSF/MVS (5665-275) Version 1 Release 3.0, with the Group 3
            attachment feature and
            --  Remote Print Manager Version 2.0 (25F5-944) or
        -   PSF/MVS (5695-040) Version 2 Release 1.0 and
            --  Remote Print Manager Version 2.0 (25F5-944)
    o   VSE Operating Environment
        -   PSF/VSE (5686-040) Version 2 Release 1.0 and
            --  Remote Print Manager Version 2.0 (25F5-944)
    o   VM Operating Environment
        -   PSF/VM (5684-141) Version 2 Release 1.0 and
            --  Remote Print Manager Version 2.0 (25F5-944)

SPECIFY FEATURES

    o   Power:  #9923 208/220/230/240 volt 60 Hz.
    o   Power Cord:  #9986 6 foot (1.8m) five-wire power attachment cord
        for Chicago.
    o   #9400 Enhanced 3900 Features
        -   Includes 4MB Pattern Store
        -   Increased Memory Performance
        -   Preheat Platen Temperature Control
        -   Operator Alert.
    o   #9950 Tool Kit
        -   For the first 3900, Specify #9950.
        -   If unit ordered is the second or higher 3900 to be installed,
            no additional tool kit is required.  If physical locations
            of machines in multiple machine installations requires a
            tool kit for the second (or higher) machine ordered, Specify
            #9950.
        -   May be ordered with the machine, or as a no cost MES at any
            time.

The following features can be ordered with new machines or as MES field
upgrades:

TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#4020) This feature allows connection of the IBM 3900
Advanced Function Printer to a second channel interface.  The IBM 3900 Advanced
Function Printer can maintain a connection with either of the channels as a
single device.  The IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printer can be configured for
either 'manual' (operator selected) or for 'dynamic' (on demand from the host)
switching.  In manual mode, the channels may be connected to the same host or
to two independent hosts, with one channel being enabled at a time.  In dynamic
mode, the two channels may be connected to the same host or to two hosts that
are tightly coupled.

PATTERN STORAGE (#4060 16MB MEMORY) (#4030 2MB MEMORY) (#4040 4MB MEMORY) These
features may be ordered in addition to the 4MB memory shipped standard with
each printer.  The number of available memory slots in the printer (3) governs
the maximum pattern storage, for example, three features #4040 provide the
maximum of 16MB of pattern storage or an initial order of #4060 for the maximum
of 16MB of pattern storage.

ADVANCED FUNCTION IMAGE AND GRAPHICS (#4200) Improves IM1 image performance by
up to 30 percent, supports IOCA images with the printer image mapping
functions, such as scale to fit, center and trim, and position and trim.
Supports IOCA decompression (IBM MMR, CCITT Groups 3 and 4 and ABIC) in the
printer.  Responds to GOCA vector graphics orders at the DR/2V0 level.  Enables
resolution correction of input to the IBM 3900's 240 pel resolution.  Customers
may need to order additional Pattern Store to help achieve desired performance
with image- intensive applications. (Replaces RPQ #8B3907)

DECOMPRESSION PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENT (#4202) Improves decompression of CCITT
Group3/Group4 or IBM MMR IOCA images by up to 12 times over the Advanced
Function Image and Graphics feature (#4200).  The Advanced Function Image and
Graphics Feature (#4200) is a prerequisite. (Replace RPQ #8B3911)

PRE/POST-PROCESSING INTERFACE (#4710) Provides the electrical interface for
attachment of OEM pre- and post-processing equipment to the Enhanced IBM 3900
Advanced Function Printer similar to RPQ 8A5019 for the IBM 3800 and RPQ 8A5022
on the IBM 3835 Advanced Function Printer.  This feature provides control of
add-on pre/post processing devices (such as continuous forms stackers, envelope
inserting equipment, roll- feed equipment, among others).  Additionally, this
feature disables the standard stacker functions.  This feature includes the
function of RPQ #8B3901 and cannot be installed with this RPQ.  Suitable vendor
post-processing equipment is recommended when printing forms longer than 14
inches (355 mm) and less than 17 inches (431 mm) in length.  Note that this
feature must be installed to disable the standard stacker for these form
lengths.

ADVANCED FUNCTION POST-PROCESSING INTERFACE (#4720) Provides the electrical
interface for attachment of OEM post-processing equipment to the Enhanced IBM
3900 Advanced Function Printer similar to RPQ 8B4400 for IBM 3835 Advanced
Function Printer.  This feature provides architected software and
communications control of add-on pre/post-processing devices such as printers
using non-electrophotographic technology, MICR impact printers, or selectable
color printers.  This feature may coreside with one of feature #4710 or RPQ
8B3901.

The following feature can be ordered MES only: RELOCATION/DISCONTINUANCE KIT
(#4050) This feature must be used to prepare the printer for transport when
original packaging is not available. *Signifies a trademark or registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. 3916 IBM PAGE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 3916 Page Printer is IBM's new mid-range page printer.  This
multifunction, table-top designed, non-impact page printer provides
letter-quality text and all points addressable graphics at a maximum speed of
16 pages (impressions) per minute and is designed to produce a maximum of
75,000 pages (impressions) per month.

With cross-industry applicability (insurance, finance, manufacturing, retail,
wholesale, health care), the 3916 is well suited for workgroups in medium and
large-sized enterprises for printing business documents for internal as well as
customer use.  The 3916 is a low cost host system attached printer with a
duplex printing option.

    o   The 3916 Page Printer is available in four models:
        -   Twinaxial/5250 Printer Data Stream (PDS) Model AS0
        -   Twinaxial/IPDS and PDS Model AS1
        -   Coax 3270 datastream Model (SCS) NS0
        -   Coax/IPDS and SCS Model NS1.

All models have, in addition to the attachments defined above, a standard
Centronics Parallel and RS-232 Serial interface which support PCL5** and
PostScript** level 1 data streams with automatic data stream switching.
Automatic port switching between these interfaces and the other attachments
(above) allows sharing of the printer between host and PC systems.

The IBM 3916 Page Printer is designed for unattended operation in IBM mainframe
distributed, IBM mid-range, and local area network (LAN) system environments:

    o   System/390*:
        -   Models NS0 and NS1 attach via Coax to IBM 3174 Controllers, ES/9000*
            Processors and ES/9370* Processors.
    o   AS/400*:
        -   Models AS0 and AS1 attach via Twinaxial cabling to the AS/400 and
            AS/400-attached 5X94 controllers.
    o   LAN:
        -   All models attach via the IBM 4033 LAN Connection.

The IBM 3916 offers other improvements (beyond the higher rate speed) over the
IBM 4028 including duplex capability, larger paper capacities, improved
operator panel, and higher print quality.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   High Reliability with a 75K maximum monthly capacity (16 IPM)
    o   Optional Duplex Capability
    o   Easier to Use
        -   New 4x20 Character LCD Operator Panel with plain language
            messages
        -   Fully configured from the OP Panel
    o   Improved Print Quality
        -   Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET)
        -   High-resolution, 600x600 dot-per-inch printing (PostScript
            only, at up to 8 impression per minute)
    o   Greater Attachment Flexibility
        -   Coax or Twinaxial  with SCS or IPDS datastreams
        -   Optional LAN Attach Capability via IBM 4033 LAN Connection
        -   Centronics Parallel  and RS-232 standard on all models
        -   Auto switching between Twinaxial, Coax, serial, and parallel
            ports.
    o   Multiple Data Streams Supported
        -   IPDS (models AS1, NS1 only)
        -   5250 Printer Data Stream (SCS) Models AS0 and AS1
        -   3270 Data Stream (DSC/DSE/SCS) Models NS0 and NS1
        -   Auto data stream switching between PCL5 and PostScript Lv 1
            on RS-232 serial/Centronics parallel ports and between IPDS
            and 3270 datastreams on coax models.
    o   Low Cost of Printing
    o   Memory
        -   4MB Usable RAM Standard
        -   16MB Maximum Memory Expansion Options
    o   PostScript and PCL Outline fonts
    o   Resident 4028 Typefaces
    o   Envelope Feeder

The IBM 3916 Page Printer is complementary to the IBM 4028 and adds extended
performance for many applications.

The IBM 3916 operates at a rated speed of 16 impressions per minute and has a
higher maximum duty cycle of 75,000 pages (impressions) per month.

    o   End User Productivity - Improved Worker Productivity
        Worker productivity is increased, for many applications, via the
        faster print speed of the IBM 3916 versus the IBM 4028.  The new
        16 IPM print engine provides much faster printing than the IBM
        4028, in most applications, thereby reducing user wait times for
        print jobs.
    o   Growth Enablement - Increased Capacity
        The higher maximum print capacity of the IBM 3916 (75,000 per
        month) allows businesses to increase their print loads without
        having to buy additional printers as frequently.

The IBM 3916 offers optional duplex capability and significantly greater paper
input and output capacity than the IBM 4028. The customer installable duplex
feature is optional. The standard input and output capacity is 500 sheets.
Input capacity is expandable to 1,000 sheets.

The customer can purchase an additional input bin to double input capacity to
meet increased print load requirements.

    o   Business Solutions - Enable Customer's Competitive Advantage
        The duplex option will provide customer's with both cost savings
        by reducing paper use and the ability to print more professional
        looking duplex documents.

The IBM 3916 offers improved print quality through the Print Quality
Enhancement Technology (PQET) at 300X300 DPI and 600x600 DPI resolution when
printing PostScript. PQET improves the appearance of characters and graphics
via edge smoothing algorithms.

    o   Business Solutions - Enable Customer's Competitive Advantage
        The IBM 3916 will improve the appearance of documents intended
        for distribution to user's customers.

The IBM 3916 line includes models with standard coax or twinaxial interface for
attachment to IBM midrange processors and mainframe controllers. Field upgrades
allow flexibility in applications.

In addition, the IBM 3916 has standard serial and parallel interfaces. These
additional ASCII interfaces will allow the 3916 to be shared with, or migrated
to ASCII systems or networks. The IBM 3916 may be attached to Local Area
Networks via the IBM 4033 LAN Connection.

The 3916 can automatically switch between all ports in use.

    o   Growth Enablement - Connectivity
        The IBM 3916 can be migrated from IBM midrange processors and
        mainframe controllers to Local Area Networks, as company's
        update their networking strategies and may be shared between the
        coax or twinaxial attached IBM host system and a Local Area
        Network.
    o   Investment Protection - Industry Standards
        The IBM 3916 Page Printer will support the IPDS* and 3270
        datastreams (DSC/DSE/SCS) in the IBM System/370-390 NDS
        environment.  On AS/400 systems, the IBM 3916 will support the
        IPDS datastream.  Within, LAN/ASCII system environments the 3916
        will support the widely used PCL5 and PostScript Level 1
        datastreams.  This permits easy migration of the IBM 3916 to new
        applications.

With the standard print cartridge, the 3916 Page Printer offers a total cost of
printing that is very competitive with similar printers. When used with the
Marathon Performance Print cartridge, (shipped with the printer) the 3916
offers a significantly lower total cost of printing.

IBM 3916 Page Printer comes standard with the following features installed: 4M
of printer memory, PostScript Level 1 Interpreter with 39 Fonts, PCL5 Printer
Emulation for HP Laser Printer III and auto Emulation switching.

MODEL AS0 Twinaxial-5250 PDS (SCS).

MODEL AS1 Twinaxial-IPDS and PDS.

MODEL NS0 Coax-3270 Datastream

MODEL NS1 Coax-IPDS and 3270 Datastream.

The 3916 is a customer setup (CSU) printer. The CSU information is contained in
the "Getting Started" manual which is supplied with the printer in the National
language.

All proposals and agreements to distribute the product/software package to the
United States Government must identify and license Software as subject to
Restricted Rights under 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19 (a)-(d) (Civilian Agencies) or 48
C.F.R. 252.227-7013 (c) (1) (ii) (Defense Agencies).

MODEL CONVERSIONS

    Model From   Model To   Description
    ----------   --------   ----------------------------
       AS0         AS1      Twinaxial PDS-SCS to IPDS/PDS
       AS0         NS1      Twinaxial PDS-SCS to Coax IPDS/3270
       AS1         NS1      Twinaxial IPDS/PDS to Coax IPDS/3270
       NS1         AS1      Coax IPDS/3270 to Twinaxial IPDS/PDS
       NS0         AS1      Coax 3270 to Twinaxial IPDS/PDS
       NS0         NS1      Coax 3270 to IPDS/3270

The 3916 will print at maximum rated engine speeds for 8 1/2 inch x 11 inch
pages in 300 DPI print resolution:

    o   Up to 16 IPM
    o   Up to 75,000 pages (impressions) per month
    o   Optional Duplex Capability
    o   Easy to Use
        -   New 4x20 Character LCD Operator Panel with plain language
            messages
        -   Fully configured from the OP Panel
    o   High Print Quality
        -   Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET)
        -   High-resolution, 600x600 dot-per-inch printing (PostScript
            only, at up to 8 impression per minute)
    o   Attachment Flexibility
        -   Coax or Twinaxial with SCS or IPDS datastreams
        -   Optional LAN Attach Capability via IBM 4033 LAN Connection
        -   Centronics Parallel and RS-232 standard on all models
    o   Multiple Data Stream Support
        -   IPDS (models AS1, NS1 only)
        -   5250 Printer Data Stream (SCS) Models AS0 and AS1
        -   3270 Data Stream (DSC/DSE/SCS) Models NS0 and NS1
        -   Auto data stream switching between PCL5 and PostScript Lv 1
            (all models--RS-232, Centronics parallel ports only)
        -   Auto switching between Twinaxial/Coax and serial/parallel
            ports.
    o   Memory Options
        -   4MB Usable RAM Standard
        -   16MB Maximum Memory Expansion Options
    o   PostScript and PCL Outline fonts supported
    o   True resident 4028 Typefaces
    o   Envelope Feeder

Print quality enhancement technology (PQET), a user friendly 4x20 character LCD
operator panel, multiple resolution print quality capabilities, 300 DPI and 600
DPI standard and versatile paper handling options are some of the basic
functions of the 3916.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

         IBM 3916 Page Printer
              Base Printer             Maximum Featured        Notes
    ------------------------------     ---------------------   ---------
    Width   378 mm (14.9 inches)     378 mm (14.9 inches)
    Depth   533 mm (21.0 inches)     872 mm (34.3 inches)        2
    Height  407 mm (16.0 in)         533 mm (21.0 in)            1
    Weight  21.0 kg (46.0 lb)        26.5 kg (58 lb)             3
    Note: 1) The printer is at maximum height when it is equipped
             with the optional 500-Sheet Second Drawer.
          2) The printer is at maximum depth, when it has both the
             front exit tray and the optional Envelope+ Feeder
             installed.
          3) Weight without paper.
    * Duty cycle up to 75,000 pages (impressions) per month
    * Acoustics:
        50 dBA printing
        33 dBA idle
    * Operating Clearance:
        The printer requires 152 mm (6.0 inches) on all four sides
        and 305 mm (12.0) inches on top for proper operation.

Electrical Specification:

       Description                   Line Voltage
    ---------------------         ------------------
       Low Voltage                100V-127V, 50/60Hz
       High Voltage               200V-240V, 50/60Hz
       Certification: U/L, CSA, FCC(A)
Printer Specifications:

    0   Maximum rated engine speeds for 8.5 x 11 inch paper are:

     Resolution (DPI)   Exit Path    Simplex (IPM)   Duplex (IPM)
     ---------------    ---------    ------------    ------------
        300              Front          16              11
        300              Top            16              15
        600              Front           8               6
        600              Top             8               8

      Note: These speed limitations are inherent to the print mechanism
            upon which both the IBM 3916 and the IBM 4039 Model 16L are
            based.
    o   Addressability:  Dots per inch (horizontal and vertical)
        -   300 x 300 dots per inch, with PQET
        -   600 x 600 dots per inch, with PQET
    o   Printer warm-up time is less than 35 seconds
    o   Minimum time to first page (after warm-up time):
        -   20.0 seconds - 279.4 mm (11 in) page from primary paper tray
        -   21.0 seconds - 279.4 mm (11 in) page from optional second
            drawer
        -   19.5 seconds - Envelope from optional envelope feeder
        -   19.5 seconds - Paper from 100-sheet auxiliary feeder
    o   Minimum time between subsequent 297.4 mm (11 in) pages is 3.7
        seconds.

There are two print cartridges:  P/N 1380850 Standard Print Cartridge has a
yield of 10,000 pages at 2.8% coverage (7,000 at 5%) and P/N 1380950 Marathon
Performance Print Cartridge has a yield of 20,000 pages at 2.8% coverage
(12,800 at 5%).

Either the manual input paper tray, the optional Envelope+ Feeder, or the
100-sheet Auxiliary Feeder must always be installed on the printer to prevent
light reaching the print cartridge, which results in degraded print quality.

500 SHEET SECOND DRAWER PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Height: 155 mm (6.1 in)
    o   Width: 360 mm (14.2 in)
    o   Depth: 400 mm (15.7 in)
    o   Weight:
        -   2.3 kg (5 lb) (without paper tray)
        -   4.1 kg (9 lb) (with letter-size paper tray)
        -   4.5 kg (9.8 lb) (with legal-size paper tray)

ENVELOPE+ FEEDER PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Height: 114 mm (4.5 in)
    o   Width: 312 mm (12.3 in)
    o   Depth: 330 mm (13 in)
    o   Weight: 1.4 g (3 lb)

100-SHEET AUXILIARY FEEDER PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Height: 114 mm (4.5 in)
    o   Width: 312 mm (12.3 in)
    o   Depth: 330 mm (13 in)
    o   Weight: 1.4 g (3 lb)

TRAYS AND FEEDERS

    Available Paper Trays/Feeders                    Feature Number
    --------------------------------------------     --------------
    500-Sheet Letter/A4 Tray                            #4503
      Letter, A4, and Executive paper
    500-Sheet Legal Tray                                #4504
      Legal, Letter, A4, and Executive paper
    200-Sheet A5 Tray                                   #4505
      Supports paper size 148 x 210mm(5.83 x 8.27in)
    100-Sheet Auxiliary Feeder                          #4507
      Letter, A4, and Executive paper
    Envelope+ Feeder                                    #4501
      Envelope Sizes:
      7.75, 9, 10, DL, C5, B5/ISO
    300-Sheet Duplex Paper Tray (Extra Tray)            #4506
      Legal, Letter, A4, and Executive paper

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT The 3916 printer is designed to operate within the IBM
Class 'B' environment, as defined by the following:

    o   Temperature:  15.6 to 32.2C (60 to 90F)
    o   Relative humidity:  8 to 80 percent
    o   Wet bulb:  22.8C (73F) maximum
    o   Altitude:  0 to 2,250 meters

Some reduction in print quality may occur at the extremes of this operating
environment.

The 3916 is environmentally friendly in that it produces negligible amounts of
chemicals that can damage the ozone layer and the duplex feature can
significantly reduce paper usage.  In addition, the 3916 is "Energy Star"
compliant. The 3916, itself, does not produce a measurable quantity of ozone.

LIMITATIONS Printer Performance The 3916 has a maximum rated print engine speed
of up to 16 IPM.  Print Speed is up to 8 IPM when printing in 600 DPI Mode.  As
is the case with most page printers in this class, performance depends on the
following:

    o   Interface to host
    o   Host system and application
    o   Complexity and content of the page
    o   Paper Size
    o   Available memory

The IBM 3916 can use only the resident PCL raster fonts for host printing via
the SCS datastream.

SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY 4028 subset emulation is provided with some host error
recovery and resource management. Error recovery is resident in the printer
with selected status messages returned to the host.  Some set-up values are
communicated to the host through operator panel key sequences.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The RS-232 Interface will attach to:

    o   IBM AS/400* ASCII workstation controller
    o   3174 Controllers on the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
    o   RISC System/6000*
    o   PS/2* computer COMx ports
    o   Direct LAN Attachment via the 4033 LAN Connection
    o   Non-IBM personal computers utilizing an RS-232 interface

The Centronics Parallel interface will attach to:

    o   RISC System/6000 workstations, excluding POWERServer 930
    o   PS/2 computer LPTx ports
    o   Direct LAN attachment via the IBM 4033 LAN Connection
    o   Non-IBM personal computers utilizing Centronics Parallel interface

The NDS Coax Interface will attach to the following devices:

    o   3174 Controller
    o   9221 ES/9000* Processor Workstation Subsystem Controller
    o   9370 Information System, Workstation Subsystem Controller
    o   9371(Micro Channel 370) using 370 Adapter
    o   PS/2 with Micro Channel PSA Card

The Twinaxial Interface will attach to the following devices:

    o   AS/400 Twinaxial Workstation Controllers
    o   5394 Remote Control Unit attached to AS/400
    o   5494 Remote Control Unit attached to AS/400

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS IBM 3916 Twinaxial Attachment Software Support:

   IBM System     Software - Minimum Level          Data Stream/Emulation
   ----------     -------------------------         ---------------------
   AS/400           OS/400*           V2.1   simplex IPDS(AFP=No)
                    OS/400            V2.3   sim/dup IPDS(AFP=No)
                    OS/400            V2.2   sim/dup IPDS(AFP=yes)
                    OS/400            V2.2   simplex SCS (AFP=No)
                    OfficeVision/400* V2.2           IPDS
                    BGU                              IPDS
                    CL and DDS                       IPDS
                    OS/400 Graphics                  IPDS
                    AFP Utilities/400* V2.2          IPDS

IBM 3916 Coax Attachment Software Support

   IBM System     Software - Minimum Level          Data Stream/Emulation
   ----------     -------------------------         ---------------------
   System/370*      PSF/MVS            V2.1.0        IPDS
                    PSF/VM             V2.1.0        IPDS
                    PSF/VSE            V2.2          IPDS
                    GDDM               V2.3          IPDS, SCS/4028
                    VM RSCS            V2.2          IPDS, SCS/4028
                    JES 328X VER2                    SCS/4028
   System/390*      PSF/MVS            V2.1.0        IPDS
                    PSF/VM             V2.1.0        IPDS
                    PSF/VSE            V2.2          IPDS
                    GDDM               V2.3          IPDS, SCS/4028
                    VM RSCS            V2.2          IPDS, SCS/4028
                    JES 328X           V2            IPDS, SCS/4028
   PS/2
   (PSA Micro Channel) PSF/2           V1.10         IPDS

IBM 3916 Serial, Parallel, Software Support: The IBM 3916  has standard RS-232
and Centronics Parallel interfaces.  System and corresponding software support
is as follows:

   System           Software - Minimum Level      Data Stream
  ----------        -------------------------     ---------------------
  IBM PS/2           OS/2 2.0                   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     OS/2 LAN Server 2.0,3.0    PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     OS/2 Standard Ed. 1.30.2   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     OS/2 Extended Ed. 1.30.2   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     PSF/2 R1.10                PCL5,
                     DOS 4.0                    PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     Microsoft Windows 3.1      PCL5, PostScript Level 1
  IBM PC and         DOS 2.1                    PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Compatibles       IBM PC LAN Program V1.3    PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     IBM PC LAN Supt. Prg. 1.0  PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                     Microsoft Windows 3.1      PCL5, PostScript Level 1
  IBM RISC           AIX Version 3.2            PCL5, PostScript Level 1
  System/6000        PSF/6000 1.1.0*            PCL5
  IBM AS/400         OS/400 Host Print          PCL5
                     Transform Version 2.3

IBM 3916 IBM OS/2, AIX, and Novell Netware** LAN Operating System support: The
3916 will support the following via attachment to the 4033 IBM IBM LAN
Connection for Printers and Plotters:

     System           Software - Minimum Level      Data Stream
   ----------        -------------------------   ---------------------
   Token Ring (1)    OS/2 Lan Server 1.2, 1.3   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Token Ring (1)    IBM AIX Ver. 3.1.5         PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Ethernet** (2)    OS/2 Lan Server 1.2,1.3    PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Ethernet   (3)    IBM AIX Ver. 3.1.5         PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Token Ring (4)    Novell Netware 2.2,        PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      3.11
   Ethernet  (5)     Novell Netware 2.2, 3.11   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
(1) The IBM 4033 Model 001 provides support for Token Ring 4/16MBps   data rate
(IEEE802.5) (2) The 4033 Model 002 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT
10Mbps data rate (IEE 802.3). (3) The 4033 Model 003 provides  support for
Ethernet 10Base2   and 10Base5 10Mpbs data rate (IEE802.3). Also compatible
with   OS/2 Lan Server 1.2, 1.3. (4) The 4033 Model 011 provides support for
Token Ring 4/16Mbps   data rate (IEE802.5). (5) The 4033 Model 012 provides
support for Ethernet 10BaseT 10Mbps   data rate (IEEE 802.3). The 4033 Model
013 provides support   for Ethernet 10Base2 and 10Base5 10Mbps data rate (IEEE
802.3   or Ethernet II).

FONT SUPPORT:

    o   32 IBM 4028 resident Bitmaps
        -   7 Courier
        -   7 Prestige
        -   13 Times New Roman (4028 utilizes Time Roman)
        -   OCR-A, OCR-B, APL
        -   Boldface PS
        -   Letter Gothic 20cpi
    o   39 Postscript outline fonts
        -   4 Courier
        -   4 Times New Roman
        -   12 Helvetica
        -   4 AvantGarde
        -   4 Bookman
        -   4 CenturySchlbk
        -   1 ZapfChancery
        -   1 ZapfDingbats
        -   4 Palatino
        -   1 SymbolSet
    o   PCL5 Fonts- 7 bitmap (raster), 13 outline
        -   Resident Raster Fonts
            --  6 Courier
            --  1 Line Printer
        -   Resident Outline Fonts
            --  4 CG Times
            --  8 Univers
            --  1 ITC ZapfDingbats

These are the fonts available for SCS datastream printing on the IBM 3916.

SPECIFY FEATURES There is no mandatory attachment specify.

Voltage/Power cord:  Chicago Power Cord-use specify code #9986 for a 6 Ft. line
cord.

SPECIAL FEATURES

    o   500 Sheet Second Drawer (#4501 letter), (#4502 legal)
        The second drawer provides an alternate automatic paper feed
        source and is installed at the base of the machine.  Each comes
        with an appropriate size paper tray (#4503 for letter and #4504
        for legal).
        Printer height is increased by 127mm (5 inches)
        Linking of the primary paper feed and this feature is supported
        via the front panel and datastream commands.
        Only one Second Drawer can be installed on the printer.
        This feature is field installable.
        Customer Set-up: Yes.
    o   Paper Trays:
        Optional paper trays provide customers with ability to have two
        different sizes or types of stationery available in the printer.
        -   Letter-size 500-Sheet (#4503)
        -   Legal-size  500-Sheet (#4504)
        -   A5-size     200-Sheet (#4505)
        #4503 Standard sizes supported:  Letter, A4, B5, Executive
        Maximum paper size 215.9 x 297.18 mm (8.5 x 11.7 in).
        #4504 Standard sizes supported:  Legal, Letter, A4, B5,
        Executive Maximum paper size 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
        #4505 Standard size supported : A5 Only supports paper size 148
        x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in) and 90g/sqm.  paper.
    o   Duplex Option (#4402):
        The Duplex Option provides the capability to print and collate
        double-sided pages through IPDS, PostScript Level 1, and PCL5
        data streams. The Duplex Option comes with a 14" special paper
        tray that allows duplexing from the standard paper tray location.
        Due to the design of this tray, input paper capacity is reduced
        to 300 sheets. This feature is portable and interchangable with
        other 3916s. Duplex on AS/400 IPDS (AFP=no) will not be available
        until later releases.  Both the standard and second drawers are
        accessed by the duplex option. A5 paper and envelopes are not
        supported for duplex printing.
    o   Duplex Paper Tray (Extra Tray) (#4506)
        Simplifies the process of changing from one type paper to another.
        Rather than removing the paper from the tray in use and
        replacing it with another type paper, a simple change of paper
        trays accomplishes the task.
    o   Flash Memory (#4030, 2MB):
        Flash Memory provides the ability to store additional download
        PCL5 and PostScript fonts and macros, and change the contents as
        needed.  Only one of these features can be installed at a time.
        Flash memory is installed in a separate slot from the other
        memory options.
    o   Envelope+ Feeder (#4511)
        Envelope+ Feeder is installed in the back of the machine, in
        place of the manual input tray. It allows the customer to
        automatically feed envelopes to be printed.  Its capacity is
        approximately 75 envelopes of 75 g/sqm (20 lb) stock.
        With this feature installed, the height is increased by 61 mm
        (2.4 in) and depth by 147 mm (5.8 in)
        In relative humidity of 65% or higher, envelope flaps may seal.
        Manual input tray must be removed if Envelope Feeder is used.
        Only one Envelope+ Feeder can be installed on the printer. The
        Envelope+ Feeder and the Auxiliary Feeder are mutually exclusive
        of each other. This feature is field installable.
        Customer Set-up: Yes.
    o   Auxiliary Feeder (#4507)
        The Auxiliary Feeder is installed in the back of the machine, in
        place of the manual input tray. It provides the customer an
        additional paper source to the standard tray or the second
        drawer.  It is capable of feeding paper and transparencies.  Its
        capacity is approximately 100 sheets of 75 g/sqm (20 lb) stock.
        With this feature installed, the height is increased by 61 mm
        (2.4 in) and depth by 147 mm (5.8 in) Manual input tray must be
        removed if Auxiliary feeder is used. Only one Auxiliary Feeder
        can be installed on the printer.  The Auxiliary Feeder and the
        Envelope+ Feeder are mutually exclusive of each other. This
        feature is field installable. Customer Set-up: Yes.
    o   Font Cartridge External Adapter (#4840)
        Adapter for HP style font cartridges from 3rd party sources.
    o   Memory Options:
        Memory options extend 3916 user memory. There are two slots
        available for memory--two memory cards can be installed at a
        time. The two available slots include the slot occupied by the
        standard 4MB card. This memory cannot be used for storage of
        IPDS resources. The IPDS controller has 2MB of storage. The
        portion of the IPDS controller memory that is not being used
        for operations can be used for IPDS resource storage.
        Printer memory can be expanded up to a total of 16MB. The
        following are offered:
           o 4 MB (#4304, Install one for a total of 8 MB)
           o 8 MB (#4308, Install one for 12 MB, install two for 16 MB)
        Additional memory is mandatory when printing PostScript under
        the following conditions:
           o Page Protect On, 600 PEL, Simplex (8 MB)
           o Page Protect On, 300 PEL, Duplex (8 MB)
           o Page Protect On, 600 PEL, Duplex, Letter (12 MB)
           o Page Protect On, 600 PEL, Duplex, Legal (16 MB)

DISKETTES Three 3.5-inch low density diskettes are included and contain the
following information:

    o   Installation utility and toolkit
    o   The LaserDriver DOS utility which can be used to send printer
        definition commands from the PC.
    o   Resource Manager utility which controls download of fonts and
        forms to the printer (IBM OS/2 only).
    o   Application Drivers
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems,
Inc. **PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Corporation. **Ethernet is a
trademark of Xerox Corporation. **New Roman is a trademark  of Adobe Systems,
Inc. **NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. 3930 IBM PAGE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3930 Page Printer is IBM's new mid-range page printer intended to replace
all models of the IBM 3816 Page Printer.  This multifunction, non-impact page
printer of table-top design provides letter-quality text and all points
addressable graphics at a maximum speed of 30 pages (impressions) per minute
and is designed to produce a maximum of 150,000 pages (impressions) per month.
With cross-industry applicability (insurance, finance, manufacturing, retail,
wholesale, health care), workgroups in medium and large-sized enterprises can
use the 3930 for printing internal business, office, and customer documents.

There are four models:  the 240 PEL/Simplex Model 02S, the 240 PEL/Duplex Model
02D, the 300 PEL/Simplex Model 03S, and the 300 PEL/Duplex Model 03D. The
Models 02S and 02D have standard RS-232 and RS-422 Serial interfaces. The
Models 03S and 03D have a standard Centronics Parallel, RS-232 Serial, and
RS-422 Serial interface.

The IBM 3930 Page Printer is designed for unattended operation in  IBM
mainframe distributed, IBM mid-range, and local area network (LAN) system
environments:

    o   System/390*:  Models 02S and 02D attach via the Coax Attachment
        Feature to IBM 3174 Controllers, ES/9000* Processors and ES/9370*
        Processors.
    o   AS/400*:  Models 02S and 02D attach via the Twinax Attachment
        Feature to the AS/400 and  AS/400-attached 5X94 controllers. Models 03S
        and 03D will attach via the ASCII Workstation Controller or PC
        Support/400.
    o   RISC System/6000*:  Models 03S and 03D.
    o   LAN:  Models 03S and 03D via the Ethernet** TCP/IP Attachment
        Feature or the IBM 4033 LAN Connection.

The IBM 3930 will offer the same paper handling capabilities as the IBM 3816.
The IBM 3930 will come standard with a 550 sheet primary input cassette, a 250
sheet secondary input cassette (expandable to 1200), and a 550 sheet output
tray (expandable to 1400). Paper sizes up to legal size will be supported on
the standard paper handling trays. Letter and A4 size paper is supported for
use on the optional high capacity paper trays.

The IBM 3930 has an improved LCD operator panel that will communicate with the
user in one of nine languages.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   New IBM AFP Printer*
    o   Local Area Network Printer
    o   Improved Performance:
        -   30 Impression Per Minute (IPM) Print Engine
        -   Improved Standard Controller
        -   Optional High Performance Package for Models 03S and 03D
    o   High Reliability:
        -   150K maximum duty cycle
    o   Easier to Use:
        -   New 2x40 Character LCD Operator Panel
    o   Improved Print Quality:
        -   Higher optical print density
    o   Greater Attachment Flexibility:
        -   Centronics Parallel and Serial Standard on Models 03S and 03D
        -   Coax, Twinax, Serial (ASCII) Options for Models 02S and 02D
        -   Optional LAN Attach Capability via IBM 4033
        -   Internal Ethernet** TCP/IP Attach Option for Models 03S and
            03D
    o   Multiple Data Streams Supported:
        -   Data stream switching between PCL5* and PostScript**
    o   Memory Options:
        -   4MB Usable RAM Standard
        -   8MB Memory Expansion Option
        -   85MB Hard Drive Option
    o   Outline Fonts:
        -   PCL and Optional PostScript on Models 03S and 03D

The IBM 3930 Page Printer is a replacement for the IBM 3816 Page Printer. The
IBM 3930 operates at a higher rated speed (30 IPM), processes print data faster
via an improved controller, and has a higher maximum monthly print capacity of
150,000 pages (impressions) per month.

Worker productivity is increased via the faster print speed of the IBM 3930
versus predecessor printers. The combination of the 30 IPM print engine and the
improved controller design significantly improves the actual print throughput
of the 3930.

The higher maximum print capacity of the IBM 3930 (150,000 per month) allows
businesses to increase their print loads without having to purchase additional
printers.

The IBM 3930 Page Printer will provide attachment to multiple system
environments including: IBM AS/400*, IBM System/370*, IBM System/390*, IBM RISC
System 6000*, IBM PS/2*, IBM PC and compatibles. Industry standard physical
attachments and data protocols will be supported.

The IBM 3930 Page Printer can be moved from one system environment to another
as companies upgrade or change their host systems. The user need change only
cables or interface features.

The IBM 3930 Page Printer will support the IPDS* and SCS datastreams in the IBM
System/370* and IBM System/390* environments.  On AS/400 Systems, the IBM 3930
will support the IPDS datastream.  Within the LAN/ASCII environments, the 3930
will support the widely used PCL5** and PostScript Level 1 data streams.  This
allows easy portability of the 3930 to new applications.

The IBM 3930 Page Printer provides higher print quality than predecessor
products at an IBM host standard of 240 PEL or at an industry standard of 300
PEL resolution.

The IBM 3930 provides high quality printing of documents intended for users'
external customers.

The IBM 3930 Page Printer provides high capacity, upgradeable paper feeding and
stacking capability.

The high capacity(up to 1,750 sheets) paper input and high capacity paper
stacking(up to 1,400 sheets) reduces the amount of time spent by users adding
and removing paper from the printer. Slower speed printers normally have paper
capacities of less than 1000 for input and output trays.

The standard input and output paper capacity of the IBM 3930 is 800 and 550
sheets, respectively. The customer can purchase high capacity input and output
features to increase capacity to 1,750 and 1,400 sheets, respectively.

The total cost of printing of the IBM 3930 is competitive with other printers
in its speed and usage range. Additionally, at higher duty cycles the IBM 3930
can provide lower cost of printing than the use of multiple slower speed
printers.

Use of the IBM 3930 rather than multiple lower speed printers can provide the
customer with both cost of printing and labor savings. The labor savings is due
to less paper handling.

MODEL 02S The Model 02S is a 240 PEL resolution, simplex page printer. The
standard interfaces shipped with the 02S are RS-232 and RS-422 Serial. This
model is designed to be used with the Coax and Twinax Attachment options.
However, with the ASCII Attachment feature the model 02S may be used as an
ASCII printer in IBM Quietwriter emulation.  A Coax, Twinax, or ASCII
Attachment feature must be specified on the initial order.

MODEL 02D The Model 02D is a 240 PEL resolution, duplex page printer. The
standard interfaces shipped with the 02S are RS-232 and RS-422 Serial. This
model is designed to be used with the Coax and Twinax Attachment options.
However, with the ASCII Attachment Feature the Model 02D may be used as an
ASCII printer in IBM 5202 emulation.  A Coax, Twinax, or ASCII Attachment
feature must be specified on the initial order.

MODEL 03S The Model 03S is a 300 PEL resolution, simplex page printer.  It is
designed for RISC System/6000* or LAN attachment.  The standard interfaces
shipped with the 03S are RS-232, RS-422 and Centronics Parallel. The Ethernet
Attachment option may be used with the Model 03S. The IBM 4033 LAN Connection
may be used with the 03S for connection to IBM Token Ring, Novell** Token Ring,
and Novell Ethernet LANs.  LANs. PCL5 emulation is standard on the Model 03S.
A PostScript Interpreter feature is an option for the Model 03S. For graphics
or image intensive applications, like most PostScript applications, it is
recommended that the customer purchase the High Performance Package for the
Model 03S.

MODEL 03D The Model 03D is a 300 PEL resolution, duplex page printer.  It is is
designed for RISC System/6000 or LAN attachment.  The standard interfaces
shipped with the 03D are RS-232, RS-422 and Centronics Parallel. The Ethernet
Attachment option may be used with the Model 03S. The IBM 4033 LAN Connection
may be used with the 03S for connection to IBM Token Ring, Novell Token Ring,
and Novell Ethernet LANs. PCL5 emulation is standard on the Model 03D.  A
PostScript Interpreter option is available for the Model 03D. For graphics or
image intensive applications, like most PostScript applications, it is
recommended that the customer purchase the High Performance Package option for
the Model 03D.

CUSTOMER SETUP (CSU) No.  However, the following IBM 3930 Page Printer Features
and Accessories are customer setup if purchased after base machine:

    o   Coax Attachment (#9476)
    o   Twinax Attachment (#9217)
    o   DBCS for Coax Attachment #9476 (#4851)
    o   DBCS for Twinax Attachment #9217 (#4852)
    o   ASCII Attachment (#7651)
    o   Ethernet TCP/IP Attachment (#9218)
    o   PostScript Interpreter (#9223)
    o   AFP Core Interchange Fonts (#4850)
    o   High Capacity Paper Input (#7640)
    o   High Capacity Paper Output (#7650)
    o   Primary Cassette (#9496)
    o   Alternate Cassette (#9497)
    o   Replacement Output Tray (#9501)
    o   240 PEL Font Management System (#9185)

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Maximum rated engine speed of 30 IPM for 8 1/2 x 11 inch pages
    o   Maximum duty cycle of 150,000 pages per month
    o   Print resolution of 240 PEL for the Models 02S and 02D
    o   Print resolution of 300 PEL for the Models 03S and 03D
    o   Standard RS-232 and RS-422 Serial on Models 02S and 02D
    o   Standard RS-232, RS-422, and Centronics Parallel on Models 03S,
        03D
    o   Coax and Twinax Attachment Options for the Models 02S and 02D
    o   ASCII Attachment Option for Serial Interface Use on 02S and 02D
    o   Ethernet TCP/IP Attachment Option for the Models 03S and 03D
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to IBM OS/2* Token Ring
        LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to Novell** Ethernet LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to Novell Token Ring LANs

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Size & Weight
                Standard Paper Handling              HCI & HCO
               -------------------------         -----------------
               Simplex           Duplex        Simplex         Duplex
               -------           ------        -------         ------
    Width:   1200 mm(48.0")  1200 mm(48.0") 1835 mm(72.3") 1835 mm(72.3")
    Depth:    510 mm(20.1")   510 mm(20.1")  510 mm(20.1")  510 mm(20.1")
    Height:   380 mm(15.0")   420 mm(16.6")  450 mm(17.7")  450 mm(17.7")
    Weight: Approximately 75 kg(165 lb)
    Floor Space: 1130 mm(44.5" deep) x 1505 mm(59.5") long
          (Front & rear covers open)
    o   Paper Handling:
        -   Input Paper Trays Standard - 550/250 (Side);
            Optional - 550/1200
        -   Output Paper Trays Standard - 1x550 (Side);
            Optional - 1x1400
    o   Paper Sizes
                Simplex Operation                Duplex Operation
                -----------------                ----------------
    Letter    - 216x279mm(8.5"x11")    Letter    - 216x279mm(8.5"x11")
  * Legal     - 216x356mm(8.5"x14")  * Legal     - 216x356mm(8.5"x14")
    Executive - 178x267mm(7.0"x10.5")  ISO/JIS A4- 210x297mm(8.3"x11.7")
    Executive - 185x267mm(7.25"x10.5")
    Executive - 191x267mm(7.5"x10.5")
    JIS B5    - 183x257mm(7.2"x10.1")
    ISO/JIS A4- 210x297mm(8.3"x11.7")
 ** Germany   - 210x318mm(8.27"x12.5")
        * Legal size paper is not supported on the High Capacity Input
          and High Capacity Output trays
       ** Paper sizes longer than 297.8MM(11.73") will print at a
          maximum of  26.25 IPM
    o   Paper Type:
        Cut sheet papers (grain long recommended) which are designed for
        xerographic printers. Preprinted paper, like company letterhead,
        with ink and paper specially designed and treated for the
        xerographic process can be used in the printer. Other types of
        commonly available office papers can also be used in the printer,
        however a reduction in reliability and
        print quality may occur. The media weight range is 60 - 90 g/m2
        (16-24 lb) in simplex operation. The media weight range for
        duplex operation is 70 - 90 g/m2 (18.7-24lb).
    o   Special Media (not supported in duplex mode)
                                     Size           Weight
                                  -----------       --------
            Transparencies    Letter, ISO/JIS A  170 - 225 g/m2 (45-60 lb
            Labels            Letter, ISO/JIS A  120 - 160 g/m2 (32-42 lb
            Card Stock        Letter, ISO/JIS A   94 - 170 g/m2 (25-45 lb
        Xerographic transparencies only are supported. The Xerographic
        transparencies must have a paper backing attached, that is no
        heavier than 24#. Only labels designed for Xerographic printers
        may be used. Labels must be on carrier sheets.
    o   Storage:
        4MB RAM standard; Optional 8MB expansion, Optional 85MB hard
        drive.

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Power Requirement:
    The IBM 3930 Page Printer is available with the following
    voltage/frequency groups:
       Voltage (VAC)    Tolerance (VAC)    Frequency (HZ)    Tolerance
       -------------    ---------------    --------------    ---------
                         Min      Max
                         ---      ---
         100              90      110            50         +/- 0.5 Hz.
         100              90      110            60         +/- 0.5 Hz.
     120-127             104      137            60         +/- 0.5 Hz.
         200             180      220            50         +/- 0.5 Hz.
     220-240             193      249            50         +/- 0.5 Hz.
     220-240             193      249            60         +/- 0.5 Hz.
    o   Acoustics:
                                              Operating      Idling
                                              ---------      ------
          Sound Power Level (LWAd)             7.0 bels       5.5 bels
    o   Power Consumption: 1.44 KVA Maximum
    o   Heat Output: 3857 BTU's per hour
    o   Temperature:  15.6 to 32.2C (60 - 90F)
    o   Relative Humidity: 8% to 80% RH
    o   Wet Bulb Temperature: 7.2 to 24.4C (45 - 76F)
    o   Altitude: 0 to 2135 m (0 to 7000 ft)
    o   Pressure Variation: +/- 2.6% at installation altitude

LIMITATIONS The IBM 3930 page printable area is limited within 4.2mm (0.165
inch. ) of any page edge.  Attempts to print to the paper edge may result in
loss o f information or print quality degradation within this boundary and
paper handling degradation.

The use of some non-xerographic papers may affect feed reliability or print
quality.  The print on a non-xerographic paper may appear lighter than on
xerographic paper.  Also, non-xerographic papers that are printed on both sides
of a page (duplex), may have a different level of darkness when one side of the
page is compared to the other.

Legal size paper is not supported on the High Capacity Input and High Capacity
Output paper trays.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The RS-232 Interface will attach to:  (Note: The Models
02S and 02D require the ASCII Attach Feature)

    o   IBM AS/400 ASCII workstation controller
    o   3174 Controllers on the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
    o   RISC System/6000
    o   PS/2*) computer COMx ports
    o   Direct LAN Attachment via the 4033 LAN Connection
    o   Non-IBM PC's utilizing an RS-232 interface
    o   Non-IBM UNIX** computers utilizing an RS-232 interface

The RS-422 Interface will attach to:  (Note: The Models 02S and 02D require the
ASCII Attach Feature)

    o   RISC System/6000 or RT workstations
    o   AS/400 ASCII workstation controller

The Centronics Parallel interface will attach to:  (Note: Available only on the
Models 03S and 03D)

    o   RISC System/6000 workstations, excluding POWERServer* 930
    o   PS/2 computer LPTx ports
    o   Direct LAN attachment via the IBM 4033 LAN Connection
    o   Non-IBM PC's utilizing the Centronics Parallel interface
    o   Non-IBM UNIX computers utilizing the Centronics Parallel
        interface

The Coax Attachment Feature, for the Models 02S and 02D only, will attach to
the following:

    o   3174 Controller
    o   9221 ES/9000 Processor Workstation Subsystem Controller
    o   9370 Information System, Workstation Subsystem Controller
    o   9371 (Micro Channel 370) using 370 Adapter
    o   PS/2 with Micro Channel PSA Card (With PSF/2 only), includes
        support with PS/55

The Twinax Attachment Features for the Models 02S and 02D only, will attach to
the following:

    o   AS/400 Twinaxial Workstation Controllers
    o   5394 Remote Control Unit attached to AS/400
    o   5494 Remote Control Unit attached to AS/400

The Ethernet Attachment Feature, for the Models 03S and 03D only, will permit
attachment to Ethernet Network 10Base5 thick coaxial cable and 10Base2 thin
coaxial cable on LANs using TCP/IP FTP, TFTP, and SNMP applications.

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS IBM 3930 Coax and Twinax Attachment Software Support
(Mdl 02S, 02D Only):

   IBM System     Software - Minimum Level          Data Stream/Emulation
   ----------     -------------------------         ---------------------
   AS/400           OS/400            V2.2  (AFP=No)      IPDS**/3816
                    OS/400            V2.2  (AFP=Yes)     IPDS
                    OfficeVision/400* V2.2                IPDS/3816
                    BGU                                   IPDS/3816
                    CL and DDS                            IPDS/3816
                    OS/400 Graphics                       IPDS/3816
                    AFP Utilities/400* V2.1               IPDS/3816
   System/370*      PSF/MVS            V2.1.0             IPDS
                    PSF/VM             V2.1.1             IPDS
                    PSF/VSE            V2.2               IPDS
                    GDDM               R2.3          IPDS/3816, SCS/3816
                    VM RSCS            R2.2          IPDS/3816, SCS/3816
                    JES 328X           V2            SCS/3816
   System/390*      PSF/MVS            V2.1.0             IPDS
                    PSF/VM             V2.1.1             IPDS
                    PSF/VSE            V2.2               IPDS
                    GDDM               R2.3          IPDS/3816, SCS/3816
                    VM RSCS            R2.2          IPDS/3816, SCS/3816
                    JES 328X           V2            SCS/3816
   PS/2*
   (PSA Micro Channel) PSF/2           V1.10              IPDS/3816
           * Includes support of PS/55 with Micro Channel PSA

IBM 3930 Models 02S and 02D ASCII Software Support: The IBM 3930 Model 02S and
02D, with the ASCII Attachment feature, use the IBM Personal Printer Data
Stream (PPDS) in a Quietwriter* III (5202) emulation, when attached to RS-232
or RS-422 Serial interfaces.  The duplex capability of the Model 02D cannot be
controlled via host software when in Quietwriter III (5202) emulation.  The
following systems support the Model 02S and 02D when in 5202 mode:

     System           Software - Minimum Level     Data Stream/Emulation
   ----------        -------------------------     ---------------------
   IBM PS/2           OS/2 1.1                          PPDS/5202
                      OS/2 LAN Server 1.0               PPDS/5202
                      Extended Services 1.0 for OS/2    PPDS/5202
                      DOS 4.0                           PPDS/5202
                      Microsoft Windows 3.1**           PPDS/5202
                      PC Support/400 W/S Function V2.2  PPDS/5202
   IBM RISC System/   AIX Version 3.2.0                 PPDS/5202
    6000
   IBM AS/400         OS/400 V2.3 Host Print Transform  PPDS/5202

IBM 3930 Models 03S and 03D Serial, Parallel, and Ethernet TCP/IP Software
Support:

The IBM 3930 Model 03S and 03D have standard RS-232, RS-422 and Centronics
Parallel interfaces, with an Ethernet direct attach option. The 3930 300 PEL
models emulate the HP LaserJet** IIIsi and support the PCL5 data stream, with
PostScript Level 1 data stream support as an option.  System and corresponding
software support is as follows for the Model 03S and 03D:

     System           Software - Minimum Level      Data Stream
   ----------        -------------------------     ---------------------
   IBM PS/2           OS/2 1.1                   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      OS/2 LAN Server 1.0        PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      Extended Svc 1.0 for OS/2  PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      PSF/2 V1.10                PCL5
                      DOS 4.0                    PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      Microsoft Windows 3.1      PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      PC Support/400 W/S
                        Function V2.2            PCL5
   IBM RISC System/   AIX Version 3.2.0          PCL5, PostScript Level 1
    6000              PSF/6000* V1.1.0            PCL5
   IBM AS/400         OS/400 V2.3 Host Print
                        Transform                PCL5
   Ethernet LAN       TCP/IP Comm. Protocol      PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Non-IBM UNIX       UNIX                       LN03+

IBM 3930 Models 03S and 03D IBM OS/2, IBM AIX, and Novell NetWare LAN Operating
System Support via the IBM 4033:

The 3930 Models 03S and 03D will support the following via attachment to the
IBM 4033 LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters:

     System           Software - Minumum Level      Data Stream
   ----------        -------------------------   ---------------------
   Token Ring (001)  OS/2 LAN Server 1.2, 1.3   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Token Ring (001)  IBM AIX Ver. 3.2.0         PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Ethernet (002,003)OS/2 LAN Server 1.2, 1.3   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Ethernet   (003)  IBM AIX Ver. 3.2.0         PCL5, PostScript Level 1
   Token Ring (011)  Novell NetWare 2.2,        PCL5, PostScript Level 1
                      3.11
   Ethernet (012,013)Novell NetWare 2.2, 3.11   PCL5, PostScript Level 1
 001) The IBM 4033 Model 001 provides support for Token Ring 4/16MBps
      data rate (IEEE 802.5), with IBM AIX and IBM OS/2.
 002) The 4033 Model 002 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT
      10Mbps data rate (IEEE 802.3), with IBM OS/2 only.
 003) The 4033 Model 003 provides support for Ethernet 10Base2
      and 10Base5 10Mbps data rate (IEEE 820.3), with IBM AIX
      and IBM OS/2.
 011) The 4033 Model 011 provides support for Token Ring 4/16Mbps
      data rate (IEEE 802.5), with Novell NetWare only.
 012) The 4033 Model 012 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT 10Mbps
      data rate (IEEE 802.3), for Novell NetWare only.
 013) The Model 013 provides support for Ethernet 10Base2 and 10Base5
      10Mbps data rate (IEEE 802.3 or Ethernet II), for Novell NetWare
      only.

The Models 03S and 03D are Novell Certified printers.

IBM 3930 Models 03S and 03D will also support the Novell NetWare LAN Operating
System via Intel** NetPort II**:

The 3930 Models 03S and 03D will support the following via attachment to Intel
NetPort II:

     System           Software - Minumum Level      Data Stream
   ----------        -------------------------   ---------------------
   Token Ring (1)    Novell NetWare 3.11        PCL5, PostScript Lvl 1
   Ethernet   (2)    Novell NetWare 3.11        PCL5, PostScript Lvl 1
     (1) - Intel NetPort II for Token Ring (Model PCLA2321)
     (2) - Intel NetPort II for thick/thin Ethernet (Model PCLA2121)
         - Intel NetPort II for twisted pair Ethernet (Model PCLA2221)

FONT SUPPORT Font Support for Models 02S and 02D

The Models 02S and 02D will have the same resident EBCDIC and ASCII fonts as
the IBM 3812 and IBM 3816. Additionally, the Models 02S and 02D will feature
identical host download font support to the IBM 3812 and 3816. For further
information please consult either of the following:

    o   "3812 and 3816 Page Printers Font Reference" (GA34-2111)
    o   "3930 Page Printer Font Reference and Font Management System
        User's Guide" (GA24-4376)

240 PEL FONT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM This Program Product was created for the IBM
3816. It may be used with the IBM 3930 Models 02S and 02D for customizing of
240 PEL fonts. Some highlights are shown below:

    o   User-friendly interface including Mouse support.
    o   Duplication and Backup of Printer Operating Diskette.
    o   Creation and Editing of fonts including:
        -   Conversion of feature fonts to printer resident fonts.
        -   Import scanned images such as signatures.
        -   Extended editing commands including lines, elipses, area
            fill, inversion, shifting, skewing, bolding, and scaling.

Requires an IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 or higher with a 3.5-inch 1.44M drive, using
DOS 3.3 or later or OS/2(DOS Compatibility Mode Only).  Model 30-286 or higher
with a 3.5-inch 1.44M drive (3816) or an Graphic character editing may be
performed using a VGA or CGA display adapter.  Orders should be placed on AAS
for Feature #9501.

The AFP Core Interchange Latin 1 and Symbol character sets are available in 240
Dot-Per-Inch raster format via diskettes (#4850) for each of the following type
families:

    o   Times New Roman
    o   Courier
    o   Helvetica

These resident AFP Core Interchange Fonts are not supported on OS/400.  The 85
MB Hard Drive (#9225) must be installed to load the fonts into the printer from
the diskettes. These fonts may only be used with the Models 02S and 02D. For
further information please refer to the following IBM publications:

    o   S544-3708 About Type: IBM's Technical Reference for Core
        Interchange Digitized Type
    o   S544-3802 About Type: IBM's Code Pages for Digitized Type
    o   G544-3804 About Type: IBM's Quick Reference for IBM Core
        Interchange Fonts
    o   G544-3710 About Type: IBM's Samples of Core Interchange
        Digitized Type

The IBM 3930 Models 02S and 02D will support downloaded Advanced Function
Printing (AFP) Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) 240 dot-per-inch (DPI) fonts.
The following DBCS languages will be supported: Japanese, Korean, Traditional
Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and Thai. The AFP DBCS fonts must be downloaded
from one of the following IBM licensed programs:

    o   5771-AGB AFP Japanese Font (MVS, VM, VSE)
    o   5771-AFW AFP Korean Font (MVS, VM, VSE)
    o   5771-AFZ AFP Traditional Chinese Font (MVS, VM, VSE)
    o   5771-AEK AFP Simplified Chinese Font (MVS, VM, VSE)
    o   5771-AEN AFP Thai Font (MVS, VM, VSE)
    o   5738-FN1 Application System/400 AFP DBCS Fonts
    o   5605-0L0 AFP Japanese Font/2 (PSF/2)
    o   5605-TL0 AFP Traditional Chinese Font/2 (PSF/2)
    o   5605-3L0 AFP Simplified Chinese Font/2 (PSF/2)

Feature #4851 must be ordered to enable downloading of AFP DBCS fonts from the
licensed programs on MVS, VM, VSE, and PSF/2. To access the DBCS fonts via
PSF/2 the Models 02S and 02D must be attached to a PS/55 via the Micro Channel
PSA card.  Feature #4852 must be ordered to enable downloading of AFP DBCS
fonts from AS/400.

300 PEL FONT SUPPORT FOR MODELS 03S AND 03D The IBM 3930 Models 03S and 03D
standard operating diskettes include seven raster and thirteen outline PCL5
compatible resident fonts. These are equivalent to the resident and outline
fonts in the HP LaserJet IIIsi. Please refer to the  3930 Page Printer Font
Reference and Font Management System User's Guide for details.

The IBM 3930 Model 03S and 03D will support 35 outline fonts that are
equivalent to the PostScript 35. These are available via the PostScript
Interpreter Feature (#9223) diskettes. Please refer to the 3930 Page Printer
Font Reference and Font Management System User's Guide for details.

MANDATORY ATTACHMENT SPECIFY FOR MODELS 02S AND 02D One of the following must
be specified when ordering the Models 02S and 02D:

    o   Coax Attachment   - #9476
    o   Twinax Attachment - #9217
    o   ASCII Attachment  - #7651

FREQUENCY/VOLTAGE GROUP The 120 Volt 60 Hz machine is available in the U.S., no
specify code is required.

POWER CORDS Power cord, except for Chicago is a no-specify item. For Chicago
only, specify #9986.

CABLES Cables are supplied by the customer.  Please refer to "IBM 3930 Page
Printer Models 02D, 02S, 03D, 03S Introduction and Planning Guide" (GA24-4375).

SPECIAL FEATURES COAX ATTACHMENT (#9476) This feature may be used only on the
Models 02S and 02D.  This feature is used to attach the IBM 3930 to coaxialial
cabling.  This feature is a backpack that attaches to the RS-422 interface.
The coaxial interface is used to attach the IBM 3930 to a 3174 Establishment
Controller, the 9221 ES/9000 Processor, the 9370 Processor, the ES/9371
Processor, and PS/2 with Microchannel PSA Card.  Two modes of operation are
supported - SNA Character Stream(SCS) line mode and Intelligent Printer Data
Stream(IPDS) mode. The IBM 3930 will emulate the IBM 3816 in SCS mode.
Non-GDDM/DisplayWrite 370 Applications are supported in SCS mode.  Advanced
Function Printing (AFP) support is provided under Print Service Facility/VM
(PSF/VM) Version 2.1.1 or higher, PSF/MVS Release 2.1.1 or higher, PSF/VSE
Version 2.2 or higher, and PSF/2 Version 1.1.0 or higher.  To use GDDM, Release
2.3 or higher should be used.  Contact your marketing representative for
assistance.  Maximum: One per machine.  Customer Set-up: If purchased after
base machine installation. Field Installation: Yes.

TWINAX ATTACHMENT (#9217) This feature may only be used on the Models 02S and
02D.  This feature is used to attach the IBM 3930 to twinaxialial cabling.
With the Twinax Attachment, the IBM 3930 Models 02S and 02D may be attached to
the AS/400 Twinaxial Workstation Controller and to 5394/5495 Remote Control
Units attached to an AS/400.  The Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) only
is supported by the Twinax Attachment for the AS/400.  Contact your marketing
representative for assistance.  Maximum: One per machine.  Customer Set-up: If
purchased after base machine installation.  Field Installation: Yes.

ASCII ATTACHMENT (#7651) This feature must be ordered to attach the Models 02S
and 02D to ASCII devices via the RS-232 or RS-422 interfaces.  This feature
includes program diskettes and documentation for attachment to IBM PS/2, RISC
System/6000, AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controllers, and 3174 Controller ASCII
Ports. Maximum: One per machine Customer Set-up: If purchased after base
machine installation Field Installation: Yes

ETHERNET TCP/IP ATTACHMENT (#9218) This feature, for the Models 03S and 03D
only, is used to attach the IBM 3930 to Ethernet LANs that run TCP/IP FTP/TFTP
applications.  It is a diskette that enables the Ethernet internal network
adapter to permit attachment to Ethernet LANs that use the TCP/IP protocol.
The Ethernet TCP/IP Attach Feature will switch between the PCL5 and PostScript
data streams via controller configuration as multiple ports or PJL commands
from the users' workstations.  This feature may be used without data stream
switching.  The PostScript Interpreter Feature (#9223) must be purchased to
enable the PostScript data stream.  Please contact your IBM marketing
representative for assistance.  Maximum: One per machine Customer Set-up: If
purchased after installation of the base machine Field Installation: Yes

POSTSCRIPT INTERPRETER (#9223) This feature, for the Models 03S and 03D only,
adds PostScript Level 1 processing capability to the IBM 3930.  Also included
are 35 PostScript equivalent outline fonts.  If graphics and image intensive
PostScript printing is expected the customer should purchase the High
Performance Package (Feature #9216).  The PostScript Interpreter consists of
code on diskettes.  Maximum: One per machine.  Customer Set-up: If purchased
after installation of base machine.  Field Installation: Yes.

HIGH PERFORMANCE PACKAGE (#9216) This feature, for the Models 03S and 03D only,
consists of a high performance (33 MHz) controller with 16 MB of RAM and an 85
MB Hard Drive.  Because this feature provides the maximum memory that can be
accomodated on the controller board, the Memory Expansion can not be added when
the High Performance Package is installed.  The High Performance Package should
be purchased for graphics or image intensive applications. PostScript users
should strongly consider the High Performance Package.  Maximum: One per
machine Field Installation: IBM Only

8MB MEMORY EXPANSION (#9224) This feature is a memory SIMM that provides
expansion of controller RAM from the standard 4 MB to 12 MB on all IBM 3930
Models.  This feature should not be ordered for machines on which the High
Performance Package will be installed. The High Performance Package Controller
already contains the additional memory.  Maximum: One per machine.  Field
Installation: IBM Only.

85MB HARD DRIVE (#9225) The 85 MB Hard Drive is used to further increase user
memory. The 85 MB Hard Drive may be installed on all models of the IBM 3930.
When installed, the Hard Drive, replaces the "B" diskette drive.  This feature
does not apply to machines that have the High Performance Package installed.
The High Performance Package includes an 85 MB Hard Drive.  Maximum: One per
machine. Field Installation: IBM Only.

HIGH CAPACITY PAPER INPUT (#7640) This feature provides the user with the
capability of holding 1,200/1,140 of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper of letter or
A4 paper sizes. When this feature is installed in the alternate (bottom) paper
slot, it becomes the primary paper cassette automatically unless the
configuration switch overrides the setting. Legal size paper is not supported
on the High Capacity Paper Input.  NOTE: The unit extends 380 mm (15 inches)
beyond and 110 mm (4.33 inches) below the base of the printer.  Maximum: One
per machine.  Customer Set-up: If purchased after initial machine installation.
Field Installation: Yes.

HIGH CAPACITY PAPER OUTPUT (#7650) This feature provides the user with the
capability of, holding 1400/1300 sheets of 75/80 g/m2 (20/21 lb) paper, 800
sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) legal size paper, or 300 sheets of special media such
as transparencies labels, and card stock. This replaces the standard single
output tray.  The high capacity paper output supports a minimum paper weight of
70 g/m2 (18.7 lb). Paper handling and/or paper stacking capacity may not be
acceptable with a relative humidity below 15 percent (test for your
application).

There will be output full sense condition displayed on the operating panel when
there is more than 1400 sheets of A4 or letter size output paper in the output
bin or the media maximum height of other media is reached. Adjacent print jobs
can be offset under host software control so that jobs can be easily separated.
Legal size paper is not supported on the High Capacity Paper Output.  NOTE: The
unit, excluding the output tray, will extend 195 mm beyond the base printer.
The unit must be supported by a tabletop or a wire rack if the optional printer
stand is used.  Maximum: One per machine. Customer Set-up:  If purchased after
base machine installation.  Field Installation:  Yes.

PRINTER STAND (#3050) The stand provides a convenient, movable physical support
for the IBM 3930 Page Printer and supplies. Magnetic latching doors provide
easy access to a supplies area under the printer. Casters make it easy to
relocate the stand and printer.  Maximum: One per machine.  Field installable:
IBM Only.

PRIMARY CASSETTE (#9496) For replacement of the primary 550 sheet cassette that
is offered on the base machine.  Customer Set-up: Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.

ALTERNATE CASSETTE (#9497) For replacement of the alternate 250 sheet cassette
that is offered on the base machine.  Customer Set-up: Yes.  Field Installable:
Yes.

REPLACEMENT OUTPUT TRAY (#9501) This feature is for replacement of the standard
550 sheet output tray. Customer Set-up: Yes.  Field Installable: Yes.

240 PEL 3816 AND 3930 FONT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (#9185) This is a Program Product
first offered as an RPQ for the IBM 3812 and 3816 Page Printers. It is being
offered as a feature for the IBM 3930. This feature may be used only on the IBM
3930 Models 02S and 02D. This product provides for customizing fo 240 PEL
resolution fonts.  Customer Set-up: Yes. Field Installable: Yes.

AFP CORE INTERCHANGE FONTS (#4850) The AFP Core Interchange Latin 1 and Symbol
character sets are available in 240 Dot-Per-Inch raster format via diskettes
for each of the following type families:

    o   Times New Roman
    o   Courier
    o   Helvetica

These resident AFP Core Interchange Fonts are not supported on OS/400.  The 85
MB Hard Drive (Feature #9225) must be installed to load the fonts from the
diskettes into the printer. These fonts may be used only with the Models 02S
and 02D. For further information on the AFP Core Interchange Fonts please refer
to:

    o   S544-3708 About Type: IBM's Technical Reference for Core
        Interchange Digitized Type
    o   S544-3802 About Type: IBM's Code Pages for Digitized Type
    o   G544-3804 About Type: IBM's Quick Reference for IBM Core
        Interchange Fonts
    o   G544-3710 About Type: IBM's Samples of Core Interchange
        Digitized Type

The IBM 3930 is shipped with the following supplies:

    o   Toner
    o   Developer Unit
    o   Cleaning Unit
    o   Photoconductor Unit
    o   Fuser Unit

The above items are considered supplies and, as such, are not available through
the parts system or included in the service agreement.

DISKETTES IBM 3930 Model 03S and 03D:

    o   PCL Load Module Diskette

Coax Attachment (#9476):

    o   2 EBCDIC Diskettes with the four language groups.

Twinax Attachment (#9217):

    o   2 EBCDIC Diskettes with the four language groups.

Ethernet TCP/IP Attachment (#9218):

    o   Ethernet Adapter Code Diskette

ASCII Attachment (#7651):

    o   PC Asynch and RISC System/6000 Diskettes for 02S, 02D

PostScript Interpreter (#9223):

    o   Two PostScript Code Diskettes

240 PEL IBM 3816 and 3930 Font Management System (#9185):

    o   Diskettes in 3.5 inch or 5.25 inch format
    o   DOS and OS/2 compatible

AFP Core Interchange Font Set (#4850):

    o   Multiple 3.5 inch diskettes to be loaded on the hard drive

DBCS for Coax Attachment Feature #9476 (#4851):

    o   Two 3.5 inch diskettes

DBCS for Twinax Attachment Feature #9417 (#4852):

    o   Two 3.5 inch diskettes

Replacement diskettes may be ordered from the Charlotte Microcode Support
Center. The toll free number is 1-800-247-7118. *Signifies a trademark or
registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. **Ethernet
is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. **PCL and PJL are trademarks of
Hewlett-Packard Corporation **PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe
Systems, Inc. **Novell is a registered trademark of Novell, Incorporated **UNIX
is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. **Windows is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. **NetWare is a registered
trademark of Novell, Inc. **Intel and NetPort are registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation. **LaserJet is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Corporation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. 4232 IBM IMPACT DOT MATRIX PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 4232 is Pennant Systems' new heavy-duty, unattended, impact dot matrix
printer capable of printing at 600 characters per second (CPS).  The IBM
4232-302 is intended to replace IBM 4224-30X printers in environments such as
the IBM mainframe, the IBM AS/400*, the IBM RISC System/6000*, the IBM Personal
System/2*, and local area networks.

The 4232 can be used for printing data processing, office or internal business
documents as well as for printing bar codes, labels and multi-part forms.
These applications are commonly used in most industries, but are especially
popular in the Service Sector industries such as insurance, finance, shipping,
health care, retail, and wholesale.

The 4232 can be offered as a workstation printer or as a shared printer in a
distributed printing environment.  In addition, the 4232 is well-suited for
printing in harsh environments (for example, warehouses or shipping docks) -
environments in which other printing technologies often cannot compete.

All of the paper handling options and features available on IBM 4230 printers
are also available on the new IBM 4232 Printer.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   IBM Heavy Duty Impact Matrix Printer with Serial and Parallel
        Attach
    o   Includes the Following Design Features of the 4230 Printer
        Family:
        -   Quiet Operation - 53 dBA
        -   80 Character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Operator Panel
        -   Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment
        -   Auto Loading (with Dual Purpose Module)
        -   Flexible Forms Handling Supports Cut Sheet or Continuous
            Forms Applications
        -   Straight Paper Path for Trouble-Free Handling of Complex
            Forms
        -   POSTNET Certified
    o   Impressive Print Speeds
        -   600 Characters Per Second (CPS) Fast Draft
        -   400 Characters Per Second (CPS) DP
        -   200 Characters Per Second (CPS) DP Text
        -   100 Characters Per Second (CPS) NLQ
    o   Designed for Heavy Usage - Rated at 16 Million Characters Per
        Month
    o   Op Panel Selectability Allows Simultaneous Connection of the
        Serial (RS-232C/RS-422A) and Parallel (IBM PC ASCII) Interfaces
    o   Compatibility with the IBM Printer Family

Pennant Systems is extending the IBM 423X Printer family with the new IBM 4232,
a heavy-duty impact matrix printer capable of printing 600 characters per
second (CPS).

This new printer complements the capabilities of the 4224 and 4230 models by
providing improved price/performance, full compatibility with the IBM 4224-3XX
plus IBM 4202 emulation resulting in a complete ASCII printing solution with
the "look and feel" of the IBM 4230.

The 4232 printer may be used as a workstation printer for the larger AS/400(R)
systems, RISC System/6000 (R) or Personal System/2 (R) environments and as the
primary shared printer for smaller AS/400 systems and LAN environments.

The IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer provides both 4202 and 4224-3XX emulation
modes.  These are selectable from the operator panel.

The IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer provides IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel,
RS-232-C Serial, and RS-422A Serial host interfaces.

The 4232-302 is the only model offered.

The IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer is a replacement for the IBM 4224-30X
Printers. The IBM 4232 prints in fast draft print quality mode at 600 CPS,
offers simultaneous serial and parallel attachment capability, the 4230 "look
and feel," and an attractive price.

Because the new 4232 printer offers a lower-priced entry product for
heavy-duty, high-speed printing, businesses will spend less money for mid-range
printing needs, thereby improving their competitive advantage.

The new IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer is an IBM heavy-duty ASCII printer which
supports the same forms handling options as the 4230 (for example, Continuous
Forms Module (CFM), Dual Purpose Module (DPM), Document Insertion Device (DID),
and Auto Sheet Feed (ASF)).

The 4232 supports the Novell-certified IBM 4033 LAN adapter and may also attach
to LAN's via LAN-attached IBM PS/2's or IBM PC-compatible personal computers.

The new IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer provides a low-priced migration path
from older, slower 4224-30X printers.  This high speed model allows businesses
to expand their printing volume while minimizing their investment in upgrade
equipment.

This product is included in Category A, Discount Group 4 of the AS/400 Systems
Exhibit (AS400), Category E of the Systems I/O Exhibit (SIO), Category A of the
Advanced Workstation Systems Exhibit (AWS-20), and Category A, Discount Group 5
of the Workstations and Related I/O Exhibit (WKSN2-20). Customers with existing
Volume Discount commitments in these categories of the exhibits may order the
announced product as additional quantities to, or as direct substitutes for,
any other machines in the same category subject to availability.

For further information regarding volume orders, contact your IBM marketing
representative.

MODEL 302 600 cps Heavy Duty Serial/Parallel-attached Matrix Impact Printer.

CUSTOMER SETUP (CSU) Yes. The CFM, DPM, or DID Conversion Kit, #4010 is a
customer setup MES kit as is the ASF Conversion Kit, #4015.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Print Speed
        -   Fast Draft print speed of 600 CPS (characters per second)
        -   DP print speed of 400 CPS (characters per second)
        -   DP Text print speed of 200 CPS (characters per second)
        -   NLQ print speed of 100 CPS (characters per second)
    o   Designed for heavy usage - Rated at 16 million characters per
        month
    o   Standard Serial (RS-232C/RS-422A) and IBM PC ASCII (Centronics)
        Parallel attach
    o   4224 and 4202 emulation modes
        -   4224 emulation provides support for bar code and vector
            graphics PPDS commands. (See RPQ 8V0428 for more information
            regarding 4224 and 4202 emulation support or reference the
            IBM 4232 Product and Programming Description manual,
            publications order number GA24-4385.)
    o   Maximum print resolution of 144 X 144
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to IBM OS/2* Token Ring
        LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to IBM OS/2 Ethernet LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to IBM AIX/6000 Token
        Ring LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to IBM AIX/6000 Ethernet
        LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to Novell** Ethernet**
        LANs
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to Novell Token Ring LANs

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  658mm (25.9 inches)
    o   Depth:  396mm (15.6 inches)
    o   Height: 315mm (12.4 inches)
    o   Weight: 20.4kg (45 lbs)

With automatic sheet feed (ASF) installed:

    o   Width:  658mm (25.9 inches)
    o   Depth:  700mm (27.6 inches)
    o   Height: 300mm (11.8 inches) + 230mm (9.1 inches) (paper supports)
    o   ASF Weight: Separator 6kg (13.2 pounds); Transport 3kg
        (6.6 pounds)

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Power Requirement:  250 VA
    o   Voltages:  100 - 127 VAC single phase grounded 50/60 Hz; 200 -
        240 VAC single phase grounded 50/60 Hz
    o   Heat Output:
        40  Watts (137 BTU/hr) -- Idle;
        90  Watts (308 BTU/hr) -- Normal print pattern;
        130 Watts (444 BTU/hr) -- Dense print pattern

IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer with continuous forms or dual-purpose module
features:

    o   Temperature:  10 to 40.6C (50 to 105F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
    o   Max Wet Bulb:  26.7C (80F)

IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer with automatic sheet feed or document insertion
features:

    o   Temperature:  15.6 to 32.2C (60 to 90F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 percent
    o   Max Wet Bulb:  22.8C (73F)
      Noise Emission:                       Operating       Idle
                                            ---------     --------
       4232 without ASF installed:
           Sound power level    (LWAd):      7.0 bels     4.5 bels
           Sound pressure level (LpAm):      53 dBA       30 dBA

       4232 with ASF installed:
           Sound power level    (LWAd):      7.0 bels     4.5 bels
           Sound pressure level (LpAm):      55 dBA       30 dBA

LIMITATIONS The overall throughput depends on the emulation mode (for example,
4202 or 4224), print mode, application program, system response time, and the
type of print operation being done.  Any print operation that requires multiple
passes or a reduction of horizontal dot spacing causes a reduction in the
throughput.

Some print operations that affect throughput are:

    o   Heavy print patterns
    o   Line length -- number of characters per line
    o   Bold printing, double-strike printing, and other types of
        emphasis
    o   Graphics printing
    o   Bar-code printing

The 4232 uses an internal print management feature to guard against overheating
the print head due to the quantity of dots being printed.  During extended
printing of dense lines, or during extended printing of long line lengths, this
temperature safeguard may cause the speed of the print mechanism to decrease,
lowering overall throughput proportionally.

The 4232 is supported in 4202 emulation mode by most application software. The
following deviations from 4202 emulation should be noted:

    o   The 4232 has a 13.2 inch writing line which assures compatibility
        with the 4202.  However, the 4202XL has a 13.6 inch writing line.
    o   The 4232 cannot accept and print 4202 font downloads.  Instead,
        national language support requirements are provided via 4232
        resident fonts.
    o   The 4232 condensed print is at 15 CPI or 16.7 CPI.  For the 4202,
        condensed print is at 17.1 CPI or 20 CPI.
    o   While the 4232 supports double high printing, it will not print
        double high characters like the 4202.  Instead, the page format
        integrity is maintained by printing single high characters with
        double-space line feeds.
    o   The 4232 will support the CANCEL control, but in some situations
        CANCEL will clear a different amount of data than it clears on
        the 4202 for the same job.  Fortunately, CANCEL is rarely, if
        ever, used by the popular drivers.

The IBM 4232 Impact Matrix Printer supports the Essay font (i.e., proportional
spacing) in DP Text and NLQ modes only.  Certain characters and code pages are
unprintable in fast-draft print quality.

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The RS-232C serial interface will attach to:

    o   IBM AS/400 ASCII workstation controller
    o   3174 controller via the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
    o   RISC System/6000
    o   PS/2* computer COMx ports and to a Token-Ring or Ethernet LAN via
        one of these computers
    o   LAN Attachment (i.e., Token Ring or Ethernet) via the Novell-
        certified IBM 4033 LAN adpater
    o   IBM-compatible PC's utilizing an RS-232C interface

The RS-422A serial interface will attach to:

    o   RISC System/6000
    o   AS/400 ASCII workstation controller

The IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel interface will attach to:

    o   RISC System/6000 workstations, excluding POWERServer 930
    o   PS/2 computer LPTx ports and to a Token-Ring or Ethernet LAN via
        one of these computers
    o   LAN attachment via the Novell-certified IBM 4033 LAN adapter
    o   IBM-compatible PC's utilizing the IBM PC ASCII (Centronics)
        Parallel interface
    o   AS/400 twinax terminals including 348X, 3477 and 3197
    o   Coax terminal 3482

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS IBM 4232 IMPACT MATRIX PRINTER ASCII SOFTWARE SUPPORT
The IBM 4232-302 can use the IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS)* in a
Proprinter (4202) emulation when attached to Serial (RS-232C/RS-422A)
interfaces or the IBM PC ASCII (Centronics) Parallel interface. 4224-emulation
may also be available.  In 4224-emulation mode, the 4232 will support PPDS bar
code and vector graphics commands.  For more information, reference 4224 RPQ
8V0428 or the "IBM 4232 Product and Programming Description", publication order
number GA24-4385.

The following systems support the 4232-302:

     System           Software - Minimum Level     Data Stream/Emulation
   ----------        -------------------------     ---------------------
   IBM PS/2           OS/2 1.1                          PPDS/4202 or 4224
                      OS/2 LAN Server 1.0               PPDS/4202 or 4224
                      OS/2 Extended Services 1.0        PPDS/4202
                      OS/2 Communications Manager/2 1.0 PPDS/4202
                      DOS 3.3                           PPDS/4202 or 4224
                      Microsoft** (4) Windows** 3.0 (4)     PPDS/4202
                  (5) PC Support/400 W/S Function V2.2  PPDS/4202
 IBM RISC System/6000 AIX Version 3.1.5                 PPDS/4202 or 4224
   IBM AS/400     (5) OS/400 V2.3 Host Print Transform  PPDS/4202
                  (5) OS/400 V2.2                       PPDS/4202

IBM 4232-302 IBM OS/2, IBM AIX, AND NOVELL NETWARE LAN OPERATING SYSTEM SUPPORT
VIA THE IBM 4033 LAN ADAPTER The IBM 4232-302 will support the following via
attachment to the IBM 4033 LAN adapter:

       System           Software - Minumum Level      Data Stream
     ----------        -------------------------   ---------------------
     Token Ring(1)     OS/2 Lan Server 1.2, 1.3         PPDS
     Ethernet(2)       OS/2 Lan Server 1.2, 1.3         PPDS
     Token Ring(1)     IBM AIX Ver. 3.1.5               PPDS
     Ethernet  (2)     IBM AIX Ver. 3.1.5               PPDS
     Token Ring(3)     Novell (5) NetWare** (5) 2.2,    PPDS
                        3.11
     Ethernet  (4)     Novell NetWare 2.2, 3.11         PPDS
     1) The IBM 4033 Model 001 provides support for Token Ring 4/16MBps
        data rate.
     2) The 4033 Model 002 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT
        10Mbps data rate. The 4033 Model 003 provides
        support for Ethernet 10Base2 and 10Base5 10Mpbs data rate.
     3) The 4033 Model 011 provides support for Token Ring 4/16Mbps
        data rate.
     4) The 4033 Model 012 provides support for Ethernet 10BaseT 10Mbps
        data rate. The 4033 Model 013 provides support
        for Ethernet 10Base2 and 10Base5 10Mbps data rate.
     5) Paper bin #4 is not selectable when the IBM 4232 with
        the Auto Sheed Feed feature installed is attached to an
        AS/400.  In addition, only the 4202 supported PPDS commands
        are supported when the IBM 4232 is attached to an AS/400.

CHARACTER SETS The 4232-302 will provide non-English characters in the same
quality level, pitches, and fonts as English characters with only three
exceptions.  Arabic, Thai, and Cyrillic are not available in the Essay font
(i.e., proportional-spacing).  Furthermore, the Essay font can only be printed
in DP Text or NLQ modes for the supported code pages.

The 4232 will support the following resident Code Pages and Character Sets:

                            |     ASCII       | U | E | A |
                            |                 | S | M | G |
                            |                 |   | E |   |
                            |                 |   | A |   |
                            |                 |   |   |   |
     LANGUAGE               | GCSGID |  CPGID |   |   |   |
                            |        |        |   |   |   |
  Arabic X/A                |  994   |  864   |   | * |   |
  Austrian/German           |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Belgian                   |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Brazilian                 |  980   |  850   |   |   | * |
  Canadian French           |  993   |  863   |   |   | * |
  Cyrillic                  |  985   |  855   |   | * |   |
  Danish/Norwegian          |  995   |  865   |   | * |   |
  English (UK)/Ireland      |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Finnish/Swedish           |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  French/French Azerty      |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Greek (new)               |  998   |  869   |   | * |   |
  Greek (old)               |  981   |  851   |   | * |   |
  Hebrew                    |  992   |  862   |   | * |   |
  Icelandic                 |  991   |  861   |   | * |   |
  Italian                   |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Latin 2/ROECE             |  982   |  852   |   | * |   |
  Netherlands               |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  OCR-A (1)                 |  968   |  876   | * | * | * |
  OCR-B (1)                 |  969   |  877   | * | * | * |
  PC Multilingual           |  980   |  850   | * | * | * |
  Portugal                  |  990   |  860   |   | * |   |
  South Africa              |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Spanish                   |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Spanish Speaking          |  980   |  850   |   |   | * |
  Swiss                     |  980   |  850   |   | * |   |
  Thai                      |  966   |  874   |   |   | * |
  Turkish                   |  987   |  857   |   | * |   |
  USA/Canada                |  919   |  437   | * |   | * |
  Note (1): OCR-A and OCR-B fonts can only be printed in NLQ print mode.

FONT SUPPORT The 4232-302 will provide print quality levels, character
spacings, and character configurations (resident fonts) as follows:

    o   Fast Draft, Fast Draft Italic (Gothic):  10, 12, 15, and 16.7 CPI
    o   DP, DP Italic (Gothic): 10, 12, 15, and 16.7 CPI
    o   DP Text, DP Text Italic:  10, 12, 15 CPI(Courier), and
        Proportional Spacing (Essay)
    o   NLQ, NLQ Italic:  10, 12, 15 CPI (Courier), and Proportional
        Spacing (Essay)
Note: The above fonts and print quality levels will include all characters
defined by the Resident Code Pages described in "Character Sets" above unless
otherwise noted. Any quality level can be printed at either 6 or 8 lines per
inch (LPI).

SPECIFY FEATURES

    o   #9200 for Low Voltage - 100V to 127V, 50/60Hz(default)
    o   #9201 for High Voltage - 200V to 240V, 50/60Hz (U.S. Government
        orders only)

Two lengths of power cords are available.  Specify #9250 for 6.0ft (1.8m) power
cord with non-locking plug OR #9251 for 2.8m (9 ft) power cord with non-locking
plug.  #9251 is the default.

    o   Specify at least one and only one of the following forms devices
        at time of machine order (no default).  See "Special Features"
        for descriptions of forms devices under the second feature code.
        -   #9501 for Continuous Forms Device (#4001), or
        -   #9502 for Dual Purpose Module (#4002), or
        -   #9503 for Document Insertion Device (#4003), or
        -   #4004 for Automatic Sheet Feed.  Features #9501, #9502 and
            #9503 are not allowed with #4004. However, features #9501,
            #9502 and #9503 may be ordered with #4015, the Automatic
            Sheet Feed Kit, at initial order time.

SPECIAL FEATURES

    o   Continuous Forms Module (CFM - F1) #4001:
        Provides an operator changeable "drop in" mechanism optimized for
        handling continuous forms utilizing pull tractors.  For customers
        whose applications require continuous forms but do not require
        any "document on demand" (DOD) capability, this module is the
        best choice.  The right hand tractor is adjustable to accommodate
        forms width from 3 inches to 15 inches.  Forms length can be from
        3 inches to 14 inches.  Up to 6-part forms may be used.
        Limitations:  Forms less than 6 inches in length or width and
        forms greater than 12.5 inches in length should be tested for
        satisfactory stacking.  This CFM feature cannot be installed in
        the 4232 simultaneously with other forms handling features
        (#9502, #9503, #4002, #4003, and #4004).  Maximum:  One.
        Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
    o   Dual Purpose Module (DPM - F2) #4002:
        Provides an operator changeable "drop in" mechanism for handling
        both long continuous forms jobs and "document on demand" (DOD)
        tearoff applications.  The DPM allows the user to remove (tear
        off) the individual printed form without wasting a blank form
        each time forms are removed from the printer.  The DPM is
        required for applications which require the Document on Demand
        function.  The DPM is recommended for applications which need a
        combination of long continuous forms jobs and the Document on
        Demand function.  The CFM is recommended for all continuous forms
        applications which do not require the DOD function especially
        when unattended printing is the only mode of operation.  The
        right hand tractor and feed rolls are adjustable to accommodate
        forms width from 3 inches to 15 inches.  Forms length can be from
        3 inches to 14 inches.  Limitations:  Up to 6-part continuous
        forms may be used., Forms less than 6 inches in length or width
        and forms greater than 12.5 inches in length should be tested for
        satisfactory stacking. Applications requiring more than six forms
        to be fed before separation (tear off) should be tested for
        satisfactory operation.  No limitations exist to limit the
        printable area on forms.  This feature cannot be installed in
        the 4232 simultaneously with other forms handling features
        (#9501, #9503, #4001, #4003, and #4004).  Maximum:  One.  Field
        Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
        Note: For both the CFM and the DPM, five- and six-part forms
        should be tested on an individual basis for acceptable feeding,
        registration, and print quality before production.  Likewise, for
        optimum performance, printing should be restricted to 6.4 mm
        (0.25 in.) from all edges, holes, or folds on the forms.
    o   Document Insertion Device (DID - F3) #4003
        Provides an operator changeable "drop in" mechanism to handle
        individually inserted forms.  Includes a snap on guide for the
        left edge of the form.  The right hand set of feed rolls is
        adjustable to accommodate forms width from 3 inches to 15 inches.
        Forms length can be from 7 inches to 14 inches.  Limitations:
        Forms over 13 inches wide should be tested for satisfactory
        feeding and registration.  2- to 6-part forms should be tested
        for satisfactory feeding, registration, and print quality.
        Multi-part form sets must not be fastened with staples, and
        must be glued only at the top edge securely enough to prevent
        form separation while passing through the printer.  This feature
        cannot be installed in the 4232 simultaneously with other forms
        handling features (#9501, #9502, #4001, #4002, and #4004).
        Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.
    o   Automatic Sheet Feed (ASF - F4) #4004:
        The IBM 4230/4232 Auto Sheet Feeder provides an operator
        changeable mechanism for automatic feeding of cut sheets.
        Complements NLQ printing for business correspondence
        applications.  Includes three automatic input bins and one manual
        input bin.  Each automatic bin holds up to 220 sheets of variable
        width 80g/m2 (20 lb) single-part paper.  Multi-part forms (up to
        4-part) can also be used.  The manual bin allows feeding a single
        sheet of variable width paper, either single or multi-part.  The
        output stacker holds up to 250 sheets of 80g/m2 (20 lb) single-
        part paper, stacked in sequential order.  Bin selection can be
        controlled by the host system or from the 4232 operator panel.
        All operator control is from the 4232 operator panel; there are
        no controls or indicators on the ASF device.  Limitations: This
        device cannot be installed simultaneously with other forms
        handling features (#9501 #9502 #9503 #4001 #4002 #4003). Also,
        AS/400 system support for paper bin selection can only access two
        of the three bins provided with the ASF.  See ASF paper/forms
        specifications below.  Maximum:  One.  Field Installation:  No,
        see #4015 for field installation.  Customer Setup:  Not
        applicable.
    o   ASF Paper Specifications:
        Paper meeting the following specifications is acceptable for use
        in the ASF.  All other paper must be tested by the customer for
        suitable performance.
        -   Paper sizes (single or multi-part):
             ASF Bin            Paper Length             Paper Width
         --------------   ----------------------   ---------------------
         Bin 1 (auto)     127-356mm (5-14 in.)     102-356mm (4-14 in.)
         Bin 2 (auto)     203-356mm (8-14 in.)     102-356mm (4-14 in.)
         Bin 3 (auto)     279-356mm (11-14 in.)    102-356mm (4-14 in.)
         Bin 4 (manual)   127-356mm (5-14 in.)     102-356mm (4-14 in.)
        -   Paper width within a stack may vary no more than 0.5mm
            (0.020 in.).  Cuts must be orthogonal (90 degrees) with a
            deviation no greater than 3 angular minutes.
        -   Paper type should be one of the following compositions:
                No. 1 sulphite (100 % chemical wood pulp).
                25% to 100% cotton content.
        -   Basis weight should be 60 to 100g/m2 (16 to 27 lb) Paper
            weight given in pounds (lb) is the weight of 500 sheets (one
            ream) of paper sized 17 x 22 inches.
        -   Thickness of a single sheet should be a minimum of 0.086mm
            (0.0034 in.) and a maximum of 0.117mm (0.0046 in.).  (Also
            see multi-part forms specifications).
        -   For optimum performance, use 75 to 90g/m2 (20 to 24 lb)
            cotton content (25% or 50%) plain bond paper.
        -   Multi-part forms can be used in all ASF bins.  Tolerances
            and environmental conditions are more critical for multi-part
            forms than for single sheets.  All multi-part forms must be
            tested by the customer for suitable performance with the ASF.
        -   The top surface of the first sheet of any multi-part form
            must have a surface smoothness range of 18 to 30 Bekk or 180
            to 140 Sheffield.
        -   Multi-part forms used on the ASF are restricted to snap-out
            or top-glued forms only.
        -   Multi-part snap-out forms must meet the following
            specifications (refer to the IBM 4232 Printer ASF "General
            Information Manual" for an illustration of recommended snap-
            out form construction):
              Pressure sensitive paper (4 sheets maximum)
               First sheet    70 - 80g/m2 (19 - 21 lb)
               2nd/3rd sheet  40 - 60g/m2 (11 - 16 lb)
               Last sheet     70 - 80g/m2 (19 - 21 lb)
              Carbon sets (4 sheets maximum)
               First sheet    70 - 80g/m2 (19 - 21 lb)
               2nd/3rd sheet  35 - 40g/m2 (9 - 11 lb)
               Last sheet     70 - 80g/m2 (19 - 21 lb)
               Carbon paper   25g/m2 (6.6 lb) approximate
               (Carbon non-coated surface must be rough.)
              Snap-out perforation
               First sheet     3 : 0.8mm
               2nd/3rd sheet   7 : 0.8mm
               Last sheet      7 : 0.8mm
               (Micro-perforations allowed for first and last
               sheets, 72 perfs per inch recommended.)
        -   Multi-part top-glued forms must have a top edge that is flat,
            smooth, and free from any traces of glue.  Form sets cut
            against the grain are more acceptable than sets cut with
            the grain.
        -   Unsatisfactory paper and forms (the following are some of
            the papers and forms that do not perform reliably or may
            cause damage to the sheet feed mechanism):
                Coated paper
                Vellums
                Highly sized erasable bond
                Synthetic paper
                Translucents
                Some paper with a cockle finish
                Some multi-part forms not meeting specifications
                Some pressure sensitive adhesive labels
                Some chemically treated paper (ink-impregnated paper)
                Some preprinted forms requiring high registration
                accuracy for character location
                Envelopes
                Card stock
                Some preprinted paper containing chemicals that
                contaminate the sheet feed mechanism or change the
                frictional characteristics of the paper
                Stapled or clipped forms
                Paper with gum surfaces, holes, perforations, cutouts or
                windows
                Paper with embossment height exceeding 0.5mm (0.020 in.).
                (Embossments must not be located within 15mm (0.59 in.)
                of any edge of a sheet)
                Folded documents
                Paper with curl or waviness exceeding  3mm (0.118 in.)
                Reams with edges or corners folded or bonded together
                Paper with poorly cut or rough edges
        -   Paper used in the ASF should be new, unused, and without
            packaging damage.
        -   Paper of different types (letterhead, plain, etc.), sizes, or
            composition should not be mixed or interleaved in the same
            ASF bin.
        -   Paper should not be exposed to adverse temperature and
            humidity conditions.  (Consult the manufacturer for
            recommended storage environment).
    o   Paper Handling Conversion Kit #4010:  Provides parts to convert
        a printer ordered with #4004 (Auto Sheet Feed) to other forms
        handling features, #4001, #4002 and #4003.  Maximum:  One.
        Field installation:  Yes. Customer Setup:  Yes.
    o   Paper Handling Conversion Kit #4015 Provides parts to convert a
        printer ordered without #4004 (Auto Sheet Feed) to ASF
        capability.  Consists of the ASF device, cover parts, and
        supporting publications.  Maximum:  One. Field installation:
        Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes.

ACCESSORIES A line cord is provided with the printer.

Attachment cables are not provided. The IBM 4232 is attachable to the same
serial or parallel cabling as other IBM printers including the Models 4224-3XX
(serial-only), 4234-009 or 4234-013 (serial and parallel), and the 4202
(parallel-only).  The IBM 4232 is attachable to the industry standard IBM PC
ASCII (Centronics) Parallel, RS-232-C Serial, and RS-422A Serial cabling. For
best results, it is recommended that existing IBM parallel and serial cabling
be used. New attachment cables can be purchased from IBM's authorized
distributors or from IBM Teleservice and Customer Support (TCS) by part number.
Call IBM TCS toll-free at 800-426-2468.  Mail orders should be sent to:

    IBM Corporation
    IBM Teleservice and Customer Support
    One Culver Road
    Dayton, NJ 08810

Cable part number references for ordering via TCS are as follows:

    Attachment           Part Number           Cable Length
    ----------           -----------           ------------
    Parallel             1525612                1.8 m ( 6 ft)
                         (or equivalent)
    Serial (RS-232C)     8509386                6.1 m (20 ft)
    Serial (RS-422A)     70X8652               15.2 m (50 ft)

AS/400 ASCII Attachment:

    Attachment           Part Number
    ----------           -----------
    Parallel to PC       1525612
                         (or equivalent)
    Serial to PC         8509386
                         (or equivalent)
    Serial to ASCII
     W/S Controller      1319143

RISC System/6000: For RS-232C attachment to the IBM RISC System/6000, an IBM
Async cable EIA-232/V.24 (part number 6323741) with a printer/terminal
interposer EIA-232 (part number 58F2861).  These RISC System/6000 cables
require the printer system serial interface adapter (part number 1319143).

IBM 4033 Model 001, Token Ring:

    o   IBM Token-Ring Network PC Adapter Cable (IBM part #6339098), if
        the LAN segment uses IBM Cabling System data grade media and
        operates at a ring data rate of either 4MBps or 16 MBps.
    o   Type 3 Media Filter Cable, if the LAN segment uses telephone
        twisted-pair media and operates at a ring data rate of 4MBps.
Note: Cabling distance is as defined in "IBM Token Ring Network Introduction
and Planning Guide" (GA27-3677).

IBM 4033 Model 002, Ethernet 10BaseT:

    o   An 8-pin RJ-45 connector is used to attach unshielded twisted-
        pair (telephone) cable.
Note: Cabling distance is as specified in IEEE 802.3 standard for Ethernet
10BaseT.

IBM 4033 Model 003, Ethernet 10Base2:

    o   A BNC jack is used for attaching BNC-T connector provided with
        the IBM 4033. This BNC-T connector is then used to connect the
        RG-58 coaxial cable between the networks.
Note: The IBM 4033 attaches directly to the network through the BNC-T
connector.

IBM 4033 Model 003, Ethernet 10Base5:

    o   15-pin D-shell connector is used for attaching the IBM 4033 to
        an attachment unit interface (AUI) cable.
        Note: AUI Cable distance as specified in IEEE 802.3 standard for
        Ethernet 10Base5.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation **Novell
is a registered trademark of Novell, Incorporated **Windows is a registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation. **NetWare is a registered trademark of
Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. 6408 IBM LINE MATRIX PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 6408 is IBM's new mid-range line matrix printer for the SCS and ASCII
marketplace.  These heavy-duty, continuous-form, impact line printers allow
customers to print up to 800 lines per minute (LPM) on multiple system
environments including IBM mainframe distributed, IBM mid-range, IBM RISC
System/6000* and Local Area Networks (LANs) through the IBM 4033.

The new Models A00 and CT0 provide improved price/performance; and
compatibility with SCS and ASCII models of the IBM 4234 and other predecessor
IBM printers.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Improved Price/performance.
    o   Print speeds of 800/600/320 LPM in Draft/DP/NLQ print modes.
    o   Very quiet operation - 52 dBA.
    o   30,000 pages/month average duty cycle.
    o   Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Operator Display.
    o   Flexible forms handling, including forms thickness adjustments.
    o   Enhanced Bar Code and graphics support.

The IBM 6408 Models A00 and CT0 offer significantly improved price/ performance
because of lower purchase prices compared to predecessor IBM printers, and also
because of lower ownership costs, especially ribbon costs.

The IBM 6408 printers purchase prices and lower operating costs, plus bar code
and graphics capability allows the customer to save money and increase printing
flexibility.

The IBM 6408 printer with the IGP (Intelligent Graphics Processor) Printronix
Emulation, or Code V- Printronix Emulation will enable support of bar code and
graphics applications not available on predecessor non-IPDS IBM printers.

The IBM 6408 Printer provides a low-priced migration path from older, lower
performance ASCII and SCS printers such as IBM 4234, 5224 and 5225.

The IBM 6408 Printer models are upgradeable in function by the addition of IGP
and Code V Emulation.

The IBM 6408 printer is upgradeable in function by the addition of IGP and Code
V Emulation.

The new IBM 6408 Printer models are compatible with current models of SCS and
ASCII 4234 models and older IBM printers which they replace.

Because the IBM 6408 models are compatible with current and older IBM printers,
existing software applications are usable, protecting the customers' investment
in application programming.

MODEL A00 Model A00 is a 800 LPM Line Matrix Printer.  The printer offers a
unique interface structure  selectable from the operator panel that supports
three popular attachment methods.  Standard on all models are PC Parallel ,
Dataproducts parallel and RS-232-C Serial.  In addition the printers offer two
emulation standards, also selectable from the operator panel, IBM Proprinter*
III and EPSON FX Graphics.

This model printer is designed to be used to address the general printer market
requirements for the ASCII systems such as PC's and RISC System/ 6000 and on
LAN's where a high speed Line Matrix Printer is required.

Users may also select the optional graphic features supporting the IGP and CODE
V (Printronix emulations) graphic languages for applications requiring bar
codes, labels and forms background creation.

MODEL CT0 Model CTO is a 800 LPM Line Matrix Printer. The standard interface
structure supports both twinaxial and coaxial system attachments and is switch
selectable. In addition, the following emulation are supported and selected via
the operator panel.

    Attachment           IBM Emulation
    Coaxial              4234-001 or 3287
    Twinaxial            4234-002 ir 5225-3/4

Users may also select the optional graphic features supporting the IGP and CODE
V (Printronix emulations) graphic languages for applications requiring bar
codes, labels and forms background creation.

This model printer is designed to offer users an alternative choice for print
requirements where NON-IPDS graphics are required or where users wish to
maintain existing program and configuration formats to to replace 4234 models
001/002, 5225 or 3287 model printers.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

    o   Maximum rated print speed of 800 LPM
    o   Standard RS-232, and PC Parallel on Model A00
    o   Coax and Twinax Attachment for the Model CT0
    o   IBM 4033 LAN Connection for attachment to Token Ring or
        Ethernet** LANs using IBM AIX Version 3, Microsoft or IBM OS/2*
        LAN Server, Microsoft** LAN Manager and Novell** Netware.
    o   Intel Netport for Token Ring and Ethernet using Novell Netware.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  68.6cm (27.0 inches)
    o   Depth:  72.9cm (28.7 inches)
    o   Height:  108 cm (42.5 inches)
    o   Weight:  102kg (225 lbs) Unpacked
    o   Weight:  129kg (285 lbs) Packaged for shipping

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

    o   Temperature:
        -   Operating 10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
        -   Storage -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F)
    o   Relative Humidity:
        -   Operating 10 to 90 (percent) noncondensing
        -   Storage 5 to 95 (percent) noncondensing
    o   Electrical power:
        -   Standby:  121 Watts
        -   Operating:  360 Watts maximum (black plot)
        -   Noise Level: 52 dBA (tested per ISO 7779)
        -   Maximum RMS Current:  9A @ 120 V; 5A @240 V

The IBM 6408 Model A00 is subject to the following limitations: The use of
ASCII pass-through commands in combination with the optional feature requires
that the user select commands that were intended for the same feature. An
example would be the use of an ASCII command to start a function and the use of
a similar feature command to end would cause unexpected results.

Use of high speed fonts for 15 cpi or 17 cpi critical applications should be
avoided without assuring readability of the application.

The IBM 6408 Model CT0 is subject to the following limitations: In coaxial
emulations the following features are not supported:

    o   Friction feed paper handling
    o   Dot matrix of 9 wide 8 high
    o   Dot matrix of 4 0r 7 wide by 8 high
    o   IBM 3287 Models 1C and 2C
    o   Forms width of 17.7 inches
    o   Programmed symbols 2 and 4 , 190 character downloadable fonts
    o   Data analysis = APL feature
    o    Graphic escape

In twinaxial emulations the following features are not supported:

    o   Friction feed paper handling
    o   Dot matrix of 9 wide 8 high
    o   Forms width of 17.7 inches
    o   Japanese Katakana character sets

MACHINE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 6408 attach to systems, controllers, and
processors as described below.

    6408          System/
    Printer       Control Unit/
    Model         Processor                Attachment
    ---------   ------------------   --------------------------
    Model CT0    3174 Controllers    Coaxial ports (Release A3.0 or
                                     higher)
                                     or Workstation Adapter port
                 ES/9370, ES/9000    Workstation Subsystem
                   Processors        Controller port (#6020 or #6120)
    Model CT0    AS/400              Twinaxial Workstation port
                                     on 9402, 9404, and 9406
                 5394 & 5494
                 Control Unit        Workstation port
    Model A00    AS/400              ASCII Workstation Controller port on
                                     9402 (except Model Y10), 9404, and 9406
                 3174 Controller     Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
                 ES/9370             ASCII Subsystem
                 Micro Channel 370   ASCII Serial or Parallel port
                 RISC System/6000    ASCII Serial or Parallel port
                 4033 LAN Connection ASCII Serial or Parallel port
                 PC, PS/2            ASCII Serial or Parallel port
                 non-IBM PC's        ASCII Serial or Parallel port

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM/370* AND SYSTEM/390* (MVS/VM/VSE ENVIRONMENTS)
Programming Support Existing non-graphics printing applications for the 4234
Model 001 and 3262 will support the (non-IPDS) 6408 Model CT0.

AS/400 PROGRAMMING SUPPORT The IBM 6408 Model CT0 Printer is supported on the
AS/400 Models 9402 (except Model Y10), 9404, and 9406 with OS/400* (5728-SS1)
Release 1.0 or later and on AS/Entry (9402-Y10) with System Support Program
(SSP) Release 6.0.

OS/400 support for the printer includes:

    o   Most 4234 Model 02 functions are supported by System/36 SSP and
        System/38 CPF.  Many printer applications can be migrated from
        System/36 and System/38, with few if any modifications required.
    o   Operating Control Language (CL) support of LPI, CPI, print
        quality, and font selection.
    o   Data Description Specifications (DDS) support of LPI, font
        selection, bold printing, underscore, expanded characters, print
        quality, and code page selection.
    o   OfficeVision/400 (5738-WP1).
    o   AS/400 Business Graphics Utility (5728-DS1).
    o   Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM).

The Automatic Identification Printing System PRPQ P90035 is not supported on
the IBM 6408 Printer.

The IBM 6408 Model A00 Printer is supported on the AS/400 (9402 except Model
Y10) with OS/400 Release 3.0, on the AS/400 (9404) with Release 2.0 or later,
and on the AS/400 (9406) with Release 2.0 or later.

PC AND PS/2 PROGRAMMING SUPPORT The IBM 6408 Model A00 Printer is supported by
DOS (Release 3.3 and higher, IBM PC LAN Program V1.32) and OS/2 (Standard
Edition 1.2 and Extended Edition 1.2 and higher) environments as a Pro-Printer
III XL(4202-003). Also supported is Windows Level 3.0 and above.

RISC SYSTEM/6000 PROGRAMMING SUPPORT The IBM 6408 Model A00 Printer is
supported by AIX Version 3 as a 4234 Printer.

SPECIFY FEATURES

    o   IGP Printronix Emulation (#4840)
    o   CODE V Printronix Emulation (#4850)

POWER CORDS Power cord, except for Chicago is a no-specify item. For Chicago
only, specify #9986.

CABLES Cables are supplied by the customer.

SPECIAL FEATURES IGP PRINTRONIX EMULATION (#4840) CODE V PRINTRONIX EMULATION
(#4850) The graphics features contain an optional graphics processor located
within the printer that performs various graphic instructions based on a
program language that performs various graphic instructions that is interleaved
into the base application program. The graphics card is inactive, until
activated by the user using command type control codes to indicate that program
data with interleaved graphic data are in transit to the printer.

The data streams are divided into two groups:

    o   Group One - Normal SCS Data Stream which passes through the
        graphics card and no action is taken.
    o   Group Two - The graphics commands interleaved within Group One
        data. The graphic card interrupts the data into graphic output
        and then reports both data streams to the printer for printing.
        The result is normal SCS data combined with bar codes, forms
        backgrounds and expanded characters in a final format.

The graphic NON-IPDS data streams, IGP Printronix Emulation and Code V
Printronix Emulation, while similar in output capabilities, the individual
options use different graphical program languages to perform the desired
graphic function.  Users will be responsible for development of application
programs, using the programming guides that are supplied with these features.

Key functions of the graphic features are:

    o   Forms Generation - Generation of forms background or label
        formats with normal text or bar codes.
    o   Bar Code Symbols - Several different Bar codes in various
        rotation formats.
    o   Lines and Boxes - Commands that simplify the creation of label
        and form backgrounds.
    o   Expanded Characters - Ability to print characters up to 99 times
        normal size.
    o   Logos - Users have the ability to create and store for later use.
    o   Compressed Print - Use of 13 and 17 cpi density not supported on
        the IBM 5225 or IBM 3287

Maximum:  One per machine.  Customer Set-up:  No.  Field Installation:  Yes.
*Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. **Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation **Novell
is a registered trademark of Novell, Incorporated


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. IBM 4234 DOT BAND PRINTER MODEL 009 and 013 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

IBM DOT BAND PRINTER MODELS 7, 8, AND 9

IBM 4234 Dot Band Printer Models 7, 8, and 9 are line matrix impact printers
providing printing speeds of up to 475 LPM in Draft mode, 350 LPM in Data
Processing mode and 160 LPM in Near Letter Quality

A high function multi-language operator display panel, expanded printing
capabilities and a range of advanced functions for those systems supporting the
Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) provide a new performance point relative
to the existing IBM 4234 Models 001, 002.  The IBM 4234 Models 7, 8 and 9 can
be converted to the corresponding higher speed Model 11, 12 or 13 via the Model
Upgrade.  Also available are conversions that allow host-attachments to be
changed in the field.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Model 7 (coaxial) and Model 8 (twinaxial) support IPDS, Intelligent
        Printer Data Stream.
    o   Serial/Parallel attachment to PC, PS/2, 6150, RISC System/6000, AS/400
        (serial only), 3X74 and ES/9370 systems; support by LAN software for the
        Model 9; and direct LAN attachment via IBM 4033.
    o   Improved price performance over the IBM 4234 Models 001 and 002 with
        upgrade capability to the faster speed 4234 Models 11,12 or 13
    o   Three selectable print qualities yielding up to 475 LPM (Draft), 350 LPM
        (Data Processing) and 160 LPM (Near Letter Quality).
    o   Significant improvements in compressed mode printing over the 4234 Models
        001 and 002 with print capability at 10, 12, 13.3, 15, 16.7, 18 CPI and
        proportional horizontal spacing.
    o   Ease of use features including enhanced operator panel, power-assisted
        forms loading, and eject/restore function to reduce forms waste plus a
        convenient replaceable ribbon cartridge.
    o   National Language Support provides 24 printable languages for Model 7, 23
        languages for Model 8 and 12 languages for Model 9.
    o   Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) operator panel displays messages in French,
        German, Italian, Spanish, Japanese, and U.S. English

As additions to the IBM 4234 Dot Band Printer family, the 4234 Models 7, 8 and
9 offer improved price performance over the IBM 4234 Models 001 and 002. Print
speeds range from up to 475 LPM in Draft (upper case only), up to 350 LPM in
Data Processing and up to 160 LPM in Near-Letter Quality when printing at 10
CPI and 6 LPI.  In addition to these higher speeds, the Models 7 and 8 support
the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS), resulting in a variety of enhanced
data processing, word processing, graphics and forms generation capabilities.
The 4234 Models 7, 8, and 9 can be upgraded to the corresponding higher speed
Models 11, 12, or 13, and all six attachment conversions (model conversions)
are available.

The 4234 Model 9 provides IBM 4202 function emulation for the AS/400, RISC
System/6000, PC, PS/2 and 6150 Micro Computer processors.  This expands the
attachment capabilities of the 4234 family to the serial/parallel environment
for those applications requiring heavy duty, intermediate speed printing.

The RS-232-C/RS-422-A and IBM PC parallel connectors support the transfer of
messages using the Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS).  Direct LAN attachment
(Token Ring or Ethernet) is supported via the IBM 4033 LAN Connection for
printers and plotters.

Models 7, 8, and 9 each provide 512Kb of printer storage.  Refer to the
"Machine Requirements" and "Programming Requirements" sections for further
details regarding system requirements for these printers.

These printer models have expanded font style and character spacing
capabilities.  The "Gothic" font style can be printed with character spacings
of 10, 12, 13.3, 15, 16.7 and 18 cpi in both Draft and Data Processing modes,
and at 13.3, 16.7 and 18 cpi in Near-Letter quality mode.  The "Courier" font
style can be printed at 10, 12, and 15 cpi in Near-Letter quality mode.
Additionally, the "Essay" font style (proportional spacing at approximately 12
cpi) is selectable for Near-Letter quality printing.

Models 7 and 8 (via IPDS), and Model 9 provide such enhanced print capabilities
as doublewide, subscripts, superscripts, italicization, bold print and host
loadable fonts (Load Symbol Sets for Models 7 and 8, Character Font Image
Download for Model 9 ).  Graphics printing functions for the Models 7 and 8
include bit-image graphics and vector graphics.  Model 9 function is supported
via bit-image graphics and block graphics.  Models 7 and 8 have the ability to
print graphics in either high density (144 by 144 dots per inch) or low density
(60 by 72 dots per inch) modes.  Model 9 prints bit-image graphics at densities
of 60 by 72 dpi, 120 by 72 dpi, or 180 by 72 dpi based upon the selected escape
sequence.

Printed throughput for the Models 7, 8, and 9 printers will vary depending upon
parameters associated with the printed data and communications environment.
The following table summarizes maximum achievable throughput for text
applications.  Maximum achievable printed throughput for the Model 7 will be
less in IPDS mode and non-IPDS LU1 mode.  These values are based upon the
assumptions of 66 lines per page at 6 LPI, 88 lines per page at 8 LPI, a clean
print band (no blocked emitters), no wait time for system response, no
compressed height fonts, no multiple horizontal print densities on the same
line, and no accented, underscore, descender, or multiple strike characters
used.  Throughput is not affected by the number of characters per line or the
print line length (maximum physical print line length is 13.2 inches).

                           Maximum Throughput (LPM) at Selected CPI

                                                               Prop.
                            10    12   13.3   15   16.7   18   Space

    LPI = 6
      Draft                 475   385   385   320   320   285   N/A
      Data Processing       350   280   280   230   230   200   N/A
      Near Letter Quality   160   130   160   110   120   110   160
    LPI = 8
      Draft                 475   385   385   320   320   285   N/A
      Data Processing       350   280   280   230   230   200   N/A
      Near Letter Quality   130   110   130   090   100   090   130

The acoustical ratings of these machines are a quiet 7.2 Bels (57 dbA) when
printing and 6.5 Bels (44 dbA) when idling.

Continuous forms are fed by variable width forms tractors that accept forms
from 88.9 mm (3.5 inches) to 406.4 mm (16 inches) wide.  Up to six-part forms
may be used.  However, forms of five or six parts, card stock and labels should
be tested on an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration and print
quality.  Forms loading, handling and removal operations used on Models 7, 8,
and 9 are the same as those used on the current Models 11, 12, and 13.
Power-assisted forms loading, horizontal and vertical vernier adjustment, set
top of form function, and forms eject and restore function maintain the ease of
use of the 4234 printer family.  In addition, these models provide an enhanced
multi-function operator panel which incorporates a two line 24 characters per
line liquid crystal display (LCD).  This LCD displays text messages (machine
status, options, default conditions, test numbers) for easy interpretation by
the operator.

Customer changeable ribbons and print bands permit the optimization of print
resolution at various speeds and print qualities to help meet the customer's
requirements.

Supplies designated for use with the Models 7, 8, and 9 are the same as the
supplies for the Models 11, 12, and 13.

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) A and B fonts are provided for machine
readable OCR applications.  These fonts are derived from OCR standards but
users should test OCR printing with their scanning equipment to ensure
satisfactory performance.

The 4234 Model 9 supports US English and National Languages for
Danish/Norwegian, Portuguese, Arabic, Greek, Icelandic, Turkish, Latin 2/ROECE,
Cyrillic, Thai, Hebrew and PC Multilingual.  The operator panel overlay and LCD
display support US English and the character sets for French, German, Italian,
Spanish, and Japanese (LCD display only).

MODEL 009 Serial/Parallel interface.  The Model 9 attaches to the ASCII
Workstation Controller port, the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter on the 3174
Controller, the ASCII Subsystem of the ES/9370 and the Serial or Parallel port
on the RT processor, the Micro Channel 370, the RISC System/6000, the 4033 LAN
Connection, the PC or the PS/2.

The 4234 Printers are designated as customer setup thereby allowing early
availability and relocation flexibility.  CSU publications are available in
English, Belgian/Dutch, Belgian/French, Danish, Dutch, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, and Swedish.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IBM 4234 Dot Band Printer Models 7, 8, and 9 uses only existing attachment
interfaces.

    Width:  660 mm (26 inches)
    Depth:  936 mm (36.85 inches)
    Height: 958 mm (37.75 inches)
    Printer Weight:  49.0 kg (108 lbs)
    Stand Weight:  23.6 kg (52 lbs)
    Total Weight:  72.6 kg (160 lbs)

The IBM 4234 Dot Band Printer Models 011, 012, and 013 are line matrix impact
printers providing speeds of up to 800 lpm in Draft mode, 600 lpm in Data
Processing mode and 200 lpm in Near-Letter quality mode.  Improved
price/performance, additional functions, and improved ergonomics relative to
existing IBM printers in this speed range are offered along with a range of
advanced functions for those systems supporting the Intelligent Printer Data
Stream (IPDS) architecture.

CSU publications are available in US English, Belgian/Dutch, Belgian/French,
Canadian/French, Danish, Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Japanese,
Spanish, Spanish Speaking, and Swedish.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Coaxial, twinaxial and serial/parallel attachment capabilities.
    o   Improved price/performance over existing IBM printers in this speed
        range.
    o   Three selectable print qualities yielding up to 800 lpm (Draft-upper case
        only), 600 lpm (Data Processing) and 200 lpm (Near Letter Quality).
    o   Dot band technology offering three customer replaceable bands for print
        quality optimization.
    o   Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) support (Models 011 and 012 only).
    o   Customer replaceable ribbon cartridge.
    o   Ease of use features including enhanced operator panel with LCD text
        display, power-assisted forms loading, and eject/restore function to
        reduce forms waste.
    o   10, 12, 13.3, 15, 16.7, 18 cpi and proportional horizontal spacing.

As additions to the IBM 4234 Dot Band Printer family, the 4234 Models 011, 012
and 013 set new price/performance levels for IBM heavy-duty, line matrix impact
printers.  These new models offer the same print quality options (Draft, Data
Processing and Near-Letter quality) offered by the previous 4234 products, but
at substantially higher print speeds with additional functions. Print speeds
range from up to 800 lpm in Draft (upper case only), up to 600 lpm in data
processing and up to 200 lpm in Near-Letter quality when printing at ten cpi
and six lpi.  In addition to these higher speeds, the Models 011 and 012
support the Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS), resulting in a variety of
enhanced Data Processing, word processing and graphics capabilities.

These printer models have expanded font style and character spacing
capabilities.  The "Gothic" font style can be printed with character spacings
of 10, 12, 13.3, 15, 16.7 and 18 cpi in both Draft and Data Processing modes,
and at 13.3, 16.7 and 18 cpi in Near-Letter quality mode.  The "Courier" font
style can be printed at 10, 12, and 15 cpi in Near-Letter quality mode.

Additionally, the "Essay" font style (proportional spacing at approximately 12
cpi) is selectable for Near-Letter quality printing.  Models 011 and 012 (via
IPDS), and Model 013 provide such enhanced print capabilities as doublewide,
subscripts, superscripts, italicization, bold print and host loadable fonts
(Load Symbol Sets for Models 011 and 012, Character Font Image Download for
Model 013).  Graphics printing functions for the Models 011 and 012 include
bit-image graphics and vector graphics.  Model 013 function is supported via
bit-image graphics and block graphics.  Models 011 and 012 have the ability to
print graphics in either high density (144 by 144 dots per inch) or low density
(60 by 72 dots per inch) modes.  Model 013 prints bit-image graphics at
densities of 60 by 72 dpi, 120 by 72 dpi, or 180 by 72 dpi based upon the
selected escape sequence.

Printed throughput for the Models 011, 012, and 013 printers will vary
depending upon parameters associated with the printed data and communications
environment.  The following table summarizes maximum achievable throughput for
text applications.  Maximum achievable printed throughput for the Model 011
will be less in IPDS mode and non-IPDS LU1 mode.  These values are based upon
the assumptions of 66 lines per page at 6 LPI, 88 lines per page at 8 LPI, a
clean print band (no blocked emitters), no wait time for system response, no
compressed height fonts, and no accented, underscore, descender, or multiple
strike characters used.  Throughput is not affected by the number of characters
per line or the print line length (maximum physical print line length is 13.2
inches).

                           Maximum Throughput (LPM) at Selected CPI

                                                               Prop.
                            10    12   13.3   15   16.7   18   Space

    LPI = 6
      Draft                 800   650   650   540   540   475   N/A
      Data Processing       600   480   480   385   385   340   N/A
      Near Letter Quality   200   175   200   140   160   140   200
    LPI = 8
      Draft                 800   650   650   540   540   475   N/A
      Data Processing       600   480   480   385   385   340   N/A
      Near Letter Quality   170   140   170   115   130   115   170

The acoustical ratings of these machines are a quiet 7.2 Bels (57 dbA) when
printing and 6.5 Bels (44 dbA) when idling.

Continuous forms are fed by variable width forms tractors that accept forms
from 88.9 mm (3.5 inches) to 406.4 mm (16 inches) wide.  Up to six-part forms
may be used.  However, forms of five or six parts, card stock and labels should
be tested on an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration and print
quality.  Forms loading, handling and removal operations used on Models 011,
012, and 013 are comparable to those used on the current Models 001 and 002.
Power-assisted forms loading, horizontal and vertical vernier adjustment, set
top of form function, and forms eject and restore function maintain the ease of
use of the 4234 printer family.  In addition, these models provide an enhanced
multifunction operator panel which incorporates a two line 24 characters per
line liquid crystal display (LCD).  This LCD displays text messages (machine
status, options, default conditions, test numbers) for easy interpretation by
the operator.

Customer changeable print bands (0.012 in./0.304 mm, 0.016 in./0.406 mm, 0.020
in./ 0.508 mm dot sizes) permit the optimization of print resolution at various
speeds and print qualities to help meet the customer's requirements.

The 0.016 inch (0.406 mm) dot band is considered the standard general purpose
band.  Print bands designated for use with the Models 011, 012 and 013 are not
interchangeable with bands designated for the Models 001 and 002.

Ribbon yield is enhanced with the new 4234 models through the availability of a
black general purpose ribbon (P/N 1040282) that produces an average of 40
million DP characters (based on using the 0.406 mm/0.016 inch dot band). This
ribbon, designated for use only with the Models 011, 012, and 013, is not
interchangeable with ribbons designated for the Models 001 and 002.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width: 660 mm (26 inches)
    Depth: 936 mm (36.85 inches)
    Height: 958 mm (37.75 inches)
    Printer Weight: 49.0 kg (108 lbs)
    Stand Weight: 23.6 kg (52 lbs)
    Total Weight: 72.6 kg (160 lbs)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. IBM IMPACTWRITER PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The multi-purpose 6252 Impactwriter* offers an exclusive design that features
unique right-to-left paper movement and total front access for all printer
tasks.  This arrangement delivers increased user efficiency and significant
floor space savings required to maintain and use the printer.  Its unique
design offers enhanced versatility, ease of use, superior price performance,
and high reliability.  Impactwriter is designed to serve as both a system
printer and a shared workstation printer.  Models print up to 800 lines per
minute (LPM) or up to 1200 LPM with a 48 character set printband.  The two
speed groups of six models each allow attachment to IBM's mid-range systems,
workstation, and personal computer systems as well as non-IBM systems.  An IBM
6252 connected to a personal computer may become a print server within a local
area network (LAN) or a remote job entry printer.  The Impactwriter also offers
an optional bar code capability that supports limited bar code applications at
800 LPM.  Because the printer is based on engraved band technology, it produces
fully formed, text characters, page after page.  The 6252 has a very low noise
level when printing, making it quiet enough for placement virtually anywhere a
need for printing exists.

Model T08 or T12 attaches twinaxially to System/36, System/38, and AS/400*
computers.  They also attach and are supported on the IBM 5X94 Controllers and
the IBM 5299 Model 3 Terminal Multiconnector and Twinax To Telephone Twisted
Pair Adapter.  (NOTE: Model T0Z or T1Z are also twinaxially attached and are
available only as part of the AS/400 Total System Package (TSP) offerings).
Model D08 or D12 attaches coaxially to the ES/9370* and ES/9000* Model 120,
130, 150 and 170 Workstation Subsystem Controller, the Micro Channel 370* 3270
Adapter, to 3X74 Establishment Controllers, and the 4702 Branch Automation
Processor.  The IBM 6252 ASx and APx models attach to ASCII serial/parallel
hosts such as PC AT*, PS/2*, RISC System/6000*, Micro Channel 370 (3270
adapter) and other PC-compatible computers that support the IBM PC serial
RS-232-C/RS-422-A and IBM PC parallel printer interfaces.  Models AS8 and AS2
also attach to the AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controller, to a 3174 Asynchronous
Emulation Adapter, and to a ES/9370 ASCII subsystem. Impactwriter P models,
utilizing the Dataproducts parallel printer interface, allows attachment to
non-IBM systems utilizing this interface.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Exclusive right-to-left printing package that provides total
        front access for all operator tasks and significant floor space
        savings
    o   Improved productivity through easier-to-use forms setup
         procedures
            Slide-out tray for the input side (1200 lpm models)
            Total front access for all operations
            Single adjustment for two forms tractors
            Up to six part printing
    o   A new improved design for ease of ribbon replacement
    o   Twelve models with outstanding price performance and enhanced
        reliability including a 12-month warranty
    o   OCR and limited bar-code support for AIAG and ODETTE labels at
        800 LPM. Postnet bar-code at both speeds
    o   Very quiet operation, suitable for office settings
    o   Convenient power requirement 120V, 1-phase;
    o   Flexible systems attachment, Model D08 or D12 for coaxial
        attachment, Model T08, T0Z, T12 or T1Z for twinaxial attachment,
        Model P08 or P12 for Dataproducts parallel system printer
        attachment, and Models AP8, AP2, AS8 or AS2 for IBM-PC printer
        interfaces also used by other manufacturers supporting these
        interfaces.

The IBM 6252 offers new levels of operating simplicity and use.  Its complete
front access design and right to left forms movement allows users to perform
all tasks including the loading and unloading of forms from the front of the
printer.  Its user friendly operator panel and 80 character LCD display provide
printer conditions in simple plain English messages (or Dutch, French, German,
Italian, or Spanish as defined by the operator) versus lookup codes on older
printers.  Conditions identified such as paper changes, job transitions, and
error detection make recovery fast and efficient.  In addition to the LCD
display the Operator panel comes equipped with an attention light and audible
alarm, operating together or light only to alert users that attention is
required.  The 6252 also has convenient ribbon changing, that features a clean
hands design of the printer ribbon, which enhances installation and replacement
speed and efficiency.  Its two form feed tractors, which can be adjusted by a
single knob, permit fast and accurate forms alignment.  Impactwriter's
reliability is improved over the 3262 and 5262 printers providing enhanced
printer availability.

Print loads generally increase as user applications and user organizations
grow.  A logical growth path is to replace 3262 and 5262 printers with the
Impactwriter -- a direct growth in rated speed.  In addition the 6252 print
applications are compatible with the 6262 printer family for future growth.

Impactwriter provides improved capabilities for forms handling, up to 6 part
forms of carbon or carbonless types, labels, cardstock, envelopes, and thin
plastic cards.  Forms inventories and investments are protected with the
printer since it is forms-compatible with IBM 3262 and 5262 printers.
Applications currently using 3262 and 5262 printers may be moved to the
Impactwriter with little or no change.

The increased cost-consciousness of today's businesses requires continual
information processing and price/performance improvements.  In addition to
printing traditional text or OCR applications, the IBM Impactwriter offers
limited bar code capability (on 800 lpm models), graphic character, and simple
label design capability.  Impactwriter printing conforms to the ANSI guidelines
for bar code print quality and to the Automotive Industry Action Group (AIAG)
and ODETTE label standards.  The 800 lpm Impactwriter provides up to 1600 AIAG
labels per hour when printing these 4" x 5" (102 x 127mm) labels, three-up and
rotated (landscape).  An IBM Cooperative Software Program is available for line
printer bar code applications.  It is developed for creating labels, tags and
forms for printing on line printers.  This is the Bar Code and Graphics Package
published and licensed by Lowry Computer Products, Inc.

Impactwriter compatibility with existing printers and overall reliability
improvements provide for simplified migration and stability of management for
system configuration changes.

MODEL AP8 Up to 800 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to ASCII hosts
providing an IBM-PC parallel printer port.

MODEL AP2 Up to 1200 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to ASCII hosts
providing an IBM-PC parallel printer port.

MODEL AS8 Up to 800 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to ASCII hosts
providing an IBM-PC serial asynchronous RS-232 or RS-422 printer port.  A task
on the operator panel will define the socket for 232 or 422.

MODEL AS2 Up to 1200 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to ASCII hosts
providing an IBM-PC serial asynchronous RS-232 or RS-422 printer port.  A task
on the operator panel will define the socket for 232 or 422.

MODEL D08 Up to 800 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to 3X74, ES/9370,
4702 and ES/9000 Systems.

MODEL D12 Up to 1200 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to 3174, ES/9370,
4702 and ES/9000 Systems.

MODEL P08 Up to 800 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to non-IBM hosts
utilizing the Dataproducts parallel system printer interface.

MODEL P12 Up to 1200 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to non-IBM hosts
utilizing the Dataproducts parallel system printer interface.

MODEL T08 Up to 800 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to the twinaxial
interface utilized by AS/400*, S/38*, S/36* Systems and 5X94 controllers.

MODEL T0Z Up to 800 LPM Impact Line Printer-available only as part of AS/400
TSP offerings.

MODEL T12 Up to 1200 LPM Impact Line Printer for attachment to the twinaxial
interface utilized by AS/400*, S/38*, S/36* systems and 5X94 controllers.

MODEL T1Z Up to 1200 LPM Impact Line Printer-available only as part of AS/400
TSP offerings.

MODELS FOR SYSTEM ATTACHMENTS:

                                        6252 Models
                            T08(9) D08  AS8(8) AP8   P08(5)
                            T12(9) D12  AS2(8) AP2   P12(5)
      ---------------------------------------------------
      IBM Mid-Range Systems:
        AS/400               X(11)       X(6)
        S/36                 X
        S/38                 X
        ES/9370                    X(1)  X(2)
        Micro Channel 370          X(10) X      X
        ES/9000                    X(1)
       Controllers:
        3174                       X     X(3)
        5X94                 X
       Workstation:
        RISC System/6000                 X      X
        6150 System                      X      X
       Personal Computers:
        PS/2                             X      X
        PC-AT                            X      X
        Token Ring LAN(4)                X      X
       Protocol Converter:
        5208 Data Link                   X      X
       Branch Auto. Processor:
        4702                       X
      Non-IBM Systems:                   X(7)   X(7)  X
          (1)  Attachment via the workstation subsystem controller
          (2)  Attachment via the ASCII subsystem
          (3)  Attachment to 3174 via the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
          (4)  Attachment via a PC-AT or PS/2 connected to a LAN
               or direct LAN attach via the IBM 4033
          (5)  Supports Dataproducts parallel system printer interface
          (6)  Attachment via the ASCII workstation controller
          (7)  Non-IBM systems utilizing the IBM-PC serial or
               parallel interfaces
          (8)  AS8 model has RS-232-C or RS-422 support
          (9)  The 5299 Model 3 Terminal Multiconnector and Twinax
               to Telephone Twisted Pair Adapter also supported.
          (10) Attachment via 3270 Adapter #6120.
          (11) Models T0Z and T1Z also available as part of TSP offerings
               only.

The Impactwriter printer is customer setup, allowance is one day. Instructions
are in English or a national language.  IBM setup is also available at the
applicable hourly service rates and minimum charges.

Any model change may be made in the field.  All conversions require MES orders.
Parts removed or replaced become the property of IBM and must be returned.

The following table provides information for migrating from a 3262/5262
character set in use to a compatible printband for the Impactwriter.  Only the
most popular printbands may be specified by feature code with a printer order
(identified by an entry in the following right most Feature Code column).
Contact an IBM Authorized Supplies Dealer or IBM-Direct for reordering selected
other bands or replacements.  Your IBM Marketing Representative can also order
any printband via AAS, MSORDER.

         Comparison Table for Impact Printer Printbands - US Only
                     3262 and 5262  To  6252
                        |Character| 3262A01,|3262-001,|
         General        |Height   | B01, C01| 02,03,05|       6252
      3262 or 5262      |         |         |11 12 13 |    |      |Feat.
          Name          |  Inch   |   P/N   | & 5262  |Chrs| P/N  |Code
  ----------------------|---------|---------|---------|----|------|-----
    48  EBCDIC,            .095     8629671   8281250   48 80F8905 9503
        USA/CANADA         .079     8629670   8281264   48 80F8916
    52/48  FORTRAN/COBOL   .095     8629595   1509874   52 80F8907 9505
                           .079     8630362      --     52 6475424
    60  POCL               .095        --     8629661   60 80F8907
                           .079        --     8629662        --
    63 EBCDIC OPTIMIZED,   .095        --     8629617   64 80F8903 9501
       USA/CANADA          .079        --     8629601   64 80F8904 9502
    64 EBCDIC,             .095     8629553   8281279   64 80F8903 9501
       USA/CANADA          .079     8629568   8281293   64 80F8904 9502
    96 TEXT USA/CANADA     .095     8629684   8281309   94 80F8906 9504
   128 TEXT                .095               8281322  128 80F8909 9507
   128 TEXT COURIER       COURIER             4136624  128 6475437
    63 OPTIMIZED,          .095     8629619   8629618   64 80F8912 9520
       INTERNATIONAL       .079     8629603   8629603   64 80F8913 9521
    64 ASCII,              .095     8629567   8281340   64 80F8912 9520
       INTERNATIONAL       .079     8629582   8281341   64 80F8913 9521
    96 ASCII,              .095     8629600   8281339   96 80F8914 9522
       INTERNATIONAL      ARTISAN
   188 MULTINATIONAL       .095        --     8629663  192 80F9352
    48 OCR AON (NUMERIC)   OCRAON   8630370   8630327   48 80F8954
    48 OCR BON (NUMERIC)   OCRBON   8630378   8630341   48 80F8956
    48 OCR AOA (A-ALPHA)   OCRAOA      --     8630320   48 80F8953
    48 OCR BOA (B-APLHA)   OCRBOA      --     8630334   48 80F8955
    48 EBCDIC SPANISH SPK   .095     8629681   8281274   48 80F8911 9509
                            .079     8629592   8281261   48 80F8995
    63 OPTIMIZED SPAN SPK   .095        --     8629631   64 80F8910 9508
                            .079        --     8629615   64 80F8994
    64 EBCDIC SPANISH SPK   .095     8629563   8281289   64 80F8910 9508
                            .079     8629578   8281303   64 80F8994

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS The Impactwriter's two speed groups with five models of
each utilize five standard interfaces and have no unique requirements of these
interfaces.

The 6252 has vertical spacing capability of 3, 4, 6, and 8 lines per inch on
all models and the horizontal spacing is 132 print positions (characters), at
ten characters per inch on all models.

    Width:  1000 mm (39.4 inches)
    Depth:   750 mm (29.5 inches)
    Height: 1000 mm (39.4 inches)
    Weight:  128 kg (286 lbs)
    o   Footprint:
            8 sq ft (.74 sq m) floor space
            18 sq ft (1.7 sq m) for operating and service clearances
    o   Paper Handling:
            Fanfold forms, up to 6 parts
            Perforation to perforation length: 3 to 18 inches (76-457mm)
            Fold to fold length: 6 to 18 inches (152-457mm)
            Width: 3.5 to 19.25* inches (89-489mm)
            Weight: 15 to 100 lbs. (6.8-45.5 kg)
            Thickness: 0.020 inches (0.51 mm)
* For forms widths greater than 16.4 inches (416.6mm), limited forms width
adjustment exists.  The distance from the left centerline of the forms feed
holes to the first print position will increase from 0.0 inches (0.0mm) on a
16.4 inch (416.6mm) wide form to 2.8 inches (71.1mm) with a maximum 19.25 inch
(489mm) wide form.  No forms width adjustment exists with the maximum width
forms of 19.25 inches (489mm).

Multiple part forms are not recommended for OCR printing.  The quality of the
top sheet is affected by the underlying sheets.  For best results, use 20-24 lb
(75-90 gr/sq.m) OCR bond single-part forms.  OCR forms using other papers
should be tested for satisfactory results with reading equipment.  OCR printing
is limited to controlled data processing environments.  Refer to appropriate
"System Planning Guides".

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    o   Power Requirement:  950 VA
    o   Voltages:  100-127, 200-240 Single phase, frequency independent
    o   Heat Output:  850 W (2900 BTU/hr - maximum printing); 390 W
        (1330 BTU/hr
        - average print load)
    o   Temperature:  10 to 40C (50 to 104F)
    o   Relative Humidity:  8 to 80 (percent) Wet Bulb:  27C (80F)
        (Maximum)
    o   Noise Emission:   All Models
                                  Operating          Idle
      Sound Power Level, L(WAd)     7.2 B            5.5 B
      Sound Pressure Level,
      Bystander Position L(pAm)   55 dBa           40 dBa

Operator interchangeable printbands are available.  The common character set
sizes are listed with their rated print speeds:

          Printband       Impactwriter 800  Impactwriter1200
      Character Set Size  Rated Speed (LPM) Rated Speed (LPM)
      ------------------  ----------------  ----------------
            48               up to 800        up to 1200
            64               up to 650        up to 1000
            94               up to 470        up to  740
           128               up to 365        up to  585

IMPACTWRITER ATTACHMENTS BY MODEL:

    o   Model AS8 or AS2 - RS-232 interface(1) will attach to:
            The AS/400 ASCII workstation controller
            The ES/9370 ASCII subsystem
            The Micro Channel 370 system
            3174 Controllers with the Asynchronous Emulation Adapter
            RISC System/6000* or 6150 workstations
            PC AT*, PS/2*, computer COMx ports or to a Token-Ring LAN
            via one of these computers or direct LAN attach via the
            IBM 4033
            The 5208 Data Link Protocol Converter
            Non-IBM computers utilizing the IBM-PC serial printer
            interface
    o   Model AS8 or AS2 - RS-422 interface(1) will attach to:
            RISC System/6000 or 6150 workstations
            The AS/400 ASCII workstation controller
            (1) Serial attachments may have performance limitations
            resulting from the baud rate established between host and
            printer.  The 6252 supports rates up to 38.4 Kb.
    o   Model AP8 or AP2 - PC-Parallel interface will attach to:
            The Micro Channel 370 system
            6150 or RISC System/6000 workstations excluding POWERserver
            930 PC AT, PS/2, computer LPTx ports or to a Token-Ring LAN
            via one of these computers or direct LAN attach via the IBM
            4033
            The 5208 Data Link Protocol Converter
            Non-IBM computers utilizing the IBM-PC parallel printer
            interface
    o   Model D08 or D12 - Coaxial interface will attach to:
            The ES/9370 via the workstation subsystem controller
            The Micro Channel 370 via the 3270 Adapter
            The ES/9000 workstation subsystem controller
            3174 Controllers
            The 4702 Branch Automation Processor
    o   Model P08 or P12 - Dataproducts parallel interface will attach
        to:
            Non-IBM systems that utilize this interface for the system
            printer.
            A simple, plug compatible process when replacing other band
            printers.
    o   Model T08 or T12 - Twinaxial interface will attach to:
            AS/400
            System/36 and System/38
            Remote Controllers 5X94
            The 5299 Model 3 Terminal Multiconnector and Twinax to
            Telephone Twisted Pair Adapter
    o   Model T0Z or T1Z - Twinaxial interface will attach to:
            AS/400 only as part of a TSP

The 6252 Impactwriter requires host based software to create bar codes or
graphics data.  Only the 800 LPM models are recommended for best barcode
printing quality.  The software used can consist of user-written programs,
commercial application packages, or combinations.  The following describes
sources for host bar code software:

    o   User-Written Programs - refer to the "IBM 6262 Applications
        Guide to Bar Code Printing" (GA24-4224).  This document
        illustrates bar code data streams and provides programming
        examples.  The examples show ways of working with US Postal
        Service Zip + 4 Code, and the creation of large graphical
        characters used primarily in AIAG style labels.  Simple label
        and form designs are also shown.
    o   Cooperative Software Program - Lowry Computer Products Inc.
        offers a bar code and graphics package (BGP) through IBM's
        Cooperative Software Program (CSP) offering.

BGP Highlights:

    o   Easy to install
    o   Easy to use
    o   Uses the industry standard Code "V" command set (eases migration
        from non-IBM applications)
    o   Wide range of system support (CPF S/38, OS/400, MVS, VM, and VSE)
        Supports most bar code symbologies

The Impactwriter D Model printer is supported by the same software that
supports the 3262 Model 3 or 13 printer.  There are no additional software
requirements.

The chart that follows indicates the system environments in which the Model D
may be utilized.

    PROGRAMMING SUPPORT CHART - IBM 6252 MODEL D08 PRINTERS
       Operating System Optional Product   Line    Protocols
       Minimum level    Minimum level     Driver   Supported
       VM/SP 5           HPO 5.0           RSCS    SCS - LU1
       VM/XA SP2                         Version 2 DSC - LU0
                                                   DSE - LU3
       VM/XA SF2                           RSCS    DSC - LU0
       VM/XA SP1                         Version 1
       MVS/SP 370        DFP  1.1.1       JES328X  SCS - LU1
         MVS 1.3.0       JES2 1.3.6      Version 2 DSC - LU0
                         JES3 1.3.4                DSE - LU3
       MVS/SP XA         DFP/XA 2.1       JES328X  SCS - LU1
         MVS 2.1.1       JES2 2.1.5      Version 2 DSC - LU0
                         JES3 2.1.5                DSE - LU3
       MVS/SP ESA        DFP/XA 3.1       JES328X  SCS - LU1
         MVS 3.1.1       JES2 3.1.0      Version 2 DSC - LU0
                         JES3 3.1.0                DSE - LU3
       VSE/SP 3.2        CICS 1.7        Report    SCS - LU1
                                        Controller DSC - LU0
                                                   DSE - LU3
       VSE/ESA 1.2.1     CICS/VSE2.1     Report    SCS - LU1
                                        Controller DSC - LU0
                                                   DSE - LU3

VM provides a line driver for telecommunications in the Remote Spooling
Communications Subsystem (RSCS); MVS provides a line driver for
telecommunications in JES/328X Print Facility product (JES328X); and VSE
provides a line driver in Customer Information Control System (CICS) Report
Controller. These line drivers provide the means for communicating to local New
Display System (NDS) Controllers (3X74) or remote telecommunication NDS
Controllers connected via 37X5 Controllers.

VM RSCS, MVS JES328X, and VSE CICS Report Controller support SNA Character
String (SCS) protocol, 3270 Data Stream Compatibility (DSC) protocol, and Data
Stream Emulation (DSE) protocol.

IMPACTWRITER MODEL D08 AND D12 NOTES

    o   Programming support for the 6252 D model is compatible with the
        3262-3 and 13 models, which are compatible with the 4245 D Model
        attachment.
    o   Licensed Internal Code Release 3.0 or later is required for a
        3174 controller.
    o   Licensed Internal Code Config D Rel 65.1 is required for a 3274
        controller.
    o   VM/SP (RSCS) and VSE/SP (CICS) support the 6252 Model D08/D12 as
        a local workstation printer when attached to the 9370 Workstation
        Adapter in DSC and SCS modes.  Full SNA support is provided via
        3X74 in a local environment or via a 3X74 attached to a 37X5 in
        a remote environment for the 9370.  Full system printer support
        such as "load forms control buffer" (FCB) is not implemented in
        VSE/SP(CICS) report controller.  The FCB is set up at the
        operator panel.
    o   Additional enhancements have been made in RSCS Version 2.2 for
        Early Print Complete (EPC).  RSCS supports EPC in DSC mode by
        using the Set Printer Characteristics Structured Field.
    o   VSE/SP 3.2 with CICS 1.7 will support the Impactwriter Model
        D08/D12 printer in SCS and DSC modes.  It is recommended that
        the Early Print Complete (EPC) be OFF in the printer when used
        by this system.
    o   EPC is supported at the Printer in DSC and DSE (LU3) mode.  If
        LU3 EPC is selected then integrity of last block in print job is
        at risk, use job separators.
    o   Remote data expansion is implemented in the Impactwriter Model
        D08/D12 printer.  Support for remote data expansion is in
        SNA(SCS).  Operating systems support in the host is required to
        compress this data stream prior to transmission to the
        Impactwriter D model printers.

The T08/T12 is supported by the same software that supports the 4245 Printer
Models T12 and T20.  Impactwriter T model printers emulate the 4245 models T12
or T20.  There are no additional software requirements for the IBM 6252 T model
running on System/36, System/38, or AS/400 processors.  If replacing a device
that is not configured as a 4245, (i.e. a 3262 Models B01 or C01 or a 5262 on a
S/36, S/38, or AS/400 V1 R3 or later), a reconfiguration of the system is
required to configure support for Impactwriter as a 4245 T model. See
"Attaching Impactwriter to the AS/400 and Other Devices", (GA24-4296).
System/36 Release 5.1, System/38 Release 8, OS/400 Release 3.0 or later must be
installed on the respective processors.  5494 Models 1 and 2, 5394 Release 2.1
or later and 5294 Model 1 will support Impactwriter T Models.

The Impactwriter printer Models APx and ASx, using IBM Personal Printer Data
Stream emulates the IBM 4202-003 printer when attached to the PC serial and
parallel interfaces for traditional line-mode printing of simple text and
numbers.  Graphics, all-points-addressable, and large characters cannot be
correctly printed with a fully formed character printer like the IBM 6252.

The "A" model interfaces permit attachment as follows:

    o   Model AS8/AS2, RS-232 interface (1) will attach to:
        -   PC AT, PS/2, and Token-Ring LAN using an AT or PS/2
            connected to the "A" model and using minimum program level
            PCLP 1.32 or OS/2* LAN Server 1.3.
        -   6150 workstations or RISC System/6000 workstations using
            minimum program level AIX* Version 3 for RISC System/6000.
        -   The AEA adapter of the 3174 controller and the ASCII
            subsystem of the ES/9370* mid-range system.
        -   AS/400 ACSII workstation controller with OS/400 R3 or later
            configured as a 4234-013.
    o   Model AS8/AS2, RS-422 interface (1) will attach to:
        -   6150 workstations or RISC System/6000 workstations using
            minimum program level AIX Version 3 for RISC System/6000.
        -   AS/400 ACSII workstation controller with OS/400 R3 or later
            configured as a 4234-013.
    o   Model AP8/AP2, Parallel interface will attach to:
        -   PC AT, PS/2, and Token-Ring LAN using an AT or PS/2 connected
            to the "A" model and using minimum program level PCLP 1.32
            or OS/2 LAN Server 1.3.
        -   6150 workstations or RISC System/6000 workstations,
            excluding the POWERserver 930, using minimum program level
            AIX Version 3 for RISC System/6000.
        (1) Serial attachments may have performance limitations resulting
        from the baud rate established between host and printer.  The
        6252 supports rates up to 38.4 Kb.

The Dataproducts Parallel interface is a common, mature printer interface used
by many competitive computer systems.

The Impactwriter P model emulates the Dataproducts LB series printers.
Programming versions and levels are a requirement of the non-IBM host. Versions
and levels supporting the Dataproducts parallel interface are necessary.

The system-printer attachment cable (a non-IBM part) is currently limited to 50
feet (15.24m).

SPECIFY FEATURES Specify feature codes, when ordered for field installation via
MES, are billable to the customer unless ordered with a model change and/or a
chargeable feature.  (Color and voltage changes are always billable.)  If the
price is not in the price file, an RPQ should be submitted.

Power (Select one feature code for Voltage, Connector, and Power Cord Length):

    o   Voltage - (Field change or installation is not recommended):
        -   Specify #9911:  Default, Low Voltage 100-127V, 60/50 Hz
        -   Specify #9912:  Optional, High Voltage 200-240V, 60/50 Hz
        -   Note:  Please verify that high voltage is really necessary.
    o   Connector (Power Plug Type):
        -   Specify #9070:  Default, Standard Non-locking Plug
        -   Specify #9080:  Optional, Watertight Plug
        -   Specify #9081:  Optional, Twistlock Plug
    o   Power Cord Length:
        -   Specify #9964:  12-ft (3.7M) cable
        -   Specify #9986:  6-ft (1.8M) cable
    o   Printband Selection:  One standard printband is included in the
        original equipment without charge.  Select one by selecting a
        feature code from the following table for the printband to be
        shipped with the printer. Otherwise a 64 character US/Canada
        0.095 in. (#9501) will be supplied on T and D models.  Or
        otherwise a 64 character International 0.095 in. (#9520) will be
        supplied on AS, AP and P models.

Selection group for 6252 Models D08, D12, T08 and T12.

      Print Band Description                      Feature  Reorder
                                Set size   Height  Code    Number
                                                          (for ref.)
      US/Canada               64 Char Set, 0.095"  #9501   80F8903
      US/Canada               64 Char Set, 0.079"  #9502   80F8904
      US/Canada               48 Char Set, 0.095"  #9503   80F8905
      US/Canada Text          94 Char Set, 0.095"  #9504   80F8906
      US/Canada Wide Courier  94 Char Set, 0.095"  #9506   80F8908
      US/Canada Text         128 Char Set, 0.095"  #9507   80F8909
      FORTRAN/COBOL           52 Char Set, 0.095"  #9505   80F8907
      Spanish Speaking        64 Char Set, 0.095"  #9508   80F8910
      Spanish Speaking        48 Char Set, 0.095"  #9509   80F8911
      International,          64 Char Set, 0.095"  #9520   80F8912
      International,          64 Char Set, 0.079"  #9521   80F8913
      International,          96 Char Set, 0.095"  #9522   80F8914
      International,          48 Char Set, 0.095"  #9523   80F8915
      US Postal Zip+4,        52 Char Set,   --    #6118   80F8976

Selection group for 6252 Models AS8, AP8, & P08 or AS2, AP2, P12.

      Print Band Description                      Feature  Reorder
                                Set size   Height  Code    Number
                                                          (for ref.)
      International,           64 Char Set, 0.095" #9520  80F8912
      International,           64 Char Set, 0.079" #9521  80F8913
      International,           96 Char Set, 0.095" #9522  80F8914
      International,           48 Char Set, 0.095" #9523  80F8915
      US/Canada,               64 Char Set, 0.095" #9501  80F8903
      US/Canada,               64 Char Set, 0.079" #9502  80F8904
      US/Canada,               48 Char Set, 0.095" #9503  80F8905
      US/Canada Text,          94 Char Set, 0.095" #9504  80F8906
      US/Canada Wide Courier,  94 Char Set, 0.095" #9506  80F8908
      FORTRAN/COBOL,           52 Char Set, 0.095" #9505  80F8907
      Spanish Speaking,        64 Char Set, 0.095" #9508  80F8910
      Spanish Speaking,        48 Char Set, 0.095" #9509  80F8911
      US Postal Zip+4,         52 Char Set,   --   #6118  80F8976

Other character set options are available as additional or replacement sets by
printband part number from IBM Direct (1-800-IBM-2468), or order through
"MSORDER" on AAS.  See the "Impactwriter Printband Manual" (GA24-4323) for
these options.

SPECIAL FEATURES BAR CODE FEATURE (#6---) A package of supplies and
instructions to begin production of bar code printing.  Includes three High
Contrast - Polyester ribbons, two interposers, printband, and reference
material.  The Postnet features (#6058 & #6118) are available at any speed.
The other features are for use with the 800 LPM models only.  The postal code
features 6058 and 6118 consist of a printband and bar code manuals only.  The
feature 6020 package excludes a standard printband - for use with customer
defined custom bar code printbands.  The printer is set-up to support bar code
printing applications, uses interposer to enhance the bar character printed,
and a bar code printband and its image. See GA24-4323 for complete details.
For plant or field installation, order one feature number from the following
lists.  Maximum: One per machine.

                            Wide-        Lines Char         Reorder
  Symbology,                Narrow  X-   Per   Set  Feature  Set
     description     Format Ratio  Dimen Inch  Size Number  Number  Note

  USPS-Zip+4            -     -      -   6or8   52    --    80F8976  1
  AIAG & ODETTE      Picket  3;1   .015"   8    78   6316   80F8966  2
  USPS-Zip+4ThickFormPicket   -      -   6or8   94   6058   80F8990  3
  No printband,        --     -      -     -    --   6020     ---
   - used when a custom bar code band is required
  Note:
   1) This USPS Zip+4 printband may now be ordered as a standard
      selection with the printer order.
   2) Prints AIAG and ODETTE labels or similar applications.  Landscape
      presentation.
   3) Recommended for stiff forms, every other character missing.
      Reduces smudging by adjacent characters.  Uses are thick forms,
      card stock, plastic cards, and thick labels.  Print Speed reduced.

For machines currently installed without barcode, order the desired plant/field
feature from above.  Ship group:  Three ribbons, two interposers, printband,
and reference material except Postal Bar Code features (6058 & 6118) described
above.  Field Installation:  Yes.  Customer Setup:  Yes. For additional bar
code print bands, see RPQ SO2102 (800 LPM models only).

CONDENSED PRINT The 800 LPM Models have an available RPQ (SO2101) that allows
15 CPI printing.  There are a number of things to consider before ordering this
RPQ.  Carefully read the RPQ description in light of customer applications.

DISKETTES A diskette, supplied with the printer, provides the configuration and
printband images. * Signifies a trademark or registered trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. IBM IMPACT LINE PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click here to display picture

The 6262 Printer Model 12 (1,200 lpm) and Model 14 (1,400 lpm), are additions
to the IBM family of intermediate speed impact printers.

The A12, A14, and A22 models are for attachment to processors that utilize the
PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or RS-422-A) printer interface and emulate the
IBM 4202-3 printer for traditional line mode printing of simple text and
numbers.  Recommended for attachment to these hosts whenever high speed, good
print quality, and reliability as well as extended operational function are
required for output.

The 6262 sets a new performance standard with excellent print quality, enhanced
and easier to use operator functions and high reliability.

MODEL A12 1200 lpm with a 48 character set.  For attachment to PC processors
that utilize the PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or RS-422-A) printer
interface and emulate the IBM 4202-3 printer for traditional line mode printing
of simple text and numbers.

MODEL A14 1400 lpm with a 48 character set.  For attachment to processors that
utilize the PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or RS-422-A) printer interface and
emulate the IBM 4202-3 printer for traditional line mode priting of simple text
and numbers.

    Character    Model 12    Model 14
    Set          Rated       Rated
    Size         Speed       Speed

     48          1,200       1,400
     64          1,000       1,130
     94            740         805
    128            585         625
    192            413         433

Note: Rated print speed is the nominal speed of a band image ripple print
pattern printing 132 characters per line.

Bar Code:  The IBM 6262 printer is a medium to low density bar code printer.
The minimum X-dimension is .38mm (.015 inch) in ladder format and .635mm (0.025
inch) in picket format.

CSU allowance is one day for all models except channel Model 022.  IBM setup is
also available at the applicable IBM hourly service rates and minimum charges.
The channel models are installed by the IBM Service Representative.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Lower prices and improved price performance.
    o   Enhanced reliability and a 12 month warranty.
    o   Improved easier-to-use forms setup procedures.
    o   Smaller footprint, 64 percent of 4245 Model 12 or Model 20; convenient
        power requirement, 120V, 1-phase.
    o   Six part forms capability, 132 print positions at 10 print positions
        per-inch.
    o   Four tractors.
    o   Bar Code printing, AIAG and ODETTE labels, ladder format.
    o   Printband image adjustment.  A local procedure for revising hex code
        assignment of printer characters.
    o   Programming systems support - Identical to current line support without
        any changes.
    o   "A" Models for attachment to the PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or
        RS-422-A) printer interface.

The 6262 printers set new IBM price performance standards for the 1,200 and
1,400 lpm users.  Utilizing a fully formed character printband, they will
produce a print quality equal to or better than the 4245 Printers.  The
operator-invoked flight timing function will allow easy maintenance of print
quality by the operator.

The 6262 printers are suitable for either computer center or work station
environments.  They provide a reliability superior to the 3203 Printer, a
reduced footprint (64 percent of the 4245 Printer), quieter operation (58 dB
versus 64 dB of the 4245-12), and easier to use operator controls.  For
example, the horizontal forms alignment procedure uses a single mechanical knob
to adjust position and tension, the vertical alignment procedure is
electronically controlled from the operator panel.

Forms loading and band or ribbon replacement is now easier because they are all
mounted on a swing gate which moves away from the form.  The processing of
pre-numbered forms is now enhanced because of the improved four tractor
registration.  Individual adjustment of left or right tractor sets is possible
- or all four tractors can be adjusted simultaneously by a single knob.

An off-line electronic operator's routine can change contrast, page length and
vertical spacing - 6, 8 (and 3 or 4 on T models) lpi.  The ability to specify
both page length and vertical spacing from the host processor is possible.  The
service procedure changing hex code assignment in the microcode is a quick way
of making unprintables visible as a printed character or masking out an
unwanted character.  Also supports some custom printbands that are minor
variations of another band.  Additional benefits of the 6262 printers include:
standard OCR alphanumeric printing, a power stacker on all 1,400 lpm models,
and an 80 character L.C.D. panel display - for operator messages.

The 6262 Bar Code feature enhances the capabilities of the IBM 6262 printer
family which will be particularly attractive to customers with high volume bar
code printing requirements.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:  1,000mm (39.4 in.)
    Depth:  850mm (33.5 in.)
    Height:  1,360mm (53.5 in.)
    Weight:  290kg (640 lbs.) (1,200 lpm models); 320kg (665 lbs.) (1,400 lpm
    models)

6262 IMPACT LINE PRINTER, 2200 LPM MODELS

The A12, A14, and A22 models are for attachment to processors that utilize the
PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or RS-422-A) printer interface and emulate the
IBM 4202-3 printer for traditional line mode printing of simple text and
numbers.  Recommended for attachment to these hosts whenever high speed, good
print quality, and reliability as well as extended operational function are
required for output.

These 6262 models continue the performance standard of excellent print quality,
enhanced ease-of-use and high reliability.

MODEL A22 2200 lpm with a 48 character set.  For attachment to processors that
utilize the PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or RS-422-A) printer interface and
emulate the IBM 4202-3 printer for traditional line mode printing of simple
text and numbers.

All models are customer setup except channel Model 022.  IBM setup is also
available at the applicable IBM hourly service rates and minimum charges.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Higher speed models expand the 6262 family.
    o   Enhanced reliability and a 12-month warranty.
    o   Additional and improved ease of use features and procedures.
    o   Lower power and space requirements over 4245 model printers.
    o   Bar Code printing, AIAG and ODETTE labels, ladder format.
    o   A22 Model for attachment to the PC Parallel and Serial (RS-232-C or
        RS-422-A) printer interface.

The 6262 Models 022, D22, and T22 set new price performance standards for IBM
high-speed impact line printers.  Utilizing a fully formed character print
band, they will produce a print quality equal to or better than the 4245 Model
20 printers.  The operator-invoked flight timing, now incorporated into the
platen instead of a separate timing bar, will allow easier maintenance of print
quality by the operator.

The Model 22 is suitable not only as the heavy duty computer center printer but
also in office, manufacturing and warehouse environments, and where less
trained personnel may use them.  The acoustic rating of 57 dB (compared to 64
dB for the 4245 Model 20) allows installation in office environments without
being disruptive.  Also, the operating temperature range of 55 to 104F (13 to
40C) compared to 60 to 90F (16 to 32C) for the 4245 permits use in a wider
variety of locations.

A number of functions have been added, compared to the 6262 Model 12s and 14s,
including:

    o   The operator-invoked flight timing is now built in to the printer platen,
        thus eliminating the need to mount a separate flight timing bar.
    o   Accommodation of forms widths up to 18.5 inches, compared to a maximum of
        17.7 on most installed Models 12 and 14.  However, the wider width is
        also now available on new Models 12 and 14 as of June 1989.
    o   A hand-held convenience vacuum to facilitate general cleaning of the
        printer.
    o   Job set-up, offers the capability to save values selected to print a
        specific job for use again later.  Values saved are: lines per inch, line
        length, page length, print contrast, and flight-time tables.
    o   An enhanced attention light.  Forms related conditions (such as stacker
        full, end-of-forms, and forms jams) are indicated with a faster flashing
        rate than other conditions.  The audible alarm can be programmed to sound
        in conjunction with the light.
    o   A ribbon pass counter.  This is helpful in more critical printing
        applications such as OCR and bar code to prevent going beyond the useful
       life of the ribbon.

Forms loading and band or ribbon replacement are easily done because they are
mounted on a swing gate that moves away from the form.  The processing of
pre-numbered forms is also enhanced because of the improved four tractor
registration.  Adjustment of the right hand tractor set is possible - or all
four tractors can be adjusted simultaneously by a single knob.

An offline electronic operator's routine can change contrast, page length, and
vertical spacing - 6, 8, (and 3 or 4 on T models) lines/inch.  Specifying both
page length and vertical spacing from the host processor will override operator
settings.  Additional benefits of these 6262 models include: standard OCR (both
A and B font) alphanumeric printing, a full power stacker, and an 80 character
LCD panel display - for operator messages.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:  1,000mm (39.4 inches)
    Depth:  850mm (33.5 inches)
    Height: 1,360mm (53.5 inches)
    Weight: 360kg  (793 lbs.)
    Power Requirement:  1.7 kVA, Single Phase


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. 3119 PAGESCANNER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3119 PageScanner(TM) is a desk-top, flat-bed page scanner for image input
to the IBM Personal System/2, Models 50 thru 80.  It scans various kinds and
sizes of paper documents and is especially suitable for scanning images in
bound documents, photographs or odd-sized documents.  It scans with a
resolution of 300 x 300 pels per inch.

The 3119 PageScanner attaches to an IBM Personal System/2 Model 50 (8550-021,
8550-031, 8550-061), Model 60 (8560-041, 8560-071), Model 70 (8570-E61,
8570-121), and Model 80 (8580-041, 8580-071, 8580-111, 8580-311) via a 3119
Adapter/A installed in the system unit of these models.

The 3119 PageScanner, when used with the supplied 'Starter Program', IBM
ImagEdit(TM) Version 2.0 or IBM TextReader(TM) Version 1.0, offers an improved,
cost efficient solution to many personal, professional or production publishing
environments. (TM) Is a trademark of the IBM Corporation.

MODEL 010 Low voltage, P/N 94X2410

MODEL S10 Low voltage, P/N 94X2520.  Convenience ordering model.

NOTE: When ordered with the convenience order model number S10, the 3119
PageScanner will be shipped with all components (PageScanner, Adapter/A, cable,
power cord and "Guide to Operations" manual) in one carton.

Only one 3119 PageScanner can be attached to a single PS/2.

The 3119 PageScanner attaches to a PS/2, Model 50 or higher via the 3119
Adapter/A (P/N 94X2415, feature #5442 on the PS/2).  A PS/2 expansion slot is
required for this adapter.

The 3119 PageScanner does not attach to any form of communication facility.

The 3119 PageScanner is a customer setup machine.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Compact, desk-top flat-bed scanner for image input to PS/2 Model
        50 or higher
    o   Allows the scanning of photographs or pages from bound documents
    o   Image scanned in black/white or up to 128 levels of gray
    o   300 x 300 pels per inch
    o   Typical scan speed is from 14 to 28 seconds per letter size page
        depending on resolution and level of gray
    o   Program selectable partial scan
    o   Provides for adjustments to darkness and contrast
    o   Operates with a 'Getting Started' program (shipped with the
        "PageScanner GTO" manual), ImagEdit Version 2.0 or TextReader
        Version 1.0.

The 3119 PageScanner is a desk-top, flat-bed page scanner for use with a PS/2
Model 50 or higher.  It scans up to letter or A4 size pages.  The flat-bed
design facilitates scanning photographs, pieces of odd size paper and pages
from bound documents.  The 3119 PageScanner scans at a resolution of 300
(horizontal) x 300 (vertical), or 300 x 150 picture elements (pels) per inch.
The image is scanned as an 8-bit per pel gray scale value, a 4-bit per pel gray
scale value or a 1-bit per pel black/white value.  The gray scale values
accurately represent 128 levels of gray, or 16 levels of gray respectively, per
pel.

The hardware and microcode of the PageScanner provides gray scale darkness
control to produce distinguishable shades of gray from such originals as under-
or over-exposed photographs, documents with color backgrounds or documents with
characters in light colors.  The scanner also provides gray scale contrast
control to produce a clear, crisp image from a document with a weak contrast
between foreground and background.  Contrast control can also be used to soften
changes in the original photograph.

Although the 3119 PageScanner scans at a device resolution of 300 pels per
inch, the application can request that the scanner return the data to the
application at any resolution from one pel per inch to 600 pels per inch in one
pel increments.  This function is available for black/white and gray scale
scanning and allows an application to capture an image at the resolution most
appropriate to its processing.  By so doing, both the amount of information
captured, and the resulting file size, are minimized.

Scaling of a scanned image size is performed in the scanner by changing the
resolution from the original 300 x 300 pels per inch.  For example, changing to
600 pel makes the original size four times larger.  Scaling to 1/9 size
requires the resolution to change from the original 300 x 150 pel to 100 x 100
pel.  This flexible image size change is a function often required in editing a
text and image page.  The original image can be reduced to any resolution or
can be expanded up to 600 pels per inch.  A scaling algorithm in the
PageScanner considers depth of gray level in each pel so that it can reproduce
smooth gray scale quality of the original.  The user can determine the scaling
parameters when scanning the image data.

Partial scanning allows scanning of only a portion of a page which the user
wishes to capture.

All scanning controls are specified by the user through the application program
such as ImagEdit Version 2.0 or the 'Getting Started' program included with the
PageScanner.

Scanning speed varies depending on scanning resolution, levels of gray and PS/2
application performance.  A minimum scan time of 14 seconds per letter size
original is achieved when scanned with a resolution of 150 x 150 pels or less
in black/white, 16 or 128 levels of gray.  A scan time of 28 seconds per letter
size original is achieved with:

    o   A resolution of 240 x 240 pels in black/white or 16/128 levels
        of gray
    o   A resolution of 300 x 300 pels in black/white or 16 levels of gray

A scan time of 40 seconds per letter size original is achieved with a
resolution of 300 x 300 pels in 128 levels of gray and 21 seconds with a
resolution of 300 x 150 pels in 128 levels of gray.  Additional time is
required when enlarging an original.  Partial scanning of an original typically
can be accomplished faster.  The user may specify the resolution in "pels per
inch" through the user interface of ImagEdit Version 2.0 or the "Getting
Started" program.

The PageScanner takes extra steps to produce consistent quality and levels of
gray scale image.  It makes adjustments to its shading correction logic to
match the current level of light intensity which may change from time to time.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:  385mm (15.2 in.)
    Depth:  340mm (13.4 in.)
    Height:  126mm ( 5.0 in.)
    Weight:  9.7kg (21.3 lbs) - Model 010 (low voltage); 10.3kg (22.7 in.)
    - Model 011 (high voltage)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. 1567 BELL AND HOWELL COPISCAN II DOCUMENT SCANNER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bell and Howell Copiscan*II Document Scanner, Models 2135 and 3338, allows
users to convert documents to digital records that can be managed, transmitted,
displayed, printed and stored.  The scanners are part of IBM's ImagePlus**
support and are attachable to an IBM PS/2** via the IBM PS/2 Image Adapter/A
Card or the PS/2 Extended Image Adapter/A Card (P/N 07F2480). *Copiscan is a
registered trademark of Bell and Howell Corporation. **ImagePlus is a trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation; PS/2 is a registered trademark
of International Business Machines Corporation.

The IBM machine type 1567 Model A01 and B01 are OEM Bell and Howell scanners
modified to meet IBM specifications and requirements.  The modified units are
identified with the letter "I" located after the Bell and Howell series number
on the back panel.  The modifications are plant only adjustments to the
scanners that require specific software support.  ONLY THE MODIFIED UNITS (IBM
machine 1567-A01 or B01) are supported by the announced IBM ImagePlus software.

Bell and Howell Models 2135 and 3338 that are not identified with the letter
"I" will NOT function with the IBM software.  End users who require other than
IBM machine type 1567 should be referred to their point of purchase.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Replace the Copiscan I, Model 2115I, and provide improved
        scanning capabilities.
    o   High quality resolution. Selectable resolution with Model 3338.
    o   Accepts various document sizes.
    o   High transport speed and data rate.
    o   More reliable due to less mechanical parts.
    o   Accepts a wide range of document thicknesses ranging from .002 -
        .008 inch.

The Bell and Howell Copiscan II Models 2135 and 3338 are key components of the
ImagePlus PS/2 Workstation.  The scanners in conjunction with ImagePlus
workstation hardware, allow users to begin the process of converting documents
into electronic form for management, display, printing, or storage by the host
system.

The capability to scan at high speeds allows for quick response and can improve
decision making or the time required for scanning documents.  The short paper
path provides high paper handling reliability and uses a minimum number of
moving parts assuring high mechanical reliability.  The feeding and stacking
trays are positioned in front for easy reach by the operator.

A number of features exist on one or both models which potentially can expand
the range of solutions:

    1.  Wide range of document sizes to 11 inches wide by 17 inches
        long.
    2.  Document thickness from onion skin to card stock.
    3.  Selectable resolutions 200 or 300 dots per inch.
    4.  High scanning speed.
    5.  Reduced size and weight versus the Copiscan I.
    6.  Compact packaging for desk top use.

The Copiscan II can provide savings in personnel and training through reduction
of complexity.  Improved serviceability is provided by the power-on and
real-time diagnostics.  Functional tests can be performed from the control
panel to facilitate troubleshooting. Operators are provided with limited
internal access for routine maintenance of the paper path, and all replaceble
subassemblies can be easily accessed.  The architecture provides adequate
security and auditablity.

MODEL A01 (2135)

MODEL B01 (3338)

CUSTOMER SETUP Yes.

The Bell and Howell Copiscan II, Models 2135 and 3338, have been verified for
compliance with FCC rules as FCC, Class A devices for use only in industrial,
commericial, or business environments.

Model 2135 has an average scanning speed of 1.2 seconds per 8.5 x 11 inch page
and 200 dots per inch resolution.  The transport speed is 9.0 inches per second
with a data rate of 5.0Mb per second.  It handles document sizes from 2.5 to
8.5 inches wide and 14 inches long.

Model 3338 has an average scanning speed per 8.5 x 11 inch page, of 1.6 seconds
when selecting the resolution of 300 dots per inch or the average scanning
speed of 1.0 seconds when selecting the 200 dots per inch resolution.  This
model features half-tone capabilities for scanning photographs.  The transport
speed is 7 or 10.5 inches per second with data rates of 8 or 5.33 megabits per
second dependent upon the 300 or 200 resolution selection.  It handles document
sizes from 4 inches to 11 inches wide and 17 inches long.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:  21.0 inches
    Depth:  21.0 inches
    Height:  9.5 inches (without feeding and stacking trays)
    Weight:  60 lbs

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:

    Temperature:  60 to 90F
    Relative Humidity: 30 to 70 percent
    Power Requirements:  115 V AC or 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 240 watts

The IBM PS/2 Image Adapter/A Card with the printer/scanner option is required.
This option includes the installation instructions and the I/O device interface
cable.  The PS/2 Extended Image Adapter/A Card (P/N 07F2480) should be
considered for growth and is required for the Model 3338 for scanning at 300
dots per inch.  See RPQ 7J0305 for complete machine requirements.

The Bell and Howell Copiscan II Models 2135 and 3338 are supported by IBM PS/2
ImagePlus Workstation Program or the IBM Electronic Filing Cabinet Program
Version 1.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. 2455 IBM IMAGE SCANNER-Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IBM announces the Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner, a desktop flatbed image scanner
that provides consistent, fast and reliable document image capture.

The Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner provides 400 dpi, 256 gray scale, scans up to
legal-size documents, and operates at up to 7ppm.  An industry standard Small
Computer System Interface (SCSI)-2 allows easy connection to personal computers
designed to today's most popular desktop architectures.

Also offered is an optional 30-sheet document feeder (Ricoh Model  DF60) which
frees the user from having to manually insert each document.

The Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner includes Koch ImageAwL(1) software.  ImageAwL is
an image acquisition application that makes it easy to acquire scanned images.
ImageAwL supports OS/2(R) Versions 2.0 and 2.1 on PS/2(R) architecture and
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) machines, a wide range of scanner
adapters, and has automated installation and configuration. (R) Registered
trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. (1) Registered
trademark of Koch Software Industries.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o  The Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner scans a variety of document types,
       bound books, card stock, and single sheets (up to legal-size
       documents).
    o  400 dpi (program-selectable from 40-1600 dpi).
    o  The program-selectable gray scale (256 levels) provides accurate
       photographic reproductions.
    o  Enhanced image processing functions including reverse image,
       mirror image, 10 dither patterns, error diffusion, and parameter
       download function (for halftone matrix and gamma curve).
    o  Built-in brightness, contrast, and gamma curve settings provide
       high flexibility in document reproduction.
    o  An optional 30-sheet document feeder frees the user from manually
       inserting each document.
    o  An industry-standard SCSI-2 interface connects to personal
       computers designed to today's most popular desktop architectures:
       IBM PC AT(R), ISA, and IBM Micro Channel(R).
(R) Registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Crisp, clear edge-to-edge scanning for up to legal size documents.  With the
appropriate software, the Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner is ideal for Desktop
Publishing and Optical Character Recognition (OCR) applications.

The Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner is a high-quality flatbed image scanner that is
easy to install and operate.  It provides consistent, fast, and reliable image
capture.  Full legal-size document scanning meets OCR application requirements.
An industry-standard SCSI-2 interface allows connection to today's most popular
desktop architectures -- IBM PC AT, ISA, and IBM Micro Channel.

Minimal training is necessary to use the Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner.  The unit
provides visual feedback to indicate ready status, and all functional
capabilities for the unit are under program control.

The ImageAwL software is an easy-to-use scanner interface:

    o  Users can define their own scanner control interface to suit
       their personal preferences.
    o  Once the user has defined an interface, it can be associated with
       a specific device or application.  This allows customization based
       on device type or application.
    o  Stores acquired images to disk in three formats:
       -  PCX
       -  TIFF
       -  EPS (Encapsulated Post Script)

SCSI-2, OS/2 Versions 2.0 and 2.1 are supported.

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Physical Specifications:

    Width:  390mm (15.4 inches)
    Depth:  540mm (21.3 inches)
    Height: 110mm ( 4.3 inches)
    Weight:  12kg (26.5 lbs)

Operating Environment:

    FCC:  Class B
    Temperature:  5 to 35 degrees C (41 to 95 degrees F)
    Relative Humidity:  30 to 85 (percent)
    Electrical power:  45W Standby, 70W Max Noise Level:  less than 54 dBA

Machine Requirements:  The Ricoh IS50 Image Scanner is designed to operate on
any system equipped with a supported SCSI adapter meeting the IBM PC-AT, ISA,
and IBM Micro Channel Standards.

The following SCSI adapters have been tested and are compatible with the Ricoh
IS50 Image Scanner and Koch ImageAwL software:

    o  IBM
       -  PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter-#1005, P/N 6451109
       -  PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter with Cache-#1018, P/N 6451110
       -  IBM 16-Bit AT FAST SCSI Adapter, P/N 32G4088
       -  IBM (Future Domain TMC-850IBM) SCSI Adapter-#3780, P/N 04G6128
    o  Future Domain
       -  IBM AT Version Models TMC-850, TMC-860, TMC-885, TMC-1650,
          TMC-1660, TMC-1670, TMC-1680
       -  IBM Micro Channel Version Model MCS-700
    o  Adaptec
       -  IBM AT Version Models AHA-1510, AHA-1520, AHA-1522, AHA-1540C,
          AHA-1542C

Programming Requirements:

    o  IBM OS/2 Version 2.0 or 2.1
    o  Koch Software Industries ImageAwL software

Compatibility: Vendor Software:  The following vendor software products have
been evaluated by Ricoh Corporation and found to be compatible with the Ricoh
IS50 Image Scanner:

    Company                       Product(s)

    Caere Corporation             OmniPage, OmniPage Pro
    ExperVision Inc.              TypeReader
    ImageIn                       ImageIn
    Westbrook Technologies        File Magic, File Magic Expert,
                                  File Magic Expert LAN

This list does not include all products that may support the Ricoh IS50 Image
Scanner.  The products operate as described in their program documentation. IBM
has not evaluated these products and makes no comments or judgements about
their functions, quality and performance.

The Koch ImageAwL software can be used to acquire scanned images for input to
OS/2 applications either by acquiring to a standard format file (TIFF, PCX or
EPS) or through the OS/2 clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. 2456 IBM IMAGE SCANNER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 2456 Image Scanner, a high-quality flatbed image scanner is easy to
install and operate.  The 2456 provides consistent, fast, reliable image
capture.

It provides selectable resolution from 100-400 dpi (dots per inch), binary and
4-bit, 6-bit or 8-bit gray scale scanning, data compression, and supports a
maximum document size of A3.

The IBM 2456 Image Scanner includes an Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) as
standard equipment, which has the capability to feed and scan up to a total of
50 pages at a time.  In ADF mode, the 2456 scans a maximum of 20 A4 size pages
per minute (ppm) at 200 dpi, 15 ppm at 300 dpi, and 12 ppm at 400 dpi.

The IBM 2456 Image Scanner attaches to any IBM Personal System/2* compatible
with either of the IBM PS/2 Micro Channel* SCSI Adapters (P/N 6451109/#1005 and
P/N 6451110/#1018) and is supported by the IBM ImagePlus* Workstation Program
Family.

*Personal System/2, and Micro Channel are registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation; ImagePlus is a trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Desktop flatbed image scanner with factory-installed Automatic
        Document Feeder (ADF).
    o   Industry Standard Interface (IBM PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapters,
        feature #1005 and #1018).
    o   Scans up to 20 pages per minute.
    o   Program-selectable resolution from 100 to 400 dpi.
    o   Program-selectable gray scale with up to 256 gradations (8 bits/
        pixel).
    o   Scans a variety of document types, bound books, card stock, and
        single sheets.
    o   Factory-installed data compression.
    o   Provides image input to IBM ImagePlus (TM) Host System Environments.
    o   Allowable maximum document size is A3.

The IBM 2456 Image Scanner is a high-quality flatbed image scanner that is easy
to install and operate.  It provides consistent, fast, and reliable image
capture.

The IBM 2456 Image Scanner is a key component of the IBM ImagePlus Workstation
Program Family.  In conjunction with IBM ImagePlus Host Systems, the 2456
allows users to convert paper documents into electronic form for storage,
retrieval, display, and forwarding.

As a flatbed scanner, a variety of single sheet and large size documents (up to
A3) can be positioned and scanned by the operator.  The Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF) is included as standard equipment.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

    Width:  699mm (27.5 inches)
    Depth:  500mm (19.7 inches)
    Height: 180mm ( 7.1 inches)
    Weight:  38kg (83.6 pounds) with ADF

The IBM 2456 Image Scanner attaches to either of the IBM PS/2 Micro Channel
SCSI Adapters (P/N 6451109/#1005 and P/N 6451110/#1018).  The PS/2 Micro
Channel SCSI Adapters can be installed in all IBM PS/2 and PS/55 Micro Channel
Systems.  Attachment to either of the IBM Micro Channel SCSI Adapters is as
follows:

    o   The IBM PS/2 Card to Option Cable (#1041 P/N 6451041) allows
        connection from the SCSI Adapter to an external SCSI device.  The
        PS/2 Micro Channel SCSI Adapter Option Interface Terminator,
        included with the PS/2 Card to Option Cable, is a terminator that
        is installed on the last SCSI device to terminate the SCSI bus.
    o   The IBM PS/2 Option to Option Cable (#1042 P/ N 6451042) allows an
        external SCSI device to be connected to another external SCSI
        device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. IBM 14.4KBPS/14.4KPBS EXTERNAL DATA/FAX MODEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IBM 7851* Model 1 is an external 14.4kbps (V.32bis) data and 14.4kbps
(V.17) fax modem.  This data/fax modem offers high performance operation at a
relatively low cost.  It includes advance features such as error control (V.42,
MNP 2-4) and data compression (V.42bis, MNP 5).  This "complete" fax modem
comes with the serial cable and a 9/25 pin adapter to accommodate any serial
port, phone line (RJ11 to RJ11), and a premium, full function software package
for both DOS and Windows.  For US customers, a PRODIGY starter kit is also
included.

HIGHLIGHTS

    o   Communicates at data rates from 1200bps to 14.4kbps
    o   Faxes at data rates from 2400bps to 14.4kbps
    o   Multiple error control protocols (MNP 2-4, V.42)
    o   Data compression can reach 4: 1 with V.42bis allowing an effective
        throughput rate of 57,600bps
    o   Hayes AT compatible
    o   Lease or dial-up lines
    o   Automatic format and speed sensing
    o   Recognizes no answer and no dial-tone conditions
    o   Low power consumption (100mA)
    o   For use in the US and Canada only

The IBM 7851 Model 1 high performance data/fax modem is packaged with the
necessary hardware and software to instantly enable any personal computer at an
economical price.  BITCOM/BITFAX for DOS and Windows is full-function software
package that will allow you send and receive faxes from your personal computer
and access bulletin boards and enterprise data from your office or remote
location.  The user can choose from numerous other software packages that
support Hayes-compatible modems to meet their individual needs and preference.
The user's guide includes the complete listing of AT commands and enhanced
protocol commands (such as MNP).  The serial cable, 9/25 pin adapter, and phone
line avoids the purchase of often needed additional hardware.

MODEL 001 (P/N 73G7094)

The IBM 14.4kbps/14.4kbps External Data/Fax Modem (7851 Model 1) operates with
any personal computer that has a 9 or 25 pin serial port.  The modem itself has
no other specific system requirements.

The BITCOM/BITFAX* application software has minimum system requirements as
defined by the programming product.  The following are the highlights of these
minimum requirements:

    1.  BITFAX for Windows
        o   Windows 3.0 or higher
        o   2.5MB of free hard drive space
        o   2MB of RAM
    2.  BITFAX for DOS
        o   DOS 3.0 or higher
        o   2.0MB of free hard drive space
        o   2MB of RAM

The IBM 14.4kbps/14.4kbps External Data/Fax Modem (7851 Model 1) is an external
machine type that communicates through the COM port or serial card. The modem
accepts Hayes AT commands and sends and receives data through the serial
interface.  There is no specific programming or operating system requirement on
how these commands or data are transferred over the serial interface.

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

    o   Width:  140 mm (5.5 inches)
    o   Depth:  190 mm (7.5 inches)
    o   Height:  38 mm (1.5 inches)

This feature works in normal PC operating environments. *Signifies a trademark
or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
BITCOM/BITFAX is a registered trademark of BIT Software Inc.